JP2023101667A - game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To suitably permit execution of a performance in a game machine capable of reserving and storing a lottery result.SOLUTION: When a predetermined condition pertaining to period extension is satisfied, a performance extension function is operated and a special period pertaining to a reservation fill-up performance is extended, thus increasing reservation to be subjected to the reservation fill-up performance by the amount of extension when the special period pertaining to the reservation fill-up performance is extended by the performance extension function. Hereby, amusement capable of extending a special period pertaining to a reservation fill-up performance can be added by allowing a player to shoot game balls by targeting start winning of a special pattern so as to increase reservation of the special pattern in a configuration in which the reservation fill-up performance can appear when the number of reservation times of the special pattern reaches the upper limit.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 59

Description

The present invention relates to a game machine represented by a pinball game machine.

Conventionally, there is a pachinko machine as a typical example of gaming machines. In a typical conventional pachinko machine, when a ball enters a starting hole provided in a game area, a lottery is conducted according to the ball entering, and when a big win is won in the lottery, a special game state is established and a large number of game balls can enter the winning hole. The pachinko machine is provided with a display device, and the display device starts the variable display of patterns based on the lottery, and displays the stop result according to the lottery result as the final stop display of the variable display. Further, some conventional pachinko machines are configured so that, when a game ball enters a starting hole while a display device is displaying a variation of symbols, winning information (information corresponding to the lottery result, corresponding to the lottery result) used for the big win lottery is retained and stored up to a predetermined number (for example, 4 pieces) as an upper limit (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

JP 2016-22147 A

However, there is a possibility that there is still room for improvement in conventional gaming machines that are capable of holding and storing lottery results.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION The present invention has been made in view of the circumstances exemplified above, and an object of the present invention is to make it possible to suitably execute an effect in a gaming machine capable of holding and storing lottery results.

In order to solve the above problems, the gaming machine according to the present invention includes:
a display unit capable of displaying a pattern;
a launching means for launching a game ball;
a starting port into which a starting condition is established when the game ball fired by the shooting means enters;
Lottery means for performing a predetermined lottery when the starting condition is met;
a variation execution means for performing a stop symbol display according to the result of the lottery after performing a variation display of the symbols on the display unit when the starting condition is satisfied;
a game control means for generating a special game state more advantageous than a normal game state after the stop symbol indicating the first result is stopped and displayed by the variation execution means when the lottery result is a predetermined first result;
a holding storage means capable of storing, from among the lottery results, the lottery results for which execution of the variation display of symbols by the variation execution means is suspended in a prescribed holding storage unit, with a prescribed number as the upper limit;
a special effect execution means for executing a predetermined special effect in a predetermined first period with a predetermined first probability when the number of lottery results stored in the reservation storage unit by the reservation storage unit reaches an upper limit,
The special effect executing means is characterized by comprising a period extension means for extending the end time of the first period when a predetermined extension condition that can be established by the game ball shot by the shooting means is established within a predetermined second period which is a period provided after the number of lottery results stored in the holding storage part reaches the upper limit and which ends at the same time as the end time of the first period or earlier than the end time of the first period.

According to the present invention, it is possible to suitably execute an effect in a game machine capable of holding and storing the lottery result.

Front perspective view of a pachinko machine as an example of a game machine Perspective view showing a pachinko machine in an open state Perspective view showing the pachinko machine in another open state A perspective view showing the pachinko machine in yet another open state. Front view of pachinko machine Front view showing a state in which the front block of the pachinko machine is removed front view of game board Back side perspective view of pachinko machine Back view of pachinko machine Block diagram showing the electrical configuration of a pachinko machine Flowchart showing an example of main control main processing Flowchart showing an example of main control interrupt processing A time chart for explaining when the suggestive effect appears in the variable display of decorative patterns Schematic diagram showing screen transition of the decorative pattern display device along the time chart of FIG. Schematic diagram showing a screen transition diagram of the decorative pattern display device along the time chart of FIG. Schematic diagram showing a screen transition diagram of the decorative pattern display device along the time chart of FIG. (a) is a screen diagram showing an example of a screen in which the player can select whether or not to restore the variable display of decorative symbols performed before transition to the special game state in the special game state, and (b) is a screen diagram showing an example of the screen displayed when the variable display of decorative symbols is restored in the special game state. A diagram showing an example of the appearance probability of the holding full tank effect in the pachinko machine of the first embodiment Time chart for explaining the suggestion production cancellation function Schematic diagram showing a pachinko machine of the third embodiment that is the own machine and another pachinko machine communicably connected to the pachinko machine A screen diagram showing an example of the display contents of the decorative pattern display device when the selection operation device is operated during the operable period that occurs during the variable display of decorative patterns. A diagram showing an example of the appearance probability of the holding full tank effect in the pachinko machine of the fifth embodiment A diagram for explaining an example for facilitating an increase in the number of times a unit game right is reserved for a special symbol. Front view of a game board in a pachinko machine according to the seventh embodiment (a) is a front view of the reel device, and (b) is a front view of the middle reel. Front view for explaining the operation of the lottery result display device Schematic diagram showing transition of display by the reel device when the second sub-symbol portent notice is performed Schematic diagram showing transition of display by the reel device when the second sub-symbol portent notice is performed Schematic diagram showing transition of display by reel device when countdown notice is given (a) is an enlarged front view of the vicinity of the reel device on the game board, and (b) is a simplified cross-sectional view of the main configuration of the game board taken along line AA in FIG. 30(a). (a) is a simplified cross-sectional view of the main configuration including the reel device taken along line BB in FIG. 30(a), and (b) is a front view for explaining a school of fish displayed beyond the display area of the reel device. (a) is an enlarged front view of the vicinity of the upper and lower start winning devices on the game board of the pachinko machine according to the eighth embodiment; (b) is a cross-sectional view of the game board taken along the line CC of FIG. 32(a); (c) is a top view of FIG. 32(a); (a) is a front view of the reel device of the ninth embodiment, (b) is a simplified cross-sectional view of the reel device taken along line DD of FIG. 33 (a), (c) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the pachinko machine cut vertically at approximately the center in the horizontal direction when viewed from the front of the game machine, and (d) is a top view of the pressing operation device and wave lamp. (a) is a front view of the reel device when the display area of each symbol row of three reels is the basic display area, (b) is a front view of the reel device when the display area of each symbol row of three reels is a reduced display area, (c) is a top view of the reel device schematically showing a mechanism for varying the display area of the symbol rows, and (d) is a top view of the reel device schematically showing a state in which the display area of the symbol rows is reduced. An exploded perspective view of the pachinko machine according to the eleventh embodiment, seen from the front side An exploded perspective view of the drum base seen from the front side Perspective view of the light guide plate unit seen from the rear side Exploded perspective view of the light guide plate unit seen from the front side Exploded perspective view of the light guide plate unit seen from the rear side Exploded perspective view of the light guide plate unit seen from the rear side (a) is a schematic diagram for explaining the traveling direction of light incident on the lower end face of the light guide plate, and (b) is a front view of the light guide plate showing an example of how it shines. (a) is a front view of the reel device when each symbol row on the three reels is in a basic state, (b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the left reel cut along the rotation axis through the rotation axis in the basic condition, (c) is a partial cross-sectional view of the left reel cut along the rotation axis through the rotation shaft when the width of the left reel symbol row is narrowed, and (d) is the reel device when the width of the left and right symbol rows on the left and right reels is narrowed. Front view, (e) is a front view of the reel device when the display area of each symbol row is reduced by movement of each of the three reels. Timing chart showing the operation of each component when changing the size of the display area of each pattern row (a) is a perspective view of the light guide plate according to the fourteenth embodiment as seen from the rear side, (b) is a cross-sectional view of the light guide plate according to the fourteenth embodiment taken vertically at substantially the center in the horizontal direction, (c) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the upper portion of the light guide plate when the drive solenoid is protruded, and (d) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the upper portion of the light guide plate when the drive solenoid is retracted. The front view of the screen portion of the light guide plate of the fourteenth embodiment. Front view of two light guide plates overlapping in the front-rear direction and the light guide plate (a) is a screen diagram for explaining the display area of the decorative pattern display device in the pachinko machine of the 16th embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the screen transition of the decorative pattern display device as the number of holds increases. Explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the types of lottery results based on the starting prizes stored in the main control board and the fluctuation time, etc. Flowchart showing display effect setting processing executed by the sub control board Time chart showing an example of game state transition Front view of the game board in the pachinko machine of the eighteenth embodiment Rear view of the pachinko machine of the eighteenth embodiment Block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine of the eighteenth embodiment Flowchart showing an example of main control main processing in the pachinko machine of the eighteenth embodiment Flowchart showing an example of main control interrupt processing in the pachinko machine of the eighteenth embodiment Flowchart showing an example of nail state related processing Flowchart showing an example of setting suggestion information related processing (a) is a front view for explaining the lottery result display section, and (b) is an explanatory diagram relating to an example of the display mode of the lottery result display section when the game mode of each type with the 3rd stage probability is set. Explanatory diagram relating to an example of the production extension function

With respect to the embodiment of the gaming machine according to the present invention, a pachinko machine 100 as an example of a pinball gaming machine, which is a type of gaming machine, will be described, and then modifications and other types of gaming machines will be described. First, regarding the embodiment of the pachinko machine 100, structural configuration, electrical configuration, and various control processes will be described in order.

<Structural configuration>
First, mainly referring to FIGS. 1 to 9, the structure of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. 1 to 4 are perspective views showing various states of the pachinko machine 100. FIG. 1 shows the closed state of the pachinko machine 100, FIG. 2 shows the state in which the front block 102 and the intermediate block 103 are integrally opened with respect to the outer frame 101, FIG. 3 shows the state in which the front block 102 is opened with respect to the intermediate block 103, and FIG. 5 is a front view of the pachinko machine 100, and FIG. 6 shows a state in which the front block 102 of the pachinko machine 100 is removed from the state of FIG. Various wirings are omitted in each figure, and a part of the configuration of the game board 400 is omitted in FIGS. 3 and 6 .

The pachinko machine 100 includes, for example, an outer frame 101, a front block 102, an intermediate block 103, and a rear block 104, as shown in FIGS.

The outer frame 101 has a function as a main body supporting means for supporting the main body of the pachinko machine 100 . The outer frame 101 is, for example, as shown in FIG. 2, a substantially quadrilateral frame in which a top plate portion 111, a bottom plate portion 112, a left plate portion 113, and a right plate portion 114 are assembled. In addition, the outer frame 101 is not an essential configuration in the pachinko machine 100, and it has the same inner shape as the outer frame 101 or the outer frame 101, and a support mechanism for supporting the main body corresponding to the configuration of the pachinko machine 100 excluding the outer frame 101 and a part of the locking mechanism for locking the main body may be provided in the island facility.

Intermediate block support mechanisms 121 and 122 are provided on one side of the outer frame 101 in the left-right direction (left side plate portion 113 side). The outer frame 101 and the intermediate block 103 are connected (coupled) by the intermediate block support mechanisms 121 and 122, and the main body of the pachinko machine 100 is configured to be rotatable forward with one end (left side) in the horizontal direction of the pachinko machine 100 viewed from the front as the base end of rotation and the other end (right side) as the leading end of rotation.

The intermediate block support mechanisms 121 and 122 are provided, for example, at the upper and lower ends of the outer frame 101 so as to be separated from each other, as shown in FIG. Each of the intermediate block support mechanisms 121 and 122 is rotatable by, for example, supporting a shaft portion provided in the intermediate block 103 from below by a shaft support portion provided in the outer frame 101, and inserting the shaft portion into a shaft hole provided in the shaft support portion. The configuration that allows the main body of the pachinko machine 100 including the intermediate block 103 to rotate is not limited to the configuration described above, and other configurations such as providing a shaft hole on the side of the intermediate block 103 and forming a shaft portion on the side of the outer frame 101 may be used.

The intermediate block support mechanisms 121 and 122 are provided with a function of releasing the connection state between the outer frame 101 and the intermediate block 103 by a predetermined removing operation, and the body part of the pachinko machine 100 including the intermediate block 103 is detachably attached to the outer frame 101.例文帳に追加For example, the connection state of the intermediate block 103 to the outer frame 101 is released by performing a predetermined detachment operation of releasing the intermediate block 103 from the outer frame 101 by a certain amount or more and moving it upward by a certain amount. As a result, the main body of the pachinko machine 100 can be removed from the outer frame 101. - 特許庁

The front block 102 is arranged to overlap the intermediate block 103 on the front side, and the intermediate block 103 and the front block 102 are connected by front block support mechanisms 131 and 132 provided on the left side in front view. The front block support mechanisms 131 and 132 have the same configuration as the intermediate block support mechanisms 121 and 122, support the front block 102 so as to be rotatable forward with respect to the intermediate block 103, and can be removed by a predetermined removal operation.

The rear block 104 is arranged to overlap the intermediate block 103 on the rear side, and the intermediate block 103 and the rear block 104 are connected by rear block support mechanisms 136 and 137 (see FIG. 8) provided on the left side in front view. The rear block support mechanisms 136 and 137 have the same configuration as the intermediate block support mechanisms 121 and 122 and the front block support mechanisms 131 and 132, support the rear block 104 so as to be rotatable backward with respect to the intermediate block 103, and are detachably supported by a predetermined removal operation.

Further, the pachinko machine 100 is provided with an intermediate block locking mechanism for regulating the opening and closing of the intermediate block 103 with respect to the outer frame 101, a front block locking mechanism for regulating the opening and closing of the front block 102 with respect to the intermediate block 103, and a lock operation mechanism operated for unlocking and locking the intermediate block locking mechanism and the front block locking mechanism. Further, as shown in FIG. 3, the intermediate block 103 is provided with a key cylinder 141 as a lock operation mechanism that is exposed on the front side of the pachinko machine 100 through the opening of the front block 102 .

As a predetermined operation for the key cylinder 141, when an operation key (not shown) is rotated to the right, the movable portion 143 of the intermediate block locking mechanism provided in the intermediate block 103 is operated. As a result, the engaged portion 142 provided on the outer frame 101 as a part of the intermediate block locking mechanism and the movable portion 143 are disengaged, and the intermediate block 103 is allowed to open and close with respect to the outer frame 101 .

On the other hand, when the key cylinder 141 is turned to the left by a predetermined operation key, the movable portion 144 of the front block locking mechanism provided in the intermediate block 103 is actuated. As a result, the engaged portion 145 provided on the front block 102 as a part of the front block locking mechanism and the movable portion 144 are disengaged, and the front block 102 becomes openable/closable with respect to the intermediate block 103 .

Further, the pachinko machine 100 is provided with a rear block opening/closing regulation mechanism that regulates the opening/closing of the rear block 104 with respect to the intermediate block 103 . By the rear block opening/closing regulation mechanism, the rear block 104 can be switched between a state in which opening/closing is prohibited (opening/closing prohibited state) and a state in which opening/closing is permitted (opening/closing permitted state) with respect to the intermediate block 103 by a predetermined operation.

The rear block opening/closing regulation mechanism is composed of, for example, two opening/closing regulation portions 150A and 150B provided in the intermediate block 103 and one opening/closing regulation portion 150C provided in the rear block 104, as shown in FIG. Rotating pieces 151A to 151C that can be rotated are provided on these three opening/closing regulating portions 150A to 150C. Rotating pieces 151A to 151C are rotated to change the engagement state with the opening portion arranged so as to overlap front and back in the closed state of the rear block 104, so that the opening/closing prohibition posture corresponding to the opening/closing prohibition state and the opening/closing permission posture corresponding to the opening/closing permission state can be switched. When all the rotating pieces 151A to 151C are placed in the openable/closable posture, the respective rotating pieces 151A to 151C can pass through the opening, and the rear block 104 is in the openable/closable state with respect to the intermediate block 103. FIG. As for the open/close prohibited posture and the open/close permitted posture, the open/close prohibited state and the open/close permitted state may be switched by changing at least one of the positions and orientations of the rotating pieces 151A to 151C. Hereinafter, the same applies to changes in posture when constituent members of each device move between a plurality of postures.

Of the three rotating pieces 151A to 151C, two rotating pieces 151A and 151B corresponding to some of them are exposed to the rear side of the pachinko machine 100 through an opening formed in the rear block 104 in the opening/closing prohibited state of the rear block 104 as shown in FIG. Therefore, it is not possible to switch all the rotating pieces 151A to 151C to the opening/closing posture only by operating from one side such as the back side of the pachinko machine 100 or the front side of the intermediate block 103, thereby improving the crime prevention.

Further, the pachinko machine 100 is provided with a game ball movement restricting mechanism for restricting movement of game balls from the intermediate block 103 to the front block 102 . For example, as shown in FIGS. 3 and 6, the game ball movement restriction mechanism is configured by a combination of a flow restriction piece 161 provided on the intermediate block 103 and a restriction changing portion 162 provided on the front block 102, and the flow restriction piece 161 is biased by a coil spring (not shown) toward the front side where the front block 102 is located.

In a state where the front block 102 is closed with respect to the intermediate block 103 (closed state of the front block 102), the flow-down restricting piece 161 is in a movement-permitting state in which the game ball is allowed to flow down, and specifically, is pressed and pushed rearward of the intermediate block 103 by the regulation changing portion 162. The flow restricting piece 161 is arranged rearwardly with respect to a guide passage (not shown) for guiding the game ball from the intermediate block 103 to the front block 102 in the movement permitting state. Thereby, in the closed state of the front block 102, movement of the game ball from the intermediate block 103 to the front block 102 is permitted.

On the other hand, in the state where the front block 102 is opened with respect to the intermediate block 103 (the open state of the front block 102), the pressure of the flow restriction piece 161 by the restriction changing unit 162 is released, and the flow restriction piece 161 protrudes toward the front block 102 side compared to the closed state of the front block 102. The flow restricting piece 161 protrudes into the guide passage in the movement-prohibited state, and prevents the game ball from flowing downstream. Thereby, movement of the game ball from the intermediate block 103 to the front block 102 is prohibited.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 2, the pachinko machine 100 is provided with an open/close detection switch 108 for detecting whether or not the intermediate block 103 is closed with respect to the outer frame 101, for example, at the lower end on the rear side of the intermediate block 103 and on the rotating tip side (left side in rear view), as shown in FIG. 2. Also, as shown in FIG. An open/close detection switch 109 is provided for detecting whether or not.

Next, each configuration of the front block 102, intermediate block 103, and rear block 104 will be described in order.

The front block 102, as shown in FIGS. 1 and 3, forms substantially the entire front surface of the pachinko machine 100, is a substantially rectangular member having a thickness in the front-rear direction, and functions as front decoration means for decorating the front surface portion of the pachinko machine 100. The front block 102 is mainly composed of a base frame 201 made of synthetic resin, and is configured by attaching a plurality of functional parts to the front and rear of the base frame 201 . On the front side of the base frame 201, a front decorative body 210 forming the front surface of the pachinko machine 100 is attached along the outer edge of the opening 210A formed including the central part of the front block 102 in the front view so as to surround the opening 210A. When the base frame 201 constituting the front block 102 and the front decoration 210 are combined, an opening 210A is formed through a wide range in the front-rear direction except for the outer peripheral portion where the front decoration 210 is attached. The intermediate block 103 including the game board 400 located behind the front block 102 is visible to the player through the opening 210A.

1 and 3, the front block 102 includes a central panel 220 provided on the back side of the base frame 201 so as to block the opening 210A, a main storage mechanism 230 for storing game balls, an auxiliary storage mechanism 240 for storing game balls, and a shooting operation device 250 operated by a player to shoot the game balls stored in the main storage mechanism 230.

1 and 5, the front block 102 includes, as a part of the front decoration 210, an opening peripheral edge portion 211 surrounding the peripheral edge of the opening 210A, an upper projecting portion 217 projecting forward below the opening 210A, a lower projecting portion 218 positioned below the upper projecting portion 217 and projecting forward, and a right side of the lower projecting portion 218 and farther than the upper projecting portion 217 and the lower projecting portion 218. A flat portion 219 is formed which consists of a laterally located generally flat area on which the firing manipulator 250 is located. A main storage mechanism 230 is arranged on the upper protrusion 217 , and an auxiliary storage mechanism 240 is arranged on the lower protrusion 218 .

The center panel 220 has a function as a cover body that closes the opening 210A penetrating in the front-rear direction in a state in which the base frame 201 and the front decoration body 210 are combined and allows the rear side to be visually recognized. 1 and 3, the central panel 220 includes a panel frame 221 (see FIG. 3) attached from the rear side of the base frame 201, a light-transmissive front plate 222 (see FIG. 1) fitted in the front side of the panel frame 221, and a light-transmissive rear plate 223 (see FIG. 3) fitted substantially parallel to the front plate 222 on the rear side of the panel frame 221 with a predetermined gap.

The main storage mechanism 230 has a function of storing game balls obtained as the game progresses and game balls rented from the game arcade. For example, as shown in FIG. 1, the main storage mechanism 230 includes a storage portion 231, a ball removal mechanism (not shown), and a ball removal operation member 232 that operates the ball removal mechanism. The storage unit 231 is provided with an inlet 231A through which game balls flow into the storage unit 231 from the inside of the pachinko machine 100, an outlet (not shown) through which game balls flow out from the storage unit 231 into the pachinko machine 100, and a discharge port (not shown) formed upstream from the outlet. By opening the discharge port, the game ball is discharged from the storage part 231 to the player side without being taken into the inside of the pachinko machine 100.例文帳に追加The ball extraction mechanism has a function of switching the discharge destination of the game ball between the outflow port and the discharge port.

Game balls acquired in accordance with the progress of the game and game balls rented out in response to a renting operation on a renting operation device 292, which will be described later, flow into the storage section 231 mainly through the inflow port 231A. The reservoir 231 is formed with an opening on the upper side, through which game balls owned by the player are manually inserted or game balls rented out at the game arcade are supplied.

The game balls that have flowed into the reservoir 231 are aligned in a line and guided to the side where the outflow port and the discharge port are formed (upper right side in FIG. 1). When the ball extraction operation (for example, pressing operation) is not performed on the ball extraction operation member 232, the game ball is guided to the later-described launching device 330 (see FIG. 3) through the outflow port. On the other hand, when the ball extraction operation is performed on the ball extraction operation member 232, the game ball is guided to the auxiliary storage mechanism 240 (see FIG. 1) through the ejection port.

As shown in FIGS. 1 and 5, the auxiliary storage mechanism 240 includes a storage portion 241 having inflow ports 241A and 241C (see FIG. 5) and a discharge port 241B (see FIG. 1) for game balls, a ball removal mechanism 243 for opening and closing the discharge port 241B, and a ball removal operation member 242 for operating the ball removal mechanism 243. Game balls and the like acquired as the game progresses mainly flow into the main storage mechanism 230, but if the storage section 231 is full, they flow into the storage section 241 through the inflow port 241A. In addition, the game ball flows into the storage section 241 from the storage section 231 through the inlet 241C in response to the ball extraction operation on the ball extraction operation member 232 as well.

The bottom surface of the reservoir 241 is inclined downward toward the discharge port 241B. When the release port 241B is opened by a ball extraction operation (for example, pressing operation) on the ball extraction operation member 242, all the game balls stored in the storage section 241 can be sequentially released to the outside of the pachinko machine 100. When the discharge port 241B is completely opened by the ball extracting operation of the ball extracting operation member 242, the open state is maintained until the ball extracting operation member 242 is restored (for example, pressed again). A ball overflow switch 249 (see FIG. 10) is provided at the back of the inflow port 241A for detecting whether or not game balls are excessively stored in the storage portion 241. FIG.

1 and 5, the shooting operation device 250 includes a pedestal 251 protruding forward from the flat portion 219 of the front decoration 210, a rotatable shooting handle 252 provided around the pedestal 251, a variable resistor 253 (see FIG. 10) for detecting the amount of rotation of the shooting handle 252, a contact sensor 254 (see FIG. 10) for detecting contact of the player with the shooting handle 252, and a shooting handle 2. It also includes a shooting stop switch 255 (see FIG. 5) that disables the ejection of the game ball accompanying the rotation operation of 52 by the player's operation. When the player rotates the shooting handle 252, game balls are ejected from the shooting device 330 (see FIG. 3) toward the game board 400 (see FIG. 3) with an intensity corresponding to the amount of rotation. When the contact sensor 254 does not detect the contact between the shooting handle 252 and the player, or when the shooting operation is invalidated by operating the shooting stop switch 255, the game ball is not ejected from the shooting device 330 even if the shooting handle 252 is rotated.

Frame light emitting devices 271 to 275 (see FIG. 10) are provided behind the front decorative body 210 in the front block 102 . The frame light emitting devices 271 to 275 are arranged so as to overlap with the opening peripheral edge portion 211 of the front decoration 210 on the back side, and are attached to the base frame 201 . As shown in FIG. 5, the opening peripheral edge portion 211 has an upper central edge portion 211A, an upper left edge portion 211B and an upper right edge portion 211C positioned on both left and right sides of the upper central edge portion 211A, a left edge portion 211D positioned below the upper left edge portion 211B, and a right edge portion 211E positioned below the upper right edge portion 211C. 71-275 are installed.

The frame emissioning device 271-275 is compatible with the upper center frame emission device 271 corresponding to the upper central edge 211a, the upper left frame flashing device 272 corresponding to the upper left edge 211b, the upper right frame light emitting device 273 corresponding to the upper right edge 211c, and the left frame flashing compatible with the left edge 211d. It is composed of the device 274 and the right frame emitting device 275 (see FIG. 10) corresponding to the right edge 211E. Each of the frame light emitting devices 271 to 275 has one or more light emitting diodes (LEDs) as light emitting means, electronic components such as resistors for controlling the LEDs, and a printed circuit board that integrates and electrically connects these electronic components.

Further, as shown in FIG. 5, the front block 102 is provided with an upper left acoustic output port 211F and an upper right acoustic output port 211G, for example, above the opening peripheral portion 211, and an upper left acoustic device 281 and an upper right acoustic device 282 (see FIGS. 3 and 10) are provided corresponding to the upper left acoustic output port 211F and the upper right acoustic output port 211G, respectively. The upper left acoustic device 281 and the upper right acoustic device 282 are attached to the base frame 201 so as to be positioned inward (rearward) of the opening peripheral portion 211 of the front decoration 210 .

In addition, as shown in FIG. 1, the front block 102 is provided with a game ball lending device 290 on the right side of the upper surface of the upper projecting portion 217, for example. The game ball lending device 290 includes a frequency display device 291 for displaying a numerical value corresponding to the balance of banknotes, cards, etc. inserted into a card unit (not shown) arranged side by side in the pachinko machine 100, a lending operation device 292 operated by the player when receiving game ball lending, and a return operation device 293 operated by the player when returning the banknotes, cards, etc. thrown into the card unit. Bills, cards, etc., are inserted into the card unit, and in a valid state in which numerical values corresponding to those amounts are displayed on the frequency display device 291, when a lending operation is performed on a lending operation device 292, a predetermined number of game balls are lent from a payout device 540 (see FIG. 8) of the rear block 104 according to the lending operation, and the display of the frequency display device 291 is updated as the game balls are lent. On the other hand, when a return operation is performed on the return operation device 293 in the valid state, the banknote equivalent corresponding to the balance or a card on which the balance is recorded is returned from the card unit in response to the return operation.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 1, the front block 102 is provided with an input operation device 260 that allows the player to perform an input operation other than the shooting operation. The input operation device 260 includes, for example, a pressing operation device 261 capable of pressing operation, a rotary operation device 262 capable of rotating operation, and a selection operation device 263 capable of upward, downward, leftward, and rightward direction operations. With these operating devices 261 to 263, selecting the production that is executed in the pachinko machine 100, the operation selection operation, the equipment setting operation that sets the volume and light volume of each device that executes the production of the pachinko machine 100, or the information about the players, and the pachinko machine 100 pachinko machines in accordance with the previous game. The production setting operation that makes it possible to execute can be executed, and it is possible to perform these operations as necessary as necessary.

For example, although the details will be described later, the pressing operation device 261 functions as an operation device for causing a predetermined suggestive effect to appear during the period in which the decorative design is variably displayed on the decorative design display device 479 (see FIG. 7). The “suggestion effect” is a effect suggesting the degree of easiness (or degree of expectation) of transition to the special game state after the decorative pattern display device 479 confirms and displays the decorative pattern.

It should be noted that the input operation unit (for example, the annular rotation operation unit in the rotation operation device 262) that the player touches in the input operation device 260 is rotated, moved up and down, or vibrated by an input operation unit drive means such as a motor or solenoid. It is possible to diversify the production accompanying the input operation, such as positively prompting the operation.

Next, the intermediate block 103 will be described. The intermediate block 103 is a substantially rectangular member having substantially the same size as the front block 102, and has a function of integrating the main body of the pachinko machine 100 by attaching the front block 102 and the rear block 104.例文帳に追加The intermediate block 103 is configured by attaching a plurality of functional parts including the game board 400 to the base frame 301 .

As shown in FIGS. 3 and 4, the intermediate block 103 includes a base frame 301 having an opening, a game board 400 (see FIG. 3) attached from the front side while covering the opening of the base frame 301, a game board support mechanism for rotatably and detachably supporting the game board 400 with respect to the base frame 301, a game board fixing mechanism for fixing the position of the game board 400 with respect to the base frame 301, and a game ball for ejecting game balls to the game board 400. A launching device 330 (see FIG. 3), a main controller 370 (see FIG. 4) mounted on the back side of the game board 400 and controlling the progress of the game in an integrated manner, and a sub-controller 390 (see FIG. 4) for controlling game performance and status notification based on commands from the main controller 370.

As shown in FIG. 3, the base frame 301 is provided with a guide passage portion 301A in which a guide passage for guiding game balls released from a payout device 540 (see FIG. 8), which will be described later, to the front block 102 is formed, and an opening 301B in which a plurality of wires (not shown) and a signal relay device 311 are positioned. The opening 301B has a shape penetrating in the front-rear direction below the game board 400, and a plurality of wires inserted through the opening 301B electrically connect various devices provided in the front block 102 (for example, the frame light emitting devices 271 to 275, the upper left acoustic device 281, and the upper right acoustic device 282) and the devices provided on the rear side of the intermediate block 103 and the rear block 104 (for example, the main controller 370 and the sub-controller 390). The signal relay device 311 has a function as a relay board that relays part of the wiring.

As shown in FIG. 3, the game board 400 includes a flat base 401 having a through hole such as a discharge port 401A through which game balls can pass back and forth, an outer rail 402 smoothly curving from the lower left to the upper right of the base 401, an inner rail 403 smoothly curving from the lower right to the upper left of the base 401, a return ball prevention mechanism 404 attached to the tip of the upper left side of the inner rail 403, and the upper right side of the outer rail 402. and an anti-recoil member 405 attached to the tip of the. The outer rail 402 guides a game ball launched from a launching device 330, which will be described later, into the game area. The return ball prevention mechanism 404 prevents a game ball once released into the game area from a shooting path 401B formed between the outer rail 402 and the inner rail 403 facing each other in parallel from returning to the shooting path 401B. The anti-recoil member 405 has a shock absorbing property to prevent a game ball from rebounding to the left after passing through the upper center of the game board 400 and returning to the left again, and is made of a material such as damping rubber.

As shown in FIG. 3, a return ball passage 163 is formed in the lower rear portion of the front block 102 . There is a gap between the guide member 335 that guides the game ball from the shooting device 330 toward the shooting path 401B and the outer rail 402, and the game ball that is shot from the shooting device 330 but does not pass the return ball prevention mechanism 404 and goes back through the shooting path 401B is returned from the inflow port 241A (see FIG. 5) to the auxiliary storage mechanism 240 (see FIG. 5) through the return ball passage portion 163 arranged below this gap. be done.

The game ball progressing beyond the return ball prevention mechanism 404 reaches the game area, and moves (flows down) while falling by its own weight within the game area. The game area has a substantially circular outer peripheral shape, and is partitioned into a shape in which the majority of the area has a front-to-rear width slightly larger than the diameter of the game ball. The game area has an outer peripheral portion defined by the outer rail 402 and the inner rail 403, the front side is substantially planarly defined by the rear plate 223 of the central panel 220, and the rear side is substantially planarly defined by the base 401 of the game board 400. Various structures provided in the game area will be described later.

As shown in FIG. 3, the shooting device 330 includes a ball feeding mechanism 331 that sequentially feeds the game balls stored in the main storage mechanism 230 to the shooting position, a ball feeding solenoid 332 (see FIG. 10) that drives the ball feeding mechanism 331, a shooting mechanism 333 that shoots the game balls placed at the shooting position, a shooting solenoid 334 (see FIG. 10) that drives the shooting mechanism 333, and a game ball shot from the shooting mechanism 333. and a guide member 335 that guides to the launch path 401B of the game board 400. - 特許庁Firing device 330 operates according to the firing operation of firing operation device 250 as described above, and the firing force is adjusted by changing the drive control of firing solenoid 334 in accordance with the firing operation of firing operation device 250 .

As shown in FIG. 4, the main controller 370 includes a main control board 920 (see FIG. 10) and a two-piece board case 371 that accommodates the main control board 920. As shown in FIG. The main control board 920 is housed inside a light-transmitting board case 371 that is sealed so that it cannot be opened without leaving a trace.

Also, the main controller 370 is rotatably attached to the back side of the game board 400 . Specifically, an attachment portion 372 is rotatably connected and fixed to the back side of the base 401 of the game board 400 , and the main controller 370 is attached to the attachment portion 372 . As a result, not only the rear side (surface side) of the main control device 370 but also the front side (back side) of the main control device 370 can be easily confirmed by rotating the mounting portion 372 while the main control device 370 is attached to the game board 400. The main controller 370 may be connected to the mounting portion 372 so that it cannot be removed without leaving a trace, and the removal status of the main controller 370 may be easily managed.

The sub-controller 390 includes a sub-control board 940 (see FIG. 10) and a board case 391 having a two-piece structure that accommodates the sub-control board 940 . The sub-control board 940 is, for example, housed inside a translucent board case 391 that is sealed so that it cannot be opened without leaving a trace, like the main control board 920. It is attached to the back side of the game board 400.

Various structures arranged in the game area on the game board 400 will now be described mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 7 is a front view of the game board 400. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 7, the game board 400 includes a base 401, flow changing members such as a peg 411 and a windmill 412 that change the flowing direction and flow speed of the game ball, a central structure 420 arranged substantially in the center of the base 401, a middle start winning device 431 arranged below the central structure 420, and a starting device related to a second special symbol arranged on the lower right side of the central structure 420 (specifically, is the right starting winning device 432), the big winning devices 433, 434 (specifically, the lower big winning device 433 and the upper big winning device 434) arranged below the right starting winning device 432, the starting device 436 related to the normal symbol arranged above (upstream side) the right starting winning device 432, and the upper right side of the game board 400 and above (upstream) the upper and lower big winning devices 433, 434 Equipped with an arranged role interlocking operation device 435 and general winning devices 439A and 439B arranged on both left and right sides of the middle start winning device 431. - 特許庁

Note that the middle start winning device 431 is a winning device in which two winning devices (specifically, the left middle start winning device 431A and the right middle starting winning device 431B) are integrated. The left center starting winning device 431A is a starting device related to the first special symbol, and the right center starting winning device 431B is a starting device related to the second special symbol similar to the right starting winning device 432. That is, the middle starting winning device 431 is a winning device having two functions as a starting device related to the first special symbol and a starting device related to the second special symbol.

The middle start winning device 431 includes a distribution unit 620 that distributes the game ball entered from the entrance 611 to either the left middle start winning device 431A or the right middle starting winning device 431B. The distribution unit 620 is configured to alternately switch between the winning devices 431A and 431B to which the game balls are distributed each time the game balls enter from the entrance 611 . As a result, the game ball that has entered the middle starting winning device 431 basically alternately enters the left middle starting winning device 431A or the right middle starting winning device 431B.

The middle start winning device 431 has a function of discharging a part of the game balls entered from the entrance 611 onto the game board 400 from an opening formed on the right side or left side of the middle start winning device 431 with a very low probability without entering any of the middle start winning devices 431A and 431B. The probability that a game ball that has entered from the entrance 611 is discharged without entering the starting prize winning devices 431A and 431B is, for example, about 1/100, preferably about 1/1000.

In addition, the game board 400 is provided with a plurality of switches (see FIG. 10) as detection means for detecting the passage of game balls corresponding to the above-described left middle start winning device 431A, etc., and the entry of the game ball into a predetermined area corresponding to each switch can be detected. For example, a middle start winning switch (left middle start winning prize switch 441A) that detects a game ball that has entered the left middle start winning device 431A, a middle start winning switch (right middle start winning prize switch 441B) that detects a game ball that has entered the right middle start winning device 431B, a right start winning prize switch 442 that detects a game ball that has entered the right start winning device 432, and a game ball that has entered the lower big winning device 433 is detected. lower big winning switch 443, upper big winning switch 444 for detecting the game ball that has entered the upper big winning device 434, role-linked operation switch 445 for detecting the game ball that has entered the role-related operating device 435, starting switch 446 for detecting the game ball that has entered the starting device 436, non-specific path switch 447 that detects the game ball entering the non-specific path (not shown) formed inside the lower big winning device 433, A specific passage switch 448 for detecting game balls entering a specific passage (not shown) formed inside the lower prize winning device 433, and general prize winning switches 449A and 449B for detecting game balls entering the general prize winning devices 439A and 439B, respectively, are installed on the game board 400.

In addition, the game board 400 is provided with various sensors (see FIG. 10) for fraud prevention, and can detect abnormalities occurring in the pachinko machine 100 . For example, a magnetic sensor 491 , a vibration sensor 492 , a radio wave sensor 493 and the like are installed on the game board 400 .

A game ball entrance portion of the central structure 420 and the starting device 436 constitutes a ball entrance, and a game ball entering each ball entrance is released into the game area. Each winning device, specifically, the left center start winning device 431A, the right center start winning device 431B, the right start winning device 432, the lower big winning device 433, the upper big winning device 434, and the general winning devices 439A and 439B form winning openings. It is guided to a passageway (not shown). In addition, the game balls that have not entered the respective winning devices are guided to the collection and discharge passage through the discharge port 401A provided at the most downstream portion of the game area. The game balls guided to the collection discharge passage are discharged from the pachinko machine 100 to a game ball circulation device (not shown) provided in the game hall. When a game ball enters one of the winning devices, a predetermined number of game balls corresponding to the type of the winning device are paid out from the payout device 540 (see FIGS. 8 and 9).

Each winning device may be configured separately from other winning devices, or a winning device may be configured by a device in which two or more winning devices (for example, the left middle start winning device 431A and the right middle start winning device 431B) are integrated like the middle start winning device 431. In addition, the starting device such as the left center start winning device 431A does not necessarily have to be a winning opening for paying out a predetermined number of game balls when the game balls enter, but may be a ball entry opening for releasing the game balls again into the game area without paying out.

Each of the general winning device 439A and the general winning device 439B guides the entering game ball to the back side of the substrate 401 without changing the entry probability of the game ball to them. The middle start winning device 431 does not change the probability of entering the entrance 611, but as described above, some of the game balls that have entered the middle start winning device 431 are discharged onto the game board 400 (that is, the game area) without entering any of the left and right middle start winning devices 431A and 431B (that is, without being guided to the back side of the base 401).

In addition, the right starting winning device 432 related to the second special symbol has a mechanism for changing the probability of entry of the game ball into its interior. In addition, the mechanism for changing the entry probability of the game ball need not be provided only in the starting device related to the second special symbol, instead of or in addition to it, the starting device related to the first special symbol, general winning devices 439A, 439B, middle starting winning device 431 including the starting device related to the first special symbol and the starting device related to the second special symbol. Further, the mechanism for changing the entry probability of the game ball may be constituted by a drive means such as an electrically driven solenoid, or may be constituted by a mechanically operated mechanism represented by a mechanism operated by the weight of the game ball that has entered a predetermined area.

A right start winning device 432 related to the second special symbol includes a right entry regulation mechanism 452 that changes the probability of entry of a game ball into the interior thereof by transition between an entry permission posture and an entry prohibition posture, and a right entry regulation solenoid 462 (see FIG. 10) for driving the right entry regulation mechanism 452. The right entry regulation mechanism 452 has two movable pieces driven by the right entry regulation solenoid 462, and when the right entry regulation mechanism 452 is in the entry prohibiting posture, the two movable pieces narrow (or close) the entry port (winning opening), thereby preventing the game ball from entering the right starting prize device 432. A game ball can enter the right starting winning device 432 by taking an arrangement such that the . A right entry regulation mechanism 452 shifts to an entry permitting posture for a prescribed number of times and for a prescribed period of time in response to driving by a right entry regulation solenoid 462 when a game ball entering a starting device 436 relating to normal symbols is won in a lottery based on detection by a start switch 446 (hereinafter also referred to as a "normal pattern lottery").

As shown in FIG. 7, the lower big prize device 433 includes a lower entry regulation mechanism 453 that regulates entry of game balls into the interior thereof by shifting between an entry permitting posture and an entry prohibition posture, a lower entry regulation solenoid 463 (see FIG. 10) that changes the posture of the lower entry regulation mechanism 453, and a distribution that distributes a game ball that has entered the lower prize winning device 433 to a non-specific passage or a specific passage by shifting between a non-guided posture and a guided posture. A dividing mechanism (not shown) and a switching solenoid 465 (see FIG. 10) for changing the orientation of the dividing mechanism and switching the guide destination of the game ball are provided. When the lower entry regulation mechanism 453 of the lower large prize winning device 433 is in the entry prohibiting posture, the game ball cannot enter the lower large prize winning device 433 by closing the entry port (winning port) of the lower entry regulation mechanism 453, but when the lower entry regulation mechanism 453 is in the entry permitting posture, the lower entry regulation mechanism 453 opens the entrance port so that the game ball can enter the lower large prize winning device 433. In addition, the game ball entering the lower prize winning device 433 is guided to a non-specific passage when the distribution mechanism is in a non-guiding posture in which it projects forward, and is guided to a specific passage when the distribution mechanism is in a guiding posture in which the distribution mechanism retreats backward. The specified path, the non-specified path and the sorting mechanism are provided to diversify the transition of the game state, and when the game ball enters the specified path, the player is given an advantageous game state as a privilege.

As shown in FIG. 7, the upper big prize device 434 is provided with an upper entry regulation mechanism 454 that regulates the entry of game balls into the interior thereof by shifting between an entry permitting posture and an entry prohibition posture, and an upper entry regulation solenoid 464 (see FIG. 10) that changes the posture of the upper entry regulation mechanism 454. When the upper entry regulation mechanism 454 is in the entry prohibiting posture, the game ball cannot enter the upper big prize winning device 434 by closing the entrance (winning mouth) by the upper entry regulation mechanism 454, but when the upper entry regulation mechanism 454 is in the entry permitting posture, the upper entry regulation mechanism 454 opens the entrance so that the game ball can enter the upper big prize winning device 434.例文帳に追加

In addition, as the entry permission posture and the entry prohibition posture as mechanisms for changing the probability of entry of the game ball into the right entry restriction mechanism 452, etc., it is sufficient if at least one of the position and orientation of the action member is different according to each posture, corresponding to the change in the posture of the operation member that configures each mechanism and switches between a special state in which the game ball can enter the winning opening (or ball entrance) of each device and a normal state in which the game ball cannot enter. In addition, as a mechanism for changing the probability of entry of a game ball such as the right entry regulation mechanism 452, it is not always necessary to set the state in which the game ball cannot enter as a normal state, and it is possible to allow the entry of the game ball even in the normal state, and change the attitude of the operating member to a state in which the game ball is easier to enter than in the normal state in the special state.

A game ball can enter the lower big prize winning device 433 and the upper big prize winning device 434 when winning the jackpot lottery. Specifically, when a game ball entering the left center start winning device 431A related to the first special symbol is detected by the left center start winning switch 441A (hereinafter also referred to as "first special symbol lottery") is won, or the game ball entering the right center start winning device 431B or the right starting winning device 432 related to the second special symbol is detected by the right center start winning switch 441B or the right start winning switch 442. When the lottery (hereinafter also referred to as "second special symbol lottery") is won, at least one of the lower entry regulation solenoid 463 or the upper entry regulation solenoid 464 operates. By this operation, at least one of the lower entry restriction mechanism 453 and the upper entry restriction mechanism 454 assumes the entry permitting posture for a predetermined number of times and for a predetermined time. In addition, the distribution mechanism shifts to the guiding posture in accordance with the operation of the switching solenoid 465 after a predetermined period of time from the transition to the entry-permitting posture of the downward entry regulation mechanism 453, and returns to the non-guiding posture in accordance with the stoppage of the switching solenoid 465 after a predetermined period of time from the shift to the guiding posture.

The combination operation device 435 is a device for setting conditions necessary for starting the operation of the lower special prize winning device 433 and the upper special prize winning device 434 . After winning the jackpot lottery, either the lower big winning device 433 or the upper big winning device 434 starts to operate on the condition that the game ball passes through the combination operation device 435 . Therefore, when the player wins the jackpot, the player can start the special game state at his/her intended timing. It should be noted that it is not necessarily required that either the lower big winning device 433 or the upper big winning device 434 starts to operate on the condition that the game ball passes through the role-linked operation device 435. Alternatively, or in addition to that, either the lower big winning device 433 or the upper big winning device 434 may start to operate when a predetermined time elapses.

Further, on the game board 400, as shown in FIG. 7, display devices 471 to 473 for displaying the variable display of symbols and the result of the lottery, and display devices 476 to 478 for displaying the number of times the game is held are integrated. The plurality of light-emitting units are divided in advance into light-emitting regions corresponding to respective devices, and the state of each device is displayed by the light-emitting state.

Specifically, the game board 400 includes a special symbol display device 471 related to the first special symbol that variably displays the first special symbol or confirms and displays the first special symbol as a stop symbol according to the result of the lottery along with the first special symbol lottery, and a special symbol display related to the second special symbol that variably displays the second special symbol or confirms and displays the second special symbol as a stop symbol according to the result of the lottery along with the second special symbol lottery. A device 472, a special symbol reservation display device 476 for displaying the number of times of reservation of the unit game related to the first special symbol, and a special design reservation display device 477 to display the number of times of suspension of the unit game related to the second special symbol are provided. The unit game right related to the first special symbol and the unit game right related to the second special symbol are reserved up to four times each. Here, the unit game is one game executed based on one start winning, and refers to a series of games from the start to the end of the variable display until the lottery result is displayed based on the success/failure determination of the lottery executed based on the one start winning.

When the right of the unit game related to the first special symbol is reserved up to the maximum number of times, the right of the unit game related to the first special symbol is not added even if the game ball entering the left center starting winning device 431A is detected by the left center starting winning switch 441A (see FIG. 10). Similarly, when the right of the unit game related to the second special symbol is reserved up to the maximum number of times, the right of the unit game related to the second special symbol is not added even if the game ball entering the right center start winning device 431B or the right start winning device 432 is detected by the right center start winning switch 441B (see FIG. 10) or the right starting winning switch 442 (see FIG. 10).

Each of the special symbol display device 471 related to the first special symbol and the special symbol display device 472 related to the second special symbol is composed of a plurality of light emitting units and controlled by the main control board 920 (see FIG. 10). Each of the display of the first special symbol and the display of the second special symbol is represented by a light emission pattern of a plurality of light emitting parts (combination of light emitting states including light emitting colors (light off, light on, blinking)). The special symbol reservation display device 476 related to the first special symbol and the special symbol reservation display device 477 related to the second special symbol display the number of times of suspension by a combination of light emitting states (light off, lighting, blinking) of two monochromatic light emitting parts.

In addition, the game board 400 is provided with a normal pattern display device 473 for variably displaying the normal patterns or for fixing and displaying the normal patterns with stop patterns according to the lottery results, and a normal pattern holding display device 478 for displaying the number of times of holding the right of the unit game related to the normal patterns. The right of the unit game related to normal symbols is reserved up to 4 times. When the right of the unit game related to the normal pattern is reserved up to the maximum number of times, even if the game ball entering the starting device 436 is detected by the start switch 446, the right of the unit game related to the normal pattern is not added.

The normal symbol display device 473 is composed of a plurality of light emitting parts and is controlled by the main control board 920 (see FIG. 10). A normal pattern is represented by a light emission pattern of a plurality of light emission portions. In addition, the normal symbol reservation display device 478 displays the number of times of reservation by a combination of light emitting states (extinguishing, lighting, blinking) of the two monochromatic light emitting portions.

In addition, the game board 400 is provided with a decorative pattern display device 479 overlapping behind the central structural body 420 to variably display the decorative patterns or confirm and display the decorative patterns in the unit game relating to the first special pattern and the second special pattern. The variable display and fixed display of decorative symbols are controlled by the sub-control board 940 and are synchronized with the variable display and fixed display of the first and second special symbols by the main control board 920 . In the variable display of the decorative symbols, more complex and diverse effects are executed than in the variable display of the first special symbols and the second special symbols. The variable display and final display of the first special pattern and the second special pattern and the variable display and final display of the decorative pattern do not necessarily have to start fluctuating at timings that completely coincide with each other, or stop display as final display.

In addition, the game board 400 is provided with a board surface light emitting device 490 (see FIG. 10) provided on the back side of various structures, and the board surface light emitting device 490 executes various light emitting effects and state notification by light emission according to the progress of the game based on the control by the sub control board 940.

Various game states and transitions between game states will now be described. The normal game state (hereinafter also abbreviated as "normal game state") corresponds to a state where the fluctuation display time of the first special symbol, the second special symbol and the normal symbol is long (hereinafter also referred to as "non-time saving state").

When a big win is won in the first special pattern lottery or the second special pattern lottery, the game state to be shifted after the special game state differs depending on whether or not the game ball enters a specific passage (internal passage of the lower big winning device 433) during the special game state to be shifted based on the winning. If the game ball does not enter the specific passage during the special game state, the variable display time of the first special symbol lottery, the second special symbol and the normal symbol is shorter than the non-working time state (hereinafter also referred to as the "time saving state"), and the winning probability of the big hit in the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery is the same as the normal game state (hereinafter also referred to as the "low probability state"). (also called). On the other hand, when the game ball enters the specific passage during the special game state, the game state shifts to a game state (hereinafter also referred to as a "variable probability game state") in which the probability of winning a big hit in the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery is higher than that in the normal game state (hereinafter also referred to as "high probability state").

The time saving game state is maintained until the total number of unit games related to the first special symbol and the second special symbol reaches a predetermined number of times (for example, 50 times), but then returns to the normal game state. Also, the variable probability game state is maintained until the total number of unit games related to the first special symbol and the second special symbol reaches a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times), but then returns to the normal game state.

It should be noted that the game state and the transition between the game states do not necessarily have to be configured as described above. For example, the high probability state may be configured to continue until the next big win is won, at least one of the game states may be configured according to other contents, the configuration may further include a game state different from the above-described game states, or the configuration may be configured such that the transition between game states is performed under conditions different from those described above.

Next, the operations of the main devices of the game board 400 will be described generally in chronological order. In the main control board 920, winning random numbers, jackpot pattern random numbers, stop pattern random numbers, and various variation pattern random numbers related to special symbols (common to the first special symbol and the second special symbol) are generated, and the first special symbol is started when the game ball entering the left middle start winning device 431A, which is the starting device related to the first special symbol in various game states, is detected by the left middle start winning prize switch 441A (see FIG. 10). Win a prize. When the right to play the unit game relating to the first special pattern is not reserved up to the maximum number of times at the time of start winning of the first special pattern, the winning random number, the big win pattern random number and the stop pattern random number relating to the special pattern are acquired and stored in a prescribed area of the RAM of the main control board 920.例文帳に追加

A unit game based on a random number obtained based on the start winning of the first special symbol is started immediately after the random numbers are stored when the unit game is not in a special game state, is not in a unit game relating to the first special symbol or the second special symbol, and the right of the unit game relating to the first special symbol and the second special symbol is not reserved. Also, even if it is not in the special game state, when the unit game relating to the first special symbol or the second special symbol is in progress or the right of the unit game relating to the first special symbol or the second special symbol is reserved, the unit game based on the current start winning is started after the unit game relating to all the reserved special symbols (the first special symbol and the second special symbol) is completed before the current winning. When each random number is acquired on the basis of the start prize of the first special pattern during the special game state, the unit game by the random number is started after the unit game related to all the special patterns reserved before the current start prize after the special game state.

In addition, the unit game by the random number acquired based on the start winning of the second special symbol is not in the special game state, nor in the unit game relating to the first special symbol or the second special symbol, and when the right of the unit game relating to the first special symbol and the second special symbol is not reserved, it is started immediately after storing those random numbers. Also, even if it is not in the special game state, when the unit game relating to the first special symbol or the second special symbol is in progress or the right of the unit game relating to the first special symbol or the second special symbol is reserved, the unit game based on the current start winning is started after the unit game relating to all the reserved special symbols (the first special symbol and the second special symbol) is completed before the current winning. When each random number is acquired on the basis of the start winning of the second special symbol during the special game state, the unit game by the random number is started after the unit game related to all the special symbols reserved before the current start winning after the special game state.

That is, the unit game related to the first special symbol and the second special symbol is executed in the order of starting winnings. It should be noted that it is not always necessary to perform the unit game related to the first special symbol and the second special symbol in the order of the start winning, and either one of the special symbols may be prioritized over the other special symbols. That is, during the unit game related to the first special symbol or the second special symbol, when the starting winning of the first special symbol and then the starting winning of the second special symbol is achieved, the unit game based on the starting winning of the second special symbol which becomes the starting winning later may be preferentially executed, or the two special symbols may be configured to be variable at the same time instead of being alternative.

When a big hit is won in the first special pattern lottery based on the start prize of the first special pattern, the type of stop pattern (big hit pattern) corresponding to the big win of the first special pattern lottery is further determined based on the acquired big win pattern random number. The types of the stop symbols correspond to the types of the big hits, for example, a number of rounds (for example, 6 rounds and 16 rounds) corresponding to the number of times the lower entry regulation mechanism 453 or the upper entry regulation mechanism 454 takes the entry allowable posture, and a plurality of kinds of the big hits are set corresponding to the kinds of the game state such as the game state to be shifted after the special game state (whether to shift to the probability variable game state), and the big win pattern is set for each type. When a big win is not won in the first special symbol lottery, a losing symbol different from the big winning symbol is set as a stop symbol.

After the first special symbol lottery, the variation display time of the first special symbol is determined and the variation pattern of the decorative symbol is selected based on the current game state, the lottery result, the value of the stop pattern random number, the value of various variation pattern random numbers, and the number of times the right of the unit game related to the first special symbol is reserved. The variation patterns of the decorative symbols are roughly divided into a variation pattern in which a ready-to-win display is performed before a decorative symbol corresponding to a stop symbol (a big win symbol or a losing symbol) relating to a first special symbol is fixedly displayed (hereinafter also referred to as a “ready-to-win variation pattern”), and a variation pattern in which a ready-to-win display is not performed before a decorative symbol corresponding to a stopped symbol relating to the first special symbol is a losing design is fixedly displayed.

In addition, "ready-to-win display" means that after the variable display of the decorative symbols in the unit game related to the first special symbol or the second special symbol is started, a partial combination corresponding to the combination of the decorative symbols previously confirmed and displayed in the left and right display areas of the decorative symbol display device 479 satisfies the conditions for becoming a big hit, and the display result (that is, the stop symbol) when the remaining decorative symbols whose variable display continues in the central display area is confirmed and displayed. This is a display that suggests to the player that there is

The reach display includes normal reach, which is a reach display with a relatively short variable display time (for example, approximately 25 seconds to approximately 30 seconds), and super reach, which is a reach display with a variable display time longer than normal reach (for example, approximately 60 seconds to approximately 180 seconds). The types of reach display are not limited to two types, normal reach and super reach, and may be three or more types including special reach, which is a reach display with variable display time longer than super reach.

The reach fluctuation pattern is provided for each type of reach display such as normal reach and super reach. Only one type of normal reach may be set, or a plurality of types with different variable display times may be set. When multiple types of normal reach are set, the reach variation pattern is provided for each type of normal reach. Similarly, only one type of super reach may be set, or a plurality of types with different variable display times may be set. When multiple types of super reach are set, the reach variation pattern is provided for each type of super reach.

After the variable display time of the first special symbol is determined and the variable pattern of the decorative symbol is selected, the variable display of the first special symbol on the special symbol display device 471 related to the first special symbol and the variable display (variation performance) of the decorative symbol on the decorative symbol display device 479 are started, the variable display of the first special symbol is continued over the variable display time according to the constant pattern, and the variable display of the decorative symbol is continued according to the variable display time. After that, as the variable display time elapses, the stop symbol related to the first special symbol is confirmed and displayed, and the symbol corresponding to the stop symbol of the first special symbol is confirmed and displayed as the decorative symbol. The fixed display of the first special symbol and the decorative symbol continues at least for a predetermined fixed period of time.

When the stop symbol associated with the first special symbol is a jackpot symbol, the game state shifts to the special game state after the first special symbol is confirmed and displayed. In the special game state, the lower entry regulating mechanism 453 of the lower big winning device 433 and the upper entry regulating mechanism 454 of the upper big winning device 433 are in the entry permitting posture for a predetermined number of times in a predetermined order according to the type of big win. When a predetermined number (e.g., 8) of game balls are detected by the big winning switches 443, 444 during each time of entry permission posture of the lower entry regulation mechanism 453 and the upper entry regulation mechanism 454, or when a predetermined maximum entry permission time (for example, 29.5 seconds) elapses, the lower entry regulation mechanism 453 or the upper entry regulation mechanism 454 shifts to the entry prohibition posture. Thereafter, after a predetermined entry prohibition time has passed, either the lower entry regulation mechanism 453 or the upper entry regulation mechanism 454 returns to the entry permitting posture again. This entry control operation is repeated a predetermined number of times in a predetermined order corresponding to the type of jackpot.

Only one of the lower entry regulating mechanism 453 and the upper entry regulating mechanism 454 is configured to take the entry permitting posture during the special game state, and one shifts to the first entry permitting posture after a predetermined waiting time elapses (after the opening period) from the start of the special game state. Also, the special game state ends after a predetermined entry prohibition time elapses after returning to the entry prohibition posture in the final round, and after a predetermined waiting time elapses (after the ending period). After the end of the special game state, as described above, it shifts to the time-saving game state or probability variable game state.

In various game states, when the game ball entering the right starting winning device 431B or the right starting winning device 432 which is the starting device related to the second special symbol is detected by the right starting winning switch 441B (see FIG. 10) or the right starting winning switch 442 (see FIG. 10), the second special symbol starts winning. The control of the unit game based on the start winning of the second special symbol is executed in the same manner as the control related to the first special symbol described above. That is, if the right of the unit game relating to the second special symbol is not reserved up to the maximum number of times at the time of starting winning of the second special symbol, each random number relating to the special symbol is acquired and the unit game based on this starting winning is executed. In addition, the determination of the stop symbol according to the second special symbol lottery, the selection of the variation pattern of the decorative symbol, the execution of the variation display, the game state transition control, etc. are also executed in the same manner as the control related to the first special symbol.

In various game states, when a game ball entering a starting device 436 is detected by a starting switch 446, if the right of a unit game related to normal symbols is not reserved up to the maximum number of times, winning random numbers related to normal symbols are obtained and stored in a prescribed area of a RAM of a main control board 920.例文帳に追加At this time, if it is not during the unit game related to the normal design, immediately after the storage, the unit game related to the acquired normal design is started. On the other hand, if it is during the unit game related to the normal symbol, the unit game related to the acquired normal symbol is started after the unit game based on the right of the unit game related to the acquired normal symbol is finished.

In the unit game relating to the normal symbols, it is determined whether or not the game is won based on the value of the winning random number. On the other hand, when the player does not win the normal symbol lottery, a predetermined lost symbol is set as a stop symbol. After the normal pattern lottery, the variable display of normal patterns is started in a normal pattern display device 473, the variable display by a fixed pattern is continued over a predetermined variable display time in the non-time saving state, and the variable display by a fixed pattern is continued over the predetermined variable display time shorter than the non-time saving state in the time saving state. With the lapse of a predetermined time corresponding to the game state, the stop symbols related to the normal symbols are fixedly displayed for a certain period of time.

When the stop symbol associated with the normal symbol is a winning symbol, the right entry regulation mechanism 452 of the right starting winning device 432 shifts to the entry permitting posture at least once after the normal symbol is confirmed and displayed. Specifically, when winning in a non-time-saving state (normal game state and special game state), the right start winning device 432 shifts to an entry-allowed state over a predetermined maximum allowed entry time (for example, approximately 0.1 seconds), and in the case of winning in the time-saving state (time-saving game state and variable probability game state), the right start winning device 432 (For example, divided into three times) to shift to the approach permitting posture. However, when a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are detected by the right start winning switch 442, the right entry regulation mechanism 452 shifts to the entry prohibition posture without waiting for the maximum entry permission time to pass, and even if the number of times of shifting to the entry permission posture does not reach the predetermined number of times, the operation of the right start winning device 432 in the unit game related to the current normal symbol ends.

Next, the configuration of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment relating to game play will be described.

In order to receive the second special symbol lottery based on the starting prize to the right starting prize winning device 432 (hereinafter this lottery may be referred to as "right side special symbol lottery"), first, the normal symbol lottery must be won, and furthermore, the game ball must enter the right starting prize winning device 432 in the entry permission state of the right starting prize winning device 432 based on the winning. The probability of winning the normal symbol in the normal game state is the same as the probability of winning in the time saving game state, but the staying time (for example, about 0.1 seconds) of the right start winning device 432 in the entry permission state based on the winning in the normal game state is set extremely shorter than the staying time in the time saving state (for example, about 4.8 seconds). The opportunity per unit time for receiving the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery (hereinafter these lotteries may be referred to as ``central side special symbol lottery'') based on the starting winnings is significantly smaller. Conversely, in a time-saving state such as a time-saving game state or a variable probability game state, the opportunity per unit time for receiving the right side special symbol lottery is made significantly larger than the chance per unit time for receiving the center side special symbol lottery.

Therefore, the player wins the jackpot in the center side special symbol lottery, and then plays with the aim of shifting to the probability variable game state by entering the game ball into the specific path in the special game state. On the other hand, in the time-saving game state and the variable probability game state, the game is played with the aim of winning a big hit in the right side special symbol lottery before each game state ends.

Specifically, the game board 400 is provided with a central structure 420 in the center of the game area where the game balls flow down, and a game method in which game balls flow down mainly from the left side of the central structure 420 (left hitting game method) and a game method in which game balls flow down mainly from the right side of the central structure 420 (right hitting game method) are selectively performed. The player plays the game by the left-handed game method in the normal game state, and plays the game by the right-handed game method in the time-saving game state and the variable probability game state. Further, since the lower big winning device 433 and the upper big winning device 434 are arranged on the right side with respect to the central structure 420, the right-handed game method is used even in the special game state.

Next, the rear block 104 will be described. 8 and 9 are rear perspective and rear views of the pachinko machine 100, respectively. Note that FIG. 8 omits the outer frame 101 for easy understanding.

As shown in FIGS. 8 and 9, the rear block 104 is constructed by attaching other members and devices to a base 501. As shown in FIG. The base 501 and the intermediate block 103 are connected by the rear block support mechanisms 136 and 137, so that the rear block 104 is supported on the intermediate block 103 so as to be openable and closable.

The rear block 104 includes a game ball tank 510 as a ball storage part for storing game balls, a tank rail 520 as a ball alignment part that rectifies (for example, in one row) and aligns the game balls continuously downstream of the game ball tank 510 and aligns them in one stage, a case rail 530 as a ball guide part that guides the game balls that flow in from the tank rail 520 on the downstream side of the tank rail 520, and a game ball on the downstream side of the case rail 530. A payout device 540 for executing payout or rental of game balls, a guide member 550 as a ball guiding portion for guiding the game balls flowing out of the payout device 540 to a guide passage (not shown) formed in the base 501 on the downstream side of the payout device 540, a payout control device 560 for controlling the payout or lending of the game balls by the payout device 540, and converting external power into electric power of a predetermined voltage required by various devices. A power supply/launch control device 570 having a function as output power supply means and a function as a launch control means for controlling the ejection of game balls based on the launch operation to the launch operation device 250 in cooperation with the main control board 920, and a relay device 950 for relaying signals between the payout control device 560 and the game ball lending device 290 (see FIG. 1) and a card unit (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 100.

The base 501 is integrally molded of resin (eg, ABS resin) and includes a base portion 502 corresponding to the front side portion and a protective cover portion 503 positioned behind the base portion 502 . The base portion 502 has an upper portion formed in a substantially frame shape along the outer shape of the rear block 104, and a lower portion formed in a substantially flat shape having a thickness in the front-rear direction.

The protective cover portion 503 is formed in a substantially plate shape having a thickness in the front-rear direction. In addition, the protective cover part 503 is not shaped to cover the entire back surface of the intermediate block 103, but is set to a size that forms a window part for exposing a part of the back surface of the intermediate block 103 that requires frequent inspection and confirmation, such as a part of the main control device 370, to the back surface of the pachinko machine 100.例文帳に追加A large number of ventilation holes 503A are formed on the back surface of the protective cover section 503, and have a function of improving the heat radiation performance of the main controller 370 and the sub-controller 390. As shown in FIG.

The game ball tank 510 is a horizontally long box-shaped container with an upward opening, and one longitudinal end of the game ball tank 510 is sequentially supplied with game balls supplied from a ball circulation device (not shown) of the island facility. An opening (not shown) is formed at one end of the game ball tank 510 in the longitudinal direction different from the side where the game balls are supplied. The bottom surface of the game ball tank 510 gently slopes in the longitudinal direction, and the game balls supplied to the game ball tank 510 move to the opening side by their own weight. In addition, the bottom surface of the game ball tank 510 is also inclined in a direction perpendicular to the longitudinal direction (front-rear direction) compared to the longitudinal direction, and preferentially guides the game ball to the side where the opening is provided (for example, the front side). A metal antistatic plate (not shown) is attached to the bottom surface of the game ball tank 510 so as to overlap thereon, and the antistatic plate is connected to the ground potential to remove static electricity from the game balls in the game ball tank 510 and on the downstream side thereof.

The tank rail 520 is attached to the side where the opening of the game ball tank 510 is formed, and the game ball flows through the opening of the game ball tank 510 . The tank rail 520 is provided with a passage forming member 521 which forms a substantially gutter-shaped passage for game balls having a width for the game balls to pass in a line, and a rectifying member 522 which has a top surface part whose height is gradually lowered as the upper surface of the passage formed by the passage forming member 521 and which rectifies the game balls flowing down the passage from a vertically overlapping height to a height of one step gradually. The passage formed by the tank rail 520 is gently inclined toward the downstream side and guides the game ball to the side opposite to the game ball tank 510 .

The case rail 530 is formed vertically so as to be continuous with the lower side of the tank rail 520, and game balls from the tank rail 520 flow in. The case rail 530 is curved to the left and right and continues downward so that the game ball does not flow vigorously. Further, in the middle of the ball passage of the case rail 530, a blown ball detecting portion 539 for detecting blown ball is provided. A stored ball switch 591 (see FIG. 10) is incorporated in the ball-out detector 539, and the stored ball switch 591 detects a ball-out state in which game balls are not normally replenished in the case rail 530 due to occurrence of ball clogging in the case rail 530 or its upstream side.

The payout device 540 includes a payout mechanism for sending game balls, a payout motor 542 (see FIG. 10) as driving means for driving the payout mechanism, and a payout counting switch 592 (see FIG. 10). According to the operation of the payout motor 542 based on the control by the payout control device 560, the game balls stored in the ball passage are released to the downstream side. Passage of the released game balls through the ball passage is detected by the payout counting switch 592, whereby the payout control device 560 (payout control board 930) counts the number of payouts of the game balls.

As shown in FIGS. 8 and 9, the payout control device 560 and the power supply/fire control device 570 are attached so as to overlap the lower back surface of the base portion 502 of the substrate 501 so as to be positioned at the lower back surface side of the rear block 104. The rear block 104 including the payout control device 560 and the power supply/fire control device 570 can be used continuously even when the game board 400 is replaced with another game board due to model change or the like.

The payout control device 560 includes a payout control board 930 (see FIG. 10) and a board case that houses the payout control board 930. The payout control board 930, like the main control board 920, is housed inside the board case that is sealed so that it cannot be unsealed without leaving a trace of unsealing.

The power and launch control device 570 includes a power and launch control board 900 (see FIG. 10) and a board case that houses the power and launch control board 900. The power and launch control board 900 is housed inside a sealed board case, similar to the main control board 920.

<Electrical configuration>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. FIG. 10 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 100. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 10, the pachinko machine 100 includes control circuit devices such as a power supply/fire control board 900, a power monitoring board 910, a main control board 920, a payout control board 930, a sub control board 940, and the like. In FIG. 10, a relay circuit device that only relays various signals is omitted. Below, each of these main control circuit devices is described in detail.

The power supply/emission control board 900 includes a power supply unit 901 that supplies power of a predetermined voltage to each part of the pachinko machine 100 via a power supply path (broken line in the figure), a launch control unit 902 that controls the driving of the launch device 330 in accordance with the operation of the launch operation device 250, and a signal relay unit 903 that relays the initialization signal from the initialization switch 907 and the ball overflow signal from the ball overflow switch 249.

The power supply unit 901 receives external power (for example, 24 volts AC) supplied from the outside, converts it into internal power (for example, 24 volts direct current), and generates various types of power from the internal power. The power generated by the power supply unit 901 includes drive voltage (e.g., DC 12 volts) power for driving devices such as various solenoids and various motors, control voltage (e.g., DC 5 volts) power for driving various switches and executing control processing, backup voltage power for retaining the contents of the RAM of the main control board 920, and the like.

The power supply unit 901 supplies various power generated from internal power to the power monitoring board 910, the main control board 920, the payout control board 930, the sub control board 940, and the like. Specifically, internal power, drive voltage, control voltage, and backup voltage are supplied to the power monitoring board 910 . The main control board 920 is supplied with driving voltage, control voltage, and backup voltage power, and these powers are supplied via the power monitoring unit 911 of the power monitoring board 910 . Electric power of driving voltage and control voltage is supplied to the payout control board 930 . The power of the drive voltage and the control voltage is supplied to the sub-control board 940 . Electric power of the drive voltage and the control voltage is supplied to the launch control unit 902 and the signal relay unit 903 .

A power switch 909 is connected to the power supply unit 901, and when the power switch 909 is in an off state, external power supply is stopped. A state in which the power supply to the inside of the pachinko machine 100 is stopped or a state in which the supply of external power itself is stopped by turning off the power switch 909 or removing a power plug (not shown) connected to the power supply unit 901 via the power switch 909 from an external power supply outlet (not shown) is collectively referred to as a "power failure state".

The power supply unit 901 is configured to normally output power of the control voltage for a predetermined period of time even after transition to a power failure state. This allows the main control board 920 to save the state and end the control so that the current control state can be restored.

The firing control unit 902 controls driving of the ball feed solenoid 332 and the firing solenoid 334 of the firing device 330 in cooperation with the main control board 920 . It should be noted that the ball feed solenoid 332 and the firing solenoid 334 are permitted to operate when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the firing control unit 902 outputs an on-state firing permission signal to the main control board 920 on the condition that the player's touch with the firing handle 252 (see FIG. 1) is detected based on the contact sensor signal from the contact sensor 254 and the firing stop switch 255 for stopping firing is not operated. Also, the main control board 920 outputs a firing solenoid control signal and a ball feeding solenoid control signal to the firing control section 902 based on the firing permission signal and the firing abnormality signal. The firing control unit 902 operates the ball feed solenoid 332 based on the on-state ball feed control signal, and operates the firing solenoid 334 based on the reception of the on-state firing solenoid control signal and the resistance value of the variable resistor 253 . As a result, game balls are sequentially shot from the shooting device 330 with strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor 253 (rotational operation amount of the shooting handle 252).

The signal relay unit 903 outputs an ON-state initialization signal to the main control board 920 when the initialization switch 907 is pressed. The main control board 920 initializes the stored information stored in the RAM of the main control board 920 in response to receiving the ON state initialization signal. The initialization switch 907 does not necessarily need to be configured to output a signal to the main control board 920 via the signal relay unit 903. For example, the initialization switch 907 may be directly mounted on the main control board 920, and the initialization switch 907 may be accommodated in the board case 371, thereby suppressing unauthorized signal input targeting the section in which the signal is transmitted.

In addition, the signal relay unit 903 outputs an on-state ball overflow signal to the main control board 920 when the ball overflow switch 249 detects a game ball. The main control board 920 outputs a low-speed payout signal to the payout control board 930 based on the detection of the ball overflow signal in the ON state, and the payout control board 930 that receives the low-speed payout signal slows down the rotation speed of the payout motor 542 (the payout speed of the game balls from the payout device 540). In addition, the main control board 920 outputs a high-speed payout signal to the payout control board 930 based on the detection of the off-state ball overflow signal, and the payout control board 930 receiving the high-speed payout signal speeds up the rotation speed of the payout motor 542.

The power monitoring board 910 includes a power monitoring unit 911 that monitors the state of power supply from the power/launch control board 900, and a signal relay unit 912 that relays power supply and transmission of various signals between the power/launch control board 900 and the main control board 920. The power monitoring unit 911 also outputs a power failure signal to the main control board 920 in response to transition to a power failure state. It monitors the voltage of a stable DC voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 901, and determines that a power failure state has occurred when this voltage remains below 22 volts for a predetermined period of time, and outputs an on-state power failure signal to the main control board 920. The main control board 920 recognizes the transition to the power failure state by receiving the power failure signal in the ON state.

The main control board 920 comprehensively controls the operation of the pachinko machine 100 . The main control board 920 is mounted with an MPU (not shown) as a one-chip microcomputer. The MPU includes a CPU (not shown) as an arithmetic processing unit, a ROM (not shown) storing various control programs executed by the CPU and fixed data, and a RAM (not shown) temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs. Various circuits such as a timer circuit (not shown), a counter circuit (not shown), a clock generation circuit (not shown), and a signal transmission/reception circuit (not shown) are also mounted on the main control board 920 . The RAM of the main control board 920 is configured so that internal data can be maintained (backed up) by the power supply of the backup voltage from the power supply/launch control board 900 even after the transition to the power outage state.

The payout control board 930 controls the game ball payout operation by the payout device 540 according to the instruction from the main control board 920 and the game ball lending operation by the payout device 540 according to the operation of the game ball lending device 290 . As with the main control board 920, the payout control board 930 includes a CPU (not shown), a ROM (not shown), and a RAM (not shown).

The payout control board 930 is equipped with an input/output port as a connection means for connecting to other devices so as to enable information communication. For example, the main control board 920 and the relay device 950 are connected to enable bidirectional information input/output communication, the open/close detection switches 108 and 109, the stored ball switch 591, and the payout counting switch 592 are connected to enable only one-way information input communication, and the payout motor 542 allows only one-way information output communication. connected as possible. Note that the RAM of the payout control board 930, like the RAM of the main control board 920, may be configured to have a backup function that can maintain internal data for a certain period in a power failure state, or unlike the RAM of the main control board 920, it may be configured not to maintain internal data in a power failure state.

The sub control board 940 controls operations of various production devices, various light emitting devices, various sound devices, etc., based on instructions from the main control board 920 . The sub control board 940 is equipped with an input/output port as a connection means for connecting to other devices so that information communication is possible. For example, it is connected to the main control board 920 so that only one-way information input communication is possible.

<Various control processing>
Next, various control processes executed by the main control board 920 will be described. The control processing in the main control board 920 can be broadly divided into main processing that is started upon recovery from a power failure state, and timer interrupt processing that is executed by periodically interrupting the main processing (2 ms (milliseconds) in this embodiment).

First, with reference to FIG. 11, the main processing executed by main control board 920 will be described. FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing main processing of the main control board 920 (abbreviated as “main control main processing” in FIG. 11).

In the main processing of the main control board 920, first, a series of control start processing (program start processing S1001 to random number initial setting processing S1019) for starting up the main control board 920 and initializing various information is executed only once, and then interrupt prohibition processing S1020 for prohibiting interrupts, winning random number initial value counter (part of RAM area) and jackpot symbol random number initial value counter (part area of RAM) and normal symbols for special symbols Random number initial value update processing S1021 for updating the value of the winning random number initial value counter (partial area of RAM), the first to fourth variation type counters for determining the variation display time (variation time), variation pattern, etc. Variation counter update processing S1022 for updating the value of the variation type counter (partial area of RAM), and interrupt permission processing S1023 for permitting an interrupt are repeatedly executed. If a request for a timer interrupt occurs before the interrupt permission processing S1023, the timer interrupt processing is executed immediately after the interrupt permission processing S1023.

In a series of control start processing, a program start processing S1001 for setting an initial value to a stack pointer (a partial area of RAM) that controls execution of the program, an interrupt mode setting processing S1002 for setting an interrupt mode, and a start-up standby processing S1003 for waiting for a predetermined time until the payout control board 930 and the sub control board 940 or the like start up are executed.

After the start-up standby process S1003, determination process S1004 of the output state of the initialization signal from the initialization switch 907 of the power/emission control board 900, determination process S1005 of the value of power failure information (partial area of RAM), and determination process S1007 of the storage state of the saved information are performed, and it is determined whether or not to erase the stored information in the RAM based on these determination results. Here, the stored information is information necessary to restore the state of the game before the power failure, corresponds to a partial area of the RAM updated according to the progress of the game before the power failure, and is exemplified by a counter value related to the unit game being executed, a counter value stored by starting winning, and the like.

The storage state of saved information is determined as follows. First, a checksum value for a storage area in a predetermined range of the RAM is calculated (checksum calculation processing S1006), and it is determined whether or not the exclusive OR of the current checksum value and the RAM determination value, which is the two's complement of the checksum value calculated in the power failure monitoring processing S1202 (see FIG. 12) accompanying the transition to the previous power failure state, is "0" (determination processing S1007). are the same.

If the initialization signal is in the ON state (S1004: Y), if the power failure information is not a predetermined power failure value indicating that the saved information has been saved and terminated when transitioning to the power failure state (S1005: N), or if the saved information is not normally held (S1007: N), RAM clear processing S1008 for erasing the saved information in the RAM is executed. After it is determined that the saved information is normally held (S1007: Y), or after the RAM clear processing S1008 is executed, hardware initialization processing S1009 for initializing various devices connected to the main control board 920 is executed.

After hardware initialization processing S1009, determination processing S1010 is performed to determine whether the power failure information is a power failure value. If the power failure information is a power failure value (S1010: N), RAM recovery setting processing S1011 for initializing various information including recovery of held information and a recovery command indicating completion of the setting are set (recovery command output processing S1012). By restoring the held information in the RAM restoration setting process S1011, the control state of the main control board 920 is restored to the control state immediately before the transition to the previous power failure state.

On the other hand, if the power failure information is not a power failure value (S1010: Y), various information is initialized without restoring the held information (RAM initialization processing S1013), and an initialization command indicating the completion of the setting is output (initialization command output processing S1014).

In the RAM recovery setting processing S1011 and the RAM initial setting processing S1013, the power failure information is set to a predetermined energization value different from the power failure value, and even if various error states such as fraudulent detection errors have occurred immediately before the transition to the previous power failure state, those error states are all cleared. In addition, either a return command or an initialization command is output from the main control board 920 to both the payout control board 930 and the sub control board 940, and the payout control board 930 and the sub control board 940 that received the return command or the initialization command also perform a predetermined initialization process.

After the initial setting of the RAM (judgment processing S1004 to initialization command output processing S1014) according to the situation at the time of start-up, if the condition device was operating at the time of transition to the previous power failure state, preparations are made for returning to the special game state (special game state return preparation processing S1015). Specifically, in the special game state return preparation process S1015, the operation state of the condition device and the accessory continuous operation device is determined, and the sub control board 940 executes a process corresponding to the game situation during the power failure state.

After the special game state return preparation process S1015, it is determined whether the time saving state or non-time saving state is set by determining whether the time saving state flag is set (determination process S1016). If it is in the time saving state (S1016: Y), the time saving command is output (time saving command output process S1017). On the other hand, when it is in a non-time-saving state (S1016:N), a non-time-saving command is output (non-time-saving command output process S1018). After that, the value of the winning random number counter (partial area of the RAM) related to the special symbol is initialized (random number initial setting process S1019).

Next, timer interrupt processing executed by the main control board 920 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 12 is a flow chart showing timer interrupt processing (abbreviated as “main control interrupt processing” in the figure) executed by the main control board 920 .

In the timer interrupt process of the main control board 920, first, an interrupt start process S1201 for starting the timer interrupt is executed. Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the interrupt control register. As a result, interrupts other than this timer interrupt are prohibited. After that, a power failure monitoring process S1202 to an external information output process S1221 relating to substantial control such as progress control of the game of the pachinko machine 100 and monitoring of various sensors are sequentially executed. However, when the progress of the game has been stopped based on the detection of various frauds (S1207: Y), the control signal output process S1208 to the external information output process S1221 are not executed. Finally, an interrupt permission process S1222 for permitting the next timer interrupt is executed, and the current timer interrupt process ends. In the following, various main processes will be individually described.

In the power failure monitoring process S<b>1202 , the value of the power failure information (part of the RAM) is updated based on the output state of the power failure signal output from the power monitoring unit 911 of the power monitoring board 910 . Specifically, the output state of the power failure signal is confirmed three times, and when the ON state is detected for all three times, it is determined that the power failure state has occurred. If it is determined that there is no power failure in this determination, the power failure information is maintained at the energization value.

On the other hand, when it is determined in the power failure monitoring process S1202 that there is a power failure, the following processes are executed. First, the power failure information value is changed from the energization value set in the RAM recovery setting process S1011 or the RAM initial setting process S1013 (see FIG. 11) to a predetermined power failure value. Also, a checksum value is calculated for a predetermined range of the storage area of the RAM, and the 2's complement of the checksum value is set as the RAM determination value. As a result, the pachinko machine 100 enters an infinite loop in which no substantial control such as progress of the game or monitoring of various sensors is performed, and the state of the RAM after the RAM determination value is set is maintained based on the backup power. Since the output state of the power failure signal is confirmed three times, each timer interrupt process is executed twice after the reception of the power failure signal is detected for the first time.

In the random number update process S1203, the winning random number counter associated with the special symbol, the jackpot symbol random number counter, the stop pattern selection counter and the winning random number counter associated with the normal symbol are updated. Specifically, when the value of the winning random number counter related to the special symbol is different from the specified maximum value (for example, "576"), it is changed to a value larger by "1" than the current value, and when the value of the winning random number counter related to the special symbol is the specified maximum value, it is changed to the specified minimum value ("0"). However, when the changed value is the same as the circulating initial value for the winning random number counter related to the special design, the value of the winning random number counter related to the special design is set to the same value as the winning random number initial value counter related to the special design, and the circulating initial value is also set to the same value as the winning random number initial value counter.

The jackpot symbol random number counter, the stop pattern selection counter and the normal symbol winning random number counter are updated in the same manner as the special symbol winning random number counter. However, as the update range determined by the specified maximum value and specified minimum value of each counter, a unique value is set for each counter, and a plurality of counters are configured to be updated asynchronously, and the cyclic initial value of each counter refers to the initial value counter unique to each counter. For example, the winning random number counter related to special symbols and the winning random number initial value counter related to special symbols have the same value range, the big winning symbol random number counter and the big winning symbol random number initial value counter have the same value range, and the winning random number counter related to normal symbols and the winning random number initial value counter related to normal symbols have the same value range.

In the random number initial value update process S1204, the winning random number initial value counter related to the special symbol, the jackpot symbol random number initial value counter and the winning random number initial value counter related to the normal symbol are updated. Specifically, when the value of the winning random number initial value counter related to the special symbol is different from the specified maximum value (for example, "576"), it is changed to a value larger by "1" than the current value, and when the value of the winning random number initial value counter related to the special symbol is the specified maximum value, it is changed to the specified minimum value ("0"). The symbol random number initial value counter related to the special symbol and the winning random number initial value counter related to the normal symbol are also updated in the same way as the winning random number initial value counter related to the special symbol except that the prescribed maximum value and the prescribed minimum value are inherent values of these counters.

In the fluctuation counter update process S1205, the values of the first to fourth fluctuation type counters for determining the fluctuation display time (fluctuation time), fluctuation pattern, etc. are updated. Specifically, when the value of the first variation type counter is different from the specified maximum value (for example, "187"), it is changed to a value larger by "1" than the current value, and when the value of the first variation type counter is the specified maximum value, it is changed to the specified minimum value ("0"). The second to fourth fluctuation type counters are updated in the same manner as the first fluctuation type counter, except that the specified maximum value and specified minimum value are values unique to those counters.

The winning random number counters, the jackpot pattern random number counters, the stop pattern selection counters, and the variation type counters related to special symbols and normal symbols do not necessarily have to have the above configuration, and at least some of the above counters may have other configurations.

In the game stop determination process S1206, when the fraud detection information is the fraud detection value, it is updated to the game stop value and various information for stopping the progress of the game is set. On the other hand, if the fraud detection information is not the fraud detection value or is already the game stop value, the game stop determination process S1206 ends without executing each process for stopping the game progress. The fraud detection information is set to a fraud detection value when the occurrence of various frauds is detected in the fraud detection processing S1211. Further, in the determination processing S1207, it is determined whether or not the game is stopped depending on whether or not the fraud detection information is a game stop value.

In the control signal output process S1208, based on the control data stored in the output buffer, the special symbol display device 471 relating to the first special symbol, the special symbol display device 472 relating to the second special symbol, and the signal for controlling various notification devices such as the normal symbol display device 473 relating to the normal symbol are output. Also, based on the control data stored in the output buffer, signals for controlling various actuators such as the ball feeding solenoid 332, the firing solenoid 334, the right entry restricting solenoid 462, the downward entering restricting solenoid 463, the upward entering restricting solenoid 464, the switching solenoid 465, etc. are output.

In the switch reading process S1209, the signal states from each of the middle start winning switches 441A and 441B, the right starting winning switch 442, the lower large winning switch 443, the upper large winning switch 444, the role-linked operation switch 445, the starting switch 446, the non-specific path switch 447, the specific path switch 448, and the general winning switches 449A and 449B are read, and changes in the detection state of the game balls by the various switches are detected. be done.

Specifically, in the switch read processing S1209, the signal states from the various switches are read into the input buffer (a partial area of the RAM) twice at predetermined time intervals. changes in the detection states of various switches are detected. Then, for each switch, when the previous detection state is the OFF state, the first signal state is the ON state, and the second signal state is the ON state, it is determined that the transition to the ON state is performed, and a detection flag (partial area of the RAM) is set according to the switch type. As described in the power failure monitoring process S1202, even if the power supply is stopped, each timer interrupt process is executed twice. Therefore, the detection flags of the various switches can be set accurately even when the various switches start to be turned on immediately after the power supply is stopped.

In timer update processing S1210, various timers (predetermined area of RAM) used for variable display of special symbols and normal symbols, control of each game state, fraud monitoring, etc. are updated.

In the fraud detection process S1211, fraud such as forcibly entering game balls into various prize winning devices or forcibly operating various prize winning devices is detected. Specifically, the right starting winning device 432, the lower big winning device 433, and the upper big winning device 434 are forcibly moved to the entry-permitting posture, the game ball is guided to the specific path of the lower big winning device 433 by vibration, the right start winning device 432, the lower big winning device 433, and the upper big winning device 434 are forcibly induced to malfunction by magnetic attraction, the game ball is guided to various winning devices by magnetic adsorption, and the left middle start winning device 4. 31A, the right center start winning device 431B, the right start winning device 432, the lower big winning device 433 and the upper big winning device 434 are detected in a situation where there is a high possibility that a fraudulent act such as guidance of a game ball has been performed at an abnormal timing.

In the winning detection response process S1212, control based on the detection of game balls by various switches provided on the game board 400 is executed. Specifically, when the middle start winning switch detection flag is set based on the detection of the game ball by the left middle start winning switch 441A (see FIG. 10) and the right middle start winning switch 441B (see FIG. 10), the middle start winning prize counter (predetermined area of RAM) and the first payout counter (predetermined area of RAM) are updated. Further, when the right starting winning switch detection flag is set based on the detection of the game ball by the right starting winning switch 442 (see FIG. 10), the first payout counter is updated. Further, when the lower big winning switch detection flag is set based on the detection of the game ball by the lower big winning switch 443 (see FIG. 10), or when the upper big winning switch detection flag is set based on the detection of the game ball by the upper big winning switch 444 (see FIG. 10), the big winning counter (predetermined area of RAM) and the second payout counter (predetermined area of RAM) are updated.

In the shooting control process S1213, shooting-related information for controlling shooting of game balls by the shooting device 330 is updated. Specifically, the activation flag of the ball feed solenoid 332 that drives the ball feed mechanism 331 and the activation flag of the firing solenoid 334 that drives the firing mechanism 333 are updated.

In the input signal monitoring process S1214, it is detected whether or not the intermediate block 103 (see FIGS. 1 and 2) is closed with respect to the outer frame 101 (see FIGS. 1 and 2) based on the output state of the signal from the open/close detection switch 108 (see FIG. 10) via the payout control board 930. Also, based on the output state of the signal from the open/close detection switch 109 via the payout control board 930 (see FIG. 10), it is detected whether or not the front block 102 (see FIGS. 2 and 3) is closed with respect to the intermediate block 103 (see FIGS. 2 and 3).

In the payout state monitoring process S1215, information indicating the payout control state output from the payout control board 930 is monitored, and various payout state commands are set according to the payout control state as necessary. In addition, the sub-control board 940 having received the payout state command causes the decorative symbol display device 479, the upper left acoustic device 281, the upper right acoustic device 282, and the like to perform notification according to the type of the payout state command.

In the payout signal output process S1216, various prize ball commands are set based on the values of the first payout counter and the second payout counter, and output to the payout control board 930, if necessary. The first payout counter and the second payout counter are updated according to the setting of the prize ball command. For example, the first payout counter is incremented by 1 each time a game ball corresponding to one win is detected, and decremented by 1 each time a prize ball command based on that win is set. The payout control board 930 requests a prize ball command from the main control board 920 each time it executes control to put out the number (for example, three) of game balls corresponding to the winning (in detail, shortly before the payout is completed), and in a situation where the payout of prize balls continues, the main control board 920 outputs a further prize ball command. The second payout counter is a counter that is updated corresponding to the winning of a different number of prize balls (for example, 13) from the first payout counter, and when the payout control board 930 receives a prize ball command based on the value of the second payout counter, the payout control board 930 executes control to put out the number of game balls corresponding to the prize ball command.

In the special symbol related process S1217, the unit game right reservation control and the unit game control related to the first special symbol are executed. Specifically, operation control of the special symbol reservation display device 476 related to the first special symbol is executed in the reservation control of the right of the unit game related to the first special symbol. In addition, in the control of the unit game related to the first special symbol, the operation control of the special symbol display device 471 related to the first special symbol is executed, and when a big hit is won in the first special symbol lottery, the operation control of the lower big winning device 433 and the upper big winning device 434 is further executed.

Further, in the unit game related to the first special symbol, each information for displaying the variable display and the fixed display of the decorative symbols on the decorative symbol display device 479 is selected. For example, the variation pattern of the variation display of the decorative symbols executed by the decorative symbol display device 479 in the unit game relating to the first special symbol is selected based on the current game state, the lottery result, the value of the stop pattern random number, the value of various variation pattern random numbers, and the number of times the right of the unit game relating to the first special symbol is reserved.

In addition, in the special symbol related processing S1217, the control of the right of the unit game related to the second special symbol and the control of the unit game related to the second special symbol are executed. Specifically, operation control of the special symbol reservation display device 477 related to the second special symbol is executed in the reservation control of the right of the unit game related to the second special symbol. In addition, in the control of the unit game related to the second special symbol, the operation control of the special symbol display device 472 related to the second special symbol is executed, and when the big win is won in the second special symbol lottery, the operation control of the lower big winning device 433 and the upper big winning device 434 is further executed.

Further, in the unit game relating to the second special symbol, each information for displaying the variable display and the fixed display of the decorative symbol on the decorative symbol display device 479 is selected. For example, the variation pattern of the variation display of the decorative symbols executed by the decorative symbol display device 479 in the unit game relating to the second special symbol is selected based on the current game state, the lottery result, the value of the stop pattern random number, the value of various variation pattern random numbers, and the number of times the right of the unit game relating to the second special symbol is reserved.

In the normal symbol-related process S1218, the control of holding the right of the unit game related to the normal symbol and the control of the unit game related to the normal symbol are executed. Specifically, operation control of the normal symbol reservation display device 478 is executed in the reservation control of the right of the unit game related to the normal symbol. In addition, in the control of the unit game related to the normal design, the operation control of the normal design display device 473 related to the normal design is executed, and when the normal design lottery is won, the operation control of the right start winning device 432 is further executed.

In the display control process S1219, the special symbol display device 471 related to the first special symbol in the special symbol related process S1217, the special symbol display device 472 related to the second special symbol, the special symbol reservation display device 476 related to the first special symbol, the special symbol retention display device 477 related to the second special symbol, etc. Based on various information updated to control the operation, output data for specifically operating those devices is synthesized. The combined output data is output to each device in control signal output processing S1208 based on the next timer interrupt.

Further, in the display control process S1219, various commands corresponding to each information for displaying the variable display and fixed display of the decorative design selected in the special design related process S1217 on the decorative design display device 479 are set. For example, a variation pattern command corresponding to the variation pattern selected in the special symbol related process S1217 is set. The set command is output to the sub control board 940 in the control signal output processing S1208 based on the next timer interrupt. The sub control board 940 controls the decorative pattern display device 479 based on commands received from the main control board 920 .

In motor control processing S1220, operation control of various motors is executed. In the external information output process S1221, output data to be output to an external device such as a data display device (not shown) electrically connected to the pachinko machine 100 or a management device (not shown) is set.

<Suggestion effect that appears in the variable display of decorative patterns>
In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, when the variable display of the decorative symbols on the decorative symbol display device 479 corresponding to the variable display of the special symbols on the special symbol display device 471 or the special symbol display device 472 includes a predetermined ready-to-win display (for example, super ready-to-win), it is possible to make a predetermined suggestive effect appear by pressing the pressing operation device 261.

With reference to FIGS. 13 to 16, the suggestive effects appearing in the variable display of decorative symbols will be described. FIG. 13 is a time chart for explaining the timing when the suggestive effect appears in the variable display of decorative symbols. Note that FIG. 13 exemplifies a variable display including super reach with a variable display time of 90 seconds as an example of a variable display in which a suggestive effect can appear. 14 to 16 are schematic diagrams showing screen transitions of the decorative design display device 479 along the time chart of FIG. 13, respectively.

As shown in FIG. 13, at time ts, when the variable display of the decorative symbols synchronized with the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is started in the decorative symbol display device 479, scrolling of the symbols constituting the decorative symbols is started. The display data that constitutes the variable display of the decorative pattern is prepared in the ROM (not shown) of the sub control board 940 in association with each variation pattern command that the sub control board 940 can receive from the main control board 920.

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the decorative symbols are composed of three rows of symbols: left row symbols (hereinafter also referred to as “left symbols”), right row symbols (hereinafter also referred to as “right symbols”), and symbols between the left and right symbols (hereinafter also referred to as “middle symbols”). In the example shown in FIG. 13, it is assumed that the left, middle, and right symbols have started to variably display the decorative symbols stopped at "6," "5," and "3," respectively.

After a predetermined period of time (for example, 4 seconds) after the start of the variable display of the decorative symbols at time ts, the first operable period starts (time t1). The first operable period started at time t1 ends (time t2) after a predetermined time (for example, three seconds) from the start. The first operable period from time t1 to time t2 is a period during which the player can perform a pressing operation on the pressing operation device 261 . Note that the time t2 does not necessarily have to be a predetermined time after the start of the first operable period, and the first operable period may end at the timing when the player performs a pressing operation on the pressing operation device 261, and a display corresponding to that operation may be displayed.

When the first operable period starts at time t1, as shown in FIG. 14, on the decorative pattern display device 479 that variably displays the decorative patterns, an image 601 reminding the player that the pressing operation on the pressing operation device 261 is possible, and characters 602 of "The enemy is coming!"

Each display data related to the display of the image 601 and the characters 602 is prepared in the ROM (not shown) of the sub-control board 940, and is displayed on the decorative design display device 479 at the start time (i.e., time t1) of the first operable period under the control of the sub-control board 940, and is erased at the end time (i.e., time t2) of the period.

When the player does not press the pressing operation device 261 during the first operable period, as shown in FIG. 13, after a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds) after the start of the variable display of the decorative symbols at time ts, the left design among the decorative symbols being variably displayed stops (time t4).
On the other hand, when the player performs a pressing operation on the pressing operation device 261 during the first operable period, when the first operable period ends at time t2, the first special effect, which is one of the suggestive effects, is started. As the first special performance, three types of pattern 1A, pattern 1B and pattern 1C are prepared as shown in FIG.

Pattern 1A is a pattern that includes characters 611A reading "The XX army is here!" Pattern 1B is a pattern that includes characters 611B reading “A thief has come!” Pattern 1C is a pattern including characters 611C reading “The cat is here!” Display data for displaying patterns 1A, 1B, and 1C are prepared in the ROM (not shown) of the sub-control board 940 . It is not necessary to set the combination of characters and frames to be the same each time, and the characters and frames may be selected by lottery.

A lottery (hereinafter also referred to as “first special effect lottery”) for selecting any of pattern 1A, pattern 1B, or pattern 1C as the first special effect is controlled by the sub control board 940 . Specifically, the first special effect lottery is performed by the sub-control board 940 acquiring the value of the first special effect selection counter (a part of the RAM) provided in the sub-control board 940 and referring to the first special effect selection table prepared in the ROM of the sub-control board 940 for the value of the first special effect selection counter.

The first special effect selection counter is updated every predetermined time (for example, every 4 ms (milliseconds)), and when the value of the counter is different from the specified maximum value (for example, '99') at the update timing, it is changed to a value larger by '1' than the current value, and when the value of the counter is the specified maximum value, it is changed to the specified minimum value ('0').

The timing at which the sub-control board 940 selects the pattern of the first special performance by the first special performance lottery may be the timing at which the sub-control board 940 receives a variation pattern command corresponding to the variation display of the decoration pattern currently being executed from the main control board 920, or the timing at which the first operable period starts or ends.

As the first special performance selection table, a first winning time table referred to when a big win is won in a first special pattern lottery or a second special pattern lottery corresponding to the variable display of decorative symbols currently being executed, and a first winning time table referred to when the big win is not won in the lottery are prepared.

The selection probability of each pattern (pattern 1A, pattern 1B, pattern 1C) in the first winning time table and the first losing time table is set in consideration of the winning probability in each special pattern lottery, the probability that the variation display of the currently executed decorative pattern (that is, the variation display including the ready-to-win display) will be selected when the big win is not drawn in each special pattern lottery.

Specifically, when the pattern 1A appears, the possibility of transitioning to the special game state is the highest after the decorative pattern currently being variably displayed is confirmed and displayed (that is, after the first special pattern or the second special pattern corresponding to the decorative pattern currently being variably displayed is confirmed and displayed), and when the pattern 1C appears, the possibility of transitioning to the special game state after the decorative pattern being variably displayed is confirmed and displayed is set to be the lowest.

Therefore, when the first special effect appears, the player recognizes the degree of expectation for the special game state by looking at the characters included in each pattern. That is, the player has the highest degree of expectation for the special game state when he/she sees the characters 611A of ``The XX army has come!'' included in the pattern 1A, and the lowest degree of expectation for the special game state when he sees the characters 611C of ``The cat is here!'' included in the pattern 1C.

Similarly, the player recognizes the degree of expectation for the special game state by looking at the frame portion of each pattern when the first special effect appears. In other words, when the player sees the pattern 1A with the red frame 612A, the player has the highest degree of expectation for the special game state, and when he sees the pattern 1C with the blue frame 612C, the player has the lowest degree of expectation for the special game state.

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the first win table is set so that pattern 1A has the highest selection probability (e.g., 60%), pattern 1B has the second highest selection probability (e.g., 20%), and pattern 1C has the lowest selection probability (e.g., 10%). On the other hand, the first deviation table is set so that pattern 1C has the highest selection probability (e.g., 60%), pattern 1B has the second highest selection probability (e.g., 20%), and pattern 1A has the lowest selection probability (e.g., 10%).

As shown in FIG. 13, the first special effect ends after a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) after the start of the first special effect (time t3). Since the first special performance (pattern 1A, pattern 1B, pattern 1C) is displayed in a layer ahead of the variable display of the decorative pattern currently being executed, when the first special performance is finished at time t3, the variable display of the decorative pattern being executed appears again. After that, the left symbol stops at time t4.

After a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) after the left symbol stops at time t4, the second operable period starts (time t5) while the right symbol is scrolling at a low speed before stopping. The first operable period started at time t5 ends (time t6) after a predetermined time (for example, three seconds) from the start. The second operable period from time t5 to time t6 is a period during which the player can perform a pressing operation on the pressing operation device 261 .

When the second operable period starts at time t5, as shown in FIG. 15, the decoration symbol display device 479 displays an image 603 that reminds the player that the pressing operation device 261 can be pressed. Display data related to the display of the image 603 is prepared in the ROM (not shown) of the sub control board 940, is displayed on the decorative design display device 479 at the start time of the second operable period (i.e., time t5) under the control of the sub control board 940, and is erased at the end time of the period (i.e., time t6).

When the player does not press the pressing operation device 261 during the second operable period, as shown in FIG. 13, after a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) from the start of the variable display of the decorative symbols at time ts, the right symbols that are scrolled at low speed (low speed fluctuation) are stopped so as to be ready-to-win display (time t7). For example, when a big win is won in the first special pattern lottery or the second special pattern lottery, the left pattern, the middle pattern and the right pattern are determined and stopped with the same pattern, as shown in FIG.

On the other hand, when the player performs a pressing operation on the pressing operation device 261 during the second operable period, when the second operable period ends at time t6, the second special effect, which is one of the suggestive effects, is started under the control of the sub control board 940. As the second special performance, four types of pattern 2A, pattern 2B, pattern 2C and pattern 2D are prepared as shown in FIG. 15, and the second special performance of one pattern selected from these four types is started at time t6.

Pattern 2D is a pattern in which the slow-scrolling right symbol is stopped so as to be ready-to-win display, as in the case where the player does not press the pressing operation device 261 during the second operable period.

In the pattern 2C, as shown in FIG. 15, the right pattern scrolling at a low speed is temporarily stopped so as to be the ready-to-win display, and then starts moving again (display Q1), the right pattern is stopped at "8" shifted by one from "7" to be the ready-to-win display (display Q2), and the middle pattern is short and temporarily stopped (display Q3). When a series of displays Q consisting of these displays Q1 to Q3 are displayed, the patterns in the middle three columns on the left and right are re-scrolled. The symbols in each column to be re-scrolled are stopped so that the left symbols stop at the same symbols as the symbols stopped at time t4, and then the right symbols undergo low-speed scrolling and become ready-to-win display. That is, the pattern 2C is a pattern configured as a continuous effect as if the variable display were performed twice in a pseudo manner.

Pattern 2B is the same as pattern 2C up to the part where the right symbol in the re-scrolled three rows of symbols is scrolled at low speed. In pattern 2B, after a series of displays Q is performed again, the patterns in the middle three columns on the left and right start scrolling again for the second time. The patterns of each column which started the second re-scrolling are stopped so that the left pattern is the same pattern as the pattern stopped at time t4, and then the right pattern is scrolled at a low speed and displayed as a ready-to-win display. That is, the pattern 2B is a pattern configured as a continuous effect as if the variable display were performed three times in a pseudo manner.

Pattern 2A is the same as pattern 2B up to the part where the right pattern is scrolled at low speed in the second re-scrolling. In pattern 2A, after a series of displays Q is performed again after that, the patterns in the middle three columns on the left and right start re-scrolling for the third time. The patterns of each column which started the third re-scrolling are stopped so that the left pattern is the same pattern as the pattern stopped at time t4, and then the right pattern is displayed as a ready-to-win display through low-speed scrolling. That is, the pattern 2A is a pattern configured as a continuous effect as if the variable display were performed four times in a pseudo manner.

In the second special effect, for the patterns (pattern 2A, pattern 2B, pattern 2C) that perform continuous effects, the frame of each color surrounding the screen of the decorative pattern display device 479 appears during the effect. For example, in the pattern 2C, as shown in FIG. 15, a blue frame 613C appears in a display Q3 (that is, a display in which the medium pattern is short and temporarily stopped) that constitutes a series of displays Q. FIG.

On the other hand, in pattern 2B, a blue frame 613B1 appears in the display Q3 forming the first series of displays Q, and a yellow frame appears in the display Q3 forming the second series of displays Q. In other words, a frame with a different color appears between the series of displays Q performed for the first time and the series of displays Q performed for the second time.

In the pattern 2A, a blue frame 613A1 appears in the display Q3 forming the series of displays Q performed for the first time, a yellow frame appears in the display Q3 forming the series of displays Q performed the second time, and a red frame appears in the display Q3 forming the series of displays Q performed the third time. In other words, frames of different colors appear in the series of displays Q performed the first time, the series of displays Q performed the second time, and the series of displays Q performed the third time. In the pattern 2A, there is a case where a rainbow-colored frame appears before the right pattern is stopped after the third re-scrolling, and in this case, the variable display corresponds to winning of a big win, and after the variable display, it is set to shift to a special game state without fail.

Each display data relating to the display of pattern 2A, pattern 2B, and pattern 2C described above is prepared in the ROM (not shown) of the sub-control board 940 . As for the pattern 2D, the display data constituting the variable display of the decorative symbols being executed is used.

A lottery (hereinafter also referred to as “second special effect lottery”) for selecting any of pattern 2A, pattern 2B, pattern 2C, or pattern 2D as the second special effect is controlled by the sub control board 940. Specifically, the second special effect lottery is performed by the sub-control board 940 acquiring the value of a second special effect selection counter (a partial area of the RAM) provided in the sub-control board 940 and referring to the second special effect selection table prepared in the ROM of the sub-control board 940 for the value of the second special effect selection counter.

The second special performance selection counter is updated every predetermined time (for example, every 4 milliseconds), and when the value of the counter is different from the specified maximum value (for example, '99') at the update timing, it is changed to a value larger by '1' than the current value, and when the value of the counter is the specified maximum value, it is changed to the specified minimum value ('0'). In addition, it is good also as a structure which uses the counter which is common with the 1st special production|presentation selection counter mentioned above as a 2nd special production|presentation selection counter.

The timing at which the sub-control board 940 selects the pattern of the second special performance by the second special performance lottery may be the timing at which the sub-control board 940 receives a variation pattern command corresponding to the variation display of the decoration pattern currently being executed from the main control board 920, or the timing at which the second operable period starts or ends.

As the second special performance selection table, a second win table referred to when a big win is won in the first special pattern lottery or the second special pattern lottery corresponding to the variable display of the currently executed decorative pattern, and a second win table referred to when the big win is not won in the lottery are prepared.

The selection probability of each pattern (pattern 2A, pattern 2B, pattern 2C, pattern 2D) in the table for the second winning time and the table for the second losing time is set in consideration of the winning probability in each special pattern lottery, the probability that the variable display of the decoration pattern currently being executed (that is, the variable display including the ready-to-win display) will be selected when the big win is not drawn in each special pattern lottery.

Specifically, when the pattern 2A appears, the possibility of transitioning to the special game state is highest after the decoration pattern currently being variably displayed is fixedly displayed (that is, after the first special pattern or the second special pattern corresponding to the decorative pattern currently being variably displayed is decidedly displayed), and when the pattern 2D appears, the possibility of transitioning to the special game state after the decorative pattern currently being variably displayed is decidedly displayed is set to be lowest. Patterns 2B and 2C are set to have the second and third highest possibilities, respectively.

Therefore, when a pattern 2A performing a continuous performance as if the variable display is performed quasi-four times appears as the second special performance, the player has the highest degree of expectation for the special game state, while the player has the lowest degree of expectation when the ready-to-win display pattern 2D appears without performing the continuous performance despite the operation of the pressing operation device 261.例文帳に追加

In addition, in pattern 2A, pattern 2B, and pattern 2C, which perform continuous effects among the second special effects, frames of respective colors (frames 613C, 613B1, 613A1, etc.) surrounding the screen of the decorative pattern display device 479 appear. The number of times that the color of the frame changes in each pattern is 4 times in the pattern 2A, 2 times in the pattern 2B, and 1 time in the pattern 2C, so that the player's expectation for the special game state is improved every time the color of the frame changes.

Furthermore, the change in the color of the frame in pattern 2A, pattern 2B, and pattern 2C is configured to change in the order of blue→yellow→red as the possibility of transition to the special game state increases, like each pattern (pattern 1A, pattern 1B, pattern 1C) constituting the first special effect. That is, in the second special performance, there is a certain regularity between the changing order of the color of the frame in each pattern (pattern 2A, pattern 2B, pattern 2C) for continuous performance and the possibility of transition to the special game state. Therefore, the player synergistically increases the degree of expectation for the special game state as the color of the frame sequentially changes according to the regularity.

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the second win table is set so that pattern 2A has the highest selection probability (e.g., 60%), pattern 2B has the second highest selection probability (e.g., 30%), pattern 2C has the third highest selection probability (e.g., 8%), and pattern 2D has the lowest selection probability (e.g., 2%). On the other hand, the second failure table is set so that pattern 2D has the highest selection probability (e.g., 70%), pattern 2C has the second highest selection probability (e.g., 18%), pattern 2B has the third highest selection probability (e.g., 10%), and pattern 2A has the lowest selection probability (e.g., 2%).

As shown in FIG. 13, the second special effect ends after a predetermined time from the start of the second special effect by stopping so that the right symbol becomes the ready-to-win display (time t10). In FIG. 13, only one period is shown as time t10, which is the end time of the second special performance, but since the execution time of the second special performance differs depending on each pattern (pattern 2A, pattern 2B, pattern 2C, pattern 2D), four times corresponding to each pattern of the second special performance can be time t10.

For example, in pattern 2D, time t7, which is the timing at which the right symbol is stopped when the player does not press the pressing operation device 261 during the second operable period, becomes time t10. On the other hand, in pattern 2A, for example, time t10 is the timing 60 seconds after the start of the variable display of decorative symbols at time ts. Also, in pattern 2B and pattern 2C, for example, timing t10 is 40 seconds and 50 seconds after the start of the variable display of decorative symbols at time ts.

The execution time of the second special effect may correspond to the preselected variable display time. For example, the larger the number of times of re-scrolling corresponding to each pattern (pattern 2A, pattern 2B, pattern 2C, and pattern 2D), the greater the number of times of re-scrolling, the greater the number of times of re-scrolling. Also, the length of the performance (battle performance) to be executed after the right pattern is stopped may be made different, the timing of stopping the right pattern in the first time and the second time and after in each pattern may be the same, and the performance of different length may be executed corresponding to each pattern.

When the right symbol stops in the ready-to-win display at time t7 or time t10 after the end of the second special effect, the third operable period starts. The third operable period ends (time t8 or time t11) after a predetermined time (for example, three seconds) after the start. The third operable period is a period during which the player can perform a pressing operation on the pressing operation device 261 .

When the third operable period starts when the right symbol stops at the ready-to-win display, as shown in FIG. 16, the decoration symbol display device 479 displays an image 605 for reminding the player that the pushing operation to the pressing operation device 261 is possible, and characters 606 of "Help Wanted!"

Each display data related to the display of the image 605 and the characters 606 is prepared in the ROM (not shown) of the sub-control board 940, and is displayed on the decorative design display device 479 at the start time of the third operable period under the control of the sub-control board 940, and is erased at the end time of the period.

As shown in FIG. 13, when the third operable period started at time t7 ends at time t8, regardless of whether or not the player presses the pressing operation device 261 during the third operable period, the battle effect, which is one of the suggested effects, is started under the control of the sub control board 940. Likewise, when the third operable period started at time t10 ends at time t11, the battle effect is started under the control of the sub control board 940 regardless of whether the player presses the pressing operation device 261 during the third operable period.

The battle effect is a video effect that shows the situation of the battle with characters regarded as enemies such as the ○○ army, thieves, and cats until the middle pattern finally stops. As the battle performance, as shown in FIG. 16, four types of pattern 4A, pattern 4B, pattern 4C and pattern 4D are prepared, and the battle performance of one pattern selected from these four types is started at time t8 or time t11.

Pattern 4A is a pattern representing a state in which the enemy is fighting in a situation of overwhelming priority. Pattern 4B is a pattern representing a situation in which the enemy is fighting in a situation of priority. Pattern 4C is a pattern that represents a state in which the enemy is fighting in an inferior situation. Pattern 4D is a pattern representing a state in which the enemy is fighting in an overwhelmingly inferior situation.

Each display data relating to display of pattern 4A, pattern 4B, pattern 4C, and pattern 4D is prepared in the ROM (not shown) of the sub-control board 940 . Each of these patterns 4A, 4B, 4C, and 4D may be configured such that only display data corresponding to the video presentation showing the situation of each battle is prepared, or display data corresponding to a plurality of types of video presentation showing the situation of the battle for each type of enemy that can appear in the first special presentation may be prepared.

For each of the patterns 4A, 4B, and 4C, a long effect time pattern used when the right symbol stops at time t7 (that is, when the pressing operation device 261 is not pressed during the second operation period) and a short effect time pattern used when the right symbol stops at time t10 after the end of the second special effect (that is, when the pressing operation device 261 is pressed during the second operation time) are prepared. On the other hand, for the pattern 4D, the time when the right pattern stops is the same regardless of whether or not the second special performance is performed (that is, whether or not the pressing operation device 261 is pressed during the second operation timing).

A lottery (hereinafter also referred to as “battle effect lottery”) for selecting any of pattern 4A, pattern 4B, pattern 4C, or pattern 4D as a battle effect is controlled by the sub control board 940 . Specifically, the battle performance lottery is performed by the sub control board 940 acquiring the value of a battle performance selection counter (a part of the RAM) provided in the sub control board 940 and referring to the battle performance selection table prepared in the ROM of the sub control board 940 for the value of the battle performance selection counter.

The battle performance selection counter is updated every predetermined time (for example, every 4 milliseconds), and when the value of the counter is different from the specified maximum value (for example, '99') at the update timing, it is changed to a value larger by '1' than the current value, and when the value of the counter is the specified maximum value, it is changed to the specified minimum value ('0'). It should be noted that a counter common to at least one of the first special effect selection counter and the second special effect selection counter described above may be used as the battle effect selection counter.

The timing at which the sub-control board 940 selects the pattern of the battle performance by the battle performance lottery may be the timing at which the sub-control board 940 receives a variation pattern command corresponding to the variation display of the decoration pattern currently being executed from the main control board 920, or the timing at which the third operable period starts or ends.

As the battle performance selection table, a fourth win table referred to when a big win is won in the first special pattern lottery or the second special pattern lottery corresponding to the variable display of the currently executed decorative pattern, and a fourth win table referred to when the big win is not won in the lottery are prepared.

The selection probability of each pattern (pattern 4A, pattern 4B, pattern 4C, pattern 4D) in the table at the time of the fourth hit and the table at the time of the fourth failure is set in consideration of the probability of winning in each special pattern lottery, the probability of selection of the variation display (that is, the variation display including the ready-to-win display) of the decoration pattern currently being executed when the special pattern lottery does not draw a big win in each special pattern lottery.

Specifically, when the pattern 4A appears, the possibility of transitioning to the special game state is the highest after the decoration pattern currently being variably displayed is fixedly displayed (that is, after the first special pattern or the second special pattern corresponding to the decorative pattern currently being variably displayed is decidedly displayed), and when the pattern 4D appears, the possibility of transitioning to the special game state after the decorative pattern currently being variably displayed is decidedly displayed is set to be the lowest. Patterns 4B and 4C are set to have the second and third highest possibilities, respectively.

Therefore, when a pattern 4A for performing an image performance showing fighting in an overwhelmingly superior situation to the enemy appears as a battle performance, the player has the highest degree of expectation for the special game state, while when a pattern 4D for performing the image performance showing the fighting in an overwhelmingly inferior situation to the enemy appears, the player has the lowest degree of expectation.

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the fourth win table is set so that pattern 4A has the highest selection probability (e.g., 80%), pattern 4B has the second highest selection probability (e.g., 15%), pattern 4C has the third highest selection probability (e.g., 5%), and pattern 4D has the lowest selection probability (e.g., 0%). On the other hand, the fourth failure table is set so that pattern 4D has the highest selection probability (e.g., 80%), pattern 4C has the second highest selection probability (e.g., 15%), pattern 4B has the third highest selection probability (e.g., 4%), and pattern 4A has the lowest selection probability (e.g., 1%).

The battle effect started at time t8 or time t11 is, as shown in FIG. 13, after a predetermined time (in the example shown in FIG. 13, after 90 seconds) from the start of the variable display of the decorative symbols at time ts, the middle symbols are finally stopped (that is, the decorative symbols are confirmed and displayed) with the symbols corresponding to the lottery results of the first special symbol lottery or the second special symbol lottery, and end (time te).

In a structure in which the left pattern, the middle pattern and the right pattern are fixed and stopped with the same pattern when the first special pattern lottery or the second special pattern lottery wins the jackpot, when both the left pattern and the right pattern stop at ``7'', if the first or second special pattern lottery wins the jackpot, the middle pattern finally stops at ``7'' at time te. On the other hand, if the first or second special symbol lottery has not won a big hit, the middle symbol finally stops at a symbol other than "7" (for example, "8") at time te. Immediately before or at the same time as this stop, the result of the battle performance is also displayed, and if the first or second special pattern lottery wins the jackpot, an image in which the character on the side of the team wins is displayed, and if the lottery on the side of the opponent does not win, an image in which the character on the side of the enemy wins and the side of the team loses is displayed.

As shown in FIG. 13, when the player performs a pressing operation on the pressing operation device 261 during the third operable period started at time t7, when the third operable period ends at time t8, the third special effect, which is one of the suggested effects, is started under the control of the sub control board 940. Similarly, when the player presses the pressing operation device 261 during the third operable period started at time t10, the third special effect is started when the third operable period ends at time t11.

As the third special performance, as shown in FIG. 16, three types of pattern 3A, pattern 3B and pattern 3C are prepared, and the third special performance of one pattern selected from these three types is started at time t8. As described above, at time t8 or time t11, the battle effect is also started, but since the third special effect is displayed in the layer preceding the battle effect, the player will see the third special effect on the screen of the decorative pattern display device 479 until the third special effect ends.

Pattern 3A is a pattern that includes characters 614A reading “○○○ man is here!” Pattern 3B is a pattern including characters 614B reading “A fighter has come!” Pattern 3C is a pattern including characters 614C reading “The dog is here!” Each display data relating to the display of pattern 3A, pattern 3B, and pattern 3C is prepared in the ROM (not shown) of the sub-control board 940. FIG.

A lottery (hereinafter also referred to as “third special effect lottery”) for selecting any of pattern 3A, pattern 3B, or pattern 3C as the first special effect is controlled by the sub control board 940 . Specifically, the third special effect lottery is performed by the sub-control board 940 acquiring the value of the third special effect selection counter (a part of the RAM) provided in the sub-control board 940 and referring to the third special effect selection table prepared in the ROM of the sub-control board 940 for the value of the third special effect selection counter.

The third special performance selection counter is updated every predetermined time (for example, every 4 milliseconds), and when the value of the counter is different from the specified maximum value (for example, '99') at the update timing, it is changed to a value larger by '1' than the current value, and when the value of the counter is the specified maximum value, it is changed to the specified minimum value ('0'). A counter common to at least one of the above-described first special effect selection counter, second special effect selection counter, or battle effect selection counter may be used as the third special effect selection counter.

The timing at which the sub-control board 940 selects the pattern of the third special performance by the third special performance lottery may be the timing at which the sub-control board 940 receives a variation pattern command corresponding to the variation display of the decoration pattern currently being executed from the main control board 920, or the timing at which the third operable period starts or ends.

As the third special performance selection table, a third winning time table referred to when a big win is won in a first special pattern lottery or a second special pattern lottery corresponding to the variable display of decorative symbols currently being executed, and a third losing time table referred to when the big win is not won in the lottery are prepared.

The selection probability of each pattern (pattern 3A, pattern 3B, pattern 3C) in the table for the third winning time and the table for the third losing time is set in consideration of the winning probability in each special pattern lottery, and the probability that the variable display of the currently executed decorative pattern (that is, the variable display including the ready-to-win display) will be selected when the big win is not drawn in each special pattern lottery.

Specifically, when the pattern 3A appears, the possibility of transitioning to the special game state is highest after the decoration pattern currently being variably displayed is fixedly displayed (that is, after the first special pattern or the second special pattern corresponding to the decorative pattern currently being variably displayed is decidedly displayed), and when the pattern 3C appears, the possibility of transitioning to the special game state after the decorative pattern currently being variably displayed is decidedly displayed is set to be lowest.

Therefore, when the third special effect appears, the player recognizes the degree of expectation for the special game state by looking at the characters included in each pattern. That is, the player has the highest degree of expectation for the special game state when he/she sees the characters 614A ``The man has come!'' included in the pattern 3A, and the lowest expectation for the special game state when he sees the characters 614C ``The dog is here!'' included in the pattern 3C.

Similarly, the player recognizes the degree of expectation for the special game state by looking at the frame portion of each pattern when the third special effect appears. That is, the player has the highest degree of expectation for the special game state when he/she sees the pattern 3A with the red frame 615A, and the lowest degree of expectation for the special game state when he/she sees the pattern 3C with the blue frame 615C.

In particular, since the correlation between the frame color of each pattern (pattern 3A, pattern 3B, pattern 3C) and the possibility of transition to the special game state constituting the third special performance is configured in the same manner as each pattern (pattern 1A, pattern 1B, pattern 1C) constituting the first special performance, the player can sensuously determine the degree of expectation for the special game state with respect to the frame color in the third special performance from the regularity of the frame color.

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the third win table is set so that pattern 3A has the highest selection probability (eg, 70%), pattern 3B has the second highest selection probability (eg, 25%), and pattern 3C has the lowest selection probability (eg, 5%). On the other hand, the third failure table is set so that pattern 3C has the highest selection probability (e.g., 80%), pattern 3B has the second highest selection probability (e.g., 18%), and pattern 3A has the lowest selection probability (e.g., 2%).

As shown in FIG. 13, the third special effect started at time t8 or time t11 ends after a predetermined time (for example, three seconds) from the start (time t9 or time t12). Since the third special performance (pattern 3A, pattern 3B, pattern 3C) is displayed in a layer in front of the battle performance, the player sees the battle performance on the screen of the decorative pattern display device 479 when the third special performance is completed at time t9 or time t12.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, when the variable display of decorative symbols on the decorative symbol display device 479 includes a predetermined ready-to-win display, a predetermined suggestive effect can be produced by pressing the pressing operation device 261.

In the example shown in FIG. 13, three operable periods (that is, a first operable period, a second operable period, and a third operable period) are provided during which the pressing operation device 261 can be operated by pressing while one decorative symbol variation display is performed. It can be made to appear (display) on the display device 479 .

Therefore, in the variable display of the decorative pattern in the example shown in FIG. 13, three operable periods are provided during one variable display, so that various patterns (more specifically, 8 patterns) of suggestive effects can be made to appear depending on whether or not the pressing operation device 261 is operated during each operable period.

First, in the first pattern, performing a pressing operation on the pressing operation device 261 during the first operable period starting at time t1 causes the first special effect to appear at time t2, performing the pressing operation on the pressing operation device 261 during the second operable period starting at time t5 causes the second special effect to appear at time t6, and performing the pressing operation on the pressing operation device 261 during the third operable period starting at time t10 causes the second special effect to appear at time t11. 3 A pattern for producing a special effect and a battle effect.

In the second pattern, the pressing operation on the pressing operation device 261 is performed during the first operable period starting at time t1 to cause the first special effect to appear at time t2, the pressing operation to the pressing operation device 261 is performed during the second operable period starting at time t5 to appear the second special effect at time t6, and the pressing operation to the pressing operation device 261 is not performed during the third operable period starting at time t10 to cause the third special effect to appear at time t11. This is a pattern in which only the battle effect appears without the special effect appearing.

In the third pattern, the pressing operation of the pressing operation device 261 is performed during the first operable period starting at time t1 to cause the first special effect to appear at time t2, the second special effect is not displayed by not performing the pressing operation to the pressing operation device 261 during the second operable period starting at time t5, and the pressing operation to the pressing operation device 261 is performed during the third operable period starting at time t7 to perform the third special effect and the battle effect at time t8. It is the pattern that emerges.

In the fourth pattern, the pressing operation on the pressing operation device 261 is performed during the first operable period starting at time t1 to cause the first special effect to appear at time t2, the pressing operation to the pressing operation device 261 is not performed during the second operable period starting at time t5 to prevent the second special effect from appearing, and the pressing operation to the pressing operation device 261 is not performed during the third operable period starting at time t7 to appear the third special effect at time t8. This is a pattern in which only the battle effect is displayed without causing any damage.

In the fifth pattern, the pressing operation on the pressing operation device 261 is not performed during the first operable period starting at time t1 to prevent the second special effect from appearing, the pressing operation on the pressing operation device 261 is performed during the second operable period starting at time t5 to cause the second special effect to appear at time t6, and the pressing operation on the pressing operation device 261 is performed during the third operable period starting at time t10 to perform the third special effect and the battle at time t11. It is a pattern that brings out the performance.

In the sixth pattern, no pressing operation is performed on the pressing operation device 261 during the first operable period starting at time t1 to prevent the second special effect from appearing, performing the pressing operation on the pressing operation device 261 during the second operable period starting at time t5 causes the second special effect to appear at time t6, and not performing the pressing operation on the pressing operation device 261 during the third operable period starting at time t10 causes the third special effect to appear at time t11. This is a pattern in which only the battle effect is displayed without being displayed.

In the seventh pattern, no pressing operation is performed on the pressing operation device 261 during the first operable period starting at time t1 to prevent the second special effect from appearing, no pressing operation on the pressing operation device 261 is performed during the second operable period starting at time t5 to prevent the second special effect from appearing, and performing the pressing operation on the pressing operation device 261 during the third operable period starting at time t7 causes the third special effect and the battle effect to appear at time t8. It's a pattern.

In the eighth pattern, no pressing operation is performed on the pressing operation device 261 during the first operable period starting at time t1 to prevent the second special effect from appearing, no pressing operation on the pressing operation device 261 is performed during the second operable period starting at time t5 to prevent the second special effect from appearing, and no pressing operation on the pressing operation device 261 is performed during the third operable period starting at time t7 so that the third special effect does not appear at time t8. It is a pattern that makes only the performance appear.

In this way, when a plurality of operable periods are provided while one variable display is performed, one pattern of a plurality of patterns can be made to appear as suggestive performance depending on whether or not the pressing operation device 261 is operated in each operable period.

As described above, as an example of variable display in which a plurality of operable periods are provided, a variable display including super reach with a variable display time of 90 seconds was illustrated, but in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, even in variable display including super reach with a variable display time other than 90 seconds, a plurality of operable periods are similarly provided. It should be noted that regardless of the type of reach display included, a plurality of operable periods may be provided for the variable display (variable display including the reach display) whose variable display time is longer than a predetermined time. The number of operable periods provided may differ according to the length of the variable display time. Also, the number of operable periods provided for one variable display may be one.

Although the details will be described later, the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment is configured such that when the game state transitions to the special game state after the variable display capable of appearing a plurality of suggestive effects such as the variable display including super reach shown in FIG.

In order to realize such a configuration, the sub-control board 940 executes a variable display capable of producing a plurality of suggested effects, such as the variable display including super reach shown in FIG. 13, and when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery (first special symbol lottery or second special symbol lottery) corresponding to the variable display is a big hit, the stop symbol (for example, "653" in the example of FIG. A lottery result of a performance lottery, a lottery result of a second special performance lottery, a lottery result of a third special performance lottery, a lottery result of a battle performance lottery, and a stop pattern (for example, "777" in the example of FIG. 13) of each row in fixed display of decorative patterns are stored in a predetermined area of a RAM.

These pieces of information (that is, the stop pattern before the variable display of the decorative pattern, the stop pattern of the fixed display of the decorative pattern, and the lottery result of each performance lottery) may be configured to store all of the information at predetermined timings, or may be configured to store one or a plurality of information at each timing at a plurality of timings. The timing of storing the information may be the timing at which the variable display ends (that is, the timing at which the fixed display is displayed), the timing at which the variable display starts, or the timing at which each performance lottery is performed.

<Restoration of suggestion effect in special game state>
In a structure in which a plurality of suggestive performances appear while one variable display is performed, if the suggestive performance that appears later has a lower possibility of transitioning to the special game state than the suggestive performance that appears earlier, the player may lose hope for the transition from the currently executed variable display to the special game state and be disappointed in the game. In order to prevent such discouragement, the player can choose not to operate the pressing device 261 during the operable period.

However, in some cases, such as when the fixed display of the decorative pattern is the display indicating the winning of the jackpot in the first special pattern lottery or the second special pattern lottery, the player may later want to know what would have happened if the suggestive performance, which was not made to appear by his/her own will, was made to appear.

For such a case, the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment is constructed so as to restore, during the period of the special game state, the variable display of the decorative symbols performed by the decorative design display device 479 before transition to the special game state, including suggestive performances that can appear during the variable display.

The configuration will be described below with reference to FIG. FIG. 17(a) is a screen diagram showing an example of a screen in which the player can select whether or not to restore the variable display of decorative symbols performed before transition to the special game state in the special game state. FIG. 17(b) is a screen diagram showing an example of a screen displayed when the variable display of decorative symbols is restored in the special game state.

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, when the game state transitions to the special game state after the variable display capable of appearing a plurality of suggestive effects such as the variable display including the super reach shown in FIG. A screen as shown in FIG. 17(a) is displayed on the decorative design display device 479 as a screen that can be selected by the technician (hereinafter also referred to as a "restore selection screen").

As shown in FIG. 17(a), the restoration selection screen is a special game state screen including characters 621 informing the player that the variable display of the decorative symbols performed before the transition to the special game state can be restored, an image 622 reminding the player that the pressing operation device 261 can be pressed in order to restore the variable display of the decorative symbols, and a round number display 631 informing the player of the current number of rounds in the special game state. is configured as a screen displayed on

The characters 621 and the image 622 are displayed on the special game state screen at the timing when a predetermined round (for example, the third round) is started in the special game state, and are erased after a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) after the display is started. In other words, the restoration selection screen is displayed on the decoration symbol display device 479 for a period from when a predetermined round is started in the special game state until a predetermined time such as 5 seconds elapses. Each display data for displaying the characters 621 and the image 622 is prepared in the ROM (not shown) of the sub-control board 940, and the sub-control board 940 controls display and erasure.

When the player performs a pressing operation on the pressing operation device 261 during the period in which the restoration selection screen is displayed, the sub-control board 940 performs a suggestive effect that the variable display of the decorative pattern can appear during the variable display based on each information stored in a predetermined area of the RAM (that is, the stopped pattern before the variable display of the decorative pattern, the stopped pattern of the fixed display of the decorative pattern, and the lottery result of each effect lottery) regarding the variable display of the decorative pattern that was performed before transitioning to the special game state during execution. restore including

In other words, in the example of FIG. 13 described above, the variable display of the decorative symbols stopped at "653" is started, and when the first operable period arrives, an image 601 and characters 602 are displayed as shown in FIG. 17(b). Thereafter, when the pressing operation device 261 is operated during the first operable period, the first special effect is executed according to the lottery result of the stored first special effect lottery.

When the second operable period arrives after the left symbol has stopped at "7", an image 603 is displayed. Thereafter, when the pressing operation device 261 is operated during the second operable period, the second special effect is executed according to the lottery result of the stored second special effect lottery.

When the third operable period arrives after the right symbol has stopped at "7" so as to be ready-to-win display, an image 605 and characters 606 are displayed. After that, when the pressing operation device 261 is operated during the third operable period, the third special performance corresponding to the lottery result of the stored third special performance lottery and the battle performance corresponding to the lottery result of the stored battle performance lottery are displayed, and at the timing when the variation display time (for example, 90 seconds in the example of FIG. 13) of the variation display being executed has passed, the middle pattern is finally stopped at "7". That is, the decoration pattern is fixedly displayed as "777".

On the other hand, when the pressing operation device 261 is not operated during the third operable period, the battle performance corresponding to the lottery result of the stored battle performance lottery is displayed, and the medium pattern is finally stopped at "7" at the timing when the variation display time of the variation display being executed has passed, similarly to the case where the pressing operation device 261 is operated.

Therefore, when the variable display of the decorative symbols that was performed before transitioning to the special game state being executed is restored as described above, the player can see the special effect that the player wants to see, out of the first special effect, the second special effect, or the third special effect, by pressing the pressing operation device 261 during all or part of the operable periods (the first operable period, the second operable period, and the third operable period) provided three times. .

That is, in the variable display of the restored decorative symbols, when the player operates the pressing operation device 261 during the operable period corresponding to the operable period during which the pressing operation device 261 is operated during the variable display of the decorative symbols performed before the special game state, the player can see again the special performance seen during the variable display of the decorative symbols performed before the special game state even in the restored variable display of the decorative symbols.

On the other hand, in the variable display of the restored decorative patterns, when the player operates the pressing device 261 during the operable period corresponding to the period during which the pushing operation device 261 is not operated during the variable display of the decorative patterns performed before the special game state, the player can see the special performance that was not seen during the variable display of the decorative patterns performed before the special game state in the variable display of the restored decorative patterns.

Therefore, for example, in the variable display of the decorative symbols in the example shown in FIG. 13, as described above, eight patterns from the first to the eighth suggestive effects (the first special effect, the second special effect, the third special effect, and the battle effect) can appear. You can go out.

Here, the restoration of the variable display of the decorative pattern does not necessarily need to restore the entire period from the start to the end of the variable display, and a part of the variable display may be restored, or the period in which the variable display is executed a plurality of times from the start winning to the execution of the variable display corresponding to the winning of the jackpot may be restored, or the timing of restoration may be selected by the player.

The restore selection screen may be displayed multiple times during the special game state, such as displaying the restore selection screen in the third and seventh rounds in the special game state. In other words, the configuration may be such that the variable display of the decorative symbols can be restored multiple times during the special game state. By adopting a configuration capable of restoring the variable display of the decorative patterns a plurality of times, the player can make suggestive performances appear in a plurality of patterns different from the pattern that was made to appear in the variable display of the decorative patterns performed before the special game state.

When the variable display of the decorative patterns performed before transitioning to the special game state being executed is restored to the decorative pattern display device 479, as shown in FIG. 17(b), a round number display 641 indicating the current round number is displayed in a predetermined area (for example, the lower right part of the screen) so that the player can recognize the current round number even while the restoration is being performed. The display of the round number display 641 is controlled by the sub control board 940 . Instead of displaying the number of rounds display 641, a reduced screen of the special game state screen may be displayed in a predetermined area.

<Holding full tank effect>
In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, when both the number of times the unit game right is reserved for the first special symbol and the number of times the unit game right for the second special symbol is reserved reach the maximum number of times, that is, when the number of reservations for the two special symbols reaches eight in total, a predetermined effect (hereinafter, this effect is also referred to as a "reserved full tank effect") appears on the decorative pattern display device 479 under a predetermined condition.

The pending full tank performance may be a performance that is immediately executed at the timing when the total of pending reaches 8, or a special period that continues for a certain period of time (for example, until a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times) of variable display is executed, or a predetermined time (for example, 5 minutes)) The start of the special period changes the background color of the display area of the decorative pattern display device 479, or displays a specific color on the peripheral portion of the display screen. It may be a presentation suggested to the operator. In addition, the pending full tank effect outputs a specific sound effect at the timing when the pending reaches 8, a specific character that does not appear during the variable display except for the special period appears, the variable display of the decorative pattern makes a specific movement (for example, high-speed movement), and the color of the reserved display indicates the degree of expectation for the lottery result of the special pattern (first special pattern or second special pattern) for each hold with a color of 1 (for example, the color of the display part indicating the hold is blue, yellow, or red. , gold, and rainbow colors, and it is preferable that the color order be consistent with the colors that indicate other expectations.

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, when both the number of times of holding the right of the unit game related to the first special symbol and the number of times of holding the right of the unit game related to the second special symbol reach the maximum number of times (upper limit of the number of times of holding), the appearance probability of the reserved full-fill performance is different depending on whether or not the holding of winning the special symbol lottery (the first special symbol lottery or the second special symbol lottery) is included in all these reservations.

In more detail, when the reservation for the maximum number of times includes the reservation for which the special symbol lottery is won, the reservation full performance is produced at a higher probability than when the reservation for which the special symbol lottery is won is not included. For example, as shown in FIG. 18, when the reservation of winning the special symbol lottery is included in the reservations for the maximum number of times, the reservation full performance appears with a probability of 80%, but when the reservation of winning the special symbol lottery is not included, the reservation full performance appears only with a probability of 10%.

A lottery (hereinafter also referred to as “holding full tank effect lottery”) as to whether or not to make the reserve full tank effect appear is controlled by the sub control board 940 . Specifically, the holding full-tank effect lottery is performed by acquiring the value of a holding full-tank effect counter (a part of the RAM) provided in the sub-control board 940 and referring to a holding full-tank effect selection table prepared in the ROM of the sub-control board 940 for the value of the reserve full-tank effect counter (partial area of the RAM) provided in the sub-control board 940 when the number of times of holding both of the first special symbol and the second special symbol reaches the maximum number of times.

The main control board 920 notifies the sub control board 940 of information related to the number of times of suspension at a predetermined timing each time the number of times of suspension for each special symbol changes. Based on the information notified from the main control board 920, the sub-control board 940 can determine whether or not the number of times of holding each of the first special symbol and the second special symbol has reached the maximum number of times.

In addition, the main control board 920, for example, at the timing when the number of times of suspension for the special symbol increases due to the start winning of each special symbol, a predetermined command including information related to the number of times of suspension of each special symbol (hereinafter, this command is also referred to as a "hold command") is sent to the sub control board 940, thereby notifying the sub control board 940 of the information related to the number of times of suspension. Further, the main control board 920, for example, at the timing when the main control board 920 transmits the variation pattern command (that is, the timing at which the number of times of holding the special symbol is reduced), by sending a variation pattern command including information on the number of holdings to the sub control board 940, notifies the sub control board 940 of the information on the number of holdings.

The pending command includes information related to the number of times of holding each special symbol and information related to the lottery result of each special symbol lottery (first special symbol lottery or second special symbol lottery). The sub control board 940, when receiving a pending command from the main control board 920, stores information related to the lottery result of the special symbol lottery in a predetermined area of the RAM in association with the order of reception of the pending command (that is, the order in which the starting prize is generated), and then erases the information when the corresponding pending is consumed (that is, the suspended unit game is executed). Based on the information stored in the RAM, the sub-control board 940 can judge whether or not the reservation for winning the special symbol lottery is included in the reservation for the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

The holding full-tank effect counter is updated every predetermined time (for example, every 4 ms (milliseconds)), and when the value of the counter is different from the specified maximum value (for example, "99") at the update timing, it is changed to a value larger by "1" than the current value, and when the value of the counter is the specified maximum value, it is changed to the specified minimum value ("0").

As a reservation full-filled performance selection table, a first table to be referred to when the reservation of the special symbol lottery is included in the maximum number of reservations, and a second table to be referred to when the reservation of the special symbol lottery is not included in the maximum number of reservations are prepared. The first table is set so that the appearance of the holding full-tank effect is selected with a predetermined probability (for example, a probability of 80% as in the example shown in FIG. 18). The second table is also set so that the appearance of the pending full tank effect is selected with a predetermined probability (for example, a probability of 10% as in the example shown in FIG. 18).

The sub-control board 940 executes the holding full-tank effect when appearance of the holding full-tank effect is selected in the holding full-tank effect lottery.

In the pachinko machine 100 in the present embodiment, the depth of the second and second special patterns in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment is a configuration in which the holding tan production lottery is performed when the number of people on the first and second special patterns reaches the maximum number of times, but the main control board 920 is the hold for each hold for the first special pattern and the second special view. If the number reaches the maximum number, it may be a configuration that performs the same holding tongue production lottery similar to the holding tongue production lottery performed by the Deputy Controlled Board 940. In such a configuration, the main control board 920 notifies the sub-control board 940 of information notifying that effect when appearance of the holding full-tank effect is selected in the holding full-tank effect lottery, and the sub-control board 940 executes the holding full-tank effect when receiving the information from the main control board 920. - 特許庁

Next, the action and effect of the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment described above will be described.

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the variable display of the decorative pattern performed in the decorative pattern display device 479 before transition to the special game state can be restored during the period of the special game state, including suggestive performances (first special performance, second special performance, third special performance) that can be displayed by operating the pressing operation device 261 during the variable display.

Therefore, even if the player does not intentionally operate the pressing operation device 261 during the period of variable display of the decorative pattern during the operation possible period provided for making the suggestive performance appear, the player can later restore and see the suggestive performance that was not seen due to the non-operation of the pressing operation device 261.例文帳に追加

As a result, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the player will have a negative feeling about the game, such as regretting not seeing the suggestive performance that could be seen during the variable display period of the decorative pattern, and suppress the loss of interest in the game.

Further, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, when both the number of reservation times of the right of the unit game related to the first special symbol and the number of times of reservation of the right of the unit game related to the second special symbol reach the maximum number of times, the reserved full tank performance appears on the decorative symbol display device 479 under a predetermined condition. Therefore, since the player has the objective of increasing the number of times of holding each special symbol, the player's desire to play is improved.

In particular, when the reservation for the maximum number of times includes the reservation for winning the special symbol lottery, the reservation full performance is produced at a higher probability than the case where the reservation for winning the special symbol lottery is not included. In other words, when the reservation includes the reservation winning the special symbol lottery, the reservation full-ton performance is more likely to appear than the case where the reservation winning the special symbol lottery is not included, so that the appearance of the reservation full-tank performance can make the player expect the occurrence of the special game state. Therefore, since it is possible to add a sense of contrast to the progress of the game, the amusement of the game can be improved.

Here, the lottery result of the holding full tank effect may be suggested to the player by a variable display different from the variable display related to the first special symbol and the second special symbol. The roulettes arranged in order are displayed, variable display is executed by the roulette performance in which one of the areas is brightly lit in order, and finally, the lighting part is stopped in the ``win'' or ``losing'' area according to the lottery result of the reserve full-fill performance, and then the reserve full-fill performance is executed. As a result, it is possible to clearly indicate to the player that there is a possibility that the holding full tank effect will be executed.

<Second embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 19, a second embodiment will be described. The pachinko machine 100 of the second embodiment has a function (hereinafter also referred to as a ``suggestive performance canceling function'') that allows the player to cancel execution of the second and subsequent suggestive performances among a plurality of suggestive performances that can appear during one variable display. In addition, in the following description, the same reference numerals are given to the same configurations as those in the above-described first embodiment, and the description thereof is omitted.

FIG. 19 is a time chart for explaining the suggestive effect canceling function. Note that FIG. 19 illustrates a case where the player cancels the suggestion effect in the variable display including the super ready-to-win with the variable display time of 90 seconds shown in FIG.

As shown in FIG. 19, when the player operates the pressing operation device 261 during the first operable period from time t1 to time t2, and the first special effect is performed in the period from time t2 to time t3, after the first special effect ends at time t3, the first cancelable period starts at time ta1 (for example, one second after the first special effect ends). The first cancelable period ends at time ta2 after a predetermined time (for example, three seconds) from time ta1.

It should be noted that the first cancelable period may be provided before the start of the second operable period. Therefore, for example, the first cancelable period may start at time t3 when the first special effect ends, or the first cancelable period may end at time t4 when the left symbol stops.

In the first cancellation period, characters, images, etc., are displayed to inform the player that the display of the subsequent suggestive performance can be canceled based on the display data prepared in the ROM (not shown) of the sub-control board 940 under the control of the sub-control board 940.例文帳に追加For example, a character indicating a comment for notifying the player that the display of the subsequent suggestive performance can be canceled is displayed, or an image similar to the image 601 is displayed to remind the player that the pushing operation to the pressing operation device 261 is possible.

When the player performs a pressing operation on the pressing operation device 261 during the first cancel period, the second operable period and the third operable period do not occur, and when the right symbol is stopped so that the ready-to-win display is performed at time t7, the non-battle effect is started under the control of the sub-control board 940.

The non-battle performance is different from the suggestive performance such as the first special performance and the battle performance, and is a performance in a mode that does not remind the degree of easiness of transition to the special game state after the decoration pattern is fixedly displayed. The non-battle effect is, for example, an introductory image of a character appearing in a suggestive effect such as a first special effect that can appear in the variable display.

As shown in FIG. 19, the second operable period starts at time t5 on condition that the player does not operate the pressing operation device 261 during the first cancel period. When the player operates the pressing operation device 261 during the second operable period from time t5 to time t6, and the second special performance is performed in the period from time t6 to time t10, the second cancelable period is started at time ta3 (for example, 5 seconds before the second special performance ends) within the execution period of the second special performance. The second cancelable period ends at time ta4 after a predetermined time (for example, three seconds) from time ta3.

It should be noted that the second cancelable period may be provided in a period before the start of the third operable period. Therefore, for example, the second cancelable period may start at time t6 when the second special effect starts, or the second cancelable period may end at time t10 when the right symbol stops (or the second special effect ends).

In the second cancellation period, as in the first cancellation period described above, characters, images, etc. are displayed based on the display data prepared in the ROM of the sub-control board 940 under the control of the sub-control board 940 to inform the player that the display of the subsequent suggestive performance can be canceled.

When the player presses the pressing operation device 261 during the second cancel period, the third operable period does not occur, and when the right symbol stops at time t10 so that the ready-to-win display is performed, the same non-battle presentation as when the player presses the pressing operation device 261 during the first cancellation period is started by the control of the sub control board 940.

Note that the presentation time of the non-battle presentation started at time t10 when the player operates the pressing operation device 261 during the second cancellation period is shorter than the battle presentation started at time t7 when the player operates the pressing operation device 261 during the first cancellation period, except when the second special presentation is pattern 2D.

The display data of the battle presentation started at time t10 when the player operates the pressing operation device 261 during the second cancellation period is also prepared in the ROM of the sub-control board 940, like the display data of the battle presentation started at time t7 when the player operates the pressing operation device 261 during the first cancellation period.

Although not shown in FIG. 19, the third operable period starts at time t7 on condition that the player does not operate the pressing device 261 during the first cancellation period and does not operate the pressing device 261 during the second cancellation period. When the third operable period occurs, regardless of whether or not the player operates the pressing operation device 261 during the third operable period, at least the battle effect appears as the suggestive effect.

Next, the action and effect of the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment described above will be described.

The pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment has a function (suggestive effect canceling function) that allows the player to cancel execution of the second and subsequent suggestive effects (second special effect, third special effect, battle effect) among a plurality of suggestive effects (first special effect, second special effect, third special effect, battle effect) that can appear during one variable display. can be suppressed. Therefore, the player loses expectations for the occurrence of the special game state due to the content of the suggestive effect that appears later, thereby suppressing the loss of interest in the game.

<Third Embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 20, a third embodiment will be described. In the pachinko machine 100 of the third embodiment, when the pressing operation device 261 is operated in the operable period generated during the variable display of the decorative symbols, a predetermined suggestive effect is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 479 of the own pachinko machine 100, while when the selection operation device 263 is operated during the operable period, the predetermined suggestive effect is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 479 of the other pachinko machine 100.例文帳に追加In addition, in the following description, the same reference numerals are given to the same configurations as those in the above-described first embodiment, and the description thereof is omitted.

FIG. 20 is a schematic diagram showing a pachinko machine 100 according to the third embodiment (this pachinko machine is hereinafter also referred to as "pachinko machine 100A" for convenience) and another pachinko machine 100 communicably connected to the pachinko machine 100 (hereinafter this pachinko machine is also referred to as "pachinko machine 100B" for convenience).

As shown in FIG. 20, the pachinko machine 100A is communicatively connected to the pachinko machine 100B via a LAN651. The connection between the pachinko machine 100A and the pachinko machine 100B is not limited to the LAN 651, and may be a direct connection with a cable or a wireless connection based on various standards such as Bluetooth (registered trademark).

The pachinko machine 100B, which is the communication partner of the pachinko machine 100A, may be the pachinko machine 100 installed at a specific position with respect to the pachinko machine 100A, such as the right side of the pachinko machine 100A, or may be a predetermined pachinko machine 100 specified by the pachinko machine 100A among the plurality of pachinko machines 100 installed in the game hall (hall). The pachinko machine 100B, which is the communication partner of the pachinko machine 100A, may be one or more.

When an operable period (for example, the first operable period in the first embodiment) occurs during the variable display of decorative symbols in the pachinko machine 100A, and the player presses the pressing operation device 261 during the operable period, a suggestive performance (for example, the first special performance in the first embodiment) corresponding to the operable period is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 479 of the own pachinko machine 100A.

On the other hand, when the player operates the selection operation device 263 in a predetermined direction (for example, rightward direction) during the operable period generated in the pachinko machine 100A, the information on the suggested performance corresponding to the operable period is transmitted to the pachinko machine 100B predetermined as a communication partner via the LAN 651.例文帳に追加

Information transmitted from the pachinko machine 100A to the pachinko machine 100B (information on suggestive performance corresponding to the operable period) includes information indicating a pattern selected as the suggestive performance (for example, the pattern of the first special performance selected by the first special performance lottery in the first embodiment). Transmission of information to the pachinko machine 100B is performed under the control of the sub-control board 940 of the pachinko machine 100A.

When the pachinko machine 100B receives the information from the pachinko machine 100A, the pachinko machine 100B, based on the received information, displays a suggestive effect of the pattern selected in the pachinko machine 100A, that is, a suggestive effect displayed on the decorative symbol display device 479 of the pachinko machine 100A when the player pushes the pressing operation device 261 during the operable period (for example, the first special effect in the first embodiment). Display on device 479 . The display control in the pachinko machine 100B is performed by the control of the sub-control board 940 of the pachinko machine 100B.

That is, in the pachinko machine 100A of the present embodiment, when the player presses the pressing operation device 261 during the operable period that occurs during the variable display of the decorative symbols, the suggestive effect corresponding to the operable period can be displayed on the decorative symbol display device 479 of the own pachinko machine 100A. It can be displayed on the decorative pattern display device 479 of the pachinko machine 100B, which is a pachinko machine.

When the pachinko machine 100B displays the suggestive effect on the decorative symbol display device 479 of the pachinko machine 100B based on the information received from the pachinko machine 100A, the screen displayed on the decorative symbol display device 479 of the pachinko machine 100B based on the game of the pachinko machine 100B (for example, the screen in which the variable display is performed) is reduced by controlling the sub-control board 940 of the pachinko machine 100B. is displayed in a predetermined area (for example, the lower right portion of the screen) of the decorative design display device 479 .

Next, the action and effect of the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment described above will be described.

In the pachinko machine 100A of the present embodiment, when the pressing operation device 261 is operated during the operable period generated during the variable display of the decorative symbols, a suggestive effect is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 479 of the own pachinko machine 100A.

In this manner, the display position of the suggestive performance can be changed by operating the pressing operation device 261 or the selection operation device 263 during the operable period, so that the game in which the suggestive performance is displayed according to the player's operation can be diversified and the interest can be improved.

In particular, when the selection operation device 263 is operated during the operable period, the suggestive performance is displayed on the decoration pattern display device 479 of the other pachinko machine 100B, so that the suggestive performance can be seen together with other players playing the game with the other pachinko machine 100B, and the player can obtain an interest different from the case of playing the game alone.

<Fourth Embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 21, a fourth embodiment will be described. In the pachinko machine 100 of the fourth embodiment, when the selection operation device 263 is operated instead of the pressing operation device 261 in the operable period generated during the variable display of the decorative patterns, a predetermined suggestive performance is displayed in a region different from the region where the variable display of the decorative patterns is displayed in the decorative pattern display device 479.例文帳に追加In addition, in the following description, the same reference numerals are given to the same configurations as those in the above-described first embodiment, and the description thereof is omitted.

FIG. 21 is a screen diagram showing an example of the display contents of the decorative design display device 479 when the selection operation device 263 is operated during the operable period occurring during the variable display of the decorative design. When an operable period (for example, the first operable period in the first embodiment) occurs during the variable display of the decorative patterns in the pachinko machine 100, and the player presses the pressing operation device 261 during the operable period, a suggestive performance (for example, the first special performance in the first embodiment) corresponding to the operable period is displayed on the entire screen of the decorative pattern display device 479.

On the other hand, when the player operates the selection operation device 263 in a predetermined direction (for example, rightward direction) during the operable period generated in the pachinko machine 100, as shown in FIG.

In contrast to the right area 479A where the suggestive effect is displayed, the left area 479B displays display contents when the player does not operate the pressing operation device 261 during the relevant operable period (for example, variable display after the first operable period in the first embodiment).

When the suggestive effect displayed in the right area 479A ends, the continuation of the variable display of the decorative design is displayed on the entire screen of the decorative design display device 479. - 特許庁Alternatively, the continuation of the variable display of decorative patterns may be displayed in the left region 479B and nothing may be displayed in the right region 479A, or the continuation of the variable display of decorative patterns may be displayed in the left and right regions 479A and 479B.

Note that the above-described display control in the present embodiment is all performed by the sub control board 940 .

Next, the action and effect of the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment described above will be described.

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, when the selection operation device 263 is operated instead of the pressing operation device 261 in the operable period generated during the variable display of the decorative patterns, the suggestion performance is displayed in a region different from the region where the variable display of the decorative patterns is displayed in the decorative pattern display device 479.例文帳に追加

In this manner, the display position of the suggestive performance can be changed by operating the pressing operation device 261 or the selection operation device 263 during the operable period, so that the game in which the suggestive performance is displayed according to the player's operation can be diversified and the interest can be improved.

In addition, since the player can simultaneously see the suggestive performance displayed by operating the selection operation device 263 and the contents displayed on the decorative pattern display device 479 when neither the pressing operation device 261 nor the selection operation device 263 is operated, the interest in the game is favorably improved.

<Fifth Embodiment>
Next, referring to FIG. 22, a fifth embodiment will be described. In the pachinko machine 100 of the first embodiment, when the number of reservations of each unit game right related to the first special symbol and the second special symbol reaches the maximum number of times (upper limit of the number of reservations), the appearance probability of the reservation full performance is different depending on whether or not the reservation winning the special symbol lottery (the first special symbol lottery or the second special symbol lottery) is included in all the reservations.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 100 of the fifth embodiment, when the number of reservations of each unit game right related to the first special symbol and the second special symbol reaches the maximum number (the upper limit of the number of reservations), the appearance probability of the reservation full performance is different depending on how many times the arrival is within a predetermined period. In addition, in the following description, the same reference numerals are given to the same configurations as those in the above-described first embodiment, and the description thereof is omitted.

Specifically, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, there is a portion in which the appearance probability of the reservation full performance increases as the number of times that the number of times of holding each of the first and second special symbols reaches the maximum number increases in a predetermined period. Hereinafter, the "predetermined period" is also referred to as a "hold count monitoring period".

For example, as shown in FIG. 22, if the maximum number of holding times for both the first special symbol and the second special symbol is reached for the first time in a predetermined period, the holding full tank effect appears with a probability of 50%, if it is the second time, the holding full tank effect appears with a probability of 70%, if it is the third time, the holding full tank effect appears with a probability of 80%. appears with a probability of 95%.

Here, when the number of holding times for each of the first special pattern and the second special pattern reaches the upper limit over a plurality of times during a predetermined period, not only the appearance probability of the reserved full-fill performance but also the contents of the performance may be different. A privilege may be given to the player when the appearance of the reserved full-tank effect is selected a predetermined number of times during a predetermined period, and as the privilege, for example, only when the appearance of the reserved full-tank effect is selected a plurality of times during the predetermined period. can be restored, and the number of times that can be restored increases as the number of times that the appearance of the reserved full-tank effect is selected during a predetermined period increases. As a result, even when the appearance of the reserved full-tank performance is once selected and the reserved full-tank performance is executed, it is possible to motivate the player to continue the game so that the number of times of suspension reaches the upper limit again during a predetermined period, and to suppress the situation where the player is interested in the reserved full-tank performance, suspends the game, and lowers the operation of the game machine.

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the period for monitoring the number of suspensions starts from the time when the number of suspensions for the first special symbol and the number of second special symbols reaches the maximum number at a certain time, and is a period until all the number of suspensions are exhausted (that is, until the unit game related to the first or second special symbol is performed for the maximum number of times).

A period from the starting point until the unit game related to the first or second special symbol is performed a predetermined number of times larger or smaller than the maximum number of times may be set as the holding number monitoring period, or a period from the starting point until a predetermined time elapses may be set as the holding number monitoring period. The starting point of the number-of-holds monitoring period is not limited to the point in time when the number of holding times for each of the first special symbol and the second special symbol reaches the maximum number of times, but may be a predetermined time (for example, 0 minutes every hour), or may be a point in time designated by the player in a predetermined manner.

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the holding full-tank effect lottery is the same as in the pachinko machine 100 of the first embodiment, when the sub-control board 940 obtains the value of the holding full-tank effect counter (a part of the RAM) provided in the sub-control board 940 when the number of times of holding each of the first special symbol and the second special symbol reaches the maximum number, This is done by referring to the effect selection table.

As the holding full tank effect selection table of the present embodiment, a first table is referred to when the number of holding times for both the first special symbol and the second special symbol reaches the maximum number of times in the holding number monitoring period, a second table is referred to when it is the second time, a third table is referred to when it is the third time, and a fourth table is prepared when it is the fourth time or later.

The first table is set so that the appearance of the holding full tank effect is selected with a predetermined probability (for example, a probability of 50% as in the example shown in FIG. 22), and the second table is also set so that the appearance of the holding full tank effect is selected with a predetermined probability (for example, a probability of 70% as in the example shown in FIG. 22). The third table and the fourth table are also set so that the appearance of the pending full-tan effect is selected with a predetermined probability.

The sub-control board 940 includes a period flag (partial area of RAM) which is set when it is during the holding number monitoring period, an arrival counter (partial area of RAM) for counting the number of times each holding number for the first special symbol and the second special symbol reaches the maximum number during the holding number monitoring period, and a remaining period counter (partial area of RAM) for counting the remaining period of the holding number monitoring period. The initial values of the arrival counter and the remaining period counter are "0".

The sub-control board 940 sets the period flag, adds 1 to the arrival counter, and sets the total upper limit value of the number of times of holding for the first special symbol and the second special symbol (in this embodiment, "8") to the remaining period counter when the number of times of holding each of the first special symbol and the second special symbol reaches the maximum number while the period flag is not set. Then, the sub-control board 940 refers to the first table to perform a holding full-tank effect lottery, and executes the holding full-tank effect when appearance of the holding full-tank effect is selected.

A sub-control board 940 adds 1 to the arrival counter and subtracts 1 from the remaining period counter when the number of times of holding each of the first special symbol and the second special symbol reaches the maximum number of times while the period flag is set. Then, the sub-control board 940 refers to a table corresponding to the value of the arrival counter among the reserve full-tank performance selection tables, performs a holding full-tank performance lottery, and executes the reserve full-tank performance when appearance of the reserve full-tank performance is selected.

Further, when the value of the remaining period counter becomes "0" by updating the remaining period counter, the sub control board 940 determines that the holding number monitoring period has ended, cancels the setting of the period flag, and sets the arrival counter to "0" which is the initial value.

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the sub-control board 940 is configured to perform the holding full-tank effect lottery, but the main control board 920 may be configured to perform the holding full-tank effect lottery similar to the holding full-tank effect lottery performed by the sub-control board 940. In such a configuration, the main control board 920 notifies the sub-control board 940 of information notifying that effect when appearance of the holding full-tank effect is selected in the holding full-tank effect lottery, and the sub-control board 940 executes the holding full-tank effect when receiving the information from the main control board 920. - 特許庁

Next, the action and effect of the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment described above will be described.

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, when the number of reservations of each unit game right related to the first special symbol and the second special symbol reaches the maximum number of times (the upper limit of the number of reservations), the appearance probability of the reserved full-ton performance is different depending on how many times the arrival occurs within a predetermined period.

Therefore, when the number of times of holding for each special pattern reaches the upper limit again within a predetermined period, the suggestive performance is more likely to appear than when the number of times of holding reaches the upper limit before that, so the player can face the game of shooting the game ball aiming to enter the starting device related to each special pattern with the purpose of increasing the number of times of holding for each special pattern. As a result, the player's desire to play can be improved.

<Sixth Embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 23, a sixth embodiment will be described. In the pachinko machine 100 of the sixth embodiment, it is configured to facilitate increasing the number of reservations of the right of each unit game related to the first special symbol and the second special symbol (easily accumulate reservations). In addition, in the following description, the same reference numerals are given to the same configurations as those in the above-described first embodiment, and the description thereof is omitted.

In the special game state, the game balls shot during the special game state tend to cause the number of reserved unit games related to the special symbols to easily reach the upper limit. Therefore, when the ready-to-win display appears in the variable display of the decorative symbols, there are many cases where the player who sees it stops shooting the game balls so as not to increase the number of reserved games before the special game state occurs (that is, during the variable display) in consideration of the subsequent occurrence of the special game state. In other words, the appearance of the ready-to-win display in the variable display of decorative symbols can be one of the reasons why it is difficult to increase the number of pending unit games related to special symbols.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, when the variable display including the ready-to-win display is selected as the variable display of decorative patterns to be executed in the decorative pattern display device 479 (that is, when the sub-control board 940 receives a variable pattern command corresponding to the variable display including the ready-to-win display from the main control board 920), if there is a hold for winning the special symbol lottery among the holds for the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the selected variation is selected with a predetermined probability. It is configured to perform variable display including a plurality of variable displays (that is, complete loss variable display) that do not include ready-to-win display for the same variable display time (variable time) as the display.

For example, FIG. 23A is a time chart showing an example of variable display including reach display. In this example, the variable display time of the variable display is 60 seconds. In variable display including ready-to-win display, when the right symbol stops and ready-to-win display occurs, the player tends to stop shooting the game ball for a relatively long period until the middle symbol stops after that.

On the other hand, FIG. 23(b) is a time chart showing an example of a completely lost variable display. The variable display time of the variable display including the reach display is configured to be longer than the variable display time of the complete loss variable display. In this example, the variable display time of the variable display is 20 seconds.

FIG. 23(c) is a time chart showing a variable display with a variable display time of 60 seconds, which is composed of a completely lost variable display with a variable display time of 20 seconds. As shown in FIG. 23(c), by repeating the completely lost variable display shown in FIG. 23(b) three times, a variable display with the same variable display time (that is, 60 seconds) as the variable display including the reach display shown in FIG. 23(a) is configured.

For each of the variable displays including the ready-to-win display prepared in advance in the ROM of the sub-control board 940, the ROM of the sub-control board 940 preliminarily prepares information defining how to combine the complete failure variable display in order to configure the variable display of the same variable display time as the variable display including the ready-to-reach display. Based on the information, the sub-control board 940 configures the variable display by combining the target complete-missing variable display so that the variable display time is the same as that of the variable display including the ready-to-win display.

On the other hand, when the variable display including the ready-to-win display is selected as the variable display of the decorative pattern to be executed in the decorative pattern display device 479, even when there is no reservation of winning the special pattern lottery among the holdings for the first special pattern or the second special pattern, the variable display including the complete loss variable display for the same variable display time as the selected variable display is executed a plurality of times with a predetermined probability, similarly to the case where the special pattern lottery is held.

However, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the probability of executing the variable display including the complete losing variable display for a plurality of times is higher when the holding of the first special symbol or the second special symbol includes the holding of winning the special symbol lottery than when the holding of the first special symbol or the second special symbol does not have the holding of winning the special symbol lottery.

A lottery (hereinafter also referred to as a “non-reach mode lottery”) as to whether or not to execute a variable display that includes a plurality of completely lost variable displays is controlled by the sub control board 940 . Specifically, when the sub control board 940 receives a variation pattern command corresponding to a variable display including a reach display from the main control board 920, the non-reach mode lottery is performed by acquiring the value of a selection counter (part of the RAM) provided in the sub control board 940 and referring to the selection table prepared in the ROM of the sub control board 940 for the value of the selection counter.

The selected counter is updated every predetermined time (for example, every 4 ms (milliseconds)), and at the update timing, if the value of the counter is different from the specified maximum value (for example, "99"), it is changed to a value larger by "1" than the current value, and if the value of the counter is the specified maximum value, it is changed to the specified minimum value ("0").

As selection tables, a first table is referred to when there is a reservation of winning the special pattern lottery among the reservations of the first special pattern or the second special pattern, and a second table is referred to when there is no reservation of winning the special pattern lottery among the reservations of the first special pattern or the second special pattern. The first table is set so as to select, with a predetermined probability (for example, a probability of 80%), the execution of the variable display including a plurality of complete failure variable displays for the same variable display time as the variable display indicated by the received variable pattern command. The second table is also set with a predetermined probability (for example, a probability of 10%) to select the execution of the variation display including a plurality of complete failure variation displays for the same variation display time as the variation display indicated by the received variation pattern command.

A sub control board 940 executes a variable display including a plurality of complete failure variable displays in the same variation display time as the variable display indicated by the received variation pattern command in the non-reach mode lottery, when execution of the variable display including the complete failure variable display for a plurality of times is selected.

When the variation display indicated by the reach variation pattern received from the main control board 920 subsequently generates a special game state (that is, winning the special symbol lottery), the sub control board 940 controls the stop pattern (fixed display) in the variation display consisting of the combination of the complete loss variation display to be a jackpot pattern.

23 illustrates the case where the variable display time of the variable display including the ready-to-win display is an integral multiple of the variable display time of the complete-loss variable display, but if the variable display time of the variable display including the ready-to-win display is not an integer multiple of the variable display time of the complete-loss variable display, the sub control board 940 extends or shortens each variable display time of one or more complete-loss variable displays, so that the total variable display time fluctuates according to the ready-to-win variable pattern received from the main control board 920. Control is performed so that the variable display time of display (variable display including reach display) is reached.

Next, the action and effect of the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment described above will be described.

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, when the variable display including the ready-to-win display is selected as the variable display of the decorative symbols, if there is a hold for winning the special symbol lottery among the holdings for the first special pattern or the second special pattern, the variable display including the variable display not including the ready-to-win display (that is, complete loss variable display) for the same variable display time as the selected variable display is executed a plurality of times with a predetermined probability.

By making it difficult to execute the variable display including the ready-to-win display in this way, it is possible to suppress the phenomenon that the player stops shooting the game ball when the ready-to-win display appears, so that it is possible to easily increase the number of times of holding the right of each unit game related to the first special pattern and the second special pattern (easy to accumulate the holding). Therefore, in the configuration for performing the above-mentioned reservation full-ton performance, since the reservation for each special symbol is easily accumulated, the reservation full-ton performance is likely to appear, so that the player is less likely to be dissatisfied with not being able to see the reservation full-ton performance, and the decrease in interest in the game can be suppressed.

Only when the holding for each special pattern includes the holding for winning the special pattern lottery, instead of the variable display including the ready-to-win display, the variable display including the variable display not including the ready-to-win display for a plurality of times is displayed, so that the holding for each special pattern includes holding for winning the special pattern lottery more easily than the case where there is no holding for winning the special pattern lottery. Therefore, when there is a reservation for winning the special symbol lottery among the reservations for each special symbol, the reservation full-ton performance is more likely to appear than when there is no reservation for winning the special symbol lottery, and a situation can be created in which the player expects the occurrence of the special game state by the appearance of the reservation full-tank performance. As a result, since the progress of the game can be given a sense of contrast, the interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, since the variable display including the variable display not including the reach display for a plurality of times appears instead of the variable display including the reach display, it is not necessary to have exclusively the display data of the variable display not including the reach display for the variable display time corresponding to the variable display including the reach display, and the display data of the variable display not including the reach display having a shorter variable display time than the variable display including the reach display can be diverted. As a result, the consumption of storage capacity in the pachinko machine 100 is suitably suppressed.

<Seventh embodiment>
Next, a seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 24 to 29. FIG. In the pachinko machine 100 according to the first embodiment, decorative patterns are displayed (variable display, stationary display) on the screen of the decorative pattern display device 479, but in the pachinko machine 100 according to the seventh embodiment, cylindrical reels 711L, 711M, and 711R having decorative patterns drawn on their outer peripheral surfaces are arranged side by side, and the decorative patterns are variably displayed by rotating the reels 711L, 711M, and 711R, respectively. . In the following description, the same reference numerals are assigned to the same configurations as those in the first to sixth embodiments, and description thereof is omitted.

First, with reference to FIGS. 24 and 25, the structural configuration of the game board 400X of this embodiment will be described. 24 is a front view of the game board 400X in the pachinko machine 100 according to the seventh embodiment, FIG. 25(a) is a front view of the reel device 710, and FIG. 25(b) is a front view of the middle reel 711M.

Like the game board 400, the game board 400X also has a substantially circular game area formed on the front side of the base 401 by the outer rail 402 and the inner rail 403, and when the game ball shot from the shooting device 330 enters the game area beyond the return ball prevention mechanism 404, the game ball moves (flows down) while falling within the game area by its own weight.

As shown in FIG. 24, the game board 400X is provided with flow changing members such as a nail 411 and a pinwheel 412, a central structure 420 arranged substantially in the center of the base 401, and the like in the same manner as the game board 400, and an upper start winning device 1431 arranged below the central structure 420, a lower starting winning device 1432 arranged below the upper starting winning device 1431, and a lower starting winning device. A grand prize device 1434 located below the device 1432 and starting devices 1436A, 1436B located on both left and right sides of the central structure 420 are provided. Here, the upper starting winning device 1431 is a winning device in which two winning devices (specifically, the left starting winning device 1431A and the right starting winning device 1431B) are integrated, like the middle starting winning device 431.

The game board 400X is provided with a plurality of switches (not shown) as detection means for detecting the passage of game balls corresponding to the left and right starting prize winning devices 1431A and 1431B, the lower starting prize winning device 1432, and the left and right starting devices 1436A and 1436B, respectively, and the entry of the game ball into a predetermined area corresponding to each switch can be detected.

Specifically, the left start winning switch that detects the game ball that has entered the left start winning device 1431A, the right starting winning switch that detects the gaming ball that has entered the right starting winning device 1431B, the lower starting winning switch that detects the gaming ball that has entered the lower starting winning device 1432, the big winning switch that detects the gaming ball that has entered the big winning device 1434, and the game ball that has entered the left starting winning device 1436A is detected. The game board 400 is provided with a left start switch for detecting a game ball that has entered the right starter 1436B and a right start switch for detecting a game ball that has entered the right starter 1436B. Each of these switches is connected to the main control board 920 in the same manner as the general winning switches 449A and 449B (see FIG. 10) for detecting game balls entering the general winning devices 439A and 439B.

In the following, for convenience, the above -mentioned left -hand entry prize switch, right starting dynamic entry switch, lower -side starting award switch, large entry switch, left -side start switch, and right starting switch, respectively, "left -sided entry switch 1441a", "right -handed starting switch 1441B" It is also called the lower starting dynamic switch 1442, "Omitsu switch 1444", "left start switch 1446a", and "right starting switch 1446B".

The entrance portions of the game balls in the left start winning device 1431A, the right start winning device 1431B, the lower start winning device 1432, and the big winning device 1434 constitute prize winning openings, and the game balls that have entered each winning opening are guided to a recovery and discharge passage (not shown) formed on the back side of the base 401 through a through hole formed in the base 401. On the other hand, game balls that have not entered each winning device are guided to the collection and discharge passage through the discharge port 401A. When a game ball enters one of the winning devices, a predetermined number of game balls corresponding to the type of the winning device are paid out from the payout device 540 (see FIGS. 8 and 9). For each of the winning devices, the game ball entrance portions of the left starting device 1436A and the right starting device 1436B constitute ball entrances, and game balls entering the respective ball entrances are released into the game area.

The left starting winning device 1431A is a starting device related to the first special symbol like the left center starting winning device 431A, and the right starting winning device 1431B is a starting device related to the second special symbol like the right center starting winning device 431B. That is, the upper starting winning device 1431 is a winning device having two functions as a starting device related to the first special symbol and a starting device related to the second special symbol.

The upper starting winning device 1431 includes a distribution unit (not shown in FIG. 24) that distributes the game ball entered from the entrance 1611 to either the left starting winning device 1431A or the right starting winning device 1431B. The sorting section is provided on the back side of the base 401, and game balls entering from the entrance 1611 are guided to the back side of the base 401 by a path (not shown) and distributed by the sorting section.

Similar to the distribution unit 620, the distribution unit of the upper starting winning device 1431 is configured such that each time a game ball enters from the entrance 1611, the winning devices 1431A and 1431B to which the game ball is distributed are alternately switched. As a result, the game ball entering the upper start winning device 1431 basically alternately enters the left starting winning device 1431A or the right starting winning device 1431B.

The upper starting prize device 1431 is configured so that the probability of entering the entrance 1611 does not change. On the other hand, the upper starting prize winning device 1431 has a function of discharging some of the game balls entered from the entrance 1611 to a recovery discharge passage (not shown) from a discharge port formed at a predetermined position with a very low probability without entering either the left or right starting prize winning device 1431A, 1431B. In other words, some of the game balls that have entered the upper starting prize winning device 1431 through the entrance 1611 are discharged to the collection discharge path without entering any of the left and right starting prize winning devices 1431A and 1431B. In addition, the probability that the game ball entering from the entrance 1611 is discharged to the recovery discharge passage without entering the starting winning devices 1431A and 1431B is, for example, about 1/100, preferably about 1/1000.

The lower starting winning device 1432 is a starting device related to the second special symbol, like the right starting winning device 432. The lower start winning device 1432 has a mechanism for changing the probability of entry of game balls into the inside thereof, like the right starting winning device 432 . It should be noted that the mechanism for changing the entry probability of the game ball need not be provided only in the lower starting winning device 1432, instead of or in addition to it, one or more other winning devices such as the upper starting winning device 1431 may be provided. Further, the mechanism for changing the entry probability of the game ball may be constituted by a drive means such as an electrically driven solenoid, or may be constituted by a mechanically operated mechanism represented by a mechanism operated by the weight of the game ball that has entered a predetermined area.

The lower starting winning device 1432, like the right starting winning device 432, includes an entry regulation mechanism 1452 that changes the probability of entry of a game ball into the interior thereof by transition between an entry permission posture and an entry prohibition posture, and an entry regulation solenoid (not shown) that drives the entry regulation mechanism 1452. The entry restriction solenoid that drives the entry restriction mechanism 1452 is connected to the main control board 920, like the right entry restriction solenoid 462 (see FIG. 10). In the following description, the entry restriction solenoid that drives the entry restriction mechanism 1452 is also referred to as the "entry restriction solenoid 1462" for convenience.

The entry restriction mechanism 1452 includes two movable pieces driven by an entry restriction solenoid 1462. When the entry restriction mechanism 1452 is in the entry prohibition posture, the two movable pieces narrow (or close) the entry opening (a prize opening), thereby preventing the game ball from entering the lower start winning device 1432. The game ball can enter the lower starting winning device 1432 by adopting an arrangement such that the interval between .

The entry regulation mechanism 1452, when winning a lottery (hereinafter also referred to as "normal pattern lottery") based on the detection by the start switch 1446 of the game ball entering the left and right starting devices 1436A, 1436B related to the normal pattern, shifts to the entry permission posture for a predetermined number of times and for a predetermined time in response to the drive by the entry regulation solenoid 1462.

The big winning device 1434, like the upper big winning device 434, includes an entry regulation mechanism 1454 for regulating the entry of game balls therein by shifting between an entry permitting posture and an entry prohibition posture, and an entry regulation solenoid (not shown) for changing the posture of the entry regulation mechanism 1454. An entry control solenoid that changes the attitude of the entry control mechanism 1454 is connected to the main control board 920, like the upper entry control solenoid 464 (see FIG. 10). In the following description, the entry restriction solenoid that changes the posture of entry restriction mechanism 1454 is also referred to as "entry restriction solenoid 1464" for convenience.

The entry restriction mechanism 1454 includes a plate-shaped movable piece that is arranged on the front side of the big winning device 1434 and driven by the entry restriction solenoid 1464. When the entry restriction mechanism 1454 is in the entry prohibiting posture, the game ball cannot enter the big winning device 1434 by closing the entry port (winning mouth). The game ball can enter the big winning device 1434 by being pushed forward with the side as an axis to open the entrance.

The big winning device 1434 allows game balls to enter when winning a lottery for a big win. Specifically, when the game ball entering the left side start winning device 1431A related to the first special design wins the lottery based on the detection by the left side start winning prize switch 1441A (that is, the first special symbol lottery), or the game ball entering the right side start winning device 1431B or the lower side start winning device 1432 related to the second special design is detected by the right side start winning switch 1441B or the lower side start winning prize switch 1442 When winning the lottery based on this (that is, the second special symbol lottery), the entry control solenoid 1464 of the big winning device 1434 operates. By this operation, the entry restricting mechanism 1454 assumes the entry permitting posture for a prescribed number of times and for a prescribed period of time.

Further, as shown in FIG. 24, the game board 400 is provided with a reel device 710 in the opening of the central structure 420 as a device for displaying decorative symbols (variable display, stationary display) in place of the decorative symbol display device 479. The reel device 710 is attached to a plate-shaped base 701 arranged on the back side of the game board 400 .

As shown in FIG. 25(a), the reel device 710 includes three rotating bodies arranged side by side in the left-right direction, that is, a left reel 711L, a middle reel 711M, and a right reel (right symbol row) 711R. The left reel 711L constitutes a left symbol row, the middle reel 711M constitutes a middle symbol row, and the right reel 711R constitutes a right symbol row.

Each of the reels 711L, 711M, 711R is rotatably supported such that its center axis coincides with the rotation axis of the reel 711L, 711M, 711R. The rotation axes of the reels 711L, 711M and 711R are arranged on the same axis extending substantially horizontally.

Each of the reels 711L, 711M, 711R is connected to a reel driving motor (not shown in FIG. 25), which is a stepping motor, and is rotated by driving the reel driving motor. For convenience, the reel drive motors connected to the left reel 711L, middle reel 711M, and right reel 711R are hereinafter also referred to as "reel drive motor 721L," "reel drive motor 721M," and "reel drive motor 721R," respectively.

The reel drive motors 721L, 721M and 721R are all connected to the sub control board 940 and driven independently under the control of the sub control board 940. FIG. Thereby, each reel 711L, 711M, 711R can rotate individually, that is, independently.

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, decorative symbols are drawn on the outer peripheral surfaces of the respective reels 711L, 711M, 711R, and by individually rotating these reels 711L, 711M, 711R, variable display of the decorative symbols is realized. The decorative pattern is composed of a main pattern 712 and a sub-pattern 713 smaller than the main pattern 712. - 特許庁

The main symbol 712 is a symbol that can constitute a jackpot symbol. The main symbols 712 are, for example, composed of symbols including information specifying individual numerical values such as numbers and characters corresponding to numbers (this information is hereinafter referred to as "numerical information").

The main symbols 712 are sequentially arranged so that each number from "1" to "9" circulates on each reel 711L, 711M, 711R. More specifically, on the left reel 711L and the right reel 711R, the main symbols 712 with numbers excluding some of the numbers from "1" to "9" (specifically, "4") are arranged in descending order when the reels 711L and 711R are rotated clockwise when viewed from the left side in front view. On the other hand, on the middle reel 711M, the main symbols 712 with the numbers "1" to "9" are arranged so as to change in ascending order when the middle reel 711M rotates clockwise when viewed from the front left side. In addition, although the configuration in which the sub symbol 713 is arranged at the location corresponding to "4" is illustrated, the main symbol 712 with the number "4" may be included in each of the reels 711L, 711M and 711R.

The sub-symbol 713 is a symbol that cannot constitute a big hit symbol. In this embodiment, the sub-design 713 is configured as a predetermined design that does not contain numerical information. The sub-symbol 713 consists of a first sub-symbol 713A provided on each of the reels 711L, 711M, 711R, and a second sub-symbol 713B provided only on the middle reel 711M as shown in FIG. 25(b).

In the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment, the second sub symbol 713B is arranged between the main symbol 712 with the number "3" and the main symbol 712 with the number "5" on the middle reel 711M. This second sub-symbol 713B is provided in place of the "4" symbol in the main symbol 712, and is composed of a large symbol so that the player can easily recognize it as compared with the first sub-symbol 713A as the other sub-symbol 713.

Also, the first sub symbol 713A is arranged between the main symbols 712 arranged on the reels 711L, 711M, 711R except between the main symbol 712 with the number "3" and the main symbol 712 with the number "5" on the middle reel 711M.

Each of the reels 711L, 711M, and 711R is arranged with its front side protruding forward from the front surface of the base 701, and is covered with a light-transmitting resin cover that has a substantially semicircular cross-section when viewed from the left side in front view and extends in the left-right direction. The resin cover is configured as a light guide plate in which a predetermined decorative design (for example, a school of fish) is formed by fine unevenness on one side (for example, the back side), and an image of the predetermined decorative design can be visually displayed from the front by irradiating light from light emitting units (not shown) provided on at least one of the top, bottom, left, and right sides of the resin cover (for example, both the upper and lower sides).

Further, on the game board 400, as shown in FIG. 24, a holding lamp 720 for displaying the number of holdings of unit games related to special symbols (first special symbol and second special symbol) is provided in the opening of the central structure 420 and at a position below the reel device 710. The reservation lamp 720 is composed of a number (eight in this embodiment) of light-emitting parts corresponding to the sum of the upper limits of the number of times of reservation for the first special symbol and the second special symbol. Specifically, a light-emitting means such as an LED is provided on the back side of each of the holding lamps 720, and the sub-control board 940 controls the light-emitting means, and the light-transmitting light-emitting portion overlapping the front side of the light-emitting means as the holding lamp 720 is configured to turn on or off. The suspension lamps 720 are connected to the sub-control board 940, and each lamp is individually lit or extinguished according to the increase or decrease in the number of suspension times of the unit game related to the special symbol under the control of the sub-control board 940.

Further, the game board 400 is provided with a lottery result display device 730 inside the opening of the central structure 420 and on the right side of the holding lamp 720 . The lottery result display device 730 is a device for suggesting to the player the lottery result of the reserved full tank effect by a variable display different from the variable display related to the special symbols (first special symbol and second special symbol), and is composed of a plurality of (four in this embodiment) lamps. The lottery result display device 730 is connected to the sub-control board 940, and each lamp is individually turned on or off under the control of the sub-control board 940. FIG.

Here, the operation of the lottery result display device 730 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 26 is a front view for explaining the operation of the lottery result display device 730. FIG. In addition, in FIG. 26, the reel device 710 and the holding lamp 720 are shown together.

As shown in FIG. 26, the lottery result display device 730 is composed of four lamps 730A to 730D. The first lamp 730A is the smallest lamp among the lamps 730A to 730D and is arranged on the leftmost side. The second lamp 730B is the second smallest lamp and is positioned to the right of the first lamp 730A. The third lamp 730C is the second largest lamp and is positioned to the right of the second lamp 730B. The fourth lamp 730D is the largest lamp and is positioned to the right of the third lamp 730C.

During the variable display of the decorative symbols by the reel device 710, that is, during the rotation of the reels 711L, 711M, and 711R, when the number of holdings of unit games related to the special symbols (the first special symbol and the second special symbol) reaches the upper limit, the lottery result display device 730, as shown in FIG. After the fourth lamp 730D is turned on, the lamp 730D returns to the first lamp 730A and sequentially shifts to the right from the first lamp 730A to repeat the lighting pattern.

The lamp fluctuation display by the lottery result display device 730 performs high-speed fluctuation in which the moving speed (lamp lighting interval) of the lighting lamps in the lamps 730A to 730D is fast, and then the moving speed gradually slows down, and at the timing when a predetermined fluctuation display time elapses from the start of the lamp fluctuation display, the lamp corresponding to the lottery result of the holding full tank effect among the lamps 730A to 730D is lit and finally stopped (stopped display).

More specifically, when appearance of the holding full-tank effect lottery is selected, as shown in FIG. 26(b), the lottery result display device 730 performs lamp fluctuation display by the respective lamps 730A to 730D, and then the fourth lamp 730D is turned on to stop display. On the other hand, when appearance of the holding full-tank performance lottery is not selected, the lottery result display device 730 is stopped and displayed by any of the lamps other than the fourth lamp 730D, that is, the first lamp 730A, the second lamp 730B, or the third lamp 730C.

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the variable display time of the variable display (ramp variable display) by the lottery result display device 730 is adjusted so that the timing at which the stop display is performed on the lottery result display device 730 is out of the period from the emergence of the ready-to-win display in the variable display of decorative symbols performed by the reel device 710 to the final display (hereinafter, this period is also referred to as the “ready-to-win effect period”).

Specifically, when the ramp variation display by the lottery result display device 730 is started because the number of times of holding unit games related to the special symbols (first special symbol and second special symbol) reaches the upper limit, when the basic variation display time (for example, 3 seconds) elapses for the ramp variation display (that is, when the stop display is performed in the lottery result display device 730) is the ready-to-win effect period in the variation display of the decorative symbols performed in the reel device 710, the variation display of the ramp variation display. time is extended.

A sub-control board 940 determines whether or not the variable display of the decoration pattern being executed is the variable display including the ready-to-win display when starting the lamp variable display by the lottery result display device 730 because the number of holding times of the unit game related to the special symbols (the first special symbol and the second special symbol) reaches the upper limit.

Next, when the sub-control board 940 determines in the above determination that the variable display of the decorative pattern being executed is the variable display including the ready-to-win display, when the ramp variable display is performed only for the basic variable display time, it judges whether or not the timing of stopping display on the lottery result display device 730 during the ready-to-win performance period of the variable display of the decorative pattern being executed comes.

Further, when the sub-control board 940 determines in the above determination that the timing of stop-displaying in the lottery result display device 730 during the ready-to-win performance period of the variable display of the decorative symbols being executed comes, it extends the variable display time of the lamp variable display so that the timing of stop-displaying in the lottery result display device 730 comes after the ready-to-win performance period of the variable display of the decorative symbols being executed ends (that is, after the final display is performed).

For example, the variable display time of the lamp variable display is extended so that the timing of stop display on the lottery result display device 730 comes after a predetermined time (for example, three seconds) from the timing of displaying the fixed display in the variable display of the decorative pattern being executed. It should be noted that the variable display time of the ramp variable display may be extended so that the stop display on the lottery result display device 730 comes at the timing when the fixed display is displayed in the variable display of the decorative symbols being executed.

Alternatively, the fluctuation display time of the ramp fluctuation display may be extended by a uniform amount of time according to the period from the timing of stopping display on the lottery result display device 730 when the ramp fluctuation display is performed only for the basic fluctuation display time to the timing of displaying the fixed display in the fluctuation display of the decoration pattern being executed (hereinafter, this period is also referred to as "reach effect remaining period"). In this case, for example, if the remaining period of the ready-to-win effect is 5 seconds or less, the fluctuation display time of the ramp fluctuation display is extended by 6 seconds, and if the remaining period of the ready-to-win effect is 5 seconds or more and 10 seconds or less, the fluctuation display time of the ramp fluctuation display is extended by 11 seconds.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 27 to 29, the read-ahead effect executed by the pachinko machine 100 according to the seventh embodiment will be described. In addition, the "pre-reading effect" is a kind of suggestive effect, and when the right of the unit game related to the special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) is reserved, based on the lottery result of the special symbol for the reservation, it is an effect that predicts a specific game state (for example, special game state) that will occur after the completion of the unit game performed by digesting the reservation.

Here, the pre-reading performance for notifying the specific game state occurring after the completion of the unit game may be a performance that always transitions to the specific game state when the performance occurs, or may be a performance that may be executed even if the transition to the specific game state is not made when the performance occurs, and includes a performance that makes the player expect the transition to the specific game state. Further, the read-ahead performance is not limited to the performance of foretelling a specific game state occurring immediately after the end of the unit game in which the performance is executed, but may be the performance of foretelling the specific game state occurring after one or more variable displays are executed.

27 and 28 are schematic diagrams showing the transition of the display by the reel device 710 when the second sub-symbol precursor notice is given, and FIG. 29 is a schematic diagram showing the transition of the display by the reel device 710 when the countdown notice is given.

Both the second sub-symbol omen notice and the countdown notice are types of pre-reading effect. A sub-control board 940 determines whether or not to execute a pre-reading performance based on predetermined performance object information received from a main control board 920, and which kind of pre-reading performance is to be executed when the pre-reading performance is executed.

Specifically, when the start winning of a special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) occurs, the main control board 920 performs a special symbol lottery corresponding to the starting winning based on the value of the random number acquired based on the occurrence of the starting winning, and determines the variable display time of the special symbol corresponding to the starting winning. This determination is made before starting the variable display that is executed based on the starting prize. The main control board 920 sets information corresponding to whether or not the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is won (hereinafter also referred to as "win/fail correspondence information") and information corresponding to the determined or to be determined variable display time (hereinafter also referred to as "variable display time correspondence information") as performance target information, and outputs a command including the performance target information to the sub control board 940.

Here, the effect target information may be information selected or determined based on the value of the random number acquired by the main control board 920 based on the occurrence of the start winning. For example, information indicating whether or not the player has won a prize and information indicating the variable display time may be used as the effect target information. Further, the obtained random number value itself may be used as performance object information, the random number value itself obtained by the main control board 920 may be output to the sub control board 940, and control may be included for determining the lottery result of the special symbol lottery and the variable display time by the same selection method for both the main control board 920 and the sub control board 940.

Note that the command including the effect target information may be a pending command, or may be a command dedicated to outputting the effect target information. Also, the effect target information may be composed only of win/fail information without including the variable display time correspondence information. When the sub control board 940 receives the performance object information from the main control board 920, it determines whether or not to execute a pre-reading performance for foretelling the game state to occur after the unit game corresponding to the performance object information is finished, based on the performance object information and the number of times of holding the right of the unit game related to the special symbol. The sub-control board 940 determines the type of prefetching effect to be executed when execution of the prefetching effect is determined. It should be noted that, when the execution of the prefetch effect is determined, the special symbol unit game for the effect target information corresponding to the prefetch effect is also referred to as "variable display of the prefetch target".

First, with reference to FIGS. 27 and 28, the second sub-symbol precursor notice will be described. The second sub-symbol portent notice is a pre-reading performance in which the middle reel 711M is not changed (rotated) and remains stopped until the variable display of the pre-reading object is executed after the losing pattern including the second sub-symbol 713B of the middle reel 711M is displayed as a stop pattern on the middle line L2 which is one of the effective lines. Control of the second sub-symbol forewarning is performed by the sub-control board 940, and control of each reel 711L, 711M, 711R described below is performed by the sub-control board 940.

The "active line" is a line that transitions to a special game state when a jackpot symbol is displayed as a stop symbol on that line. In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 27, three effective lines are set: the uppermost line L1, the lowermost lower line L3, and the middle line L2 between the upper line L1 and the lower line L3. Note that the effective lines are not limited to the above-described form, and may be increased to five effective lines including two effective lines slanted upward and downward to the right, or may be reduced such as only the middle line L2.

For example, when a starting prize of a special symbol to be read ahead occurs in a state where the number of times of holding the unit game of the special symbol is 2, as shown in FIG. 27, after the variable display two ahead of the target to be read is started, the variable display ends with the lost symbol including the second sub symbol 713B of the middle reel 711M being stopped and displayed as a stop symbol on the middle line L2 which is one of the activated lines.

More specifically, the reels 711L, 711M, and 711R, which fluctuate in the fluctuation display two positions before the prefetch target, are first controlled so that the middle reel 711M stops with the second sub-symbol 713B displayed on the middle line L2. Since the second sub pattern 713B is a pattern that does not constitute a big win pattern, the display of the second sub pattern 713B on the middle line L2 prevents the big win pattern from being stop-displayed on the middle line L2 and indicates to the player that the losing pattern is already stop-displayed as a stop pattern to be stop-displayed on the middle line L2.

After the middle reel 711M stops, the left reel 711M is controlled to stop with the main symbol 712 displayed on the middle line L2. In each of the reels 711L, 711M, 711R, the main symbols 712 and the sub-symbols 713 (713A, 713B) are alternately arranged in the circumferential direction. Therefore, in a state where the second sub-symbol 713B of the middle reel 711M is stopped and displayed on the middle line L2, by stopping and displaying the main pattern 712 of the left reel 711R on the middle line L2, the upper line L1 and the middle line L2 are displayed. , and the lower line L3, the symbols of the left reel 711L and the symbols of the middle reel 711R do not form a ready-to-win display, and the losing symbols are already stopped and displayed on all the activated lines L1 to L3.

After the left reel 711L stops, the right reel 711R is controlled to stop. The right reel 711R is controlled so that the stop symbols stopped and displayed on the middle line L2 differ depending on whether the variable display is for the prefetch target or the variable display is performed before the prefetch target. In the case of variable display performed before the look-ahead object, control is performed so that the main pattern 712 or the sub-pattern 713 which does not become the ready-to-win display in combination with the main pattern 712 of the left reel 711L stopped on the middle line L2 is stopped. Therefore, in the variable display two lines before the look-ahead target, the player is shown a state in which no ready-to-win display is formed by the left and right reels 711L and 711R on any of the activated lines, and the variable display is stopped with a losing pattern.

After the end of the variable display two before the look-ahead target, the variable display in the unit game of the next reserved special symbol (the variable display one before the look-ahead target) is started. In the variation display, the variation of the left and right reels 711L and 711R is started while the middle reel 711M is stopped without being varied (rotated) (that is, while the second sub-symbol 713B is kept displayed on the middle line L2).

Note that the "state in which the middle reel 711M is stopped without being moved (rotated)" is not limited to the state in which the middle reel 711M is completely stopped. 11M may be in a stationary state without being changed (rotated).

The left and right reels 711L and 711R, which fluctuate in the previous variable display to be read ahead, are first controlled so that the left reel 711L stops with one of the main symbols 712 displayed on the middle line L2. Therefore, in the variable display, as in the variable display two ahead of the prefetch target described above, the player is shown that the losing symbols are already stopped and displayed on all the activated lines in the situation where the right reel 711R is being variably displayed, and the formation of the ready-to-win display with the symbols on the left reel 711L and the symbols on the middle reel 711R is suppressed.

Here, in the read-ahead effect in this embodiment, only the left reel 711L and the right reel 711R are varied, and a variable display is intentionally set without varying the middle reel 711M so that the player can pay attention to whether or not the ready-to-win display is formed by these two reels 711L and 711R and by which main symbol 712 the ready-to-win display is formed. In this case, if a combination of a part of the jackpot symbols is stop-displayed by the symbols of the left reel 711L and the symbols of the middle reel 711M, the player cannot recognize that the performance attracts the attention of the left reel 711L and the right reel 711R, and there is a possibility that the ready-to-win display is formed by the left reel 711L and the middle reel 711M to make the player expect to develop into a special performance. Therefore, when the left reel 711L stops during execution of the read-ahead effect, control is performed so that the ready-to-win display is not formed depending on the symbols on the left reel 711L and the symbols on the middle reel 711M.

The read-ahead effect is preferably controlled by varying the probability (expectation) of transitioning to the special game state according to how many times before the variable display of the target read-ahead has started the read-ahead effect. It is preferable to control so that the probability (expectation) of transition to the special game state is set higher as the number of times the variable display is continuously executed is higher. It is preferable to set the number of balls (for example, the number of rounds) differently, or to set the game state to be changed after the special game state to be different according to the type of the main pattern 712 as the jackpot pattern, in order to draw attention to the type of the main pattern 712 constituting the ready-to-win display stopped and displayed on the left reel 711L and the right reel 711R in the read-ahead effect.

After the left reel 711L is stopped, the right reel 711R is controlled so as to stop and display a main pattern 712 or a sub-pattern 713 which is not a ready-to-win display in combination with the main pattern 712 of the stopped left reel 711L on the middle line L2, similarly to the variable display before the variable display being executed. As a result, even in the variable display one before the prefetch target, the player is shown a state in which no ready-to-win display is formed by the left and right reels 711L, 711R on any of the effective lines L1, L2, L3, and the variable display is stopped and displayed with a losing pattern in the same way as in the variable display two before the prefetch target.

Here, as a stop control of the right reel 711R during the look-ahead effect, the main symbol 712 (the same main symbol 712 in this embodiment) of the right reel 711R, which can form the ready-to-win display in combination with the main symbol 712 of the left reel 711L, is slightly moved near the middle line L2 so that the player can take time to pay attention to whether or not the combination with the main symbol 712 of the left reel 711L results in the ready-to-win display. The movement is slowed down on the upper side, which is the front side, and is controlled so as to be further slowed down to the extent that it seems to stop when it overlaps with the middle line L2. Then, in the variable display before the look-ahead target, the main pattern 712 may move downward from the state where it is likely to stop at the point where it overlaps with the middle line L2, the main pattern 712 may stop at the lower line L3, and the sub pattern 713 may stop at the middle line L2.

After the previous variable display of the prefetch target ends, the variable display of the prefetch target is started. Also in the variable display of the prefetch target, the left and right reels 711L and 711R are varied while the middle reel 711M is stopped without being varied, similarly to the variable display of the prefetch target two before.

The left and right reels 711L and 711R, which fluctuate in the variable display of the look-ahead object, are controlled to form a ready-to-win display on the middle line L2 and stop display as shown in FIG. For example, in the variable display of the prefetch target, similar to the variable display before the prefetch target illustrated above, the main symbol 712 which is the same as the main symbol 712 stopped on the left reel 711L may be controlled to be further slowed down to the extent that the main symbol 712 is likely to stop when it overlaps the middle line L2.

After the left and right reels 711L and 711R are stop-displayed while forming a ready-to-win display in the variable display of the prefetch target, the middle reel 711M starts to float, and then the middle reel 711M stops, thereby ending the variable display of the prefetch target. When the middle reel 711M is stopped and the jackpot symbol is stop-displayed on the middle line L2, after the stop display (that is, after the variable display of the look-ahead object ends), the game state transitions to the special game state. On the other hand, when the middle reel 711M is stopped and a losing symbol is stopped and displayed on the middle line L2, the game state is changed to the normal game state without transitioning to the special game state after the stop display.

Regarding the second secondary symbol advance notice, in the above, the case where the start winning of the special symbols to be read occurs in a state where the number of times of holding the special symbol unit game is 2 is illustrated, but when the starting winning of the special symbols to be looked ahead occurs in a state where the number of times of holding the unit game of special symbols is 1, or when the starting winning of the special symbols to be looked forward occurs in a state where the number of times of holding the unit game of special symbols is 3 or more, the second secondary is similarly applied. It is good also as a structure which performs a symbol omen notice.

Next, the countdown notice will be described with reference to FIG. The countdown notice is a pre-reading performance for counting down the number of times of variable display to be executed until the pre-reading target variable display is executed in the variable display before the pre-reading target variable display by the number included in the main pattern 712.例文帳に追加Control of the countdown notice is performed by the sub control board 940 .

For example, when a start winning of a special symbol to be read ahead occurs in a state where the number of times of holding the unit game of the special symbol is 3, as shown in FIG. At L3, the game ends when the stopped symbol is stopped to become a lost symbol.

After the end of the variable display three times before the look-ahead target, the variable display (the variable display two before the look-ahead target) in the unit game of the next reserved special symbol is started. After the main symbol 712 to which the number "2" is attached on the middle reel 711M is stopped in the middle line L2, the left and right reels 711L and 711R are stopped so that the stopped symbol becomes a losing symbol on each of the effective lines L1, L2 and L3, and ends.

After the end of the variable display two before the target to be read ahead, the variable display one before the target to be read is started, and after the main pattern 712 with the number "1" on the middle reel 711M is stopped at the middle line L2, the left and right reels 711L, 711R are stopped so that the stopped pattern becomes a lost pattern on each of the effective lines L1, L2, L3.

After the variable display of the one before the prefetch target is finished, the variable display of the prefetch target is started, and the big hit pattern or the losing pattern is stopped as the stop pattern. In the variable display of the prefetch target, the left reel 711L, the right reel 711R, and the middle reel 711M are stopped in this order.

Regarding the countdown notice, in the above, the case where the start winning of the special symbol to be the target of reading occurs while the number of times of holding the special symbol unit game is 3 is exemplified, but when the starting winning of the special symbol to be the target of reading occurs while the number of times of holding the unit game of the special symbol is 2, or when the starting winning of the special symbol to be the target of reading occurs while the number of times of holding the unit game of the special symbol is 4 or more. Good. In addition, when the number of times of holding the unit game of the special symbol is 2 and the start winning of the special symbol to be read ahead occurs, a countdown notice may be given.

Next, the action and effect of the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment described above will be described.

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, when the number of times the special symbols are held reaches the upper limit, the lottery result display device 730 performs lamp variation display over a predetermined variation display time, and then the position of the stopped lamp among the lamps 730A to 730D informs the lottery result of the holding full tank performance lottery.

In particular, the position of the stop-displayed lamp is different between when the appearance of the holding full-tank performance is selected in the holding full-tank performance lottery and when the appearance of the holding full-tank performance is not selected, so that the player can intuitively judge whether or not the appearance of the holding full-tank performance has been selected from the position of the stop-displayed lamp. Further, the stop display for notifying the lottery result of the holding full-tank performance lottery is performed within the range of the lamps 730A to 730D constituting the lottery result display device 730, so that the player's line of sight is less likely to be distracted when viewing the stop display, and the player can easily grasp the position of the stop display.

Further, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, when the lottery result of the holding full-tank performance lottery is displayed in the lottery result display device 730, the timing at which the stop display (that is, the display of the lottery result of the holding full-tank performance lottery) is performed is configured to be out of the ready-to-win performance period. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the stop display on the lottery result display device 730 during an effect that the player wants to pay attention to, such as a suggestive effect executed during the ready-to-win effect period. As a result, the interest of the player can be concentrated on the performance such as the suggestive performance executed during the ready-to-win performance period, so that the player's expectation for the variable display being executed by the suggestive performance can be preferably improved. In addition, the display timing of the stop display in the lottery result display device 730 does not overlap with the display timing of the suggestion performance or the like, so that the player can be prevented from overlooking the lottery result of the holding full tank performance lottery displayed by the lottery result display device 730.例文帳に追加

In addition, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, after the losing symbols including the second sub symbol 713B of the middle reel 711M are stop-displayed on the middle line L2 as the second sub-symbol precursor notice, and before the variable display of the look-ahead target, and in the variation display of the look-ahead target, the left and right reels 711L and 711R are variably displayed while the middle reel 711M is stopped. Since the variable display of the reels 711L and 711R has started, it is possible to increase the expectation for the lottery result of the variable display of the prefetch target that will come after that.

In particular, the middle reel 711M, which has been stopped from the variable display before the variable display of the prefetch target, starts to fluctuate in synchronism with the formation of the ready-to-win display on the middle line L2 by the left and right reels 711L and 711R, so that it is strongly impressed that the end time of the variable display of the prefetch target (that is, the display of the lottery result for the variable display of the prefetch target) is approaching, thereby further increasing the expectation for the lottery result of the variable display of the prefetch target.

In addition, in the second sub-symbol precursor notice, the middle reel 711M stopped prior to the left and right reels 711L and 711R continues to be stopped until it is changed in synchronism with the formation of the ready-to-win display on the middle line L2 by the left and right reels 711L and 711R. .

In addition, in the second sub-symbol portent notice, the second sub-symbol 713B which continues to be stopped and displayed on the middle line L2 in the middle reel 711M which has been stopped from the variable display before the variable display of the look-ahead object is a pattern which does not constitute a big win pattern, so that in the variable display executed before the variable display of the look-ahead object, that is, before the variable display of the look-ahead object is executed, it is possible to prevent the situation where the big win pattern is stopped and displayed on the middle line L2.

In addition, in the second sub-symbol portent notice, in the variable display before the variable display of the look-ahead target, part of the symbols that do not constitute the big win, such as the second sub-symbol 713B, continue to be displayed in the middle symbol row (middle reel 711M) of the middle line L2 for the entire period of the variable display. It is possible to further amplify the expectation for the variable display of the incoming prefetch target.

In particular, in the second sub-symbol portent notice, the symbol stopped and displayed in the middle pattern row (middle reel 711M) of the middle line L2 is the second sub-symbol 713B provided only on the middle reel 711M among the sub-symbols 713, so that it is easy to attract the player's attention and make the player recognize that the second sub-symbol portent notice has started. In addition, in the second sub-symbol precursor announcement of the present embodiment, the second sub-symbol 713B is displayed in the middle symbol row (middle reel 711M) on the middle line L2 positioned in the middle of the plurality of activated lines L1, L2, and L3. In this respect as well, it is easy to attract the player's attention and make the player aware that the second sub-symbol precursor announcement has started.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, as a countdown notice, the number of variable displays to be executed until the variable display of the prefetch target is executed is counted down by the number included in the main symbol 712 of the middle reel 711M in the variable display of the prefetch target. It is possible to grasp the number of times of the variable display. Since the number of times is counted down each time the variable display is performed, it is possible to increase the expectation for the lottery result for the variable display of the prefetch target that is gradually approaching.

In addition, in the countdown notice, the countdown of the number of times of variable display to be performed until the variable display to be read ahead is performed is performed using the main pattern 712 of the reel for variably displaying the decoration pattern (main pattern 712, sub-pattern 713), so that the player can be prevented from overlooking the countdown.

In addition, in the countdown notice, the middle reel 711M that counts down the number of times of variable display to be performed until the variable display to be read ahead is stopped before the left and right reels 711L and 711R.

<Eighth embodiment>
Next, an eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 30 to 32. FIG. In the pachinko machine 100 according to the eighth embodiment, the substrate 401 of the game board 400X is configured as a flat plate-shaped member having light transmission properties (translucency), and the characteristics of the substrate 401 are used to enhance the interest of the game. In the following description, the same reference numerals are assigned to the same configurations as those in the first to seventh embodiments, and description thereof is omitted.

First, referring to FIGS. 30 and 31, a fish school will be described as an example of a luminous display for effect that is displayed beyond the display area of the reel device 710 by using the light-transmitting base 401 and the display area visible in the front view of the reel device 710 and the outer portion thereof. FIG. 30(a) is an enlarged front view of the vicinity of the reel device 710 on the game board 400X, and FIG. 30(b) is a simplified cross-sectional view of the main components of the game board 400X along line AA of FIG. 30(a). FIG. 31(a) is a simplified cross-sectional view of the main configuration including the reel device 710 along line BB in FIG. 30(a), and FIG. 31(b) is a front view for explaining a school of fish displayed beyond the display area of the reel device 710.

30(a), 30(b), and 31(b), illustration of the central structure 420 is omitted. Also, in FIG. 30(b), for reference, a part of the nail 411 provided on the base 401 is illustrated, the outer shape of the resin cover 715 of the reel device 710 is illustrated by a two-dot chain line, and the rear plate 223 is illustrated by a one-dot chain line. In addition, in FIG. 31(a), the rear plate 223 is illustrated with a dashed line for reference. Also, in FIGS. 30(b) and 31(a), hatching of cross sections is omitted.

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the base 401 of the game board 400X is configured as a plate-like member having optical transparency. As shown in FIG. 30(a), the base 401 is formed with an opening 401D forming an opening to which the central structural body 420 is attached. The central structure 420 is attached by fitting it into the opening 401D from the front, and is made of a translucent resin material so that a part of the school of fish displayed on the far side can be seen, and is not shown in FIG.

On the front surface of the substrate 401, on the left and right sides with respect to the reel device 710, fish patterns 741 forming part of a continuous leftward shoal of fish (fish school) are drawn in various sizes, for example, by printing translucent colored paint. The fish pattern 741 drawn on the substrate 401 includes a pattern partly cut off by the periphery (edge) of the opening 401D, like the pattern 741A.

The substrate 701 arranged on the back side of the game board 400 is also configured as a plate-like member having light transmission properties, like the substrate 401 . As shown in FIG. 30(a), on the front surface of the base 701, inside the opening 401D and on the left and right sides with respect to the reel device 710, a picture 742 of fish forming part of a school of fish facing left along with the fish drawn by the picture 741 is drawn in various sizes.

The fish pattern 742 drawn on the substrate 701 also includes a pattern 742A, which itself is only a part of the fish, but which is paired with a pattern 741 (for example, a pattern 741A) partly cut off by the periphery of the opening 401D to constitute one fish when viewed from the front.

The fish pattern 742 drawn on the substrate 701 also includes patterns that are partially interrupted by the boundary with the resin cover 715 of the reel device 710, such as patterns 742B, 742C, and 742D. The pattern 742B drawn on the left side of the resin cover 715 and the pattern 742D drawn on the right side of the resin cover 715 may be one side and the other side of a pattern in which one fish is divided into left and right.

As shown in FIG. 30(b), on the back side of the substrate 401, a board light emitting device 490A, which is a part of the board light emitting device 490, is provided. The board surface light emitting device 490A is arranged so that the light emitting means E1 such as an LED can emit light toward the front where the base 401 is located. Therefore, by lighting (lighting) the light emitting means E1 arranged on the back side of the area where the fish pattern 741 is drawn on the substrate 401, the pattern 741 that emerges in the light can be displayed.

On the other hand, on the back side of the substrate 701, a board light emitting device 490B, which is a part of the board light emitting device 490, is provided. The board surface light emitting device 490B includes a light emitting means E2 such as an LED directed toward the substrate 701 and a light emitting means E4 (see FIG. 31(a)). Therefore, by turning on the light emitting means E2 arranged on the back side of the area where the fish pattern 742 is drawn on the substrate 701, the pattern 742 that emerges in the light can be displayed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 30(b), between the opening 401D of the substrate 401 and the peripheral edge of the substrate 701, there is provided a plate-shaped side wall portion 702 extending in the front-rear direction substantially perpendicular to the substrates 401, 701 and having light transmission properties. On the surface of the side wall portion 702 (the surface facing the inside of the opening 401D), a pattern (not shown) connecting a pattern 741 (for example, a pattern 741A) partially cut off by the periphery of the opening 401D and a pattern 742 (for example, a pattern 742A) paired with the pattern 741 is drawn. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the fish formed by the combination of the pattern 741 and the pattern 742 from appearing divided by the difference in level between the substrates 401 and 701 .

A board light emitting device 490C, which is a part of the board light emitting device 490, is provided on the back side of the side wall portion 702 (outside the opening 401D). The board surface light emitting device 490C includes a light emitting means E3 such as an LED that is capable of emitting light toward the side wall portion 702 . Therefore, by turning on the light-emitting means E3 arranged on the back side of the area where the pattern is drawn on the side wall portion 702, the pattern that emerges in the light can be displayed.

The resin cover 715 of the reel device 710 is a light-transmitting cover that covers the front sides of the reels 711L, 711M, and 711R. As shown in FIG. 31(a), the resin cover 715 of this embodiment has an arcuate side cross section that curves along the cross section of each reel such as the middle reel 711M. The resin cover 715 includes a translucent outer cover 715A integrated with the base 701, and a light guide plate 715B arranged behind the outer cover 715A.

The light guide plate 715B has a light-transmitting resin plate on one side (for example, the back side) of which a pattern 743 of a fish forming a part of a school of fish facing left is formed by fine unevenness. The light emitting means E4 such as LEDs provided in the board light emitting device 490B are arranged above the upper end of the light guide plate 715B along the upper end, and below the lower end of the light guide plate 715B along the lower end.

The back side of the light guide plate 715B is visible from the front side when the light emitting means E4 is not lit, and the player can visually recognize the reels 711L, 711M and 711R through the resin cover 715 (the outer cover 715A and the light guide plate 715B) as shown in FIG. 30(a). On the other hand, when the light emitting means E4 is turned on, the light emitted from the light emitting means E4 is incident on the upper and lower ends of the light guide plate 715B, so that the light guide plate 715B (resin cover 715) displays a pattern 743 of fish forming part of a school of fish, as shown in FIG. 31(b).

The fish pattern 743 displayed on the light guide plate 715B includes a pattern 743B and 743C, which itself is only a pattern in which a part of the fish is drawn, but also includes a pattern that constitutes one fish when viewed from the front in pair with the pattern 742 (for example, patterns 742B and 742C) partially interrupted by the boundary with the resin cover 715.例文帳に追加

A pattern 743, such as patterns 743B and 743C, which constitutes one fish paired with a pattern 742 partly cut off by a boundary with the resin cover 715, is formed to be displayed within predetermined regions R1 and R2 on the lower side than the foremost top portion of the resin cover 715. - 特許庁

The “predetermined region” is, for example, a region below 2/5 from the top side of the height difference (height in the front-rear direction) between the top of the resin cover 715 (the top of the outer cover 715A) and the upper and lower ends of the outer cover 715A, preferably a region below 1/2 from the top side of the height difference, and may be a region below 3/5 from the top side of the height difference. The end of the “predetermined region” on the side of the substrate 701 may or may not be in contact with the substrate 701 , but is preferably in contact with the substrate 701 .

Since the areas R1 and R2 are closer to the surface (front surface) of the base body 701 than the vicinity of the top of the resin cover 715, the height difference (height in the front-rear direction) between the pattern 742 (for example, patterns 742B and 742C) partly cut off by the boundary with the resin cover 715 and the pattern 743 (for example, patterns 743B and 743C) paired with the pattern 742 can be kept low. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the distortion when the pair of the patterns 742 and 743 is viewed from the front, so that the fish pattern formed by the pair of the patterns 742 and 743 is less likely to cause a sense of incongruity.

Here, each of the reels 711L, 711M, and 711R of the reel device 710 has a shape that bulges forward in an arc when viewed from the side, and the light guide plate 715B (resin cover 715) also has a shape that bulges in an arc toward the front along the surface shape of each of the reels 711L, 711M, and 711R. Therefore, even if the reels 711L, 711M, and 711R and the front end of the light guide plate 715B (resin cover 715) are arranged between the base 401 forming the game area where the game balls flow down and the transparent plate (rear plate 223) positioned in front of the base 401 or near the front, the upper and lower ends of the display area of the reel device 710 that can be visually recognized in the front view are shifted to the rear side of the front surface of the base 401. will be located. The substrate 701 is arranged in a planar shape so as to be in substantially the same front and rear positions as the upper and lower ends of the display area visible in the front view of the reel device 710. This makes it possible to express a sense of unity between the fish pattern 743 displayed on the light guide plate 715B and the pattern 742 displayed on the substrate 701, and the patterns of the reels 711L, 711M, and 711R positioned inside the substrate 701 when viewed from the player side are aligned with the substrate. It can be displayed in an emphasized manner in comparison with the pattern 742 displayed in 701, and the result of winning or failing can be displayed in an easy-to-understand manner for the player.

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, in addition to lighting the light emitting means E4 to display the fish pattern 743 on the light guide plate 715B, by lighting the light emitting means E1 to E3, a school of fish facing left can be displayed in a wide area from the right side of the base 401 to the left side of the base 401 across the reel device 710 (resin cover 715). At this time, by controlling the lighting timing of the light emitting means E1 to E4, it is possible to produce an effect in which a school of fish moves from right to left in a wide area sandwiching the reel device 710. FIG.

Next, with reference to FIG. 32, a description will be given of a configuration in which a player can visually recognize a downflow path of a game ball that has entered the upper start winning device 1431 from the entrance 1611. FIG.

FIG. 32(a) is an enlarged front view of the vicinity of the upper and lower starting winning devices 1431 and 1432 on the game board 400X of the pachinko machine 100 according to the eighth embodiment. FIG. 32(b) is a sectional view of the game board 400X taken along line CC of FIG. 32(a), and FIG. 32(c) is a top view of FIG. 32(a) viewed from above. FIG. 32(d) is a diagram showing how the vicinity of the information display section 753 looks when a player who is playing the pachinko machine 100 according to the eighth embodiment obliquely looks toward the lower left direction.

In addition, in FIG. 32(a), the distributing portion 1620 is shown in a schematic outline. In FIG. 32(c), the right portion of the upper start winning device 1431 is omitted, and the upper surfaces of the guide passage 1612, the first passages 1613A and 1613B, and the second subsidiary passage 1614A are omitted.

32(b) and 32(c), the illustration of the nail 411 is omitted except for the nail 411A (a part of the nail 411) arranged in the lower right direction from the upper side of the information display section 753 on the left side in the front view of the game machine, and the illustration of the lower start winning device 1432 is also omitted. In addition, in FIG. 32(b), for reference, one of the nails 411A is shown including a portion embedded in the base 401, the portion of the other nails 411A projecting to the front side of the base 401 is shown by a two-dot chain line, and the rear plate 223 is shown by a one-dot chain line. In FIG. 32(c), for reference, the portion of the nail 411A that protrudes forward from the base 401 is indicated by a two-dot chain line, and the rear plate 223 is indicated by a one-dot chain line.

In addition, in FIGS. 32(b) and 32(c), for reference, a part of the game ball that has entered the upper starting winning device 1431 from the entrance 1611 is illustrated, and a part of the flow-down path in the upper starting winning device 1431 is illustrated by an arrow.

As shown in FIGS. 32(a) to 32(c), on the back side (rear side) of the base body 401 of the game board 400X, there are a guide passage 1612 for guiding the game balls entering the upper start winning device 1431 from the entrance 1611 to the distributing portion 1620, left and right first passages 1613A and 1613B through which the game balls distributed by the distributing portion 1620 flow down, and left and right first passages. Second passages 1614A and 1614B branching from 1613A and 1613B, respectively, are provided.

These passages 1612, 1613A, 1613B, 1614A, and 1614B are formed by a passage forming member 1631 provided on the back side (rear side) of the base 401, as shown in FIGS. 32(b) and 32(c). The passage forming member 1631 is made of resin having optical transparency.

As shown in FIGS. 32(b) and 32(c), the guide passage 1612 guides a game ball (for example, a game ball P1) entering from the entrance 1611 to the back side of the base 401 from an opening 401C formed through the base 401 to a position above the distribution section 1620, and then guides the game ball downward above the distribution section 1620. .

The game balls that have passed through the guide passage 1612 are distributed by the distribution section 1620 . The distribution unit 1620 corresponds to the distribution unit of the upper start winning device 1431 in the pachinko machine 100 of the seventh embodiment. In other words, the distribution section 1620 alternately switches the distribution destination each time a game ball enters from the entrance 1611, similarly to the distribution section 620. FIG.

Specifically, the distribution unit 1620 alternately distributes game balls guided by the guide passage 1612 to a left first passage 1613A located on the left side of the distribution unit 1620 when viewed from the front of the game machine, or to a first right passage 1613B positioned on the right side of the distribution unit 1620 when viewed from the front of the game machine.

The first left passage 1613A, as shown in FIG. 32(a), comprises an upstream passage 1613A1 forming an upstream passage in the first left passage 1613A, and a downstream passage 1613A2 through which game balls that have passed through the upstream passage 1613A1 but have not entered a second left passage 1614A, which will be described later, flow down.

As shown in FIG. 32(c), the upstream passage 1613A1 is a passage that guides game balls (for example, game balls P2) distributed to the left side by the distribution unit 1620 to the left side, then to the back side (rear side), and then in a substantially vertically downward direction (from the front side to the back side perpendicular to the paper surface in FIG. 32(c)).

As shown in FIGS. 32(a) and 32(c), the downstream passage 1613A2 is a passage provided downstream from the entrance of the left second passage 1614A branching from the upstream passage 1613A1. The downstream passage 1613A2 continues to guide the game ball guided substantially vertically downward by the upstream passage 1613A1 substantially vertically downward, and then guides it to a collection discharge passage (not shown).

As shown in FIGS. 32(a) to 32(c), the left second passage 1614A is a passage formed by branching leftward from a downwardly extending portion of the upstream passage 1613A1. The second left passage 1614A guides the game ball (for example, the game ball P3) entering from the first left passage 1613A (upstream passage 1613A1) to the left, then guides it substantially vertically downward like the game ball P4, and then guides it to the recovery discharge passage.

The probability that a game ball passing through the upstream passage 1613A1 enters the left second passage 1614A is very low probability compared to the probability that the game ball enters the downstream passage 1613A2. The probability that a game ball passing through the upstream passage 1613A1 enters the left second passage 1614A is, for example, about 1/200, preferably about 1/2000.

As shown in FIG. 32(a), the left starting winning switch 1441A is provided so as to be able to detect game balls flowing down the downstream passage 1613A2. Therefore, when a game ball passing through the first left passage 1613A enters the downstream passage 1613A2 from the upstream passage 1613A1, the game ball is detected by the left start winning switch 1441A.

Therefore, the game ball distributed to the left first passage 1613A by the distribution part 1620 enters the left start winning device 1431A by passing through the downstream passage 1613A2, is detected by the left start winning switch 1441A, and becomes the start winning of the first special symbol.

On the other hand, when a game ball passing through the left first passage 1613A enters the left second passage 1614A from the upstream passage 1613A1, the game ball is not detected by the left start winning switch 1441A. Therefore, when the game ball passing through the upstream passage 1613A1 enters the left second passage 1614A without entering the downstream passage 1613A2, the starting winning of the first special symbol does not occur.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 32(a), the first right passage 1613B is composed of an upstream passage 1613B1 forming an upstream passage in the first right passage 1613B, and a downstream passage 1613B2 through which game balls that have passed through the upstream passage 1613B1 but have not entered a second right passage 1614B, which will be described later, flow down.

As shown in FIG. 32(c), the upstream passage 1613B1 guides the game balls distributed to the right side by the distribution section 1620 to the right side, then guides them to the back side (rear side) in the same manner as the upstream passage 1613A1, and then guides them substantially vertically downward.

As shown in FIG. 32(a), the downstream passage 1613B2 is a passage provided downstream from the inlet of the second right passage 1614B branched from the upstream passage 1613B1. The downstream side passage 1613B2 continues to guide the game ball guided substantially vertically downward by the upstream side passage 1613B1 substantially vertically downward, and then guides it to the collection discharge passage.

As shown in FIG. 32(a), the right second passage 1614B is a passage that is formed by branching rightward from a downwardly extending portion of the upstream passage 1613B1. The right second passage 1614B guides the game ball that has entered from the right first passage 1613B (upstream passage 1613B1) to the right, then guides it substantially vertically downward, and then guides it to the collection and discharge passage.

The probability that a game ball passing through the upstream passage 1613B1 enters the right second passage 1614B is very low probability compared to the probability that the game ball enters the downstream passage 1613B2. The probability that a game ball passing through the upstream passage 1613B1 enters the right second passage 1614B is, for example, about 1/200, preferably about 1/2000.

As shown in FIG. 32(a), the right starting winning switch 1441B is provided so as to be able to detect game balls flowing down the downstream passage 1613B2. Therefore, when a game ball passing through the right first passage 1613B enters from the upstream passage 1613B1 to the downstream passage 1613B2, the game ball is detected by the right start winning switch 1441B.

Therefore, the game ball distributed to the right first passage 1613B by the distribution part 1620 enters the right starting winning device 1431B by passing through the downstream side passage 1613B2, is detected by the right starting winning switch 1441B, and becomes the starting winning of the second special symbol.

On the other hand, when a game ball passing through the right first passage 1613B enters the right second passage 1614B from the upstream passage 1613B1, the game ball is not detected by the right start winning switch 1441B. Therefore, when the game ball passing through the upstream passage 1613B1 enters the right second passage 1614B without entering the downstream passage 1613B2, the second special symbol is not started winning.

A region J on the substrate 401 corresponds to a region surrounded by a thick line in FIG. 32( a ), in which an image such as the pattern 741 described above is not drawn, and is configured as a region having higher visibility when viewed from the front side to the rear side than the region in which the image or the like is drawn. As shown in FIG. 32(a), the area J is provided at a position overlapping the entire left and right upstream passages 1613A1 and 1613B1, the left and right downstream passages 1613A2 and 1613B2, and the left and right second passages 1614A and 1614B.

As described above, since the passage forming member 1631 forming the passages 1613A1, 1613B1, 1613A2, 1613B2, 1614A, and 1614B is made of a resin having optical transparency, the player can visually recognize, through the area J of the substrate 401, the downflow path of the game ball that has entered the upper start winning device 1431 from the entrance 1611.

Therefore, when a game ball enters the entrance 1611, the player can see the flow path of the game ball through the area J of the base body 401 to know whether the game ball has been sorted to the left or right by the sorting unit 1620 and whether the game ball has entered the path (that is, the downstream side path 1613A2, 1613B2) in which the start winning of the special symbol occurs.

As shown in FIG. 32(a), the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment is provided with information display units 751 to 754 for informing the player of characteristic areas on the game board 400X.

The information display section 751 is provided near the entrance 1611 on the front surface of the upper starting prize winning device 1431 . A character string “IN” is displayed on the surface of the information display portion 751 . Therefore, the player can recognize that the area into which the game ball has entered is the entrance 1611 of the upper start winning device 1431 by seeing the character string "IN". In other words, the character string "IN" displayed on the information display portion 751 functions as information (hereinafter, this information is also referred to as "start prize winning device entrance information") that enables the player to recognize that the area to which the information display portion 751 is attached (that is, the entrance 1611) is the entrance of the upper starting prize winning device 1431.

The information display portion 752 is provided on the front surface of the base 401 so as to overlap a position near the branch position of the left and right downstream passages 1613A2 and 1613B2 with the second passages 1614A and 1614B. A character string “Lucky” is displayed on the surface of the information display portion 752 .

Therefore, by seeing the character string "Lucky", the player can recognize that the area into which the game ball has entered (that is, the downstream passages 1613A2 and 1613B2) is the area where the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) will start winning. In other words, the character string “Lucky” displayed on the information display portion 752 functions as information (hereinafter, this information is also referred to as “start winning area information”) that enables the player to recognize that the area to which the information displaying portion 752 is attached (that is, the downstream side passages 1613A2 and 1613B2) is an area where a special symbol starting winning will occur when the game ball enters.

The information display portion 753 is provided on the rear side of the passage wall (for example, the passage wall portion 1631A in FIG. 32(c)) on the rear side in the front view of the game machine, among the passage walls forming the passage extending to the left or right of the second passages 1614A and 1614B in the passage forming member 1631 so as to overlap slightly downstream from the entrances of the left and right second passages 1614A and 1614B. A character string “OUT” is displayed on the surface of the information display portion 753 .

Therefore, by seeing the character string "OUT", the player can recognize that the area into which the game ball has entered (that is, the second passages 1614A and 1614B) has entered an area in which the starting winning of the special symbols does not occur. That is, the character string "OUT" displayed on the information display portion 753 functions as information (hereinafter, this information is also referred to as "non-start winning area information") that allows the player to recognize that the area to which the information display portion 753 is attached (that is, the left and right second passages 1614A and 1614B) is an area where the starting winning of the special symbol does not occur even if the game ball enters.

The information display section 754 is provided on the front surface of the lower starting prize winning device 1432 so as to overlap the opening 1432A that guides the game ball entering the lower starting prize winning device 1432 to the back side (rear side) of the base 401 . A character string “GO” is displayed on the surface of the information display portion 754 .

Since the game ball entering the opening 1432A is detected by the lower start winning switch 1442, the player can recognize that the area into which the game ball has entered is the area for starting winning of the second special symbol by seeing the character string "GO". That is, the character string “GO” displayed on the information display portion 754 functions as starting winning area information similar to “Lucky” displayed on the information display portion 752 .

Among the information display portions 751 to 754, the surfaces of the information display portions 751, 752 and 754 display information such as starting winning device entrance information and starting winning area information, which gives the player expectations for starting winning of special symbols. Such information display portions 751 , 752 , 754 are provided at positions such as the upper and lower starting prize winning devices 1431 , 1432 and the front surface of the base 401 where the player can directly view them through the front plate 222 and the rear plate 223 .

Therefore, since the information display parts 751, 752, 754 are arranged at relatively easy-to-visually-recognized positions, the player's expectation for the starting winning of the special symbol can be favorably amplified when the game ball enters the area corresponding to each information display part 751, 752, 754.例文帳に追加

As shown in FIG. 32(a), from the upper side to the right side of the information display section 753 on the left side, five nails 411A are arranged downward to the right. As shown in FIGS. 32(b) and 32(c), the information display section 753 on the left side is provided so as to fit within both the vertical range and the horizontal range in which the five nails 411A are arranged.

Since the nail 411A is erected in this arrangement with respect to the information display part 753 on the left side, when a player whose viewpoint is located on the front side of the pachinko machine 100 during the game looks obliquely in the lower left direction, the player sees the information display part 753 on the left side overlapping the rear side of the five nails 411A as shown in FIG. 32(d).

As a result, the visibility of the information display section 753 on the left side when the player looks obliquely in the lower left direction during the game is obstructed by the five nails 411A overlapping on the front side. On the surface of the information display portion 753, information such as the character string "OUT" (that is, non-start winning area information) that reduces the player's expectation for the starting prize of the special symbol is displayed. However, since the visibility of the information display portion 753 is obstructed by the five nails 411A, the character string "OUT" displayed on the information display portion 753 hardly leaves an impression on the player.

Even when the game ball entering the upper start winning device 1431 from the entrance 1611 enters the area corresponding to the information display part 753 (that is, the left and right second passages 1614A, 1614B), the information display part 753 can prevent the player from being strongly impressed that the start winning of the special symbol is not achieved. As a result, it is possible to suppress the disappointment of the player that the game ball has entered the upper starting winning device 1431 from the entrance 1611 but the starting winning of the special symbol has not been achieved.

In addition, in the right information display portion 753, as in the left information display portion 753, five nails 411B are arranged downward to the left from the upper side to the left side of the information display portion 753 (see FIG. 32(a)), and the information display portion 753 is provided so as to fit within either the vertical range or the horizontal range in which the five nails 411B are arranged.

Therefore, when a player whose visual point is located on the front side of the pachinko machine 100 during a game looks obliquely in the lower right direction, the player sees the information display part 753 on the right side overlapping the rear side of the five nails 411B, so the visibility of the information display part 753 is hindered by the five nails 411A overlapping on the front side. As a result, as in the case of the information display section 753 on the left side described above, it is possible to suppress the disappointment of the player due to the fact that the start winning of the special symbol is not achieved.

Further, as shown in FIG. 32(a), the left and right information display portions 753 each have a character string “OUT” displayed on the surface arranged along the arrangement direction of the nails 411A or 411B corresponding to each information display portion 753. That is, the character string "OUT" displayed in the information display section 753 on the left side is arranged downward to the right like the arrangement of the nails 411A, and the character string "OUT" displayed in the information display section 753 on the right side is arranged downward to the left like the arrangement of the nails 411B.

By arranging the character string displayed on the information display portion 753 along the arrangement direction of the nail 411A or the nail 411B in this way, for example, as shown in FIG.

Further, as shown in FIG. 32(c), the information display section 753 is provided on the back side (rear side) of the base 401, so the visibility of the information display section 753 viewed through the base 401 is lower than the visibility of the information display sections 751, 752, and 754 that are viewed without the base 401.

In particular, in front of the information display portion 753, not only the base 401 but also the front and rear passage wall portions, such as the passage wall portion 1631A, of the passage wall portions forming the passages extending to the left or right of the second passages 1614A and 1614B when viewed from the front of the game machine are present, thereby further reducing the visibility of the information display portion 753.

Therefore, since the substrate 401 and the passage wall portion 1631A overlap on the front side of the information display portion 753, the impression of the character string "OUT" displayed on the information display portion 753 is even less impressive. As a result, even though the game ball has entered the upper start winning device 1431 from the entrance 1611, it is possible to suitably suppress the disappointment of the player when the start winning of the first special symbol is not achieved.

Also, as shown in FIG. 32(c), the upstream passage 1613A1 is configured as a passage that guides the game ball to the left side and then to the back side. In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the passage wall portion 1631B is arranged so as to overlap the front side of the information display portion 753 on the left side in the field of view of the player obliquely looking in the lower left direction. Therefore, in this point as well, the impression of the character string "OUT" displayed on the information display part 753 is less likely to remain in the player, so that the disappointment of the player due to the fact that the start prize of the special symbol is not won can be more suitably suppressed.

Next, the action and effect of the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment described above will be described.

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, a school of fish that continues facing left can be displayed in a wide area from the right side of the base 401 to the left side of the base 401 with the reel device 710 (resin cover 715) interposed therebetween.

In particular, since the base 701 is also configured to display a pattern 742 forming a part of a continuous school of fish facing leftward, even when there is a structural separation between the opening 401D of the base 401 and the light guide plate 715B as in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the discontinuity occurring between the pattern 743 displayed on the light guide plate 715B and the pattern 741 displayed on the base 401 can be prevented by the pattern 742. can compensate. As a result, the effect of the school of fish displayed beyond the display area of the light guide plate 715B can be realized as a suitable effect in which unnaturalness due to discontinuity is suppressed.

In addition, since one fish is displayed by the pattern 741 and the pattern 742 at the boundary between the peripheral edge of the opening 401D in the base body 401 and the base body 701 when viewed from the front of the game machine, it is possible to prevent the continuity of the school of fish that continues facing leftward from becoming unnatural at the boundary. Similarly, since one fish is displayed by the pattern 743 and the pattern 742 at the boundary between the light guide plate 715B and the base 701 when viewed from the front of the game machine, it is possible to prevent the continuity of the shoals of fish that continue facing leftward from becoming unnatural at the boundary.

Also, on the side wall portion 702, a pattern 741 partly cut off by the periphery of the opening 401D and a pattern (not shown) connecting the pattern 742 paired with the pattern 741 are displayed. Therefore, it is possible to more preferably suppress unnaturalness due to discontinuity in the effect of the continuous fish school facing the left direction.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the visibility of the information display portion 753 when the player looks obliquely in the lower left or lower right direction during the game is hindered by the nails 411A and 411B overlapping the front side of the information display portion 753, the passage wall portion 1631A, and the passage wall portion 1631B. It is possible to suitably suppress the disappointment of the player when the starting prize is not won.

On the other hand, since the information display part 753 is provided at a position where the nails 411A and 411B do not overlap when viewed from the front of the game machine, the characters "OUT" can be sufficiently visually recognized when the information display part 753 is viewed from the front of the game machine. Therefore, the information display part 753 can suitably inform the player seen from the front of the gaming machine that the area to which the information display part 753 is attached is an area where the start winning of the special symbol does not occur even if the game ball enters.

<Ninth Embodiment>
Next, a ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the pachinko machine 100 according to the ninth embodiment, the resin cover 715 of the reel device 710 is provided with half mirrors 761A and 761B capable of reflecting light emitted from the pressing device 261 and the like. In addition, in the following description, the same reference numerals are given to the same configurations as those in the first to eighth embodiments, and the description thereof is omitted.

FIG. 33(a) is a front view of the reel device 710 of the ninth embodiment, and FIG. 33(b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the reel device 710 along line DD of FIG. 33(a). FIG. 33(c) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the pachinko machine 100 cut in the vertical direction at approximately the center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front of the gaming machine, and FIG.

In addition, in FIG.33(b), illustration of the light-guide plate 715B and the board surface light-emitting device 490B is abbreviate|omitted. Also, in FIG. 33(c), the island 10 on which the pachinko machine 100 is installed is also illustrated. Also, in FIG. 33(c), for reference, the head of the player X during the game is illustrated, and the optical path of the light emitted by the upper center frame light emitting device 271 and the pressing operation device 261 is illustrated by a chain double-dashed line. In addition, in FIGS. 33(b) and 33(c), hatching of cross sections is omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 33(a) and 33(b), one side of the resin cover 715 of the reel device 710 (in this embodiment, the front side of the outer cover 715A) is provided with a half mirror 761A and a half mirror 761B above and below the middle line display area, respectively, while leaving the middle line display area of the vertically aligned effective lines. Although the resin cover 715 of this embodiment has the light guide plate 715B (not shown in FIG. 33B), it may be a simple transparent cover that does not have the light guide plate 715B.

The half mirrors 761A and 761B are semi-transmissive mirrors that transmit light from the back side (rear side) of the resin cover 715 forward while reflecting light from the front side (front side) of the resin cover 715. As the half mirrors 761A and 761B, a transparent plate or the like on which aluminum is vapor-deposited can be appropriately used.

In this embodiment, each of the reels 711L, 711M, and 711R is configured as a hollow cylinder with a permeable decorative pattern drawn on its outer peripheral surface. Each of the reels 711L, 711M, 711R has a common internal structure, and the internal structure of the middle reel 711M will be representatively described below with reference to FIG. 33(b).

As shown in FIG. 33(b), inside the middle reel 711M, three light-emitting devices 718A to 718C are provided for irradiating light from the inside to an area visible from the resin cover 715 on the outer peripheral surface of the middle reel 711M.

Among the light emitting devices 718A to 718C, the uppermost light emitting device 718A is a light emitting device that irradiates light to the area of the upper line of the pattern effective lines on the outer peripheral surface of the middle reel 711M, and is provided with a light emitting means E6 such as an LED directed slightly upward. By lighting (lighting) the light emitting means E6, the symbols positioned on the upper line among the symbols drawn on the outer peripheral surface of the middle reel 711M can be illuminated.

On the other hand, the lowermost light emitting device 718C is a light emitting device that irradiates the lower line area of the effective lines with light, and has a light emitting means E8 such as an LED facing forward and slightly downward. By turning on the light-emitting means E8, the symbols positioned on the lower line among the symbols drawn on the outer peripheral surface of the middle reel 711M can be illuminated.

The light-emitting device 718B arranged between the light-emitting device 718A and the light-emitting device 718B is a light-emitting device that irradiates the middle line area of the effective lines with light, and has a light-emitting means E7 such as an LED directed substantially horizontally forward. By turning on the light emitting means E7, the symbols positioned on the middle line among the symbols drawn on the outer peripheral surface of the middle reel 711M can be illuminated.

Lighting (emission) and extinguishing of these light emitting devices 718A to 718C are independently controlled by a sub control board 940. FIG. Therefore, the pattern positioned on the upper line, the pattern positioned on the middle line, and the pattern positioned on the lower line can be illuminated independently.

A partition wall 719A is provided between the light emitting device 718A and the light emitting device 718B. The partition wall 719A has the function of preventing light emitted from the light emitting device 718A (light emitting means E6) from entering the region of the middle line and blocking light from the light emitting device 718B (light emitting means E7) from entering the region of the upper line.

A partition wall 719B is provided between the light emitting device 718B and the light emitting device 718C. The partition wall 719B has the function of preventing light emitted from the light emitting device 718B (light emitting means E7) from entering the area of the lower line and blocking light from the light emitting device 718C (light emitting means E8) from entering the area of the middle line.

When the light emitting device 718A is lit (lighted), the half mirror 761A provided above the display area of the middle line transmits the light from the light emitting means E6 forward, thereby allowing the pattern positioned on the upper line to be visible from the front. On the other hand, when the light emitting device 718A and the like are turned off, the half mirror 761A at this position is not irradiated with light from the back side (rear side), so that the front side (front side) becomes a mirror, thereby reflecting the light from the front side (rear side).

Similarly, when the light emitting device 718C is turned on, the half mirror 761B provided below the display area of the middle line transmits the light from the light emitting means E8 forward, thereby making the pattern positioned on the lower line visible from the front. On the other hand, when the light emitting device 718C or the like is turned off, the half mirror 761B at this position is not irradiated with light from the back side (rear side), so that the front side (front side) becomes a mirror, thereby reflecting the light from the front side (rear side).

As shown in FIG. 33(c), a resin cover 715 that covers the front sides of the reels 711L, 711M, and 711R protrudes forward from the base 701 in an arcuate shape in a side sectional view. Half mirrors 761A and 761B are provided along the surface of resin cover 715 (outer cover 715A) on the upper and lower portions of resin cover 715. Therefore, when light emitting device 718A and the like are turned off, half mirror 761A provided on the upper side functions as a mirror having a convex surface facing forward and upward in a side sectional view. Further, the half mirror 761B provided on the lower side functions as a mirror having a convex surface facing forward and downward in a side sectional view when the light emitting device 718C and the like are turned off.

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the half mirror 761A provided on the upper part of the resin cover 715 reflects the light emitted from the upper center frame light emitting device 271 provided on the upper central edge 211A (see FIG. 5) of the front decoration 210, and is provided at a position where the reflected light can be visually recognized by the player playing the game. As a result, when the upper center frame light emitting device 271 is turned on, the player can visually recognize the image G1 of the emitted upper center frame light emitting device 271 reflected in the half mirror 761A, as shown in FIG. 33(a).

The pressing operation device 261 of this embodiment is configured to be turned on (light emitted) or turned off under the control of the sub-control board 940 . In other words, in the pressing operation device 261, the operation portion pressed by the player is configured as a light-transmitting light-emitting portion.

In the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment, the half mirror 761B provided in the lower part of the resin cover 715 reflects the light emitted from the pressing operation device 261, and is provided at a position where the reflected light can be visually recognized by the player during the game. Accordingly, when the pressing operation device 261 is lit, the player can visually recognize the illuminated image G2 of the pressing operation device 261 reflected in the half mirror 761B as shown in FIG. 33(a).

Further, as shown in FIG. 33(d), wave motion lamps 771 are provided on the left and right sides of the pressing operation device 261. As shown in FIG. The wave motion lamp 771 is composed of three lamps 771A to 771C arranged outward from the pressing device 261 side. Each of the lamps 771A to 771C constituting the wave lamp 771 is provided with a light-emitting means such as an LED on the back side thereof, and by controlling the light-emitting means by the sub-control board 940, the light-transmitting light-emitting part superimposed on the front side of the light-emitting means is configured to turn on or off.

In the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment, the half mirror 761AB provided in the lower part of the resin cover 715 reflects the light emitted from the wave lamp 771 (lamps 771A to 771C), and is provided at a position where the reflected light can be visually recognized by the player playing the game. Thus, when the wave lamp 771 is turned on, the player can visually recognize the image G3 of the lighted wave lamp 771 reflected in the half mirror 761B, as shown in FIG. 33(a).

Since the half mirrors 761A and 761B are not arranged in the display area of the middle line of the resin cover 715, the player can always see the symbols positioned on the middle line of the reels 711L, 711M and 711R by always lighting the light emitting device 718B.

As shown in FIG. 33(c), the holding lamp 720 is provided on the rear end side (closer to the substrate 701) of the lower half mirror 761B. Since the lower half mirror 761B has a convex surface facing forward and downward in a side sectional view, the light from the reserve lamp 720 is easily reflected downward by the half mirror 761B and is difficult for the player to see.

Therefore, it is possible to prevent the visibility of the image G2 (image of the pressing device 261) and the image G3 (image of the wave lamp 771) reflected on the half mirror 761B from being hindered by the image of the holding lamp 720 reflected on the half mirror 761B.

In addition, while the pressing operation device 261 and wave lamp 771 are positioned forward and below the resin cover 715, the holding lamp 720 is provided on the rear end side of the lower half mirror 761B and closer to the half mirror 761B than the pressing operation device 261 and wave lamp 771.

Therefore, while the image G2 of the pressing operation device 261 and the image G3 of the wave lamp 771 can be seen in the front side area of the half mirror 761B (the area on the top side of the resin cover 715), the image of the holding lamp 720 that the player can see is limited to the rear end side of the half mirror 761B. Therefore, even when the image of the holding lamp 720 reflected on the half mirror 761B is visually recognized by the player, the image of the holding lamp 720 hardly hinders the visibility of the images G2 and G3.

Although not shown in FIG. 33 (C), the lottery result display device 730 is also located on the rear end side of the lower half mirror 761B (near the base 701b), as in the holding lamp 720, and is located near the Half Mirror 761B from the pressurized operation device 261 and the wave lamp 771. Because of the fact, the visuality of the statue G2 and the statue G3 is not inhibited by the image of the lottery result display device 730 reflected in the half mirror 761B.

As shown in FIG. 33(a), between the left reel 711L and the middle reel 711M and between the middle reel 711M and the right reel 711R, there are provided substantially circular partitions 717 along the winding direction of the reels 711L, 711M and 711R. The partition 717 is fixed so as not to rotate independently of the reels 711L, 711M, and 711R, and a reel-side lamp 717A is provided on the front side of the partition 717 in a region behind the half mirror 761B.

The reel-side lamps 717A are provided with light-emitting means such as LEDs on the back side thereof, and by controlling the light-emitting means with the sub-control board 940, the light-emitting part as the reel-side lamp 717A having translucency superimposed on the front side of the light-emitting means is configured to turn on or off.

In this embodiment, the reel-side lamps 717A are configured to emit light in a color corresponding to the emission color of the pressing operation device 261 or the wave lamp 771 (the same color, or a color having a specific correspondence) at timing synchronized with the lighting timing of the pressing operation device 261 or the wave lamp 771, for example. Since the reel side lamp 717A is provided behind the half mirror 761B, when the reel side lamp 717A is turned on, the player can visually recognize the light of the reel side lamp 717A passing through the half mirror 761B.

Next, the action and effect of the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment described above will be described.

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the upper half mirror 761A, which is a mirror having a convex surface facing forward and upward in a side sectional view, reflects light emitted from the upper center frame light emitting device 271, and is provided at a position where the reflected light can be visually recognized by the player playing the game. Therefore, when the upper center frame light emitting device 271 is turned on, the player can recognize that the upper center frame light emitting device 271 emits light and in what color the upper center frame light emitting device 271 emits light by visually recognizing the image G1 reflected on the half mirror 761A without moving the line of sight to the upper center frame light emitting device 271.例文帳に追加

The frame light emitting device provided in the upper center edge 211A, such as the upper center frame light emitting device 271, may emit light as part of the suggestive effect that is performed during the period in which the decorative symbols are variably displayed. Since the player generally tends to want to pay attention to the variable display of the decorative pattern during the variable display, even when the upper center frame light emitting device 271 emits light as part of the suggestive performance, the player can recognize the light emitting state of the upper center frame light emitting device 271 from the image G1 reflected on the half mirror 761A while watching the variable display of the decorative pattern.

In addition, the lower half mirror 761B, which has a convex surface facing forward and downward in a side sectional view, reflects the light emitted from the pressing operation device 261 and the wave lamp 771, and is provided at a position where the reflected light can be visually recognized by the player during the game. Therefore, when the pressing operation device 261 or the wave lamp 771 is turned on, the player can recognize that the pressing operation device 261 or the wave lamp 771 has emitted light and in what color the pressing operation device 261 or the wave lamp 771 has emitted light without moving the line of sight to the pressing operation device 261 or the wave lamp 771 by visually recognizing the image G2 or the image G3 reflected on the half mirror 761B.

The pressing operation device 261 may emit light in synchronization with an operation-enabled period during which the operation of the pressing operation device 261 is enabled, or with a notification period that indicates the operation-enabled period prior to the operation-enabled period. Note that the operable period includes a period during which the pressing operation device 261 can be operated to display a special performance that is one of the suggestive effects, a period during which the pressing operation device 261 can be operated for adjusting the volume, and a period during which the pressing operation device 261 can be operated to change the music played during the game.

Since the player generally tends to want to pay attention to the variable display of the decorative pattern during the variable display, even when the pressing operation device 261 emits light during the variable display of the decorative pattern, the player can recognize the light emitting state of the pressing device 261 from the image G2 reflected on the half mirror 761B while watching the variable display of the decorative pattern. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from missing the operation timing (operable timing) of the pressing operation device 261 without noticing the light emission of the pressing operation device 261 .

Similarly to the pressing operation device 261, the wave lamp 771 may emit light in synchronization with the operable period of the pressing operation device 261 or the notification period for the operable period. However, even when the wave lamp 771 is illuminated during the variable display of the decorative pattern, the player can recognize the light emission state of the wave lamp 771 from the image G3 reflected on the half mirror 761B while watching the variable display of the decorative pattern. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from missing the time to operate the pressing operation device 261 without noticing the light emission of the wave lamp 771 .

In addition, even when the pressing operation device 261 and the wave lamp 771 are illuminated as part of the suggestive performance regardless of the operation timing of the pressing operation device 261, the player can recognize the suggestive performance by visually recognizing the image G2 and the image G3 reflected on the half mirror 761B while watching the variable display of the decorative pattern.

Further, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the reel side lamps 717A are configured to emit light in a color corresponding to the emission color of the pressing operation device 261 or the wave lamp 771 at the timing synchronized with the lighting timing of the pressing operation device 261 or the wave lamp 771. Therefore, the operation timing is reported not only by the light reflected by the half mirror 761B (that is, the images G2 and G3 reflected on the half mirror 761B), but also by the direct light from the reel side lamps 717A provided between the reels that the player tends to pay attention to, so that the player can more preferably prevent the player from overlooking the operation timing.

<Tenth Embodiment>
Next, referring to FIG. 34, a tenth embodiment will be described. In the pachinko machine 100 according to the tenth embodiment, the display area of each symbol row displayed by each reel 711L, 711M, 711R is configured to be variable. In the following description, the same reference numerals are assigned to the same configurations as those in the first to ninth embodiments, and description thereof is omitted.

34(a) is a front view of the reel device 710 when the display area of each symbol row on the reels 711L, 711M, 711R is the basic display area, and FIG. 34(b) is a front view of the reel device 710 when the display area of each symbol row on the reels 711L, 711M, 711R is a reduced display area. FIG. 34(c) is a top view of the reel device 710 schematically showing a mechanism for varying the display area of the symbol row, and FIG. 34(d) is a top view of the reel device 710 schematically showing a state in which the display area of the symbol row is reduced. In FIGS. 34(c) and 34(d), the gears 781 to 783 are illustrated as circles from which the shapes of the tooth portions are omitted.

As shown in FIG. 34(a), in the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment, the reels 711L, 711M, and 711R are basically arranged such that their center axes are on the same line. As a result, the symbol rows of the respective reels 711L, 711M, and 711R are aligned in the left-right direction without overlapping each other in the basic state. Therefore, in a basic state, the display area of each symbol row by each reel 711L, 711M, 711R is configured to have a width of length W1 (length in the horizontal direction).

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, when the player operates a predetermined operation unit (for example, the pressing operation device 261), the reels 711L, 711M, and 711R move, and as shown in FIG. That is, in the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment, the player can reduce the display area of each symbol row by each reel 711L, 711M, 711R by operating a predetermined operation unit.

As shown in FIG. 34(c), between the left reel 711L and the middle reel 711M and between the middle reel 711M and the right reel 711R, there are provided substantially circular partitions 717 along the winding direction of the reels 711L, 711M and 711R. The two partitions 717 support the rotation shaft of the middle reel 711M so that the middle reel 711M can rotate.

On the rear side of one of the two partitions 717 (in this embodiment, the right partition 717), an extension 786 is provided that crosses the rotational axis of the middle reel 711M and extends rearward in a substantially horizontal direction. A rack gear (not shown) tooth-cut against the teeth of the gear 781 is linearly formed substantially horizontally on the right side of the right partition portion 717 and the extension portion 786 (that is, the side facing away from the middle reel 711M).

The gear 781 is connected to a drive mechanism (not shown) that is driven and controlled by the sub control board 940 and operates under drive control of the drive mechanism by the sub control board 940 . The gear 781 is provided so as to mesh with the rack gear formed on the partition portion 717 and the extension portion 786, so that the middle reel 711M can be moved in the front-rear direction by the rack and pinion mechanism formed by the rack gear formed on the partition portion 717 and the extension portion 786 and the gear 781.

The left reel 711L is provided with an extending portion 787 extending substantially horizontally to the left from the rotation shaft of the left reel 711L. A rack gear (not shown) tooth-cut against the teeth of the gear 782 is linearly formed substantially horizontally on the rear side surface of the extended portion 787 .

The gear 782 is connected to a drive mechanism (not shown) that is driven and controlled by the sub control board 940 and operates under drive control of the drive mechanism by the sub control board 940 . The gear 782 is provided so as to mesh with a rack gear formed on the extension portion 787, so that the left reel 711L can be moved in the left-right direction by a rack and pinion mechanism formed by the rack gear formed on the extension portion 787 and the gear 782.

The right reel 711R is provided with an extending portion 788 extending substantially horizontally to the right from the rotation axis of the right reel 711R. A rack gear (not shown) tooth-cut against the teeth of the gear 783 is linearly formed substantially horizontally on the rear side surface of the extended portion 788 .

The gear 783 is connected to a drive mechanism (not shown) that is driven and controlled by the sub control board 940 and operates under drive control of the drive mechanism by the sub control board 940 . The gear 783 is provided so as to mesh with a rack gear formed on the extension portion 788, so that the right reel 711R can be moved in the left-right direction by a rack and pinion mechanism formed by the rack gear formed on the extension portion 788 and the gear 783.

When the player operates a predetermined operation unit (for example, the pressing operation device 261) in the state where the display area of each symbol row by the reels 711L, 711M, and 711R is shown in FIG.

Next, the gears 782 and 783 are operated, thereby moving the left reel 711L rightward (arrow M2 direction) and the right reel 711R leftward (arrow M3 direction). In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, it is assumed that the left reel 711L and the right reel 711R move substantially the same amount.

As a result, as shown in FIG. 34(b), the left reel 711L moving rightward and the right reel 711R moving leftward reduce the display area of the middle reel 711M positioned behind these reels 711L and 711R to the extent that the number information of the main symbols can be recognized. Therefore, the display area of each symbol row by each reel 711L, 711M, 711R is reduced in the width direction (horizontal direction).

In addition, when the display area of each symbol row by each reel 711L, 711M, 711R is in the state shown in FIG. 34(b), when the player operates a predetermined operation unit (for example, the pressing operation device 261), the left and right reels 711L, 711R are operated to open in the left and right direction, and then the middle reel 711M moves forward and returns to the state shown in FIG. 34(a).

Next, the action and effect of the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment described above will be described.

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the player can reduce the display area of each symbol row by the reels 711L, 711M, 711R by operating a predetermined operation unit (for example, the pressing operation device 261), so that the player can be prevented from feeling that the variable display of decorative symbols is difficult to see.

Further, when the display area of each symbol row by each reel 711L, 711M, 711R is reduced, the left symbol row (left reel 711L) and the right symbol row (right reel 711R), which are symbol rows that can constitute the ready-to-win display, are located in front of the middle symbol row (middle reel 711M), whereby the ready-to-win display can be displayed with symbols of the same size as before the reduction of the display area. Therefore, by reducing the display area of each symbol row, it is possible to suppress the loss of expectation for the ready-to-win display.

Further, when the display area of each symbol row by each reel 711L, 711M, 711R is reduced, the middle reel 711M is moved to the rear side (back side), and the left and right reels 711L, 711R are configured to move toward each other by substantially the same distance. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the center of the display area of each symbol row from moving due to reduction. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player's line of sight from moving to the left or right due to the reduction in the display area of each symbol row when viewing the variable display of the decorative symbols.

<Eleventh Embodiment>
Next, an eleventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 35 to 40. FIG. In the pachinko machine 100 according to the eleventh embodiment, the light guide plate unit 810 including the light guide plate 715B having the curved portion can be preferably assembled. In the following description, the same reference numerals are given to the same configurations as those in the first to tenth embodiments, and the description thereof is omitted.

FIG. 35 is an exploded perspective view of the game board 400X viewed from the front side. Note that FIG. 35 also shows the main controller 370 and the sub-controller 390 mounted on the back side of the game board 400X. Also, in FIG. 35, illustration of a part of the structures arranged on the front side of the base 401 such as the inner and outer rails 402 and 403 and the nail 411 is omitted.

As shown in FIG. 35, in the game board 400X, a drum base 801 for holding a reel device 710 is arranged on the back side of the base 401. As shown in FIG. A reel device 710 having three rows of reels 711L, 711M, and 711R is attached to the drum base 801 from the rear side (back side) of the drum base 800 . The resin cover 715 is attached to the front side of the drum base 801 together with the base 701 and the like as a light guide plate unit 810 to be described later.

36 is an exploded perspective view of the drum base 801 seen from the front side, and FIG. 37 is a perspective view of the light guide plate unit 810 seen from the rear side. As shown in FIG. 35 , the drum base 801 is a base body made of resin having substantially the same outer shape as the base body 401 . An opening 801A is formed through the drum base 801 at the mounting position of the reel device 710 . The reel device 710 is attached to the drum base 801 by inserting the reels 711L, 711M, and 711R from the back side of the opening 801A and fixing them with fixing members (not shown) such as screws.

Substrates 803 on which light emitting means 802 such as LEDs are mounted are provided on the left and right sides of the opening 801A. The light-emitting means 802 is a light-emitting means that is positioned behind the area on which the fish pattern 741 is drawn on the base 401 and the area on which the fish pattern 742 is drawn on the base 701, and can emit light toward these areas. That is, the light emitting means 802 in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment corresponds to the light emitting means E1 (see FIG. 30(b)) and the light emitting means E2 (see FIG. 30(b)) in the pachinko machine 100 of the eighth embodiment. Light emission control of the light emitting means 802 is performed by the sub control board 940 .

The board 803 in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment corresponds to the left and right portions of the reel device 710 of the board light emitting device 490A (see FIG. 30(b)) and the board light emitting device 490B (see FIG. 30(b)) in the pachinko machine 100 of the eighth embodiment. In addition, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, illustration of a substrate corresponding to the board light emitting device 490C (see FIG. 30(b)) is omitted.

A holding unit 809 is provided below the opening 801A. The holding unit 809 includes a substrate (not shown) on which a holding lamp 720, a lottery result display device 730, and the like are mounted, and a light-transmissive cover covering the front surface of the substrate.

A light guide plate unit 810 is arranged in front of the substrate 803 and the holding unit 809 . The light guide plate unit 810 includes an outer cover 715A integrated with the base 701, a light guide plate 715B arranged behind the outer cover 715A (see FIG. 36), holding members 811 (see FIG. 36) capable of pressing the curved portion of the light guide plate 715B against the curved portion of the outer cover 715A on both the left and right sides, and light emitting means (not shown) for irradiating the upper end surface of the light guide plate 715B with light. 2 and a light source unit 813 including a light emitting means 834 for emitting light to the lower end surface of the light guide plate 715B.

A pattern sticker 703 and a pattern sticker 704 having a fish pattern 742 printed with translucent colored paint are pasted on the front side of the base body 701 on both the left and right sides and the upper side of the outer cover 715A. A light emitting means 802 capable of irradiating light toward the picture sticker 703 is positioned behind the picture sticker 703 . Further, on the rear side of the pattern sticker 704, a light-emitting means 825 such as an LED that is arranged on the front end side of the upper surface of the substrate 822 (see FIG. 36) of the light source unit 812 and can emit light toward the pattern sticker 704 is positioned.

By lighting (lighting) the light-emitting means 802 positioned behind the pattern sticker 703 and the light-emitting means 825 positioned behind the pattern sticker 704, a pattern 742 that emerges in the light can be displayed. The light emitting means 825 in the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment corresponds to the light emitting means E2 (see FIG. 30(b)) in the pachinko machine 100 of the eighth embodiment. Light emission control of the light emitting means 825 is performed by the sub control board 940 .

A region 701A on the back side of the sticking position of the picture sticker 703 on the substrate 701 is subjected to light diffusion processing (for example, embossing) to form fine unevenness. Although not shown in FIG. 37 and later-described FIGS. 39 and 40, the area on the back side of the sticking position of the picture sticker 703 on the substrate 701 is also subjected to the same light diffusion processing as the area 701A. By performing such a light diffusion process, the entire area of the picture sticker 703 or the picture sticker 704 can be illuminated by the light emitted from the light emitting means 802 or 825 .

As shown in FIG. 35, on the upper front side of the light guide plate unit 810, a substrate 806 on which light emitting means 804 and 805 such as LEDs are mounted is provided. The light emitting means 804 is positioned behind the upper portion of the central structure 420 and emits light forward. The light emitting means 805 is a light emitting means that is positioned behind the portion of the base 401 above the central structure 420 and emits light forward. Light emission control of these light emitting means 804 and 805 is performed by a sub control board 940 . A lens 807 for diffusing the light emitted from the light emitting means 804 and 805 is provided on the front side of the substrate 806 .

Next, the configuration of light guide plate unit 810 will be described in more detail with reference to FIGS. 38 and 40. FIG. FIG. 38 is an exploded perspective view of the light guide plate unit 810 viewed from the front side. 39 and 40 are both exploded perspective views of the light guide plate unit 810 viewed from the rear side. 38 and 40, illustration of screws 871A, 871B, 872A, 872B, 881A, 881B, 882A, 882B, and 896 is omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 38 and 39, in front of the light guide plate unit 810, an outer cover 715A integrated with the base 701 is arranged. The front surface of the outer cover 715A includes curved portions 715A1 that curve along the curved surfaces of the reels 711L, 711M, and 711R of the reel device 710, and side portions 715A2 that extend between the left and right ends of the curved portions 715A1 and the base 701.

A region 715A3 (see FIG. 39) provided with light diffusion processing (e.g., embossing) forming fine irregularities is provided in the lower portion of the rear side (back side) surface (surface facing the reel device 710) of the curved portion 715A1. On the upper side of the curved portion 715A1, similarly to the region 715A3, a band-shaped region (not shown) is provided on the rear surface, which is subjected to light diffusion processing to form fine irregularities.

The region 715A3 formed on the lower side of the curved portion 715A1 and the band-shaped region similar to the region 715A3 formed on the upper side are provided so as not to overlap the symbols stopped and displayed on the lower line L3 (see FIG. 27) and the upper line L1 (see FIG. 27), respectively, when viewed from the front of the gaming machine. In addition, the inner surfaces of the left and right side portions 715A2 (surfaces facing the reel device 710) are also subjected to light diffusion processing (for example, texturing) to form fine irregularities.

Projections 891 (see FIG. 39) protruding rearward are provided along the left and right edges of the outer cover 715A on the rear side (back side) surface of the base 701 connected to the outer cover 715A. Approximately in the center of the protrusion 891, a screw hole is formed into which a screw 896 used for fixing the pressing member 811 can be screwed. The screw hole and the screw 896 are arranged so that the longitudinal direction is the front-rear direction, and after the pressing member 811 is arranged at a position spaced apart on the rear side of the outer cover 715A, by tightening the screw 896, the relative position in the front-rear direction is gradually brought closer and can be integrated.

Projections 892 and 893 (see FIG. 39) project rearward from the rear surface of the base 701 above and below the projections 891 provided on the left and right sides of the outer cover 715A. The two protrusions 892 located on the upper side are protrusions that are inserted through the through holes 843A and 843B (see FIG. 38) of the light source unit 812, respectively. On the other hand, the two protrusions 893 located on the lower side are protrusions that are inserted through the through holes 853A and 853B of the light source unit 813, respectively.

Approximately in the center of the protrusion 892, a screw hole is formed into which screws 871A and 871B (see FIG. 39) used for fixing the light source unit 812 can be screwed. On the other hand, substantially in the center of the protrusion 893, a screw hole is formed into which screws 881A and 881B (see FIG. 39) used for fixing the light source unit 813 can be screwed. These screw holes and screws 871A, 871B, 881A, and 881B are arranged such that the longitudinal direction is the front-rear direction, and the light source units 812, 813 and the outer cover 715A are not separated from each other in the front-rear direction by fixing the screws 871A, 871B, 881A, and 881B in a state where the light source units 812 and 813 are spaced apart behind the outer cover 715A. After that, proper alignment in the vertical direction and a complete fixing operation while gradually correcting deformation of the light guide plate 715B, which will be described later, can be performed for integration.

Further, a through hole 701B for inserting a screw (not shown) for fixing the light guide plate unit 810 to the drum base 801 is formed around the outer cover 715A. After the assembly of the light guide plate unit 810 is completed, the light guide plate unit 810 can be fixed to the drum base 801 by screwing a screw inserted from the rear side of the through hole 701B into a screw hole (not shown) formed at a predetermined position on the back side of the drum base 801.

A light guide plate 715B is arranged behind the outer cover 715A integrated with the base 701 . The light guide plate 715B includes a curved portion 715B1 curved along the curved surfaces of the reels 711L, 711M, and 711R of the reel device 710 and arranged behind the curved portion 715A1 of the outer cover 715A, a planar portion 715B2 positioned above the curved portion 715B1, and a planar portion 715B3 positioned below the curved portion 715B1. The fish pattern 743 that is displayed by light emission is formed by fine unevenness on one side (for example, the back side) of the curved portion 715B1.

Here, since the light guide plate 715B is curved along the curved surfaces of the reels 711L, 711M, and 711R of the reel device 710, the fish pattern 743 that is illuminated and displayed on the curved portion 715B1 can be arranged at a position spaced apart by a predetermined distance on the entire front side along the curved surfaces of the reels 711L, 711M, and 711R of the reel device 710. Therefore, even if the player's visual point position changes due to the player's height, posture, etc., the position where the fish pattern 743 is superimposed and displayed on the front side of the reel device 710 does not greatly shift, and the fish pattern 743 can be displayed at an appropriate position positioned in front of the surfaces of the reels 711L, 711M, 711R by a fixed distance.

Below the light guide plate 715B, a light source unit 813 for irradiating light onto the lower end surface 715B4 (see FIG. 39) of the light guide plate 715B is arranged. The light source unit 813 includes a substrate base 831 arranged behind the lower flat portion 715B3 of the light guide plate 715B, a substrate 832 held by the substrate base 831, and a reflector 833 arranged in front of the flat portion 715B3.

The substrate base 831 has a recessed portion 831A (see FIG. 38) whose lower and front sides are open to accommodate the substrate 832. The substrate 832 is accommodated and fixed in the recessed portion 831A. A plurality of light emitting units 834 are arranged on the upper side of the substrate 832 along the front side of the substrate 832 in the longitudinal direction.

The light emitting means 834 is a light emitting means for irradiating light onto the lower end surface 715B4 of the light guide plate 715B, and is composed of a light emitting means having directivity in the light irradiation direction (output direction), such as an LED. The light emitting means 834 in the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment corresponds to the light emitting means E4 (see FIG. 31) in the pachinko machine 100 of the eighth embodiment. Light emission control of the light emitting means 834 is performed by the sub control board 940 .

When the light source unit 813 is fixed to the light guide plate 715B, the light emitting means 834 is arranged below the lower end surface 715B4 of the light guide plate 715B so that the light irradiation direction is directed toward the lower end surface 715B4 (that is, upward) along the lower end surface 715B4. Therefore, when the substrate 832 is accommodated in the recess 831A, the plurality of light emitting means 834 protrude forward from the front surface 831B of the substrate base 831, as shown in FIG.

A surface 833B (see FIG. 39) of the reflector 833, which faces the surface 831B of the substrate base 831 with the light guide plate 715B interposed therebetween, is configured as a light-impermeable surface that is mirror-finished (for example, chrome-plated). Similarly, the surface 831B of the substrate base 831 is also configured as a light-impermeable surface having a mirror-finished surface. As a result, in a state where the light source unit 813 is fixed to the light guide plate 715B, the light emitted from the light emitting means 834 irradiated toward the lower end surface 715B4 of the light guide plate 715B from below the lower end surface 715B4 of the light guide plate 715B is guided to the lower end surface 715B4 so as to appropriately enter the lower end surface 715B4 of the light guide plate 715B by being reflected by the surfaces 831B and 833B.

A through hole 851A is provided on the left end side of the substrate base 831 when viewed from the front of the game machine, and a through hole 852A is provided inside the through hole 851A (on the right side of the through hole 851A when viewed from the front of the game machine). On the other hand, a through hole 851B is provided on the right end side of the board base 831 when viewed from the front of the game machine, and a through hole 852B is provided inside the through hole 851B (on the left side of the through hole 851B when viewed from the front of the game machine).

A through hole 853A communicating with the through hole 851A in a state where the light source unit 813 is fixed to the light guide plate 715B is provided on the left end side of the reflector 833 when viewed from the front of the gaming machine. On the other hand, on the right end side of the reflector 833 when viewed from the front of the game machine, a through hole 853B is provided that communicates with the through hole 851B when the light source unit 813 is fixed to the light guide plate 715B.

A projection 854A (see FIG. 39) is provided inside the through hole 853A of the reflector 833 (on the right side of the through hole 853A when viewed from the front of the game machine) and projects rearward from the rear surface 833B (see FIG. 39). The protrusion 854A is a protrusion that is inserted through a through hole 862A formed in the light guide plate 715B on the lower left side in the front view of the game machine and the through hole 852A of the substrate base 831 when the light source unit 813 is attached to the light guide plate 715B.

On the other hand, inside the through-hole 853B of the reflector 833 (on the left side of the through-hole 853B when viewed from the front of the game machine), a projecting portion 854B projecting rearward from the rear side surface 833B (see FIG. 39) is provided. The projecting portion 854B is a projection that is inserted through a through hole 862B formed on the lower right side of the light guide plate 715B when viewed from the front of the game machine and the through hole 852B of the substrate base 831 when the light source unit 813 is attached to the light guide plate 715B.

A threaded hole into which a screw 882A can be screwed is formed substantially in the center of the projection 854A, and a threaded hole into which the screw 882B can be screwed is formed substantially in the center of the projection 854B. Therefore, after combining the substrate base 831 and the reflector 833 so that the projection 854A is inserted into the through hole 862A and the through hole 852A, and the projection 854B is inserted into the through hole 862B and the through hole 852B, the screw 882A is screwed into the screw hole of the projection 854A, and the screw 882B is screwed into the screw hole of the projection 854B. The unit 813 can be fixed (attached) to the light guide plate 715B.

Here, the screws 882A and 882B are arranged so that the longitudinal direction is the front-rear direction. Therefore, by fixing (temporarily fixing) the screws 882A and 882B, the substrate base 831 and the reflector 833 are integrated so that there is no front-rear separation, and then the light source unit 813 and the light guide plate 715B can be integrated by performing a complete fixing operation while slowly aligning the relative positions and angles of the light guide plate 715B so as not to cause excessive deformation.

As shown in FIG. 39, the through hole 862A formed in the light guide plate 715B is configured in a substantially circular shape having a size that matches the outer diameter of the protrusion 854A so that the positional displacement of the protrusion 854A inserted into the through hole 862A with respect to the through hole 862A is hardly allowed in any direction. Therefore, the protrusion 854A inserted through the through hole 862A is positioned at a substantially constant position by the through hole 862A.

On the other hand, the through hole 862B has a maximum vertical height H3 that is the same as the maximum vertical height of the through hole 862A, but a maximum horizontal width W4 that is larger than the maximum horizontal width W3 of the through hole 862A. Therefore, the projection 854B inserted through the through hole 862B is positioned at a substantially constant position in the vertical direction with respect to the through hole 862B, similarly to the projection 854A inserted into the through hole 862A, but the allowable range of positioning in the horizontal direction with respect to the through hole 862B is larger than that in the vertical direction. As a result, the distance between each of the plurality of light emitting means 834 provided in the light source unit 813 and the lower end face 715B4 (see FIG. 39) of the light guide plate 715B can be made substantially constant, and the light emission display of the fish pattern 743 by the light guide plate 715B can be made to have a good appearance with little variation in the amount of light in the left-right direction.

When the light source unit 813 is fixed to the light guide plate 715B, the through hole 851A of the substrate base 831 and the through hole 853A of the reflector 833 communicate with each other, and the through hole 851B of the substrate base 831 and the through hole 853B of the reflector 833 communicate with each other. A screw 881A inserted through the communicating through-holes 851A and 853A and a screw 881B inserted through the communicating through-holes 851B and 853B are screwed into a protrusion 893 (see FIG. 39) projecting backward from the base 701, whereby the light source unit 813 fixed to the lower side of the light guide plate 715B can be fixed to the base 701.

As shown in FIG. 39, the through-hole 853A of the reflector 833 and the through-hole 851A of the substrate base 831 corresponding to the through-hole 853A are formed in an elongated hole shape with a maximum vertical height H5 larger than the maximum horizontal width W5 and a slightly larger vertical dimension than the outer diameter of the protrusion 893. Note that the maximum height H5 is greater than the maximum height H3 of the through holes 862A and 862B in the vertical direction. Similarly, the through-hole 853B of the reflector 833 and the through-hole 851B of the substrate base 831 corresponding to the through-hole 853B have the same shape as the through-hole 853A.

Therefore, the protrusions 893 inserted through the communicating through-holes 851A, 853A and the communicating through-holes 851B, 853B are allowed to move vertically relative to the through-holes 851A, 853A or the through-holes 851B, 853B more than laterally. Accordingly, the allowable range of positioning of the light source unit 813 with respect to the base 701 is larger in the vertical direction than in the horizontal direction.

A light source unit 812 is arranged above the light guide plate 715B to irradiate the upper end surface 715B5 (see FIG. 39) of the light guide plate 715B with light. The light source unit 812 includes a substrate base 821 arranged on the rear side of the upper flat portion 715B2 of the light guide plate 715B, a substrate 822 held by the substrate base 821, and a reflector 823 arranged on the front side of the flat portion 715B2.

The substrate base 821 has a recess 821A whose upper and front sides are open so as to accommodate the substrate 822. The substrate 822 is accommodated and fixed in the recess 821A. A plurality of light emitting means (not shown) are arranged on the lower surface of the substrate 822 along the front side of the substrate 822 in the longitudinal direction. In the following, for convenience, the light-emitting means provided on the lower surface of the substrate 822 is also referred to as "light-emitting means 824".

The light emitting means 824 is a light emitting means for irradiating light onto the upper end surface 715B5 of the light guide plate 715B, and is composed of a light emitting means such as an LED having directivity in the light irradiation direction (output direction), similar to the light emitting means 834. The light emitting means 824 in the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment corresponds to the light emitting means E4 (see FIG. 31) in the pachinko machine 100 of the eighth embodiment. Light emission control of the light emitting means 824 is performed by the sub control board 940 .

When the light source unit 812 is fixed to the light guide plate 715B, the light emitting means 834 is arranged above the upper end surface 715B5 of the light guide plate 715B so that the light irradiation direction is directed toward the upper end surface 715B5 (that is, downward) along the upper end surface 715B5. Therefore, the plurality of light emitting means 824 protrude forward from the front surface 821B of the substrate base 821 when the substrate 822 is accommodated in the recess 821A.

Further, the board 822 is provided with a light emitting means 825 such as an LED that emits light toward the picture sticker 704 (that is, forward) on the front end side of the upper surface of the board 822 .

A surface 823B (see FIG. 39) of the reflector 823 facing the surface 821B of the substrate base 821 with the light guide plate 715B interposed therebetween is configured as a light-impermeable surface that is mirror-finished like the surface 833B of the reflector 833 . The surface 821B of the substrate base 821 is also configured as a light-impermeable surface having a mirror-finished surface. As a result, in a state in which the light source unit 812 is fixed to the light guide plate 715B, the light emitted from the light emitting means 824, which is emitted from the upper side of the upper end surface of the light guide plate 715B toward the upper end surface 715B5, is guided to the upper end surface 715B5 so as to be appropriately incident on the upper end surface 715B5 of the light guide plate 715B by being reflected by the surfaces 821B and 823B.

A through hole 841A is provided on the left end side of the substrate base 821 when viewed from the front of the game machine, and a through hole 842A is provided inside the through hole 841A (on the right side of the through hole 841A when viewed from the front of the game machine). On the other hand, a through hole 841B is provided on the right end side of the substrate base 821 when viewed from the front of the game machine, and a through hole 842B is provided inside the through hole 841B (on the left side of the through hole 841B when viewed from the front of the game machine).

A through hole 843A having the same shape as the through hole 841A is provided on the left end side of the reflector 823 as viewed from the front of the gaming machine, communicating with the through hole 841A when the light source unit 812 is fixed to the light guide plate 715B. On the other hand, a through hole 843B having the same shape as the through hole 841B, which communicates with the through hole 841B when the light source unit 812 is fixed to the light guide plate 715B, is provided on the right end side of the reflector 823 when viewed from the front of the gaming machine.

In addition, inside the through hole 843A of the reflector 823 (on the right side of the through hole 843A when viewed from the front of the game machine), a protrusion 844A is provided that protrudes rearward from the rear side surface 823B (see FIG. 39). The protrusion 844A is a protrusion that is inserted through a through hole 861A formed in the light guide plate 715B on the upper left side of the light guide plate 715B when viewed from the front of the game machine and through the through hole 842A of the substrate base 821 when the light source unit 812 is attached to the light guide plate 715B.

On the other hand, inside the through-hole 843B of the reflector 823 (on the left side of the through-hole 843B when viewed from the front of the game machine), a projecting portion 844B projecting rearward from the rear side surface 823B (see FIG. 39) is provided. The projecting portion 844B is a projection that is inserted through a through hole 861B formed on the upper right side of the light guide plate 715B when viewed from the front of the game machine and a through hole 842B of the substrate base 821 when the light source unit 812 is attached to the light guide plate 715B.

A threaded hole into which a screw 872A can be screwed is formed substantially in the center of the projection 844A, and a threaded hole into which the screw 872B can be screwed is formed substantially in the center of the projection 844B. Therefore, after combining the substrate base 821 and the reflector 823 so that the protrusion 844A is inserted through the through holes 861A and 842A, and the protrusion 844B is inserted through the through holes 861B and 842B, the screw 872A is screwed into the screw hole of the protrusion 844A, and the screw 872B is screwed into the screw hole of the protrusion 844B. The unit 812 can be fixed (attached) to the light guide plate 715B.

Here, the screws 872A and 872B are arranged so that the longitudinal direction is the front-rear direction. Therefore, by fixing (temporarily fixing) the screws 872A and 872B, the substrate base 821 and the reflector 823 are integrated so that there is no front-to-back separation, and then the light source unit 812 and the light guide plate 715B can be integrated by performing a complete fixing operation while slowly aligning the relative positions and angles of the light guide plate 715B so as not to cause excessive deformation.

Like the through hole 862A described above, the through hole 861A formed in the light guide plate 715B is configured in a substantially circular shape having a size that matches the outer diameter of the protrusion 844A so that the positional displacement of the protrusion 844A inserted into the through hole 861A with respect to the through hole 861A is hardly allowed in any direction. Therefore, the protrusion 844A inserted through the through hole 861A is positioned at a substantially constant position by the through hole 861A.

Like the through hole 862B described above, the through hole 861B is also formed in an elongated hole shape that is slightly larger in the left-right direction than the outer diameter of the protrusion 844B. Therefore, the projection 844B inserted through the through hole 861B is positioned at a substantially constant position in the vertical direction with respect to the through hole 862B, similarly to the projection 844A inserted into the through hole 861A, but the allowable range of positioning in the horizontal direction with respect to the through hole 861B is larger than that in the vertical direction. As a result, the distance between each of the plurality of light emitting means 824 provided in the light source unit 812 and the upper end surface 715B5 (see FIG. 39) of the light guide plate 715B can be made substantially constant, and the fish pattern 743 formed by the light guide plate 715B can be made to have a good appearance with little variation in the amount of light in the left-right direction.

When the light source unit 812 is fixed to the light guide plate 715B, the through hole 841A of the substrate base 821 and the through hole 843A of the reflector 823 communicate with each other, and the through hole 841B of the substrate base 821 and the through hole 843AB of the reflector 823 communicate with each other. A screw 871A inserted through the communicating through-holes 841A and 843A and a screw 871B inserted through the communicating through-holes 841B and 843B are screwed into projections 892 (see FIG. 39) projecting backward from the base 701, whereby the light source unit 812 fixed on the upper side of the light guide plate 715B can be fixed to the base 701.

The through-holes 843A and 843B of the reflector 823 and the through-holes 841A and 841B of the substrate base 821 corresponding to the through-holes 843A and 843B are formed in an elongated shape slightly larger in the vertical direction than the outer diameter of the projection 892, like the through-holes 853A, 853B, 841A and 841B described above. Therefore, the allowable range of positioning of the light source unit 812 with respect to the substrate 701 is larger in the vertical direction than in the horizontal direction, as in the case of the light source unit 813 described above.

On the rear side of the light guide plate 715B, pressing members 811 are arranged on both left and right end sides of the light guide plate 715B. The pressing member 811 includes a pressing portion 811A having a shape along the curved shape of the curved portion 715A1 of the outer cover 715A, and a mounting portion 811B projecting from a frame connecting both ends of the pressing portion 811A to the right or left side in the front view of the gaming machine. The mounting portion 811B is provided at a position corresponding to a projection 891 (see FIG. 39) projecting rearward from the base 701, and has a through hole communicating with the screw hole of the projection 891. As shown in FIG. Therefore, the pressing member 811 can be fixed to the base body 701 by screwing the screw 896 inserted through the through hole of the mounting portion 811B into the threaded hole of the projecting portion 891 .

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 40, after the curved portion 715B1 of the light guide plate 715B to which the light source units 812 and 813 are fixed is arranged on the rear side of the curved portion 715A1 of the outer cover 715A, the left and right holding members 811 are removed prior to fixing the light source units 812 and 813 to the base body 701 with the screws 871A, 871B, 881A and 881B. It is fixed to the base 701 with screws 896 .

The pressing portion 811A is a portion for pressing the curved portion 715B1 of the light guide plate 715B against the curved portion 715A1 (toward the curved portion 715A1) when the pressing member 811 is fixed to the base 701. FIG. The pressing portion 811A is configured to have a front end along the curved shape of the curved portion 715A1 of the outer cover 715A. Therefore, when the pressing member 811 is fixed (attached) to the base 701, if the curved portion 715B1 of the light guide plate 715B is deformed out of the predetermined gap between the curved portion 715A1 of the outer cover 715A and the pressing portion 811A, the pressing portion 811A presses both the left and right ends of the curved portion 715B1, thereby matching the shape of the curved portion 715B1 to the shape of the curved portion 715A1. It is held in a straightened state.

Here, the curved portion 715B1 of the light guide plate 715B does not necessarily have to come into contact with at least one of the curved portion 715A1 of the outer cover 715A and the holding portion 811A of the holding member 811, and may be set to a design dimension that makes contact only when deformation of a certain amount or more occurs, or may be set to a size that makes sure to come into contact with either.

When the left and right pressing members 811 are fixed to the base 701 with screws 896, the screws 896 are fixed so that the gap between the curved portion 715A1 of the outer cover 715A and the pressing portion 811A of the pressing member 811 narrows as the screws 871A, 871B, 881A, and 881B are fixed from the rear side. Therefore, the curved portion 715A1 of the outer cover 715A and the pressing portion 811A of the pressing member 811 can gradually correct the deformation of the curved portion 715B1 of the light guide plate 715B by a certain amount or more, and the force of tightening the screw 896 can be used for the correction.

The pressing member 811 is formed in a mesh shape having openings through which light can pass from one surface to the other surface between the pressing portion 811A and the frame connecting both ends of the pressing portion 811A. The side portion 715A2 of the outer cover 715A is illuminated by the light.

In this embodiment, as described above, the holding member 811 is fixed to the base 701 with the screws 896 before the light source units 812 and 813 are fixed to the base 701 with the screws 871A, 871B, 881A and 881B. are fixed to the base 701 with screws 896, and then the light source units 812 and 813 are fixed to the base 701 with screws 871A, 871B, 881A and 881B. By temporarily fixing the screws 871A, 871B, 881A, and 881B, the position of the light guide plate 715B relative to the outer cover 715A can be roughly positioned, so that the light guide plate 715B can be attached with high accuracy.

In addition, fixing positions where screws 872A, 872B, 882A, and 882B are arranged for integrating the light source units 812 and 813 and the light guide plate 715B are provided within the four corners of the fixing positions where the light source units 812 and 813 are fixed to the base 701 by the screws 871A, 871B, 881A and 881B. Specifically, fixing positions (screws 871A, 871B) for fixing the light source unit 812 to the base 701 are provided near each of the two screws 872A, 872B for integrating the light source unit 812 and the light guide plate 715B, and on both sides of the screws 872A, 872B. In addition, fixing positions (screws 881A, 881B) for fixing the light source unit 813 to the base 701 are provided near each of the two screws 882A, 882B for integrating the light source unit 813 and the light guide plate 715B, on both sides of the screws 882A, 882B. Therefore, the shape in which the light source units 812 and 813 and the light guide plate 715B are integrated makes it easy to hold the light source unit 813 without changing when it is fixed to the base 701, thereby suppressing performance defects of the light guide plate 715B and making it possible to make the fish pattern 724 using the light guide plate 715B look good and emit light.

Next, the action and effect of the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment described above will be described.

In the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment, the through holes 841A and 843A and the through holes 841B and 843B formed on the left and right sides of the upper light source unit 812 are elongated holes that are slightly larger in the vertical direction than the outer diameter of the protrusion 892 formed on the base 701. Similarly, through holes 851A and 853A and through holes 851B and 853B formed on the left and right sides of the lower light source unit 813 are also formed in an elongated hole shape slightly larger in the vertical direction than the outer diameter of the protrusion 893 formed on the base 701.

Therefore, the allowable range of positioning of the light source units 812 and 813 with respect to the base 701 is relatively allowable in the direction in which the plate surface of the light guide plate 715B continues (vertical direction). Accompanying displacement in the direction (vertical direction) in which the plate surface of the light guide plate 715B continues is allowed. Therefore, even if a large variation in the manufacturing of the light guide plate 715B is allowed in order to reduce the manufacturing cost of the light guide plate 715B including the curved portion, when the light guide plate 715B is integrated with the base 701 and the outer cover 715A, the load in the vertical direction (i.e., the force that stretches or compresses the curved portion 715B1) can be suppressed from being applied to the curved portion 715B1. damage can be suppressed.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the through holes 861A and 861B formed on the upper left and right sides of the light guide plate 715B are both configured to have such a size that the position of the light source unit 812 inserted through the through holes 861A and 861B with respect to the projections 844A and 844B is hardly allowed to move in the vertical direction. Similarly, the through holes 862A and 862B formed on the left and right sides of the lower side of the light guide plate 715B are both configured to have a size that hardly permits vertical displacement of the position of the light source unit 813 inserted through the through holes 862A and 862B with respect to the protrusions 854A and 854B.

Therefore, the light source units 812 and 813 can be positioned and integrated with the light guide plate 715B at suitable positions in the direction in which the plate surface of the light guide plate 715B continues (vertical direction). As a result, the position of the light emitting means 824 with respect to the upper end face 715B5 (see FIG. 39) of the light guide plate 715B and the position of the light emitting means 834 with respect to the lower end face 715B4 (see FIG. 39) of the light guide plate 715B can both be suitably matched, so that the performance failure of the light guide plate 715B due to the positional deviation of the light emitting means 824 or the light emitting means 834 can be suppressed. 24 can be made to be visually appealing and capable of emitting light.

Of the through-holes 861A and 861B formed on the left and right sides of the upper side of the light guide plate 715B, one through-hole 861A is configured to have a size that hardly allows displacement in the left-right direction relative to the corresponding projection 844A, whereas the other through-hole 861B is configured to relatively allow displacement in the left-right direction relative to the corresponding projection 844B. Similarly, of the through-holes 862A and 862B formed on the left and right sides of the lower side of the light guide plate 715B, one through-hole 862A is also configured to have a size that hardly allows lateral displacement relative to the corresponding protrusion 854A, while the other through-hole 862B is configured to relatively allow lateral displacement relative to the corresponding protrusion 854B.

Therefore, even if there is a manufacturing error in the installation positions of the protrusions 844A and 844B in the light source unit 812 or the installation positions of the protrusions 854A and 854B in the light source unit 813, the manufacturing error can be absorbed by the lateral displacement allowed by the through hole 861B or the through hole 862. This can prevent manufacturing errors of the projections 844A, 844B, 854A, and 854B from adversely affecting the positioning accuracy of the light source units 812 and 813 in the vertical direction with respect to the light guide plate 715B.

Further, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the light source units 812 and 813 are fixed to the base body 701 after the left and right sides of the curved portion 715B1 of the light guide plate 715B to which the light source units 812 and 813 are attached are pressed against the curved portion 715A1 by the pressing member 811.

Therefore, the light guide plate 715B is fixed to the base 701 integrated with the outer cover 715A in a state in which the shape of the curved portion 715B1 is corrected to the shape of the curved portion 715A1 by the pressing member 811 in advance. It is possible to suppress the application of a force that stretches or compresses the curved portion 715B1. In this respect as well, it is possible to prevent the light guide plate 715B from being damaged when the light guide plate unit 810 is assembled.

<Twelfth Embodiment>
Next, a twelfth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. The pachinko machine 100 according to the twelfth embodiment is characterized by how the light guide plate 715B shines. In the following description, the same reference numerals are assigned to the same configurations as those in the first to eleventh embodiments, and description thereof is omitted.

FIG. 41(a) is a schematic diagram for explaining the traveling direction of light incident on the lower end face 715B4 of the light guide plate 715B, and FIG. 41(b) is a front view of the light guide plate 715B showing an example of how it shines.

As shown in FIG. 41(a), the lower end surface 715B4 of the light guide plate 715B is formed in a shape in which a plurality of trapezoidal recesses Z having a lateral width smaller than the lateral width of one light emitting means 834 are continuous when viewed from the front (or viewed from the direction along the thickness direction of the light guide plate 715B). Further, the lower end surface 715B4 of the light guide plate 715B is formed with trapezoidal concave portions Z having horizontal widths smaller than the irradiation width of light from one light emitting unit 834, and a plurality of concave portions Z are positioned within the irradiation width of light from one light emitting unit 834. It is preferable that 5 or more, preferably 10 or more, recesses Z are provided in the irradiation width of light from one light emitting means 834 . The width of the trapezoid forming each recess Z is preferably set to 0.5 mm or less, more preferably 0.1 mm or less.

The recess Z has a substantially horizontally extending side Z1 serving as the bottom of the recess Z, a side Z2 connected to the left end C1 of the side Z1 and extending in the lower left direction, and a side Z3 connected to the right end C2 of the side Z1 and extending in the lower right direction.

The light emitting means 834 arranged below the end surface 715B4 is composed of a light emitting means such as an LED, which has directivity in the light irradiation direction (output direction), as described above. Therefore, the side Z1 of the concave portion Z is substantially orthogonal to the direction (output direction) of light emitted from the light emitting means 834 in a state where the light source unit 813 is attached to the lower side of the light guide plate 715B. That is, the light emitted from the light emitting means 834 is incident substantially perpendicularly to the side Z1 of the concave portion Z, so the light incident from the side Z1 travels through the light guide plate 715B in a direction substantially perpendicular to the side Z1 (arrow F1 direction).

Since the light guide plate 715B is made of a resin having a refractive index (absolute refractive index) greater than 1, such as an acrylic resin, the light incident from the side Z2 or the side Z3 inclined with respect to the light irradiation direction of the light emitting means 834 is refracted according to the relationship of (sin (incident angle φ1)/sin (refractive angle φ2))=(refractive index of light guide plate 715B/refractive index of air). In this case, the incident angle φ1 is the incident angle of light entering the light guide plate 715B (side Z2 or side Z3) from the air, and the refraction angle φ2 is the refraction angle of the light entering the light guide plate 715B.

For example, when the light guide plate 715B is made of acrylic resin, the refractive index of the light guide plate 715B is approximately 1.5, which is the refractive index of acrylic resin. In the following calculations, the refractive index of the light guide plate 715B is assumed to be 1.5 for convenience. On the other hand, since the refractive index of air is approximately 1 (hereinafter, the refractive index of air is assumed to be 1 for convenience), the light incident from side Z2 or side Z3 is refracted according to the relationship of (sin (incidence angle φ1)/sin (refraction angle φ2))=1.5.

The incident angle φ1 of the light from the light emitting means 834 with respect to the side Z2 of the concave portion Z is equal to the angle θ1 formed by the side Z2 inclined to the lower left in the concave portion Z and the side Z1 extending substantially horizontally. For example, when the angle θ1 is approximately 41°, the refraction angle φ2 is approximately 26°.

That is, when the angle θ1 formed by the side Z2 inclined to the lower left and the side Z1 is approximately 41°, the light emitted from the light emitting means 834 enters the side Z2 of the concave portion Z in the light guide plate 715B at an incident angle φ1 of approximately 41°, is refracted at a refraction angle φ2 of approximately 26°, and travels in the direction of the arrow F2 in the light guide plate 715B. As a result, when the angle θ1 is approximately 41°, the traveling direction of the light incident from the side Z2 (the direction of the arrow F2) is inclined to the left by an angle θ2 of approximately 15° with respect to the traveling direction of the light incident from the side Z1 (the direction of the arrow F1).

The magnitude of the angle θ2 changes according to the magnitude of the angle θ1. Therefore, by changing the angle (that is, the angle θ1) formed by the side Z1 and the side Z2, which are two adjacent sides of the concave portion Z, the angle (that is, the angle θ2) formed by the traveling direction of each light incident from the side Z1 and the side Z2 can be changed. For example, by setting the angle θ1 formed by the side Z1 and the side Z2 to approximately 60°, the angle θ2 formed by the traveling directions of the lights incident from the sides Z1 and Z2 can be set to approximately 25°.

Regarding the side Z3 of the recess Z, similarly to the side Z2, the incident angle φ1 of the light from the light emitting means 834 with respect to the side Z3 is equal to the angle formed by the side Z3 inclined to the lower right in the recess Z and the side Z1 extending substantially horizontally. Therefore, depending on the angle of the side Z3 with respect to the side Z1, the traveling direction of the light incident from the side Z3 (arrow F3 direction) can be tilted with respect to the traveling direction of the light incident from the side Z1 (arrow F1 direction).

In the example shown in FIG. 41(a), the angle formed by the sides Z1 and Z3 is equal to the angle θ1 formed by the sides Z1 and Z2. Therefore, the angle formed by the traveling directions of the lights incident from the sides Z1 and Z3 is equal to the angle θ2 formed by the traveling directions of the lights incident from the sides Z1 and Z2. Therefore, when the angle θ2 is approximately 15°, the light incident from the concave portion Z is separated into light traveling in a direction (direction of arrow F1) substantially equal to the direction of light emitted by the light emitting means 834 and light traveling in a direction (directions of arrows F2 and F3) inclined to the left and right by approximately 15°. Note that the angle θ1 between the sides Z1 and Z2 and the angle θ2 between the sides Z1 and Z3 do not necessarily have to be the same.

Since the direction of travel of light incident from side Z1 (direction of arrow F1) and the direction of travel of light incident from side Z2 (direction of arrow F2) intersect at angle θ2, in region D1 that extends at angle θ3 equal to angle θ2 from the intersection of side Z1 and side Z2 (that is, the left end C1 of side Z1), neither the light incident from side Z1 nor the light incident from side Z2 enters the region (or proceeds in the direction of arrow F1 or arrow F2). This is a region into which weaker light than light enters).

Similarly, since the traveling direction of light incident from side Z1 (direction of arrow F1) and the traveling direction of light incident from side Z3 (direction of arrow F3) intersect at a predetermined angle, region D2 that extends at an angle equal to the angle from the intersection of side Z1 and side Z3 (that is, the right end C2 of side Z1) is also a region where neither light incident from side Z1 nor light incident from side Z3 enters (or light traveling in the direction of arrow F1 or arrow F3). , where weaker light enters).

By continuously providing a plurality of recesses Z described above on the lower end surface 715B4 of the light guide plate 715B, as shown in FIG.

That is, the light irradiated to the range K1 of the end surface 715B4 is a band-shaped region 981A formed by light entering from the side Z1 of each recess Z included in the range K1 and traveling in the direction of the arrow F1 (that is, the direction substantially equal to the direction of light emitted by the light emitting means 834), a band-shaped region 981B formed by light entering from the side Z2 and traveling in the direction of the arrow F2, and a band-shaped region 98 formed by light entering from the side Z3 and traveling in the direction of the arrow F3. 1C.

The curvature of the light guide plate 715B and the plate thickness may be set so that the light incident from the lower end face 715B4 and guided by the light guide plate 715B almost escapes from the light guide plate 715B around the top X of the curved portion 715B1 that protrudes and curves forward. In this case, the light traveling through the regions 981A, 981B, and 981C disappears around the top X of the curved portion 715B1 and does not reach the upper portion. Further, it is preferable to set the irradiation intensity of the light from the light emitting means 834 so that the light incident from the end surface 715B4 and guided by the light guide plate 715B can reach at least the top X of the curved portion 715B1.

In the case where the light emitting means 834 is composed of a light emitting means capable of emitting light of a plurality of colors, when the light emitting means 834 irradiates the range K1 with light of a predetermined color (for example, red light), the light of that color can be propagated within the regions 981A, 981B, and 981C. Therefore, when the light emitting means 834 irradiates the range K1 with red light, of the fish pattern 743 drawn with fine unevenness on one surface side of the curved portion 715B1 of the light guide plate 715B, only the areas 981A, 981B, and 981C overlap with each other, and the red light traveling upward in these areas 981A, 981B, and 981C causes red light to be displayed.

Further, as described above, the concave portion Z is formed in a shape that forms the regions D1 and D2 where the light emitted from the light emitting means 834 does not enter, so that between the region 981A and the region 981B, a region 982 where the light irradiated to the range K1 on the end surface 715B4 does not travel is formed. Similarly, a region 983 is formed between the region 981A and the region 981BC where the light irradiated to the range K1 does not travel. Therefore, of the fish pattern 743 drawn on the curved portion 715B1, the portions within the areas 982 and 983 are not displayed by the light emitted in the range K1. As a result, for example, when the range K1 is irradiated with red light, the range between the regions 981B and 98C can be displayed in mottled red.

In addition, when a range K2 of the end surface 715B4 different from the range K1 is irradiated with a color (for example, blue light) different from the color irradiated to the range K1, a band-shaped region 983A configured by light of a different color from the regions 983A to 983C entering from the side Z1 of each recess Z included in the range K2 and traveling in the direction of the arrow F1, and regions 983A to 983C entering from the side Z2 and traveling in the direction of the arrow F2 are formed. A band-shaped region 983B formed by light and a band-shaped region 983C formed by light of a color different from that of the regions 983A to 983C entering from the side Z3 and traveling in the direction of the arrow F3 can be formed.

Therefore, when the light emitting means 834 irradiates the range K2 with blue light, of the fish pattern 743 drawn with fine unevenness on one side of the curved portion 715B1 of the light guide plate 715B, only the areas 983A, 983B, and 983C overlap with each other, and the blue light traveling upward in these areas 983A, 983B, and 983C emits blue light for display.

Further, when the light emitting unit 834 irradiates the range K1 with red light and the light emitting unit 834 irradiates the range K2 with blue light, the areas 981A, 981B, 981C and the areas 983A, 983B, 983C of the fish pattern 743 drawn on the curved portion 715B1 overlap with each other. By mixing with blue light traveling through 83B and 983C, violet light emission is displayed.

The upper end surface 715B5 of the light guide plate 715B is also provided with a trapezoidal concave portion Z when viewed from the front, similar to the lower end surface 715B4 described above. As shown in FIG.

That is, the light irradiated to the range K3 of the end surface 715B5 is a strip-shaped region 991A formed by light incident from the side Z1 of each recess Z included in the range K3 and traveling in the direction of the arrow F1 (that is, the direction substantially equal to the direction of light emitted by the light emitting means 824), a strip-shaped region 991B formed by light entering from the side Z2 and traveling in the direction of the arrow F2, and a strip-shaped region 99 formed by light entering from the side Z3 and traveling in the direction of the arrow F3. 1C.

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, as in the example shown in FIG. 41B, the concave portion Z formed in the upper end face 715B5 is such that the direction of travel of the light in the region 991A (that is, the direction of the arrow F1) and the direction of travel of the light in the region 991B or the region 991C (that is, the directions of the arrows F2 and F3) form an angle that is equal to the direction of travel of the light in the region 981A and the direction of the light in the region 981B or the region 981. It is set to be different from the angle formed by each traveling direction of light in C. That is, the recess Z formed in the upper end face 715B5 is set such that the angle formed by the side Z2 or the side Z3 with respect to the side Z1 is different from the angle formed by the side Z2 or the side Z3 with respect to the side Z1 in the recess Z formed in the lower end face 715B4.

Randomness can be imparted to the luminescence display of the fish pattern 743 in the curved portion 715B1 by making the angle formed by the traveling direction of the light in the region 991A (that is, the arrow F1 direction) and the respective traveling directions of the light in the region 991B or the region 991C (that is, the directions of the arrows F2 and F3) different from the angle formed by the traveling direction of the light in the region 981A and the respective traveling directions of the light in the region 981B or the region 981C. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the light emitting display of the pattern 743 from becoming monotonous.

In the example shown in FIG. 41(b), the light emitted to the range K4 located on the left end side of the end face 715B5 when viewed from the front of the game machine is guided in two directions: a band-shaped region 993A formed by light incident from the side Z1 of each recess Z included in the range K4 and traveling in the direction of the arrow F1, and a band-shaped region 931B formed by light incident from the side Z2 and traveling in the direction of the arrow F2.

Such light guidance can be realized by making the concave portion Z included in the range K4 such that the side Z3 (that is, the left end side of the end face 715B5 when viewed from the front of the game machine) is substantially orthogonal to the side Z1 (that is, substantially parallel to the direction of light emitted by the light emitting means 824).

Even if the light emitted from the light emitting means 824 to the range K4 is guided in the left direction in the front view of the game machine, it escapes from the left end of the light guide plate 715B in the front view of the game machine before reaching the curved portion 715B1, so there is no point in guiding the light in that direction. Therefore, by guiding the light in the two directions of the regions 993A and 993B, the light emitted by the light emitting means 824 can be transmitted to the curved portion 715B1 without waste.

In the same range as the range K4 located on the right end side of the end face 715B5 when viewed from the front of the game machine, the recessed portion Z included in the range may be formed in a shape that guides light in two directions: a strip-shaped region formed by light entering from the side Z1 and traveling in the direction of the arrow F1, and a strip-shaped region formed by light entering from the side Z3 and traveling in the direction of the arrow F3. In other words, the concave portion Z included in the range may be shaped such that the side Z2 (that is, the side on the right end side of the end surface 715B5 when viewed from the front of the gaming machine) is substantially perpendicular to the side Z1.

Also, for the lower end surface 715B4, in a predetermined range on the left and right sides in the front view of the game machine, the shape of the concave portion Z included in the range may be configured to guide light in two directions: a band-shaped region formed by light entering from side Z1 and traveling in the direction of arrow F1, and a band-shaped region formed by light entering from side Z2 or Z3 and traveling in the direction of arrow F2 or F3.

Next, the action and effect of the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment described above will be described.

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the upper end face 715B5 and the lower end face 715B4 of the light guide plate 715B are configured to have a plurality of continuous trapezoidal recesses Z when viewed from the front. The light emitted from the light emitting means 824, 825 can travel (light guide) in the light guide plate 715B so that the areas on both sides of the means 824, 825 that are inclined in one direction and the other (for example, the areas 981A, 981C with respect to the area 982) shine more intensely than the part extending in the predetermined direction. Therefore, since the light of the light guide plate 715B can be given randomness, it is possible to prevent the light emission display of the pattern 743 from becoming monotonous.

<Thirteenth Embodiment>
Next, a thirteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 42 and 43. FIG. In the pachinko machine 100 according to the thirteenth embodiment, similarly to the pachinko machine 100 according to the tenth embodiment, the display area of each symbol row displayed by each reel 711L, 711M, 711R is variably configured. In the following description, the same reference numerals are given to the same configurations as those in the first to twelfth embodiments, and the description thereof will be omitted.

First, the structural configuration of the left and right reels 711L and 711R in the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 42(a) is a front view of the reel device 710 in the case where each symbol row by each reel 711L, 711M, 711R is in a basic state.

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, when each symbol row by each reel 711L, 711M, 711R is in a basic state, as shown in FIG. Constructed equally wide.

Of the three rows of reels 711L, 711M, 711R, the left and right reels 711L, 711R are configured by a combination of a first reel body 1701 located on the side of the middle reel 711M and a second reel body 1702 located on the side away from the middle reel 711M.

The first reel body 1701 is configured in a cylindrical shape with an opening on the side away from the middle reel 711M, and the second reel body 1702 is configured in a cylindrical shape with an opening on the side of the middle reel 711M and having a diameter slightly smaller than that of the first reel body 1701. By inserting the opening side edge 1702A of the second reel body 1702 into the first reel body 1701 from the side of the opening side edge 1701A, reels 711L and 711R which are one cylindrical body are formed.

As described above, the left and right reels 711L and 711R are cylindrical bodies obtained by combining the first reel body 1701 and the second reel body 1702. Therefore, by changing the amount of insertion of the second reel body 1702 into the first reel body 1701, the width of each symbol row by each reel 711L and 711R (that is, the width of each reel 711L and 711R) can be changed.

FIG. 42(b) is a partial sectional view of the left reel 711L cut along the rotating shaft 1701B through the rotating shaft 1701B in a basic state, and FIG. 42(c) is a partial sectional view of the left reel 711L cut along the rotating shaft 1701B through the rotating shaft 1701B in a state where the width of the symbol row of the left reel 711L is narrowed (reduced). In addition, in FIGS. 42(b) and 42(c), illustration of cross-section hatching is omitted.

As shown in FIG. 42(b), the left reel 711L is a cylindrical body formed by inserting the opening side edge 1702A of the second reel body 1702 located on the left side when viewed from the front of the gaming machine into the opening side edge 1701A of the first reel body 1701 located on the right side when viewed from the front of the gaming machine.

A rotating shaft 1701B extending inward from the side surface of the first reel body 1701 is provided at a position on the rotation axis line. The rotating shaft 1701B is connected to a reel driving motor 721L fixed to a base (not shown) provided inside the first reel body 1701. As shown in FIG.

Although not shown, the first reel body 1701 and the second reel body 1702 are engaged so that the respective reel bodies 1701 and 1702 are not displaced from each other in the circumferential direction. As a result, when the reel drive motor 721L is driven, the first reel body 1701 and the second reel body 1702 rotate integrally.

As a configuration for suppressing the positional deviation of the first reel body 1701 and the second reel body 1702 in the circumferential direction, for example, a protrusion (not shown) protruding inward from the surface of the first reel body 1701 and the second reel body 1702 on the back side of the outer peripheral surface of the first reel body 1701 positioned on the outside is continuously provided in the horizontal direction corresponding to the rotation axis direction, while the outer peripheral surface of the second reel body 1702 positioned on the inside is provided with the first reel body. A configuration in which recesses (not shown) corresponding to the protrusions are provided at positions corresponding to the protrusions of the reel body 1701 and the protrusions of the first reel body 1701 and the recesses of the second reel body 1702 are engaged are exemplified.

In such a configuration, at least one pair of protrusion and recess is formed in the circumferential direction of each of the reel bodies 1701 and 1702 . By providing a plurality of pairs of protrusions and recesses, it is possible to more preferably suppress the displacement of the reel bodies 1701 and 1702 in the circumferential direction. The installation positions of the pair of protrusions and recesses are not particularly limited, but by avoiding the drawing position of the decorative pattern drawn on the outer peripheral surface of the left reel 711L, it is possible to prevent the appearance of the decorative patterns on the left reel 711L from being spoiled by the formation of the recesses.

Further, as another configuration for suppressing the positional deviation in the circumferential direction of the first reel body 1701 and the second reel body 1702, for example, a circumferential surface having a radius smaller than the radius of the outer peripheral surface of the first reel body 1701 (hereinafter also referred to as "first inner peripheral surface") is provided inside the outer peripheral surface of the first reel body 1701, while a circumferential surface having a radius one size smaller than the first inner peripheral surface of the first reel body 1701 is provided inside the outer peripheral surface of the second reel body 1702 (hereinafter referred to as "first inner peripheral surface"). Also referred to as a “second inner peripheral surface”), the inner surface of the first inner peripheral surface is provided with protrusions that protrude inward from the inner surface continuously in the left-right direction corresponding to the direction of the rotation axis, and the outer surface of the second inner peripheral surface is provided with recesses corresponding to the protrusions at positions corresponding to the protrusions of the first reel body 1701, and these protrusions and recesses are engaged.

As shown in FIG. 42(b), an engagement groove 1702B is formed on the back surface of the second reel body 1702 with respect to the outer peripheral surface, extending along the entire circumference in the circumferential direction. In this embodiment, the engagement groove 1702B is formed by providing two projecting portions 1702C, which protrude inward from the surface on the back side of the outer peripheral surface of the second reel body 1702 and extend over the entire circumference in a substantially parallel manner, at a distance of the engagement groove 1702B. In other words, the engagement groove 1702B is formed by the groove between the two protrusions 1702C. The engagement groove 1702B may be a groove formed on the back surface of the second reel body 1702 with respect to the outer peripheral surface.

Inside the left reel 711L, a drive solenoid 1711 serving as a drive source for moving the second reel body 1702 with respect to the first reel body 1701 is provided on the outer peripheral surface side of the reel 711L. The driving solenoid 1711 includes a solenoid body 1711A fixed to a base (not shown) provided inside the first reel body 1701 so as not to fluctuate with respect to the rotation of the first reel body 1701 (that is, the rotation of the left reel 711L), and a plunger 1711B that can protrude from the solenoid body 1711A.

The plunger 1711B is configured such that the tip on the side away from the solenoid body 1711A is bent into a substantially L shape. In addition, hereinafter, the tip of the plunger 1711B on the side away from the solenoid body 1711A is also simply referred to as "the tip of the plunger 1711B." The tip of plunger 1711B is slidably engaged with engagement groove 1702B formed in second reel body 1702 with respect to engagement groove 1702B.

The drive solenoid 1711 is connected to the main control board 920, and is configured to be switchable between a protruded posture in which the plunger 1711B protrudes from the solenoid body 1711A side and a recessed posture in which the plunger 1711B retracts into the solenoid body 1711A side under control by the main control board 920.

The drive solenoid 1711 is maintained in the protruded posture in the basic state, and shifts to the immersed posture when a predetermined timing for narrowing the width of the pattern row arrives during the variable display of the decorative symbols. In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the "predetermined timing for narrowing the width of the symbol row" is a predetermined timing set within the acceleration period in the variable display of decorative symbols, that is, the acceleration period during which the rotation of the reels 711L, 711M, and 711R reaches a predetermined speed.

When the drive solenoid 1711 is in the protruded posture, the width of the left symbol row (that is, the width of the left reel 711L) is set to the length W11, which is the width of the symbol row in the basic state, as shown in FIG. 42(a).

On the other hand, when the driving solenoid 1711 is in the retracted posture, the plunger 1711B is retracted into the solenoid body 1711A side, so that the engagement groove 1702B of the second reel body 1702 is drawn toward the first reel body 1701 by the plunger 1711B.

Since the plunger 1711B is slidably engaged with the engagement groove 1702B, when the drive solenoid 1711 shifts to the retracted posture during the variable display of the decorative pattern (that is, while the left reel 711L is rotating), the force drawn by the plunger 1711B toward the first reel body 1701 acts on the entire circumference of the engagement groove 1702B due to the rotation of the left reel 711L.

Therefore, when the drive solenoid 1711 shifts to the retracted posture, the entire second reel body 1702 is pulled toward the first reel body 1701, that is, in the right direction toward the middle reel 711M (that is, in the direction of arrow M11 in FIG. 42(c)). As a result, the amount of insertion of the second reel body 1702 into the first reel body 1701 is increased compared to when the drive solenoid 1711 is in the projecting posture (that is, when the left reel 711L is in the basic state), so the width of the left symbol row is reduced. Specifically, the width of the left symbol row changes from the length W11 to the length W12 shorter than the length W11.

The driving solenoid 1711 shifts to the immersed posture during the acceleration period in the variable display of the decorative pattern, that is, during the period in which the reels 711L, 711M, and 711R rotate at a relatively low speed. As a result, it is possible to prevent problems from occurring in the process of increasing the insertion amount of the second reel body 1702 with respect to the first reel body 1701 .

The right reel 711R has the same shape as the cross section of the left reel 711L shown in FIGS. Therefore, the right reel 711R operates in the same manner as the left reel 711L, except that the movement direction of the second reel body 1702 located on the right side of the first reel body 1701 becomes the left direction opposite to that of the left reel 711L (i.e., the direction opposite to the direction of the arrow M11) by shifting the drive solenoid 1711 to the retracted posture. Therefore, the width of the right symbol row (that is, the width of the right reel 711R) changes from length W11 to length W12 when the drive solenoid 1711 shifts to the retracted posture.

The drive source for moving the second reel body 1702 with respect to the first reel body 1701 does not have to be the drive solenoid 1711, and may be various motors such as a stepping motor and a DC motor. When various motors are used as drive sources, a drive mechanism that is driven by the motor and draws the entire second reel body 1702 toward the first reel body 1701 may be provided.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 42(a), 42(d), 42(e), and 43, the change in the size of the display area of each symbol row displayed by each reel 711L, 711M, 711R in the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment will be described.

FIG. 42(d) is a front view of the reel device 710 when the width of the left and right symbol rows by the left and right reels 711L, 711R is narrowed, and FIG. 42(e) is a front view of the reel device 710 when the display area of each symbol row is reduced by moving the reels 711L, 711M, 711R.

The width of the left and right pattern rows is changed during the variable display of the decorative patterns as described above, but in FIG. 42(d), each pattern row is shown as if it were stopped so that the shapes of the decorative patterns can be easily identified. Similarly, the reduction of the display area of each symbol row by moving the reels 711L, 711M, 711R is also performed during the variable display of the decorative symbols as will be described later, but in FIG.

FIG. 43 is a timing chart showing the operation of each component when changing the size of the display area of each symbol row. The timing chart of FIG. 43 conceptually shows the order of operation of each component, and the intervals between the timings from time t1 to time t8 are not necessarily proportional to the actual time intervals.

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the width of the left and right symbol rows (that is, the width of the left and right reels 711L and 711R) is narrowed when the fluctuation display of symbols in the unit game relating to the first special symbol or the second special symbol is started in a state where neither the unit game right relating to the first special symbol nor the unit game right relating to the second special symbol is reserved.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 43, in a state where the unit game right related to the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) is not reserved, when the symbols in the unit game related to the first special symbol or the second special symbol start to change (time t1), the reel drive motors 721L, 721M, 721R for the respective reels 711L, 711M, 711R start rotating from the stopped state. As a result, the reels 711L, 711M, and 711R start to rotate, and the variable display of decorative symbols starts.

The rotational speeds of the reel drive motors 721L, 721M and 721R are started at time t1 and then gradually accelerated until the rotation of the reels 711L, 711M and 711R reaches a predetermined speed at time t4. As a result, the variation speed of the decorative pattern is gradually accelerated. That is, the period from time t1 to time t4 is the acceleration period in the variable display of the decorative symbols.

At the timing of time t2, which is a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds) after time t1 within the acceleration period during the variable display of the decorative pattern, the drive solenoids 1711 provided on the left and right reels 711L and 711R are driven (that is, switched from the non-energized state to the energized state), and accordingly the protruded posture is switched to the retracted posture.

By switching the drive solenoid 1711 to the retracted posture, the engaging groove 1702B of the second reel body 1702 in each of the reels 711L and 711R is pulled toward the first reel body 1701 by the plunger 1711B of the drive solenoid 1711. The displacement of the second reel body 1702 with respect to the first reel body 1701 gradually increases using the rotation of the reels 711L and 711R, and reaches the maximum possible displacement value at time t3.

As a result, the width of each of the left and right reels 711L and 711 (see FIG. 42(a)), which is the maximum width length W11 when the drive solenoid 1711 is in the projecting posture (that is, the basic state), becomes the minimum width length W12 at time t3, as shown in FIG. 42(d). Note that the time t3 may be a time after the acceleration period ends.

Since the width of each of the left and right reels 711L, 711 is narrowed from the length W11 to the length W12, the width of the display area of each symbol row by the three rows of reels 711L, 711M, 711R changes from the length W21 (see FIG. 42(a)) in the basic state to the length W22, which is shorter than the length W21, as shown in FIG. 42(d).

Thus, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the width of each of the left and right reels 711L, 711 (left and right symbol rows) is narrowed during the variable display of the decorative symbols (more specifically, during the acceleration period of the variable display of the decorative symbols), so that the size of the display area of each symbol row by the reels 711L, 711M, 711R can be made smaller than the size of the display area in the basic state.

In the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment, each reel 711L. The main patterns drawn on the outer peripheral surface of 711M and 711R are, as shown in FIG. 42(a), Arabic numerals displayed on a 7-segment display, that is, numerals composed of a horizontal line extending in a substantially horizontal direction and two vertical lines arranged on both ends of the horizontal line.

Three rows of reels 711L. Of the reels 711M and 711R, the left and right reels 711L and 711R formed by combining the first reel body 1701 and the second reel body 1702 have two vertical lines representing the respective numbers drawn on each of the reel bodies 1701 and 1702, respectively, and one horizontal line drawn across the two reel bodies 1701 and 1702.

Therefore, when the width of the left and right symbol rows (that is, the width of the left and right reels 711L and 711R) is narrowed by driving the drive solenoid 1711, as shown in FIG.

Note that each reel 711L. The main designs drawn on the outer peripheral surfaces of 711M and 711R do not necessarily have to be Arabic numerals displayed on a 7-segment display as shown in FIG. Also, each reel 711L. The main patterns drawn on the outer peripheral surfaces of 711M and 711R are not necessarily numbers, and may be patterns corresponding to each number.

Since the sub-symbols drawn on the outer peripheral surfaces of the left and right reels 711L and 711R are arranged substantially in the center of the width direction of the symbol row, as shown in FIG. Therefore, when the width of the left and right symbol rows is narrowed, the sub-symbols visually disappear, so that the presence of the main symbols on the left and right reels 711L and 711R can be emphasized.

Further, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, as in the pachinko machine 100 of the tenth embodiment described above, the left and right reels 711L and 711R are movable in the right or left direction, and the middle reel 711M is configured to be movable in the rearward direction.

As shown in FIG. 43, the rotational speeds of the reel drive motors 721L, 721M, and 721R are accelerated until the rotation of the reels 711L, 711M, and 711R reaches a predetermined speed (time t4), and then these reels 711L, 711M, and 711R are maintained to rotate at the predetermined speed. As a result, after time t4, the decorative symbols fluctuate at a predetermined speed at a high speed until the rotational speeds of the reel drive motors 721L, 721M, and 721R are decelerated.

At time t5, which is a predetermined time (e.g., 0.5 seconds) after time t4 during the high-speed fluctuation of the decorative pattern, the gear 781 (see FIG. 34(c)) is started to operate by the control of the driving mechanism (not shown), thereby gradually moving the middle reel 711M backward. After that, the operation of the gear 781 is stopped at time t6, whereby the middle reel 711M stops at a predetermined position behind the left and right reels 711L and 711R.

At time t7, which is a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds) after time t6, gears 782 and 783 (see FIG. 34(c)) start operating under the control of a drive mechanism (not shown). As a result, the left and right reels 711L, 711R gradually move toward each other (that is, toward the center of the three rows of reels 711L, 711M, 711R). That is, as shown in FIG. 42(e), the left reel 711L gradually moves to the right (in the direction of arrow M12), and the right reel 711R gradually moves to the left (in the direction of arrow M13).

The operation of the gears 782, 783 started at time t7 is stopped at time t8, whereby the left and right reels 711L, 711R stop at a predetermined position where a part thereof overlaps in front of the middle reel 711M.

Since the reels 711L, 711M, and 711R in the three rows are moved as described above, the width of the display area of each symbol row by these reels 711L, 711M, and 711R is changed from the length W22 (see FIG. 42(d)) obtained by narrowing the respective widths of the left and right reels 711L, 711 to a length W23 shorter than the length W22 as shown in FIG. 42(e). change to

When the width of the display area of each symbol row is shortened to the length W23 by the movement of the reels 711L, 711M, 711R, the left and right reels 711L, 711R are moved toward each other, so that the player can visually recognize the stopped symbols on the reels 711L, 711R at a glance.

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, when the width of the display area of each symbol row by the three reels 711L, 711M, and 711R is narrowed as described above, the width of the display area is changed after the high-speed fluctuation in the fluctuation display in a situation where the right of the unit game related to the special symbol is not reserved after the start of the variable display of the symbol in the unit game related to the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol). Before the variable display stops, the basic state (see FIG. 42(a)) is restored. That is, when the width of the display area of each symbol row by the three reels 711L, 711M, 711R is narrowed, the narrowed width of the display area is maintained while the right of the unit game relating to the special symbol is reserved.

The procedure for returning the width of the display area of each symbol row to the basic state is, for example, during the deceleration period until the variable display of the decorative symbols changes from high speed to stop, by shifting the driving solenoid 1711 to the protruding posture, thereby widening the width of the left and right symbol rows (that is, the width of the left and right reels 711L and 711R) to the width in the basic state (length W11), and then after the variable display stops, each of the reels 711L, 711M and 711R. may be returned to the arrangement in the basic state (arrangement shown in FIG. 42(a)), or after returning the arrangement of the respective reels 711L, 711M, 711R while the variable display of decorative symbols is in high-speed variation, the width of the left and right symbol rows may be returned during the deceleration period of the variable display. Alternatively, both the width of the left and right symbol rows and the arrangement of the reels 711L, 711M, and 711R may be returned to the deceleration period of the variable display of decorative symbols.

Next, the action and effect of the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment described above will be described.

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the left and right reels 711L, 711 are configured to be variable in width. By narrowing the width of each of the left and right reels 711L, 711, the display area of each symbol row by the three reels 711L, 711M, 711R can be reduced (more specifically, the width of the display area of each symbol row can be narrowed). Therefore, the entire display area of the variable display of the decorative symbols can be easily put into the field of view of the player, and it is possible to prevent the player from feeling that it is difficult to see the variable display of the decorative symbols.

Further, by moving the reels 711L, 711M, 711R after narrowing the width of each of the left and right reels 711L, 711, the display area of each pattern row can be further reduced, so that the entire display area of the variable display of the decorative pattern can be more favorably placed in the field of view of the player.

Since the display area of each symbol row is reduced by reducing the width of each of the left and right reels 711L, 711, and the display area of each symbol row is reduced by moving each of the reels 711L, 711M, 711R, both are performed during the variable display of the decorative symbols. After stopping, the movement of the other reel can be visually recognized while expecting that the symbol of the other reel constitutes the ready-to-win display while visually recognizing the symbol (number which is the main symbol) of the one reel. Therefore, the player can concentrate on the expectation of the formation of the ready-to-win display without greatly moving the line of sight during the period until the left and right reels 711L and 711R are stopped, and can fully enjoy the variable display of the decorative pattern during the period.

As shown in FIG. 42(e), when the left and right reels 711L and 711R overlap in front of the middle reel 711M, part of the numbers of the main symbols drawn on the outer peripheral surface of the middle reel 711M are hidden by the left and right reels 711L and 711R. Therefore, since it becomes difficult to discriminate the contents of the symbols stopped by the middle reel 711M, it becomes difficult for the player to discriminate the lottery result of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol), but the player can grasp the lottery result by seeing the fixed display displayed on the special symbol display device 471 or the special symbol display device 472.例文帳に追加

Further, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, when the width of the display area of each symbol row by the three reels 711L, 711M, 711R is narrowed, the narrowed width of the display area is maintained while the unit game right relating to the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) is reserved. Therefore, by reserving the right of the unit game of the special pattern, the player can enjoy the variable display of the decorative pattern without greatly moving the line of sight while the variable display of the decorative pattern is continuously executed.

<14th Embodiment>
Next, a fourteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 44 and 45. FIG. The pachinko machine 100 according to the fourteenth embodiment is characterized in the way the light guide plate 715B shines, like the pachinko machine 100 according to the twelfth embodiment. In the following description, the same reference numerals are assigned to the same configurations as those in the first to thirteenth embodiments, and description thereof is omitted.
First, with reference to FIGS. 44(a) and 44(b), the structural configuration of the light guide plate 715B included in the pachinko machine 100 according to this embodiment will be described. FIG. 44(a) is a perspective view of the light guide plate 715B of the present embodiment as seen from the rear side, and FIG. 44(b) is a cross-sectional view of the light guide plate 715B cut vertically at substantially the center in the horizontal direction. In addition, in FIG. 44(b), the drive solenoid 1731 attached to the protrusion 1721 of the light guide plate 715B is also illustrated. Also, in FIG. 44(b), illustration of hatching of the cross section is omitted.

As shown in FIG. 44(a), a projection 1721 protrudes from the rear surface side (rear surface) of the upper and lower flat portions 715B2 and 715B3 of the light guide plate 715B at substantially the center in the horizontal direction of the flat portions 715B2 and 715B3. The projecting portion 1721 is arranged above the light guide plate 715B and positioned below the light source unit 812 (see FIG. 40) and above the light source unit 813 (see FIG. 40) arranged below the light guide plate 715B. The protrusion 1721 has an engagement hole extending forward from the rear end surface, and the engagement hole engages a plunger 1731B of a drive solenoid 1731, as shown in FIG. 44(b).

The drive solenoid 1731 includes a solenoid body 1731A fixed to a base (not shown) provided on the base body 401, and a plunger 1731B that can protrude from the solenoid body 1731A. As shown in FIG. 44(b), the drive solenoid 1731 attached to the upper protrusion 1721 is attached so that the plunger 1731B faces downward, and the drive solenoid 1731 attached to the lower protrusion 1721 is attached so that the plunger 1731B faces upward.

The plunger 1731B is configured such that the tip on the side away from the solenoid body 1731A is bent into a substantially L shape. Note that, hereinafter, the tip of the plunger 1731B on the side away from the solenoid body 1731A is also simply referred to as "the tip of the plunger 1731B." The plunger 1731B is engaged by inserting its tip into the engagement hole of the protrusion 1721 .

The drive solenoid 1731 is connected to the main control board 920, and is configured to be switchable between a protruding posture in which the plunger 1731B protrudes from the solenoid main body 1731A side and a recessed posture in which the plunger 1731B is retracted into the solenoid main body 1731A side by control by the main control board 920.

The drive solenoid 1731 is maintained in the protruded posture in the basic state, and shifts to the retracted posture when a predetermined timing arrives. The "predetermined timing for shifting the drive solenoid 1731 to the immersive posture" may be, for example, the start timing of a predetermined effect such as a specific suggestive effect among various effects using the light emission display by the light guide plate 715B, the start timing of the effect selected with a predetermined probability, or the timing when the player operates a predetermined operation unit (for example, the pressing operation device 261).

When the drive solenoid 1731 shifts to the retracted posture, the upper side of the light guide plate 715B is pulled upward (in the direction of arrow M31) and the lower side of the light guide plate 715B is pulled downward (in the direction of arrow M32) as shown in FIG. As a result, the curved portion 715B1 of the light guide plate 715B is vertically stretched, so that the radius of curvature of the curved portion 715B1 becomes larger than before the actuation of the drive solenoid 1731 (that is, when the drive solenoid 1731 is in the projecting posture).

Since the light source unit 812 is fixed to the light guide plate 715B, the light source unit 812 is displaced upward together with the upper end surface 715B5 of the light guide plate 715B even when the drive solenoid 1731 shifts to the retracted posture. Similarly, since the light source unit 813 is also fixed to the light guide plate 715B, it is displaced downward together with the lower end surface 715B4 of the light guide plate 715B even when the drive solenoid 1731 shifts to the retracted posture.

Therefore, the positional relationship between the light emitting means 824 of the light source unit 812 and the upper end surface 715B5 and the positional relationship between the light emitting means 834 of the light source unit 813 and the lower end surface 715B4 are substantially constant regardless of the orientation (protruding orientation or retracted orientation) of the drive solenoid 1731. In other words, both the output of light incident on the upper end surface 715B5 from the light emitting means 824 and the output of light incident on the lower end surface 715B4 from the light emitting means 834 are substantially constant regardless of the attitude of the drive solenoid 1731.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 44(c), 44(d), and 45, how the light guide plate 715B shines according to the attitude of the drive solenoid 1731 will be described. 44(c) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the upper portion of the light guide plate 715B when the drive solenoid 1731 is in the projected state, and FIG. 44(d) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the upper portion of the light guide plate 715B when the drive solenoid 1731 is in the retracted state.

The light incident on the upper end surface 715B5 of the light guide plate 715B from the light source unit 812 is guided downward while being refracted in the light guide plate 715B by utilizing the critical angle between the air and the material (for example, acrylic resin) of the light guide plate 715B on the front and back of the light guide plate 715B.

When the fish pattern 743 is drawn on the back surface of the light guide plate 715B (the surface in the direction of the arrow B), at a position where the light guided in the light guide plate 715B is refracted on the back side of the light guide plate 715B (hereinafter, this position is also referred to as a "rear side bending position"), the portion of the pattern 743 drawn at that position is more strongly illuminated than the portion of the pattern 743 drawn at a position different from the position. Therefore, when the drive solenoid 1731 is in the projecting posture, the pattern 743 is relatively strongly illuminated at the position PA, which is the rear side bending position of the light guide plate 715B, as shown in FIG. 44(c).

When the drive solenoid 1731 shifts from the protruded position to the retracted position, the radius of curvature of the curved portion 715B1 changes (more specifically, the radius of curvature increases), and as shown in FIG. As a result, the position at which the pattern 743 is displayed with relatively strong light emission changes to a different position than when the drive solenoid 1731 is in the projecting posture.

FIG. 45 is a front view of the screen portion of the light guide plate 715B. When the screen portion (that is, the curved portion 715B1) of the light guide plate 715B is viewed from the front, the rear bent positions, which were the positions PA1, PA2, and PA3 (see FIG. 45(a)) when the drive solenoid 1731 is in the protruding posture, change to the positions PB1, PB2, and PB3 (see FIG. 45(b)), respectively, as the drive solenoid 1731 shifts to the retracted posture.

The position at which the light from the light source unit 813 that enters the lower end surface 715B4 of the light guide plate 715B and is guided downward in the light guide plate 715B is refracted on the back side of the light guide plate 715B (that is, the back side refracted position) is below the top X of the curved portion 715B1, similarly to the light that enters the lower end surface 715B4 of the light guide plate 715B from the light source unit 813. It changes according to posture.

Specifically, with respect to the light incident on the lower end surface 715B4 of the light guide plate 715B, the rear side bending positions, which were the positions PC1, PC2, and PC3 (see FIG. 45A) when the drive solenoid 1731 is in the protruded posture, change to positions PD1, PD2, and PD3 (see FIG. 45B), respectively, as the drive solenoid 1731 shifts to the retracted posture.

In this way, by changing the curvature radius of the curved portion 715B1 by operating the drive solenoid 1731, it is possible to change the position where the fish pattern 743 that can be displayed on the light guide plate 715B emits strong light (that is, the position where the pattern 743 shines).

Next, the action and effect of the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment described above will be described.

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, by changing the radius of curvature of the curved portion 715B1, it is possible to change the position where the fish pattern 743 shines, so it is possible to suppress uniformity in the lighting and coloring of the fish pattern 743 displayed on the light guide plate 715B. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the light emission display of the pattern 743 from becoming monotonous, which makes it possible to realize diversification of the display modes of the light guide plate 715B.

In addition, since the change in the light emission display of the light guide plate 715B is realized by the change in the curvature radius of the curved portion 715B1, the light emission display of the light guide plate 715B can be changed while using the installed light guide plate 715B as it is.

<Fifteenth Embodiment>
Next, referring to FIG. 46, a fifteenth embodiment will be described. In the pachinko machine 100 according to the fifteenth embodiment, the two light guide plates 1751 and 1771 are used to diversify the presentation by light emitting display of the light guide plates. In the following description, the same reference numerals are given to the same configurations as those in the first to fourteenth embodiments, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 46 is a front view of two light guide plates 1751 and 1771 overlapping in the front-rear direction. In FIG. 46, a light guide plate supporting portion 1772 and a gear 1773 for moving one light guide plate 1771 are also illustrated. In addition, in FIG. 46, a part of the configuration such as the light guide plate 1771 is illustrated with a thick line to facilitate understanding of the drawing.

The light guide plate 1751 is a flat light guide plate having optical transparency. The light guide plate 1751 is arranged in front of a display device having a screen capable of displaying a decorative pattern, such as the decorative pattern display device 479, so as to overlap the display device.

As shown in FIG. 46(b), on one side (for example, the back side) of the light-transmitting resin plate that constitutes the light guide plate 1751, a fish pattern 1761 that constitutes part of a school of fish facing leftward is formed by fine unevenness.

Above and below the light guide plate 1751, light emitting means (not shown) such as LEDs for emitting light to the upper end face and the lower end face of the light guide plate 1751 are arranged along the upper end face or the lower end face. By controlling the light emission of the light emitting means by the sub control board 940, the fish pattern 1761 can be displayed on the light guide plate 1751 by light emission.

Specifically, by turning off the light emitting means, as shown in FIG. 46(a), the fish pattern 1761 is not displayed by light emission, and by turning on the light emission means, as shown in FIG. As a result, for example, by controlling the timing of lighting and extinguishing of the light emitting means arranged along the upper end surface and the lower end surface of the light guide plate 1751, it is possible to perform an effect in which the fish school by the pattern 1761 looks as if it is moving from right to left on the light guide plate 1751.

The light guide plate 1771 is a light-transmitting flat light guide plate having a width narrower than that of the light guide plate 1751 in the left-right direction.

As shown in FIG. 46(a), a pattern 1781 of a fish forming a part of a school of fish facing leftward is formed by fine unevenness on one side (for example, the back side) of the light-transmitting resin plate that constitutes the light guide plate 1771.

Above and below the light guide plate 1771, light emitting means (not shown) such as LEDs for emitting light to the upper end surface and the lower end surface of the light guide plate 1771 are arranged along the upper end surface or the lower end surface. By controlling the light emission of the light emitting means by the sub control board 940, the fish pattern 1781 can be displayed on the light guide plate 1771 by light emission. Specifically, by lighting the light emitting means, a fish pattern 1781 can be displayed by light emission as shown in FIGS. 46(a) and 46(b). By turning off the light emitting means, it is possible to prevent the fish pattern 1781 from being displayed by light emission.

On the upper side of the light guide plate 1771, a light guide plate supporting portion 1772 is provided that extends in the left-right direction and supports the light guide plate 1771 to which the light emitting means is attached from above. On the upper surface of the light guide plate supporting portion 1772, a rack gear (not shown) tooth-cut against the teeth of the gear 1773 is linearly formed in the left-right direction.

Gear 1773 is fixed to a base (not shown) provided on base 401 . The gear 1773 is connected to a drive mechanism (not shown) that is driven and controlled by the sub control board 940 and operates under drive control of the drive mechanism by the sub control board 940 . Gear 1773 is provided so as to mesh with a rack gear formed on light guide plate support portion 1772, so that light guide plate 1771 can be moved in the left-right direction (in the direction of arrow M41 and in the opposite direction) by a rack and pinion mechanism formed by the rack gear formed on light guide plate support portion 1772 and gear 1773.

A groove-shaped rail portion (not shown) is fixedly provided below the light guide plate 1771 so as to extend in the left-right direction and slidably support the light guide plate 1771 to which the light emitting means is attached from below.

In the example shown in FIG. 46, the light guide plate 1771 is configured to be movable from the initial position where the right end of the light guide plate 1771 and the right end of the light guide plate 1751 overlap to the position where the left end of the light guide plate 1771 and the left end of the light guide plate 1751 overlap. The initial position of the light guide plate 1771 is not necessarily the position where the right end of the light guide plate 1771 and the right end of the light guide plate 1751 overlap. Similarly, the end point of the movement range of the light guide plate 1771 is not necessarily the position where the left end of the light guide plate 1771 and the left end of the light guide plate 1751 overlap.

In this way, the light guide plate 1771 is provided so as to be movable in the horizontal direction by the operation of the gear 1773, so that by moving the light guide plate 1771 with the fish pattern 1781 luminescently displayed in the left direction, the fish shoal by the pattern 1761 looks as if the fish shoal is moving from right to left. Therefore, for example, as shown in FIG. 46(a), by moving the light guide plate 1771 on which the fish pattern 1781 is illuminated while the fish pattern 1761 is not illuminated on the light guide plate 1751, the player can see the movement of the fish school that is smaller than the size of the fish school that can be displayed on the light guide plate 1751 (that is, the width in the direction of movement is narrow).

Further, since the light guide plate 1771 is relatively movable with respect to the light guide plate 1751, as shown in FIG. 46B, when the light guide plate 1771 on which the fish pattern 1781 is illuminated is moved while the fish pattern 1761 is illuminated on the light guide plate 1751, the fish shoal by the pattern 1781 (the fish luminescently displayed on the light guide plate 1771) changes to the fish shoal by the pattern 1761. It is possible to make it appear as if they are moving at different relative speeds with respect to (a school of fish displayed by light emission on the light guide plate 1751). This makes it possible to complicate the behavior of the school of fish within the range of the light guide plate 1751, compared to the case where only one light guide plate 1751 makes it look as if the school of fish is moving from right to left on the light guide plate 1751 by the pattern 1761.例文帳に追加

After the light guide plate 1771 is moved leftward (in the direction of M41), after the effect using the light emitting display of the light guide plate 1771 is completed, the light emitting means is extinguished (that is, after the fish pattern 1781 is turned off), the gear 1773 is operated to move it rightward to the initial position.

Next, the action and effect of the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment described above will be described.

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, in addition to the light guide plate 1751, the light guide plate 1771 that is relatively movable with respect to the light guide plate 1751 is provided. Therefore, compared with the case where only one light guide plate 1751 performs the luminescent display of the fish school, the behavior of the fish school within the range of the light guide plate 1751 can be complicated. Also, compared to the case where the two light guide plates 1751 and 1771 are fixedly provided (that is, one plate does not move relative to the other), the behavior of the school of fish within the range of the light guide plate 1751 can be made more complicated. As a result, the variation in the display mode of the fish school that can be visually recognized by the player from the front is increased, so that the diversification of the display mode of the image by the light guide plate can be realized.

In addition, since the light guide plate 1751 and the light guide plate 1771 are provided so as to overlap each other in the front-rear direction, the pattern 1761 displayed on the light guide plate 1751 and the pattern 1781 displayed on the light guide plate 1771 can express a sense of depth, and in this respect as well, it is possible to increase the variation of the display mode of the fish school visible from the front of the player, so that the diversification of the display mode of the image by the light guide plate can be realized.

<Sixteenth Embodiment>
Next, referring to FIG. 47, a sixteenth embodiment will be described. The pachinko machine 100 according to the sixteenth embodiment has been devised so that the player can easily grasp the information regarding the occurrence interval of the start winning. In the following description, the same reference numerals are assigned to the same configurations as those in the first to fifteenth embodiments, and description thereof is omitted.

FIG. 47(a) is a screen diagram for explaining the display area of the decorative symbol display device 479 in the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment. As shown in FIG. 47( a ), a number-of-holds display area 1810 is provided on the lower side of the screen of the decorative design display device 479 . The pending count display area 1810 is an area capable of displaying a pending icon 1812 (see FIG. 47(b)) indicating that the right of the unit game related to the special symbol is reserved.

In the number-of-holds display area 1810, icon display areas A1 to A8 of a number (eight in this embodiment) corresponding to the sum of the upper limits of the number of times of holding the right of the unit game related to the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) are provided. Each time the number of times of holding a special symbol (the number of times of holding a right of a unit game related to a special symbol) increases, a suspension icon 1812 is displayed in the icon display area one by one rightward from the leftmost icon display area A1 (that is, toward the icon display area A8). Therefore, the player can grasp the number of unit game rights related to the reserved special symbols (that is, the number of variable display of the reserved special symbols) from the number of the reserved icons 1812 displayed in the number of reserved symbols display area 1810. In addition, for each type of special symbol, that is, the number of times the first special symbol is held is displayed in the four icon display areas A1 to A4 on the left side, and the number of times the second special symbol is held is displayed in the four icon display areas A5 to A8 on the right side.

A table state icon display area 1820 is provided on the upper right side of the screen of the decorative design display device 479 . A platform state icon display area 1820 is an area in which a platform state icon 1821, which will be described later, is displayed. Although the details will be described later, the player can determine the state of the pachinko machine 100 on which the table state icon 1821 is displayed based on the number of the table state icon 1821 displayed in the table state icon display area 1820 .

FIG. 47(b) is a schematic diagram showing the screen transition of the decorative design display device 479 as the number of times of suspension increases. When the start winning of a special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) occurs in a state in which the variable display of the special symbol is not executed, the right of the unit game is not reserved, and the special game is not in a state (this state is hereinafter also referred to as a "non-variable state"), the right of the unit game related to the special symbol corresponding to the starting winning is temporarily reserved, but the variable display of the special symbol is immediately started. Therefore, with the start of the variable display, the number of times of holding the special symbols becomes 0 (zero). In the following, for the sake of convenience, the special symbol start winning that occurs in the non-fluctuation state is also referred to as the "first start winning".

When the variable display of the special symbols corresponding to the first start prize is started, until the number of times of suspension for the special symbols becomes 1, as shown in FIG. The pending scheduled icon 1811 is an icon of a predetermined shape (circular shape in the example shown in FIG. 47(b)) that is displayed in the icon display area corresponding to the number of times of suspension of "current number of times of suspension + 1" among the icon display areas A1 to A8 until the start winning of the next scheduled special symbol occurs.

The pending schedule icon 1811 is configured such that its display mode changes according to the elapsed time since the last (that is, last time) start winning. In the example shown in FIG. 47(b), the numerical value displayed in the pending schedule icon 1811 is configured to change over time as a numerical value indicating the number of seconds of the elapsed time.

Note that the interval between start-up wins (that is, the elapsed time from the last start-up win) is measured using a predetermined timer or counter provided on the sub-control board 940 . Specifically, the sub-control board 940 uses a predetermined timer or counter provided in the sub-control board 940, and a predetermined command (for example, pending command) transmitted from the main control board 920 based on the occurrence of the start winning of each special symbol. Alternatively, a predetermined timer or counter provided in the main control board 920 may be used to measure the elapsed time from the last start winning, and transmit the measurement result to the sub control board 940.

Also, in the example shown in FIG. 47(b), the size of the scheduled pending icon 1811 is configured to change according to the elapsed time. Specifically, the size of the pending icon 1811 is displayed in a predetermined minimum size at the time of the last start-up winning, and gradually changes greatly according to the elapsed time from the start-up winning (the last start-up winning), and reaches the maximum displayable size in the icon display areas A1 to A8 after a predetermined time (10.0 seconds in the example shown in FIG. 47(b)) from the minimum size.

When the scheduled pending icon 1811 reaches the maximum size and the next start winning has not occurred, the scheduled pending icon 1811 returns to the minimum size and gradually changes again from the minimum size. The reserved schedule icon 1811 repeats changing from the minimum size to the maximum size and returning to the initial size when the maximum size is reached until the next start winning occurs.

When a start winning of a new special symbol following the first start winning (hereinafter also referred to as "second starting winning" for convenience) occurs within the period from the start of the variable display corresponding to the first starting winning to returning to the non-variable state, the number of times of suspension for the special symbol becomes 1, and a pending icon 1812 is displayed in the icon display area A1 instead of the scheduled pending icon 1811, as shown in FIG. 47(b).

A pending icon 1812 displayed in the icon display area A1 by the occurrence of the second starting winning has the same size as the scheduled pending icon 1811 at the time of occurrence of the second starting winning, and includes a numerical value indicating the elapsed time after the occurrence of the first starting winning.

Therefore, the pending icon 1812 is an icon indicating that the right of the unit game relating to the special symbol is suspended, and is also a fixed display of the scheduled pending icon 1811, the display mode of which has changed according to the lapse of time after the occurrence of the last start winning, following the occurrence of the next new start winning. Therefore, each of the reserved icons 1812 displayed in the icon display areas A1 to A8 is displayed in a display mode reflecting the time interval between the time of occurrence of the start winning of the special symbol corresponding to each of the reserved icons 1812 and the time of occurrence of the last start winning of the special symbol for the start winning (that is, last generated before the occurrence of the starting winning).

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the pending icon 1812 is displayed in a display color different from that of the scheduled pending icon 1811. For example, the scheduled pending icon 1811 is displayed in blue and the pending icon 1812 is displayed in red. Therefore, the player can easily distinguish whether the icon displayed in the number of times of suspension display area 1810 is the scheduled suspension icon 1811 or the suspension icon 1812 by the difference in display color. Note that the scheduled pending icon 1811 and the pending icon 1812 may have the same display color, or the scheduled pending icon 1811 and the pending icon 1812 may have different shapes.

When the pending icon 1812 displayed in the icon display area A1 is displayed, that is, when the second start winning occurs within the period from the start of the variable display corresponding to the first start winning to the return to the non-variable state, the pending icon 1812 is displayed in the icon display area A2 corresponding to the pending count of "2", which is the "current pending count + 1", and the display mode is the same as when the pending icon 1812 is displayed in the icon display area A1, and the display mode is the last occurrence. It changes according to the elapsed time from the start winning prize.

When the second starting winning prize does not occur within the period from the start of the variable display corresponding to the first starting winning prize to the return to the non-variable state, the pending icon 1811 displayed in the icon display area A1 is erased without fail or under certain conditions. The fixed condition is exemplified by the case where the player has finished the shooting operation without touching the shooting operation device 250, or by winning the jackpot lottery and shifting to the special game state.

When the suspension of the special pattern is completed, that is, when the variable display being executed is terminated, the suspended icon 1812 displayed in the icon display area A1 is erased, and the suspended icons 1812 displayed in the icon display areas A2 to A8 are moved from the icon display area being displayed to the icon display area on the left thereof while maintaining the display mode.

The reserved scheduled icon 1811 also moves from the currently displayed icon display area to the icon display area to the left of the icon display areas A2 to A8 as the reservation for the special symbol is completed, and continues to change its display mode. Then, when the next start winning is not generated in the state that the reserved scheduled icon 1811 is displayed in the icon display area A1, and the period from the start of the variable display corresponding to the first started winning to return to the non-variable state ends, the reserved scheduled icon 1811 displayed in the icon display area A1 is erased.

Therefore, for example, as shown in FIG. 47(b), when the number of times of suspension is 1, when a start winning of a new special symbol following the second start winning (hereinafter, the start winning is also referred to as a "third start winning" for convenience) occurs, the number of times of suspension for the special symbol becomes 2, and the pending icon 1812 is displayed in the icon display area A2 as the finalized display of the pending icon 1811, and the scheduled pending icon 1811 is displayed in the icon display area A3. displayed.

Next, the table state icon display area 1820 will be described. In the initial state in which the pachinko machine 100 is activated by operating the power switch 909, a predetermined maximum number (10 in this embodiment) of the table state icons 1821 are displayed in the table state icon display area 1820.

During a predetermined game period (in the present embodiment, during the period of the shooting operation in which the game ball is fired from the launching device 330 in the normal game state), after the occurrence of one start winning, even if a predetermined first period (for example, 60 seconds) provided in advance as a period sufficient to doubt the possibility of abnormality related to the occurrence of the start winning of the special symbol has passed, If no new start winning occurs, the table state icon being displayed in the table state icon display area 1820. Among 1821, one stand state icon 1821 is erased.

In other words, during the period when the game ball is shot from the launching device 330 in the normal game state, every time the occurrence interval of the start winning of the special symbol exceeds the period (that is, the first period) sufficient to doubt the possibility of abnormality related to the occurrence of the starting winning of the special symbol, the number of the stand state icons 1821 displayed in the stand state icon display area 1820 is reduced by one until the number becomes zero. Therefore, the smaller the number of the table state icons 1821 displayed in the table state icon display area 1820, the higher the possibility of the abnormality related to the occurrence of the start winning of the special symbols.

Whether or not the game ball is being shot from the shooting device 330 may be determined based on the detection of contact between the shooting handle 252 and the player by the contact sensor 254, or based on the detection of the game ball (the game ball that has entered the game area) by providing a sensor capable of detecting the game ball that has entered the game area through the shooting passage 401B, or the collection and discharge of the game ball ejected from the game area passing through. A sensor may be provided in the passage, and the detection may be performed based on the detection of the game ball (the game ball discharged from the game area) by the sensor.

On the other hand, during the period in which the game ball is being shot from the launching device 330, after the occurrence of one starting prize, when the event of the occurrence of a new starting prize occurs continuously for a predetermined number of times (for example, three times) before the elapse of a predetermined second period (for example, 10 seconds) shorter than the first period, which is set in advance as a period in which the possibility of an abnormality related to the occurrence of the special symbol starting prize is low, the possibility of the abnormality related to the occurrence of the special symbol starting prize is low. , the platform icon 1821 of 1 is added to the platform icon display area 1820 . When the number of platform state icons 1821 displayed in the platform state icon display area 1820 reaches the maximum number, the display of the maximum number of platform state icons 1821 is maintained.

When starting prizes of special patterns generated at generation intervals shorter than the second period continue exceeding the reference number of times, each time the starting prizes of special patterns occur exceeding the reference number of times, one table state icon 1821 is added. After the start winning prizes of the special symbols occurring at the occurrence interval shorter than the second period continue for the reference number of times, the number of the starting winning prizes of the special symbols occurring at the occurrence intervals shorter than the second period is counted again from zero, and each time the starting winning prizes of the special symbols occurring at the occurrence intervals shorter than the second period continuously occur for the reference number of times, one table state icon 1821 may be added.

The number of table state icons 1821 displayed in the table state icon display area 1820 is maintained at the value updated as described above without being returned to the initial value (maximum number) until the power switch 909 is turned off (that is, while the pachinko machine 100 is running). Therefore, the player can select the Pachinko machine 100 to play from among the Pachinko machines 100 not being played by referring to the number of machine status icons 1821 displayed in the machine status icon display area 1820 of each Pachinko machine 100.例文帳に追加An operation device for returning the number of the table state icons 1821 to the initial value may be provided, and when the operation device is operated, the number of the table state icons 1821 may be returned to the initial value.

Next, the action and effect of the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment described above will be described.

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, each holding icon 1812 displayed in each icon display area A1 to A8 of the holding number display area 1810 is displayed in a display mode that reflects the time interval between the timing of the start winning of the special symbol corresponding to each holding icon 1812 and the time of occurrence of the starting winning of the special symbol last time (that is, last occurred before the occurrence of the starting winning) for the starting winning.

Therefore, since the occurrence interval of the start winning of special symbols is reflected in the display mode of the pending icon 1812, the player can, based on each display mode of one or more of the pending icons 1812 displayed in the number of times of holding display area 1810, determine the degree of likelihood of occurrence of the starting winning of the special symbols within the period from the start of the variable display corresponding to the start winning due to the occurrence of the start winning of the special symbols in the non-fluctuation state to the return to the non-fluctuation state again (that is, It is possible to grasp whether or not the start winning of special symbols is likely to occur in the period.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, before the start winning of the next scheduled special symbol occurs, the scheduled holding icon 1811 whose display mode is changed according to the elapsed time from the last start winning is displayed in the holding frequency display area 1810, so that the player can intuitively grasp the elapsed time after the last starting condition is satisfied from the change of the display mode.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the number of the table state icons 1821 is updated based on whether the occurrence interval of the start winning of the special symbols during the predetermined game period exceeds a predetermined first period set in advance as a period sufficient to doubt the possibility of an abnormality related to the start winning of the special symbols or is shorter than a predetermined second period set in advance as a period in which the possibility of an abnormality related to the start winning of the special symbols is low.

Therefore, the state of the pachinko machine 100, more specifically, the state (for example, the state of the nail 411) related to the occurrence of the start winning of the special symbol is reflected in the number of the table state icons 1821 displayed in the table state icon display area 1820, so that the player can determine the state of the pachinko machine 100 on which the table state icon 1821 is displayed based on the number of the table state icons 1821 displayed in the table state icon display area 1820. I can.

In particular, the update of the number of the table state icons 1821 is updated based on the interval of the start winning of the special symbols occurring during a predetermined game period (in the present embodiment, during the period when the game ball is being shot from the shooting device 330 in the normal game state), so that the occurrence interval of the starting winning of the special symbols becomes longer due to the non-playing of the game can be excluded. Therefore, the reliability of the relationship between the number of table status icons 1821 and the status of the pachinko machine 100 can be enhanced.

<Seventeenth Embodiment>
Next, a seventeenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 48 to 50. FIG. In the pachinko machine 100 according to the seventeenth embodiment, a configuration is added that can suitably execute the variable probability game state that can be shifted after the special game state and the time saving game state. In addition, in the following description, the same reference numerals are given to the same configurations as those in the first to sixteenth embodiments, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 48 is an explanatory diagram showing specifications such as the type of lottery result based on the start winning in the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment, the variation time, the display effect, the number of rounds to open the big winning opening, the destination of the game state, and the presence or absence of the time saving state. Fixed value data corresponding to this specification is stored in the ROM of the main control board 920, and controlled by the main control board 920 by the same program as in the above embodiment. In addition, in FIG. 48, items that are closely related to other types are surrounded by a thick frame line.

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, a low-probability state and a high-probability state are set as the probability of winning a big win in the first special pattern lottery and the second special pattern lottery, and when winning the first special pattern lottery and the second special pattern lottery, either the big win 1 or the big win 2 is selected. The winning probability of the big win is set to approximately 1/320 in the low probability state and approximately 1/137 in the high probability state, and the selection probability of the big win types is set to 65% for the big win 1 and 35% for the big win 2, for example. In addition, the variable time, the display performance, etc. will be exemplified by the configuration that can suitably execute the probability variable game state and the time-saving game state, and only the configuration related to the second special symbol during the time-saving state in which the start winning is generated by the right-handed game method will be described, and the configuration related to the first special symbol and the configuration of the variable display in the normal game state will be partially omitted.

Here, as a specification relating to the first special pattern, as a big win in the normal game state (low-probability state), a big win including at least a big win that shifts to a probability variable game state after a special game state and shifts to a probability variable game state of unlimited times in which the probability variable game state continues until the next big win is set. In addition, as a specification related to the first special symbol, as a jackpot in the normal game state (low probability state), other jackpots may be included, for example, as a jackpot that shifts to the variable probability game state after the special game state, if the jackpot is not won even if the unit game is executed a certain number of times, it may be set to include a jackpot that shifts to the variable probability game state with a limited number of times to return to the normal game state, and if the jackpot is not won even if the unit game is executed a certain number of times after the special game state. In addition, it may be set to include a jackpot that takes a time-saving game state with a limit on the number of times of returning to the normal game state.

The variable probability game state and the time saving game state are both time saving states, and are states in which the variable display time of normal symbols is shorter than the non-time saving state. In the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment, the variable display is set according to the same selection condition in the variable probability game state and the time reduction game state. Further, the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment is configured so that the player hardly recognizes the transition from the variable probability game state to the time saving game state, specifically, it can be recognized with a delay. Specifically, the transition to the time-saving game state is controlled so that the player can recognize it after a certain amount of time has elapsed after it is determined that the transition to the normal game state will occur unless a jackpot is won in the unit game in the time-saving game state 100 times. making it different.

First, with reference to FIG. 48(a), the basic specifications regarding the second special symbol in the time saving state, in which the number of remaining unit games in the time saving game state is not 20, will be described.

When a jackpot 1 is won, a long-time variable display is performed with a variable time set from 60 seconds to 120 seconds, and a decorative pattern display device 479 executes a battle performance such as, for example, a battle of warlords in the Sengoku period, and as a result, a performance is performed in which a character selected by a player or set as a main character in advance wins, and then a plurality of patterns stop at patterns corresponding to the big win. Then, a special game state of 15 rounds is generated, and after the special game state, the state is shifted to a variable probability game state accompanied by a time saving state, and the variable probability game state is continued until execution of the next big hit unit game.

When the big win 2 is won, the results are displayed from the variable display in a short time of approximately 0.5 seconds, after which the big winning device (for example, the lower big winning device 433) takes the entrance permitting attitude twice for approximately 0.2 seconds to generate a special game state of two rounds to open the big winning opening. The interval time between the entry allowable postures is set to approximately 0.6 seconds, and a special game state of approximately 1.0 seconds in total occurs. It is preferable that the entry permission posture in the special game state is set to a time length less than half of the game ball shooting time interval (approximately 0.6 seconds) so that the game balls hardly enter the big winning device, thereby making it difficult for the player to recognize the timing of the occurrence of the big win 2.例文帳に追加

After winning the big win 2 and ending the special game state, the game machine shifts to a time-saving game state with a limited number of times, and shifts to a normal game state when the big win is not won in unit games related to 100 times of special symbols. When the jackpot 1 is won within 100 times as the limit of the number of times, the state is shifted to the variable probability game state, and when the jackpot 2 is won, the time-saving game state composed of the unit game related to the special pattern of 100 times corresponding to the upper limit is started again after the win.

For the player, the winning of the big win 2 in the variable probability game state serves as an opportunity for the game state to shift from the variable probability game state to the time-reduction game state, and since the time-reduction game state has a limit on the number of times, if the player is made to immediately recognize the winning of the big win 2, there is a possibility that the player will have a disappointing feeling such as a decrease in the desire to continue the game. For this reason, the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment is configured so that the player does not immediately recognize the winning of the big win 2, but can recognize that the big win 2 was previously won at a timing close to the end of the time-saving game state. Therefore, if the player wins the jackpot 1 corresponding to the transition to the variable probability game state in the time-saving game state, the player does not need to recognize the winning of the jackpot 2, so that the player can be made to recognize through the performance that the probability of continuing the variable probability game state is higher than the set probability.

When the jackpot 2 is won, the same display performance as that of the non-win in the special symbol lottery is executed. The variation time of losing is set to approximately 1.5 seconds, and is approximately the same as the sum of the variation time of the big win 2 and the time of the special game state in which the big winning opening is opened, which is the time of occurrence of the special game state. A character selected in advance by the player is displayed on the display screen of the decorative pattern display device 479, and the characters "waiting for battle" continue to be displayed. At the end of the display screen, for example, the variable display and the stop display are repeatedly displayed with patterns such as numbers displayed extremely small such as 3 mm, and the player can hardly visually recognize the variable display and the stop display of the patterns, and visually recognizes the situation in which the state of "waiting for battle" continues. The timing of stopping the variable display on the decorative pattern display device 479 when the big win 2 is won is about 1.5 seconds from the start of the variable, which is the same as the timing when the special game state ends, and the stop result is preferably the same as the loss, with a pattern display different from the pattern corresponding to the big win, and the variable display is substantially the same in appearance and time as the variable display of the loss, and this also makes it difficult for the player to recognize the timing of the occurrence of the big win 2.例文帳に追加

As a special pattern lottery, a small prize is set as a prize for opening a big prize opening by operating a big prize device when the big prizes 1 and 2 are not won. A small win is a win that maintains the previous state without transitioning to another game state, and is set to generate a small win game state in which a game ball can enter a big winning device. For example, a small win is won with a probability of approximately 1/234, and the big win device operates in the same manner as the big win 2.例文帳に追加The display screen of the decorative symbol display device 479 is controlled to display the same (identical) content as when the big win 2 is won. As the variable display of the special pattern, a short-time variable display is executed in approximately 0.5 seconds, and after that, the big prize winning device takes an entry permitting attitude twice for approximately 0.2 seconds to generate a two-round small winning game state in which the big prize winning port is opened. As a result, even if the player pays attention to the big winning device, the player cannot distinguish between the big win 2 and the small win, making it difficult to recognize the timing of the big win 2.例文帳に追加

When the special pattern lottery is not won, the result is a loss, a short-time variable display of approximately 1.5 seconds, which is longer than the big win 2 and the small win, is executed, and as the display contents of the decorative pattern display device 479, the characters ``waiting for battle'' are continuously displayed. Depending on the result of losing, the game state does not shift, and the previous state of the time saving state is continued.

Here, in the special symbol display devices 471 and 472, the special symbol display devices 471 and 472 stop varying at a timing of approximately 0.5 seconds, and stop symbols corresponding to the big win 1, big win 2, small win, and loss are displayed. Therefore, in the inspection of the gaming machine, by managing the display contents of the special symbol display devices 471 and 472, it is possible to recognize the accurate transition state of the game state. A management device for managing the pachinko machine 100 may be provided with an external terminal for outputting information corresponding to the status of the pachinko machine 100, thereby outputting information corresponding to each of the big win 1, the big win 2, the small win and the loss, so that the correct transition state of the game state can be managed even in the game parlor.

Next, with reference to FIG. 48(B), the specification regarding the second special symbol in the time saving state, which is set for the number of remaining unit games in the time saving game state of 20 times (hereinafter also referred to as "special performance times") will be described. In addition, the specifications set for the special performance time are different from those set for other times in the setting of fluctuation time and display performance, the number of rounds to open the big winning opening, the destination of the game state, and the setting of the time saving state are the same.

When a jackpot 1 is won in a special performance time, the same variable display and performance control as in the timing other than the special performance time are performed, and after finally winning the battle performance and shifting to the special game state of 15 rounds, the probability variable game state is started.

When a big win 2 is won in a special performance, a variation time is set to the same length of time as the big win 1, and a battle performance in which another character appears on the display screen of a decoration pattern display device 479 and fights is displayed until the middle of the variable display in the same way as the big win 1.例文帳に追加Then, in the second half of the variable display, another character appears and the character selected by the player is defeated, expressing that the player is in a disappointing situation. However, when the big win 2 is won, the remaining number of unit games in the time-saving game state, which has decreased to the remaining 20 times, is increased to 100 times, so that the situation is advantageous to the player compared to losing or a small win.

When a small win is won in the special performance round, display control is performed in exactly the same manner as the winning of the big win 2 except for the display of the result on the special symbol display device 472.例文帳に追加Therefore, a player cannot recognize whether he has won a small win or a big win 2 in a special performance time even if he visually recognizes the decorative pattern display device 479 or confirms the operation of the big prize winning device. As a result, the player can be made to recognize which one was won through the performance in the time-saving game state of 19 times after the next time.

For example, after winning the big win 2 and the small win, the display screen of the decoration pattern display device 479 is displayed corresponding to the remaining number of times of the time saving state in the case of the small win, for example, after displaying ``remaining 19 times of time saving'', the remaining number is subtracted and displayed in synchronism with the execution of the variable display. Then, in the case of a small win, ``remaining time-saving 0 times'' is shifted to a normal game state, and in the case of a big win 2, instead of displaying ``remaining time-saving 0 times'', ``battle restart'' is displayed to suggest to the player that the time-saving game state is continued. As a result, the player can easily recognize that the conditions for shifting to the normal game state are already satisfied and the player will shift to the normal game state unless he wins the jackpot lottery in the remaining 19 unit games.

When the lottery related to the special pattern is not won in the special performance and the player loses the game, display control is performed in exactly the same manner as the winning of the small win and the big win 2 except for the display of the result of the special pattern display device 472.例文帳に追加Further, in the small win and the big win 2, the big winning device operates for about 1.0 second, so in the case of a loss, the variable time is set to be shorter by that amount. It cannot be recognized even if the player visually recognizes the decorative pattern display device 479 whether he wins a small win, wins a big win 2, or loses in the special performance times. However, by confirming the operation of the big winning device, it is possible to recognize whether it is a failure or something else. Further, even after losing, the display screen of the decorative design display device 479 may display a display corresponding to the remaining number of times of the time saving state.

The variation time for the big win 2 and the small win and the variation time for the loss do not necessarily have to be different for the time corresponding to the time (approximately 1.0 seconds) of the special game state and the small win game state in which the big winning opening is opened, and may be set to the same variation time. In addition, since the ratio of the difference in the variation time becomes large in the case of short-time variation, it is possible to set the variation time with a time difference only partially, for example, the variation time of about 2 seconds or less is set with a time difference, and the variation time of more than 2 seconds is set without the time difference.

Next, the invincibility time effect will be described with reference to FIG. The invincible time effect is a display condition (so-called mission) for instructing the execution of the battle effect within a fixed time by displaying the characters of "invincible time" as a predetermined effect display and a timer indicating the period of the "invincible time" (hereinafter also referred to as "invincible time") on the display screen of the decorative pattern display device 479 during the variable display. This invincible time performance is set as a performance for generating a big win when the battle performance to be executed in the special performance time is displayed during the invincible period ending before the special performance time by referring to the remaining times of the time-saving game state.

FIG. 49 is a diagram showing a display effect setting process S2000, which is part of the flowchart in the main process of the sub control board 940. As shown in FIG. The display effect setting process S2000 is stored as a control program that is part of the fixed value data of the ROM of the sub control board 940, and is executed at regular intervals (for example, every 10 ms) as part of the main process after the initial process of the sub control board 940 is completed.

In the display effect setting process S2000, first, it is confirmed whether or not it is in the time saving state (S2001). As the time saving state, there are both a time saving game state and a variable probability game state, and if the time saving state is not in effect (S2001: N), the processing from S2002 to S2015 for setting the execution of the invincibility time performance is skipped, another processing S2016 for performing display control other than the invincibility time performance is executed, and then the display performance setting processing S2000 is finished. In the process of S2016, display control of the effect including updating of the display contents of the invincible time effect is performed.

If it is determined in the process of S2001 that the time is reduced (S2001: Y), it is determined whether or not the invincible time is already set (S2002). Whether or not the invincibility time is set is determined by referring to a flag (a partial area of the RAM of the sub-control board 940) that is turned on during the invincibility period. When it is determined in the process of S2002 that the invincible time is set during the invincible period (S2002: Y), the process of S2003 to S2015 for setting the execution of the invincible time effect is skipped, and the process proceeds to S2016.

If it is determined in the process of S2002 that the invincibility period is not in effect (S2002: N), the lottery counter value (a partial area of the RAM of the sub-control board 940) that generates a random number value (for example, 0 to 65535) generated within a certain range for setting the effect is obtained (S2003), and preparations are made to determine by lottery whether or not the invincible time effect is executed and the length of the period using the lottery counter value. do.

In the process of S2004, it is determined whether or not to set an invincible time (S2004). This decision is made, for example, by determining whether or not the lottery counter value is within the range of ``0 to 655'', and if it is determined that the invincible time is not to be set because it is out of that range (S2004: N), the process proceeds to S2016.

In the process of S2004, when it is determined that the invincible time is within the range of values (S2004: Y), the remaining number of times of the time saving state (remaining number of times) is obtained (S2005). The remaining number of times of the time saving state is confirmed by monitoring the progress of 100 times of the unit game in the time saving game state by a sub control board 940, and if it is in the variable probability game state, the remaining number of times of the unit game of the time saving state is 100 times or more, so the subsequent determination is made as 100 times.

In the process of S2006, it is determined whether or not the remaining number of times is 70 or more (S2006). Since the variable display in the time saving state is executed for a short period of time of about 1.5 seconds per time, if the remaining number of times is 70 times or more (S2006: Y), the variable display is executed 50 times or more before the special performance time when the remaining number of times in the time saving state is 20 times. Therefore, approximately 75 seconds, which is obtained by multiplying the remaining number of times "50" by the variation time "approximately 1.5 seconds", takes time until the special effect is performed. In this case, it is determined whether or not the lottery counter value is a multiple of '7' (S2007), and if it is a multiple of '7' (S2007: Y), the invincibility time is set to start (S2008), and the processing is shifted to S2016. Thus, when it is determined to set the invincible time, and in a situation where it takes approximately 75 seconds or more until the special performance, the invincible time with an invincible period of ``60 seconds'' is set with a certain probability (approximately 1/7).

If it is determined in the process of S2006 that the remaining number of times in the time saving state is less than 70 times (S2006: N), and if it is determined in the process of S2007 that the lottery counter value is not a multiple of "7" (S2007: N), it is determined whether the remaining number of times is 50 or more (S2009). If the remaining number of times is 50 or more, approximately 45 seconds obtained by multiplying "30" by "approximately 1.5 seconds" will take time until the special performance is performed. In this case, it is determined whether or not the lottery counter value is a multiple of '5' (S2010), and if it is a multiple of '5' (S2010: Y), setting is made to start the invincibility time of '40 seconds' (S2011), and the process proceeds to S2016.

When it is determined in the process of S2009 that the remaining number of times of the time saving state is less than 50 times (S2009: N), and when it is determined in the process of S2010 that the lottery counter value is not a multiple of "5" (S2010: N), it is determined whether the remaining number of times is 40 times or more (S2012). If the remaining number of times is 40 or more, approximately 30 seconds obtained by multiplying "20" by "approximately 1.5 seconds" will take time before the special effect is performed. In this case, it is determined whether or not the counter value for lottery is a multiple of '3' (S2013), and if it is a multiple of '3' (S2013: Y), setting is made to start the invincible time of '20 seconds' (S2013), and the process proceeds to S2016.

When it is determined in the processing of S2013 that it is not a multiple of ``3'', setting is made to start an invincibility time of ``10 seconds'', which is an invincibility period shorter than approximately 30 seconds which is the minimum time required for the special performance (S2013), and the processing is shifted to S2016.

Here, the length of the invincible period is selected by lottery so that the shorter the length of the invincible period, the higher the probability of setting, and the longer the period, the lower the probability of setting the invincible period.

The invincibility period is not limited to the four types of "10 seconds", "20 seconds", "40 seconds" and "60 seconds", but may be more or less types, and may include settings with different lengths of time. In addition, in the processing of S2004, when the starting winning has already occurred and the winning of the big win 1 is decided, the invincibility period may be set with a higher probability than when the winning is not decided, and as a result, the big win 1 is likely to occur after the occurrence of the invincibility period, so that the invincible time performance is desirable for the player.

Next, with reference to FIG. 50, operations including game state transitions and display contents in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 50 is a time chart showing the relationship between game state transitions and display contents, exemplifying a case where the state progresses to the right according to the elapsed time. Also, FIG. 50(a) shows an example in which the jackpot 1 does not occur in the time-saving gaming state after the jackpot 2 and shifts to the normal gaming state, FIG. 50(b) shows an example in which the jackpot 1 is won in the time-saving gaming state after the jackpot 2 is won, and the probability variable gaming state is executed, and FIG. shows an example.

As shown in FIG. 50(a), first, in the normal game state ("Normal" is displayed in FIG. 50), as a normal effect, the decorative symbol display device 479 performs a variable display effect based on the start winning relating to the special symbol 1. When a jackpot that shifts to the variable probability game state in the normal game state is won, a jackpot game of, for example, 15 rounds is performed as a special game state, and an effect during the jackpot is displayed on the display screen of the decorative pattern display device 479. - 特許庁After the special game state, the variable probability game state is entered, and the variable display based on the start prize relating to the special pattern 2 is mainly executed by the right-handed game method, and if the big win 1 and the big win 2 are not won in the variable display, the display of ``waiting for battle'' is continuously displayed on the display screen of the decorative pattern display device 479.例文帳に追加

When a jackpot 2 is won during the variable probability game state, the game is shifted to a time-saving game state via a special game state (not shown) for a short period of about 1.0 seconds in which game balls hardly enter the big winning device. The display of ``waiting for battle'' is continuously displayed on the display screen of the decorative pattern display device 479 including the short-time special game state, and the player hardly notices that the state has shifted to the time-saving game state. Since the probability of the big win becomes low by shifting to the time-saving game state, it is possible to easily set the probability of the big win to a low level while making the player expect that the variable probability game state continues for a long time, and to provide the player with an easy-to-play game property with suppressed projectileness.

After shifting to a time-saving game state, 80 unit games are executed without winning a big hit, and when the remaining number of times of the time-saving state reaches 20 times, variable display of a long-time battle performance is executed, and a performance display of losing the battle is displayed on the display screen of a decoration pattern display device 479.例文帳に追加With this display, the player recognizes that the jackpot 2 has already been won and the time-saving game state ends in the remaining 20 unit games, the battle end is displayed on the display screen in the subsequent 20 unit games, and the performance results indicating how many battles have been won after the start of the variable probability game state are displayed, the game state advantageous to the player including the time-saving game state ends, and the game returns to the normal game state.

Here, as shown in the lower part of FIG. 50(a), when the jackpot 1 is won during the battle waiting period before the remaining 20 times of the time saving, the battle performance is executed at that timing, then the performance of winning the battle is displayed, and 15 rounds of the jackpot game is started as a special game state. Therefore, the battle performance that occurs during the battle standby period before the remaining 20 times of the time saving is always the performance of winning the battle, and the start of the battle performance is the period corresponding to the occurrence of the big win 1 during this period. Therefore, as shown in the lower part of FIG. 50(a), "invincible time" is displayed on the display screen of the decoration pattern display device 479 during the battle standby before the remaining 20 times of the time saving, and even if the invincibility time production is set in which the remaining time as the invincibility period is subtracted and displayed, if the battle production occurs during this period, it means that the jackpot 1 is won during this invincibility period. That is, since it is an invincible period during which the player is not defeated in battle, an invincible time effect can be set.

As shown in FIG. 50(a), the ``invincible time'' is set at a timing that always ends before the execution of the battle defeat effect by the above-described display effect setting process S2000 (see FIG. 49). After visually recognizing the state in which the execution of the battle performance is instructed as an invincible time, the player can visually recognize the battle performance itself, so that the player can experience the content of the battle performance and can be motivated to play the game by imagining the specific content for the next game.

FIG. 50(b) shows a case in which the big win 2 is won during the battle standby before the remaining 20 times of the time saving and the time saving game state is entered, and then the big win 1 is won and the probability variable game state is entered again. In addition, FIG. 50(c) shows a case where the probability variable gaming state occurs (continues) by winning the big win 1 without winning the big win 2 compared to FIG. 50(b). Comparing FIG. 50(b) and FIG. 50(c), although the transition of the game state is different, the display contents of the decorative pattern display device 479 after the start of the variation of the special pattern 2 continue until the big win 1 is won in the state of waiting for the battle, and the display contents are the same. Therefore, the winning of the big win 2, which is an opportunity to shift to the normal game state, can be prevented from being recognized by the player by continuing the performance of the battle standby even in the unit game in which the big win 2 is won. Therefore, it is possible to easily give the impression that the variable probability game state has been continued, and to suppress the opportunity to know the situation that the variable probability game state is shifted to the time reduction game state or the remaining number of times of the time reduction game state is subtracted and the shift to the normal game state is approaching.

In this way, in the normal game state, a special game state and a variable probability game state with unlimited number of times (no upper limit number of times set) are generated by winning a jackpot that shifts to the variable probability game state after the special game state, and when a big win 2 is won in the variable probability game state, the special game state and the time-saving game state are generated. This time-saving game state is a time-saving game state with a limited number of times (upper limit number of times setting) that continues at least until a unit game is executed 100 times based on establishment of a starting condition or a jackpot is won during the execution of the 100 unit games. Then, when the big win 2 is won in the variable probability game state, the display of the battle standby as the display contents displayed when the big win 2 is not won in the variable probability game state is continuously displayed. For this reason, even if the player visually recognizes the display contents of the decorative pattern display device 479, the player cannot recognize that the probability variable game state has shifted to the time-saving game state, and after that, after the unit game of 79 times of non-winning of the big win is executed, by visually recognizing the effect of battle defeat as a predetermined effect display in the 80th unit game, the player wins the big win 2, and when the unit game of 100 times of non-winning of the big win is completed, it is delayed to return to the normal game state. can recognize.

On the other hand, even if the big win 2 is won in the variable probability game state and shifts to the time-saving game state, if the big win 1 is won before the performance of the battle defeat is displayed, the state is shifted to the variable probability game state through the special game state, and the variable probability game state is started again, and in this case, the performance display of the battle defeat is not displayed at the timing when the scheduled 100-time big win non-winning unit game is finished. Therefore, by visually recognizing the performance display of battle defeat, the player can reduce the chance of recognizing the situation where the possibility of winning the big win 2 and returning to the normal game state is increased by the display contents. Therefore, compared with the probability of winning the big win 2 returning to the normal game state among the winning big wins, the probability of visually recognizing the performance display of the battle defeat can be kept low, and the player can be easily given an impression as if the winning probability of the big win 2 is set low and the probability of continuing the variable probability game state is high. As a result, it is possible to provide the pachinko machine 100 capable of executing an effect display suitable for the player while suppressing the probability of transition to an advantageous game state and the probability of continuation of an advantageous game state.

In addition, in the time-saving game state in which the upper limit number of times is limited to 100 times, the period of the invincible time is set according to the remaining number of times in the time-saving game state. After the period of the invincibility time passes, if the big win is not won until the execution of the 80th unit game, the display of the battle performance in which the character fights and the battle defeat corresponding to the non-winning of the big win is displayed on the decoration pattern display device 479, and the performance display of the character's action is executed. Since the period display indicating the period of the invincibility time is performed when the remaining number of unit games in the time-saving game state remains more than a fixed number, the display of battle defeat can be set to be executed without fail after the period of the invincibility time.

On the other hand, when the jackpot 1 is won within the period of the invincible time, the effect display of winning the battle in which the character fights is executed. That is, by displaying the invincible time, when the battle performance is started, a display condition is presented such that the character which shifts to an advantageous game state when winning is sure to win, and when the display condition is satisfied, the player can be provided with the game property that a special game state is generated. Therefore, after the display of the invincibility time and the invincibility period is displayed, the player can certainly generate an opportunity to visually recognize the performance display in which the predetermined character moves, thereby reducing the dissatisfied situation that the player cares about the contents of the performance and facilitating the continuation of the game.

<Eighteenth Embodiment>
Next, an eighteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 51 to 57. FIG. The pachinko machine 100 of the eighteenth embodiment has a setting change function for setting the game ball output rate (machine discount, payout rate). In addition, in the following description, the same reference numerals are given to the same configurations as those in the above-described first embodiment, and the description thereof is omitted.

FIG. 51 is a front view of a game board 400X in the pachinko machine 100 of the eighteenth embodiment. The game board 400X is provided with a flow-down changing member such as a nail 411 and a windmill 412, a central structure 420 arranged substantially in the center of the base body 401, etc., in the same manner as the game board 400, and a middle start winning device 2431, which is a starting device related to the first special symbol, arranged on the lower side of the central structure 420, and a starting winning device related to the second special symbol, arranged on the right side of the central structure 420. A right starting winning device 2432, a lower big winning device 2434 arranged below the middle starting winning device 2431, an upper big winning device 2433 arranged below the right starting winning device 2432, and general winning devices 2439A, 2439B arranged on both left and right sides of the lower big winning device 2434 are provided.

The game board 400X is provided with a plurality of switches (see FIG. 53) as detecting means for detecting the passage of game balls corresponding to the above-described medium start winning device 2431, etc., and the entry of the game ball into a predetermined area corresponding to each switch can be detected. For example, a middle start winning switch 2441 that detects a game ball that has entered the middle start winning device 2431, a right start winning switch 2442 that detects a game ball that has entered the right start winning device 2432, an upper big winning switch 2443 that detects a game ball that has entered the upper big winning device 2433, a lower big winning switch 2444 that detects a game ball that has entered the lower big winning device 2434, and a combination operation switch. 445, a start switch 446, a non-specific path switch 2447 for detecting game balls entering a non-specific path (not shown) formed inside the upper prize winning device 2433, a specific path switch 2448 detecting a game ball entering a specific passage (not shown) formed inside the upper prize winning device 2433, and a general winning switch 2 for detecting game balls entering the general prize winning devices 2439A and 2439B. 449A, 2449B, etc. are installed on the game board 400X.

Each winning device, specifically, the middle start winning device 2431, the right start winning device 2432, the upper big winning device 2433, the lower big winning device 2434, and the general winning devices 2439A and 2439B form winning openings, and the game balls entering each winning opening pass through a through-hole formed in the substrate 401 and enter a collection discharge passage (not shown) formed on the back side of the substrate 401. be guided. In addition, the game balls that have not entered the respective winning devices are guided to the collection and discharge passage through the discharge port 401A provided at the most downstream portion of the game area.

A shot ball detection switch 451 (see FIG. 53) is provided in the collection/discharge passage. The shot ball detection switch 451 is composed of, for example, a pass-through sensor having a detection hole through which a game ball passes. The number of game balls detected by the shot ball detection switch 451 corresponds to the number of game balls shot into the game area, and a signal corresponding to the number of game balls is output via an external terminal plate 580 (see FIG. 52) provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 100. The game ball detection by the shot ball detection switch 451 is performed based on the signal state from the shot ball detection switch 451 in the switch reading process S1209 (see FIG. 55).

A game ball whose passage is detected by a shot ball detection switch 451 in the recovery discharge passage is discharged from the pachinko machine 100 to a game ball circulation device (not shown) provided in the game hall via a discharge port provided at the lower back side of the pachinko machine 100.例文帳に追加When game balls enter any winning device, a predetermined number of game balls corresponding to the type of the winning device are paid out from a payout device 540 (see FIG. 52).

The right start winning device 2432 related to the second special symbol includes a right entry regulation mechanism 2452 that changes the probability of entry of the game ball into the interior thereof by transition between the entry permission posture and the entry prohibition posture, and a right entry regulation solenoid 2462 (see FIG. 53) that drives the right entry regulation mechanism 2452. The right entry regulation mechanism 2452 includes a movable piece driven by a right entry regulation solenoid 2462. When the right entry regulation mechanism 2452 is in the entry prohibiting posture, the movable piece closes the entrance (winning opening), thereby preventing the game ball from entering the right start winning device 2432. However, when the right entry regulation mechanism 2452 is in the entry permitting posture, the movable piece is arranged to guide the game ball into the entrance. This allows the game ball to enter the right start winning device 2432 . The right entry regulation mechanism 2452 shifts to an entry permitting posture for a prescribed number of times and for a prescribed period of time in response to driving by a right entry regulation solenoid 2462 when a game ball entering a starting device 436 relating to normal symbols is won in a lottery based on detection by a start switch 446 (hereinafter also referred to as "normal symbol lottery").

As shown in FIG. 51, the upper big winning device 2433 includes an upper entry regulation mechanism 2453 that regulates the entry of game balls into the interior thereof by shifting between an entry-allowed posture and an entry-prohibited posture, an upper entry regulation solenoid 2463 (see FIG. 53) that changes the posture of the upper entry regulation mechanism 2453, and a game ball that has entered the upper big prize device 2433 by shifting between the non-guided posture and the guided posture. A distribution mechanism (not shown) for distributing to a specific path and a switching solenoid 2465 (see FIG. 53) for changing the posture of the distribution mechanism to switch the guide destination of the game ball are provided. When the upper entry regulation mechanism 2453 of the upper special prize device 2433 is in the entry prohibiting posture, the game ball cannot enter the upper special prize device 2433 because the upper entry regulation mechanism 2453 closes the entry port (prize opening). become. In addition, the game ball entering the upper big prize device 2433 is guided to a non-specific passage when the distribution mechanism is in a non-guiding attitude of projecting forward, and is guided to a specific passage when the distribution mechanism is in a guiding attitude of retreating backward. The specified path, the non-specified path and the distribution mechanism are provided to diversify the transition of the game state, and when a game ball enters the specified path, a game state advantageous to the player as a privilege (for example, variable probability game state) is given.

As shown in FIG. 51, the lower big prize device 2434 is provided with a lower entry regulation mechanism 2454 that regulates the entry of game balls into the inside thereof by shifting between an entry permitting posture and an entry prohibition posture, and a lower entry regulation solenoid 2464 (see FIG. 53) that changes the posture of the lower entry regulation mechanism 2454. When the lower entry regulation mechanism 2454 is in the entry prohibition posture, the game ball cannot enter the lower big prize device 2434 by closing the entrance (winning mouth) by the lower entry regulation mechanism 2454, but when the lower entry regulation mechanism 2454 is in the entry permission posture, the game ball can enter the lower big prize device 2434 by opening the entrance.

A game ball can enter the upper big prize winning device 2433 and the lower big winning prize device 2434 when winning the jackpot lottery. Specifically, when the game ball entering the middle start winning device 2431 related to the first special design is detected by the middle start winning prize switch 2441 (hereinafter also referred to as "first special design lottery"), or when the game ball entering the right start winning device 2432 related to the second special design is detected by the right start winning switch 2442 (hereinafter also referred to as "second special design lottery"). In this case, at least one of the upper entry restriction solenoid 2463 and the lower entry restriction solenoid 2464 is activated. By this operation, at least one of the upper entry restriction mechanism 2453 and the lower entry restriction mechanism 2454 assumes the entry permitting posture for a predetermined number of times and for a predetermined time. In addition, the sorting mechanism shifts to the guided posture in accordance with the operation of the switching solenoid 2465 after a predetermined period of time from the shift of the upper entry regulation mechanism 2453 to the entry permitting posture, and returns to the non-guided posture in response to the stoppage of the switching solenoid 2465 after a predetermined period of time from the shift to the guided posture.

In addition, the game board 400X is provided with a nail condition level display device 474 (see FIG. 53) composed of a 7-segment display at a position (for example, the upper left corner of the game board 400) that can be seen when the front block 102 is opened with respect to the intermediate block 103. The nail condition level display device 474 is configured to be invisible or difficult to be seen by the player, and is arranged at a position where the player cannot be seen when the front block 102 is closed with respect to the intermediate block 103 (for example, a position superimposed on the back side of the front block 102 and away from the optically transparent viewing portion of the central panel 220).

Various game states and transitions between game states will now be described. When a big hit is won in the first special pattern lottery or the second special pattern lottery, the game state to be shifted after the special game state differs depending on whether or not the game ball enters a specific passage (internal passage of the upper big winning device 2433) during the special game state to be shifted based on the winning. When the game ball does not enter the specific passage during the special game state, the game state shifts to a time saving game state (that is, a game state which is a time saving state and a low probability state). On the other hand, when the game ball enters the specific passage during the special game state, the game state shifts to a variable probability game state (that is, a time-saving state and a high-probability state).

It should be noted that the game state and the transition between the game states do not necessarily have to be configured as described above. For example, the high probability state may be configured to continue until the next big win is won, at least one of the game states may be configured according to other contents, the configuration may further include a game state different from the above-described game states, or the configuration may be configured such that the transition between game states is performed under conditions different from those described above.

Next, the operations of the main devices of the game board 400X will be described roughly in chronological order. In various game states, when the game ball entering the middle start winning device 2431 related to the first special symbol is detected by the middle start winning prize switch 2441 (see FIG. 53), the first special symbol starts winning. When the right to play the unit game relating to the first special pattern is not reserved up to the maximum number of times at the time of start winning of the first special pattern, the winning random number, the big win pattern random number and the stop pattern random number relating to the special pattern are acquired and stored in a prescribed area of the RAM of the main control board 920.例文帳に追加

A unit game based on the random number obtained based on the start winning of the first special symbol is started on the game board 400 in the same manner as the unit game based on the random number obtained based on the starting winning of the first special symbol.

When a big win is won in the first special symbol lottery based on the start winning prize of the first special symbol, similar to the case of winning a big win in the first special symbol lottery based on the start winning prize of the first special symbol on the game board 400, the type of stop pattern (big win pattern) corresponding to the big win winning of the first special symbol lottery is determined based on the acquired big win symbol random number.

After the first special symbol lottery, similarly to the case of the game board 400, the variation display time of the first special symbol is determined and the variation pattern of the decorative symbol is selected. After that, the variable display of the first special symbol on the special symbol display device 471 related to the first special symbol and the variable display of the decorative symbol on the decorative symbol display device 479 (variable performance) are started and continued in the same manner as in the case of the game board 400, and as the variable display time elapses, the stop symbols related to the first special symbol and the decorative symbol are fixedly displayed.

When the stop symbol associated with the first special symbol is a jackpot symbol, the game state shifts to the special game state after the first special symbol is confirmed and displayed. In the special game state, the upper entry regulating mechanism 2453 of the upper big winning device 2433 and the lower entry regulating mechanism 2454 of the lower big winning device 2434 are in the entry permitting posture for a predetermined number of times in a predetermined order according to the type of big win. When a predetermined number (e.g., 8 pieces) of game balls are detected by the big winning switches 2443 and 2444 during each time of entry permission posture in the upper entry regulation mechanism 2453 and the lower entry regulation mechanism 2454, or when a predetermined maximum entry permission time (for example, 29.5 seconds) elapses, the upper entry regulation mechanism 2453 or the lower entry regulation mechanism 2454 shifts to the entry prohibition posture. After that, after a predetermined entry prohibition time elapses, either the upper entry regulation mechanism 2453 or the lower entry regulation mechanism 2454 returns to the entry permitting posture again. This entry control operation is repeated a predetermined number of times in a predetermined order corresponding to the type of jackpot.

Only one of the upper entry regulating mechanism 2453 and the lower entry regulating mechanism 2454 is configured to take an entry permitting posture during the special game state, and one shifts to the initial entry permitting posture after a predetermined waiting time elapses (after an opening period) from the start of the special game state. Also, the special game state ends after a predetermined entry prohibition time elapses after returning to the entry prohibition posture in the final round, and after a predetermined waiting time elapses (after the ending period). After the end of the special game state, as described above, it shifts to the time-saving game state or probability variable game state.

In various game states, when the game ball entering the right starting winning device 2432 related to the second special symbol is detected by the right starting winning switch 2442, the second special symbol starts winning. The control of the unit game based on the start winning of the second special symbol is executed in the same manner as the control related to the first special symbol described above. That is, if the right of the unit game relating to the second special symbol is not reserved up to the maximum number of times at the time of starting winning of the second special symbol, each random number relating to the special symbol is acquired and the unit game based on this starting winning is executed. In addition, the determination of the stop symbol according to the second special symbol lottery, the selection of the variation pattern of the decorative symbol, the execution of the variation display, the game state transition control, etc. are also executed in the same manner as the control related to the first special symbol.

In various game states, when a game ball entering a starting device 436 is detected by a starting switch 446, if the right of a unit game related to normal symbols is not reserved up to the maximum number of times, winning random numbers related to normal symbols are obtained and stored in a prescribed area of a RAM of a main control board 920.例文帳に追加

A unit game related to the normal pattern is performed in the same manner as in the case of the game board 400, and when the stop pattern related to the normal pattern is a win pattern, the right entry regulation mechanism 2452 of the right starting winning device 2432 shifts to the entry permitting posture at least once after the normal pattern is fixed and displayed. Specifically, when winning in a non-time-saving state (normal game state and special game state), the right starting winning device 2432 shifts to an entry-allowing state over a predetermined maximum permissible entry time (for example, approximately 0.1 seconds), and in the case of winning in the time-saving state (time-saving gaming state and probability variable gaming state), the right starting winning device 2432 is longer than the non-time-saving state. Intermittently (for example, divided into three times) transition to the approach permitting posture. However, when a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are detected by the right start winning switch 2442, the right entry regulation mechanism 2452 shifts to the entry prohibition posture without waiting for the maximum entry allowable time to pass, and even if the number of times of shifting to the entry allow posture has not reached the predetermined number, the operation of the right start winning device 2432 in the unit game related to the normal symbol of this time ends.

Next, the playability of the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment will be described. In order to receive the second special symbol lottery, first, winning in the normal symbol lottery must be won, and further, the game ball must enter the right start prize winning device 2432 in the entry permission state of the right start prize winning device 2432 based on the winning. The probability of winning the normal symbol in the normal game state is the same as the probability of winning in the time saving game state, but the staying time (for example, about 0.1 seconds) of the right start winning device 2432 in the entry permission state based on the winning in the normal game state (for example, about 4.8 seconds) is set extremely short compared to the staying time in the time saving state (for example, about 4.8 seconds). significantly smaller than the opportunities per unit of time available. Conversely, in a time-saving state such as a time-saving game state or a variable probability game state, the chance per unit time of receiving the second special symbol lottery is much larger than the chance of receiving the first special symbol lottery per unit time.

Therefore, the player wins the jackpot in the first special symbol lottery, and then plays with the aim of shifting to the probability variable game state by entering the game ball into the specific passage in the subsequent special game state. On the other hand, in the time-saving game state and the variable probability game state, the game is played with the aim of winning a big hit in the second special symbol lottery before each game state ends. Therefore, the player plays the game by the left-handed game method in the normal game state, and plays the game by the right-handed game method in the time-saving game state and the variable probability game state. Further, since the upper big winning device 2433 and the lower big winning device 434 are arranged on the right side with respect to the central structure 420, the right-handed game method is used even in the special game state.

FIG. 52 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 100 of the eighteenth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 52, a rear setting switch 905 is provided on the rear side of the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment. The back setting switch 905 is a setting validating device for validating a setting operation for setting the ball output rate of the pachinko machine 100 to one of a plurality of predetermined stages (eg, 6 stages, 9 stages, etc.).

By inserting a predetermined key (not shown) into the back setting switch 905 and rotating it to a predetermined position (in this embodiment, a position rotated approximately 90 degrees clockwise from the initial position), the setting change of the ball output rate can be validated (allowed). By performing a predetermined setting operation (pressing the initialization switch 907 in this embodiment) in a state in which the setting change of the pitching rate is enabled in this way, the setting change of the pitching rate is effectively performed.

When the setting change of the put-out rate is effectively performed, a predetermined game mode is changed according to each set stage. In other words, it can be said that the setting change of the ball output rate by operating the back setting switch 905 and the initialization switch 907 is the setting change of the game mode.

In the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment, according to each stage set by changing the setting of the ball output rate (that is, changing the setting of the game mode), the probability of winning the first hit (in this embodiment, the probability of winning the first special symbol lottery) and the variable probability continuation rate (in this embodiment, when the variable probability game state moves to the special game state via the second special symbol lottery, the probability of shifting to the variable probability game state after the special game state) Nine types with different combinations. Any one of the game modes can be selected. Therefore, when the setting change of the ball output rate (the setting change of the game mode) is effectively performed, the ball output rate is adjusted by changing each winning probability of the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery (that is, using the probability lottery data corresponding to each winning probability) so that the probability of first winning and the probability of continuation corresponding to the set stage.

Specifically, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, a top type with a significantly low initial winning probability but a significantly high variable continuation rate, a middle type with an intermediate initial winning probability and an intermediate variable continuation rate, and a bottom type with a significantly low initial winning probability but a significantly high variable continuation rate can be selected. Furthermore, in each of these types, the probability state of each type is divided into three levels (hereinafter also referred to as "probability setting state") in which the initial winning probability of each type is narrower than the range of the initial winning probability between the types, that is, the first stage probability with the lowest initial winning probability among the three stages, the second stage probability with the second lowest initial winning probability, and the third stage probability with the highest initial winning probability can be selected.

In the top type, the number of prize balls associated with winning the middle start prize device 2431 and the right start prize device 2432 is smaller than the other types, but the number of prize balls associated with the prize winning of the upper big prize device 2433 and the lower big prize device 2434 is larger than those of the other types. On the other hand, in the bottom type, the number of prize balls associated with winning the middle start prize device 2431 and the right start prize device 2432 is larger than that of the other types, but the number of prize balls associated with the prize winning of the upper big prize device 2433 and the lower big prize device 2434 is smaller than those of the other types.

Here, the same number of prize balls may be set for all of the top type, middle type, and bottom type. This makes it impossible for the player to determine from the number of winning balls which setting is the top type, the middle type, or the bottom type, and the game property of guessing which type is set can be added for a long period of time.

The profit rate for the player changes according to the stage of the probability setting state for any of the top type, the middle type and the bottom type, but if the stage of the probability setting state is the same for any type, the profit rate for the player is set substantially the same. Therefore, even if the setting of the probability is changed by changing the type, it is easy to predict the profits earned by the game hall per a certain period (for example, one day), and the management of the game hall can be facilitated.

The game mode to be changed by changing the setting of the ball output rate is not necessarily limited to the combination of the first hit probability and the variable probability entry rate as described above. For example, either the first hit probability or the variable probability entry rate may be used. Also, the probability that a small hit is selected in the first special symbol lottery or the second special symbol lottery, the probability that a small hit is selected in the first special symbol lottery or the second special symbol lottery, the probability of the probability that the first hit probability and the probability variable rush rate other than the winning probability of the first special symbol lottery or the second special symbol lottery, the probability that the small hit will be selected in the second special symbol lottery, the probability of the probability variable rush rate (in this embodiment, the rate of entering the probability variable game state via winning in the second special symbol lottery), and the probability that the variable game state that has moved after the special game state will end It may be the probability that the end of the variable probability game state is selected in the drop lottery performed each time the variable display of the pattern is executed during the variable game state), or a combination of two or more of these game modes.

A setting display device 906 is provided above the rear setting switch 905 . When the setting of the put-out rate (the setting of the game mode) is effectively changed by operating the back setting switch 905, the setting display device 906 displays the setting display information corresponding to the currently set game mode. The setting display information is composed of a combination of alphabetic characters representing the type and numbers representing the probability setting state. In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the top type, middle type, and bottom type are represented by letters "T," "M," and "B," respectively. Further, the probability setting state of each type is represented by "1" for the first stage probability, "2" for the second stage probability, and "3" for the third stage probability.

Therefore, for example, the setting display information displayed on the setting display device 906 is "T1" when the game mode is the top type with the first stage probability, the setting display information displayed on the setting display device 906 is "M3" when the game mode is the middle type with the third stage probability, and the setting display information displayed on the setting display device 906 is "B2" when the game mode is the bottom type with the second stage probability.

Further, as shown in FIG. 52, an external terminal plate 580 is provided at the upper right end of the rear block 104 as viewed from the rear. The external terminal plate 580 is provided with an output terminal for outputting a signal during a special game state, an output terminal for outputting a signal corresponding to the number of game balls detected by the shot ball detection switch 451, and the like.

FIG. 53 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 100 of the eighteenth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 53 , the rear setting switch 905 and the setting display device 906 are connected to the signal relay section 903 .

The signal relay unit 903 relays an on-state setting signal output to the main control board 920 when the rear setting switch 905 is rotated approximately 90 degrees clockwise by a predetermined key (not shown). The main control board 920 permits the change of the game mode in response to receiving the setting signal of the ON state from the rear setting switch 905 . Also, the signal relay unit 903 relays the setting display signal output from the main control board 920 to the setting display device 906 . The setting display device 906 displays setting display information corresponding to the received setting display signal.

Next, various control processes executed by the main control board 920 in the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment will be described. FIG. 54 is a flow chart showing main processing (abbreviated as "main control main processing" in FIG. 54) of the main control board 920 in the pachinko machine 100 of the eighteenth embodiment.

The main processing of the main control board 920 in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment is a process that is activated upon recovery from a power outage, like the main processing of the main control board 920 in the pachinko machine 100 of the first embodiment.

Hereinafter, portions different from the main processing of the main control board 920 in the pachinko machine 100 of the first embodiment will be described. In the main processing of the main control board 920 in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 54, after the startup standby processing S1003, the output state determination processing S2001 of the setting signal from the rear setting switch 905 of the power/launch control board 900 is performed.

Specifically, when the setting signal from the rear setting switch 905 is in the ON state indicating that the rear setting switch 905 is being operated by a predetermined key (S1005: Y), RAM clear processing S2002 is executed to erase information in substantially the entire area of the RAM. Specifically, in the RAM clearing process S2002, information in substantially all areas other than the setting correspondence information stored in the RAM is erased.

The setting correspondence information is information corresponding to each of a plurality of predetermined stages (nine types in this embodiment) of the game mode, and the setting mode information corresponding to the game mode being set is stored in the RAM. Therefore, by the RAM clearing process S2002, the information in substantially all areas except the storage area for the setting correspondence information in the RAM of the main control board 920 is erased, and the setting change is permitted.

When the setting change is permitted, a setting display signal for identifying the game mode corresponding to the setting correspondence information stored in the RAM is output to the setting display device 906 . The setting display device 906 displays setting display information corresponding to the setting display signal received from the main control board 920 . That is, the setting display device 906 displays setting display information corresponding to the setting correspondence information stored in the RAM.

Next, setting change processing S2003 is executed to change the setting of the game mode until the setting signal from the back setting switch 905 is turned off. The setting signal from the rear setting switch 905 is turned off when the rear setting switch 905 is not operated by a predetermined key.

The setting of the game mode is changed by pressing the initialization switch 907 while the back setting switch 905 is operated by a predetermined key. Specifically, in this state, each time the main control board 920 receives an initialization signal based on pressing of the initialization switch 907, the setting correspondence information is sequentially changed. Specifically, the order of cyclically selecting nine predetermined game modes (for example, . . . →T1->T2->T3->M1->M2->M3->B1->B2->B3->T1->T2-> .

Each time the change is made, a value corresponding to the currently selected game mode is stored in the RAM as setting correspondence information. Every time the setting correspondence information stored in the RAM is changed, a setting display signal corresponding to the setting correspondence information is output to the setting display device 906, and the setting display information corresponding to the changed setting correspondence information is displayed on the setting display device 906.

Therefore, the setting changer such as the manager of the game hall repeatedly presses the initialization switch 907 until the game mode desired to be set for the pachinko machine 100 is selected in a state where the back setting switch 905 is operated by a predetermined key, and then wins a game ball in the middle start winning device 2431, thereby completing the selection of the game mode. Therefore, the setting change processing S2003 ends when the game ball is won in the medium start prize winning device 2431 after the game mode is selected by pressing the initialization switch 907.

When the setting signal from the back setting switch 905 is turned off (S2004: Y), RAM change setting processing S2005 is executed for newly initializing various types of information in the RAM, excluding information related to game mode settings (that is, setting correspondence information). As a result, the start-up of the main control board 920 is substantially completed, and it is determined that the game progresses in the game mode corresponding to the setting correspondence information stored in the RAM.

After the RAM change setting process S2005, a set command output process S2006 for outputting a set command indicating completion of setting of the RAM to the payout control board 930 is executed. By receiving the set command output by the main control board 920, the payout control board 930 can recognize that the main control board 920 shifts to normal game processing, and can recognize which game mode to operate.

After the set command output process S2006, the processes after the special game state return preparation process S1015 are executed. Further, if the setting signal from the rear setting switch 905 is OFF after the start-up standby process S1003 (S1005: N), the processes after the determination process S1004 are executed.

FIG. 55 is a flow chart showing timer interrupt processing (abbreviated as “main control interrupt processing” in the figure) executed by the main control board 920 of the pachinko machine 100 of the eighteenth embodiment. The timer interrupt processing executed by the main control board 920 of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment is, similarly to the timer interrupt processing executed by the main control board 920 of the pachinko machine 100 of the first embodiment, periodically (in this embodiment, 2ms (millisecond) period).

Hereinafter, portions different from the timer interrupt processing executed by the main control board 920 of the pachinko machine 100 of the first embodiment will be described. In the timer interrupt process executed by the main control board 920 of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 55, as part of the process executed when the game progress is not stopped (S1207: N), the nail state related process S2020 described later with reference to FIG.

FIG. 56 is a flow chart showing nail condition related processing S2020. The nail state related process S2020 is a process of detecting the state of the nails 411 provided at the entrances of the winning openings of the general winning devices 2439A and 2439B and in the vicinity thereof, and displaying and outputting the result based on the detection. Specifically, the nail state-related processing S2020 is composed of first half processing S1401 to S1405 related to detection of the state of the nail 411 and second half processing S1501 to S1504 related to display of results based on the detection.

In nail state-related processing S2020, as shown in FIG. 56, first, it is determined whether or not a period (hereinafter referred to as a "counting period") for counting the number of game balls that have entered the general winning devices 2439A and 2439B (hereinafter referred to as "general winning number") and the number of game balls that have been shot into the game area (hereinafter referred to as "fired balls") is in progress (S1401). In this way, by counting the number of general prizes and the number of shot balls only during the counting period, when the ratio of the number of general prizes to the number of shot balls (that is, the ratio of game balls entering the general prize winning devices 2439A and 2439B with respect to the number of shot balls) is calculated, the calculation result is less likely to be adversely affected by fraud or numerical averaging.

Note that the “counting period” that is used as the determination criterion in S1401 may be, for example, a predetermined count valid period during the entire period during which power is supplied from the power supply unit 901, or a period excluding the predetermined count invalid period during the entire period during which power is supplied from the power supply unit 901.

The “count valid period” may be, for example, a period during which game balls are shot from the shooting device 330 . Whether or not the game ball is shot from the shooting device 330 may be determined, for example, by a variable resistor 253 that detects the amount of rotation operation of the shooting handle 252, or a predetermined shooting operation based on the detection state of a contact sensor 254 that detects that the player is in contact with the shooting handle 252. For example, when the variable resistor 253 detects that the shooting handle 252 is rotated, it may be determined that the game ball is being shot from the shooting device 330, and when the contact sensor 254 detects contact with the shooting handle 252, it may be determined that the game ball is being shot from the shooting device 330.

In addition, the "count valid period" may be a case where a predetermined shooting operation is executed, or a game ball is detected by the shot ball detection switch 451 within the flow-down elapsed time after the completion of the execution. It is preferable to set the elapsed time after the completion of the execution of the predetermined shooting operation to include the maximum time (for example, 15 seconds) in which the game ball is detected by the shooting ball detection switch 451 after the game ball is shot, and the elapsed time is preferably set to a sufficient time in consideration of variations in design in addition to the maximum time actually measured. In addition, the counting valid period may be set to a time other than the shortest time (for example, 5 seconds) through the shortest route among the times detected by the shooting ball detection switch 451 after the game ball is shot so that the fixed time after the start of the predetermined shooting operation is not set as the counting valid period.

The "count invalid period" may be, for example, during a special game state. Whether or not it is in the special game state can be determined based on the output state of the signal from the external terminal board 580, for example. Concretely, for example, the period from when the signal indicating that the game is in the special game state is started to be output from the external terminal board 580 until the output of the signal is finished can be determined to be in the special game state.

Also, the "counting invalid period" may be, for example, a period during which the previous block 102 is in an open state (that is, the previous block 102 is open to the intermediate block 103). Whether or not the front block 102 is open can be determined based on the output state of the signal from the open/close detection switch 109 via the payout control board 930 (see FIG. 53).

The game balls that entered the general prize winning devices 2439A and 2439B when the front block 102 is in the open state may not be the game balls that flowed down the game area and properly entered, but the game balls that were put into the general prize winning devices 2439A and 2439B by a factory shipping inspector, a person who cheats while playing a game (hereinafter referred to as a cheater), or a party on the side of the game hall (e.g., an employee of the game hall). There is By excluding the period in which the front block 102 is open from the counting period, the game balls thrown into the general winning devices 2439A and 2439B can be excluded from the counting object.

Alternatively, for example, when continuous insertion of game balls into the general prize winning devices 2439A and 2439B is detected, the subsequent predetermined period may be set as the counting invalid period. As a result, it is possible to exclude the game balls entering the general prize winning devices 2439A and 2439B from the counting target due to the continuous insertion of the game balls into the general prize winning devices 2439A and 2439B after the continuous insertion of the game balls into the general prize winning devices 2439A and 2439B is detected.

It should be noted that whether or not the game balls are continuously thrown into the general prize winning devices 2439A and 2439B may be detected, for example, from the number of game balls entering the general prize winning devices 2439A and 2439B within a predetermined time period, the entry interval of the game balls entering the general prize winning devices 2439A and 2439B, and the like.

For example, when a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls enter each of the general prize winning devices 2439A and 2439B within a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds), it may be detected that the game balls are continuously thrown into the general prize winning devices 2439A and 2439B. Further, when a predetermined number (for example, 5) or more game balls enter the general prize winning devices 2439A and 2439B at predetermined intervals (for example, 0.5 second intervals), it may be detected that the game balls are continuously thrown into the general prize winning devices 2439A and 2439B.

On the other hand, the ``predetermined period'', which is the count invalid period after the detection of continuous insertion of game balls into the general prize winning devices 2439A and 2439B, may be, for example, a predetermined period (for example, 10 minutes), or may be a period in which game balls are successively thrown into the general prize winning devices 2439A and 2439B. The ``period in which game balls are successively thrown into the general winning devices 2439A and 2439B after that'' may be, for example, a period in which, after the continuous insertion is detected, the continuous insertion is detected under the same conditions as the detection. Alternatively, considering that the continuous injection is performed intermittently, the period in which the continuous injection is detected under the same conditions as the detection of the continuous injection within several tens of seconds to several minutes (for example, about 30 seconds or 1 minute) may be defined as "the period in which the game balls are continuously inserted into the general winning devices 2439A and 2439B."

In addition, the invalid period (for example, 3 seconds) after a game ball is detected in each of the general prize winning devices 2439A and 2439B is set as a counting invalid period in which the counting of game balls entered is invalidated, and even if game balls are thrown continuously in a short period of time, only the first predetermined invalid number (for example, 1 or 2 balls) may be counted, and the following fixed number of game balls entering may be invalidated, or all the games continuously inserted including the first predetermined invalid number. The entry of the ball may be excluded from the counting object and invalidated. This invalid period may be set in consideration of the probability that the game ball enters the general prize winning devices 2439A, 2439B. For example, the invalid period may be set shorter as the probability is higher, and the invalid period may be set longer when the probability is lower, in correspondence with the probability that the game ball continuously enters in the shooting operation with the highest probability of entering the game ball (for example, either the left-handed game method or the right-handed game method). Alternatively, the time may be set to correspond to the number of game balls to be paid out when the game balls enter the general winning devices 2439A and 2439B (e.g., 3 balls). As the counting invalid period, a time corresponding to the game ball shooting time interval (for example, 0.6 seconds) may be set. For example, an invalid period (approximately 1.2 seconds or more) may be set that is twice or more the game ball shooting time interval (approximately 1.2 seconds or more), or an invalid period that is four times or more (approximately 2.4 seconds or more) may be set. Also, it is preferable to set the predetermined invalid number to be larger as the game ball has a higher probability of entering, and to be smaller when the probability of entering is low. A plurality of prize winning devices (for example, a general prize winning device 2439A and a general prize winning device 2439B) may be provided with a general winning number counter and a shot ball counter, respectively, so that the nail state level can be output separately. .

When the previous block 102 is in an open state and continuous insertion of game balls into the general prize winning devices 2439A and 2439B is detected, the invalid period may be generated when a combination of a plurality of conditions is satisfied, such as setting a predetermined period thereafter as the counting invalid period. As a result, it is possible to preferably exclude the game balls continuously thrown into the general winning devices 2439A and 2439B by the persons concerned on the game arcade side from the objects to be counted.

Alternatively, the “counting period”, which is the determination criterion in S1401, may be a predetermined period after a predetermined counting start condition is satisfied during the entire period in which power is supplied from the power supply unit 901, for example. The "predetermined counting start condition" may be, for example, a predetermined counting start time (e.g., 11:00 am or 3:00 pm), or may be a counting start time for each predetermined period (e.g., every 2 hours). Further, the "predetermined counting start condition" may be, for example, a predetermined timing (for example, the timing when the winning random number counter related to the first or second special symbol reaches a predetermined value as the counting start condition, the timing when the operation predetermined as the counting start condition is performed, etc.). It should be noted that the counting start time, the counting start interval, and the predetermined timing do not necessarily have to be the same every day or each time, and one of a plurality of different preset settings may be selected. Also, the counting start condition may be satisfied a plurality of times in a day.

Further, the "predetermined period", which is the counting period after the predetermined counting start condition is satisfied, may be, for example, a period until the predetermined counting end condition is satisfied. The “predetermined counting end condition” may be, for example, a predetermined counting end time (for example, 1:00 pm or 6:00 pm) or a predetermined timing. The timing predetermined as the counting end condition may be, for example, the timing when a period (for example, 30 minutes) predetermined as the counting period has passed, the timing when the winning random number counter related to the first special symbol is predetermined as the counting end condition, or the timing when the operation predetermined as the counting end condition is performed.

Note that the counting start condition and the counting end condition may be appropriately combined with the conditions exemplified above. For example, a predetermined counting start time may be used as the counting start condition, and a predetermined counting end time may be used as the counting end condition, the timing when the winning random number counter related to the first special symbol is predetermined as the counting start condition may be set as the counting start condition, and the timing when a predetermined period (for example, 30 minutes) has passed as the counting period may be used as the counting end condition.

Alternatively, after power supply from the power supply unit 901 to the pachinko machine 100 is started, the value of the winning random number counter related to the special symbol (the winning random number counter related to the first special symbol or the winning random number counter related to the second special symbol) may be obtained for the predetermined N-th time (N is an integer equal to or greater than 1) as the counting start condition. Further, in that case, the period as the counting end condition may be determined based on the value of the winning random number counter related to the special symbol acquired for the Nth time. That is, the counting period may differ based on the value of the winning random number counter obtained for the predetermined Nth time. At this time, the counting start condition may be satisfied each time the value of the winning random number counter obtained for the predetermined N-th time is obtained.

It should be noted that the "counting period" that is used as the determination criterion in S1401 does not have to be either the period excluding the predetermined counting valid period or the predetermined counting invalid period during the entire period during which power is supplied from the power supply unit 901, or the predetermined period after the predetermined counting start condition is satisfied during the entire period during which power is supplied from the power supply unit 901, and both of these periods may be adopted.

In addition, when a predetermined period after a predetermined counting start condition is satisfied during the entire period in which power is supplied from the power supply unit 901 is adopted as the "counting period" serving as the determination criterion in S1401, the predetermined period after a single type of counting start condition is satisfied does not need to be the "predetermined period", and each predetermined period after different types of counting start conditions (for example, a predetermined counting start time and a predetermined counting start timing) are satisfied. The "counting period" may be a predetermined period after a counting start condition obtained by combining different types of counting start conditions is satisfied.

In S2020, if it is determined that the counting period is not in progress (S1401: N), each process of S1401 to S1405 and S1501 to S1504 described later is not executed, and the main control interrupt process is returned (returned). If it is determined that the counting period is not in progress (S1401: N), the control may be started from the processing of S1501, and the processing of S1501 to S1504 may be executed before returning to the main control interrupt processing.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S2020 that it is in the counting period (S1401: Y), it is determined whether or not entry of game balls into the general winning devices 2439A and 2439B has been detected (S1402). Specifically, based on the detection of the game ball by the general winning switches 2449A, 2449B (see FIG. 53), when the general winning switch detection flag (predetermined area in the RAM of the main control board 920) corresponding to each switch 449A, 449B is set, it is determined that the entry of the game ball into the general winning devices 2439A, 2439B is detected.

When it is determined that the game ball has entered the general winning devices 2439A and 2439B (S1402: Y), the general winning number counter (predetermined area in the RAM of the main control board 920) is updated (S1403), and determination processing S1404 is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the entry of the game ball into the general winning devices 2439A and 2439B is not detected (S1402: N), the determination processing S1404 is performed without performing the processing of S1403.

Specifically, in S1403, when either the general winning switch detection flag corresponding to the general winning switch 2449A or the general winning switch detection flag corresponding to the general winning switch 2449B is set, "1" is added to the general winning number counter. On the other hand, when both the general winning switch detection flag corresponding to the general winning switch 2449A and the general winning switch detection flag corresponding to the general winning switch 2449B are set, "2" is added to the general winning number counter.

Since the RAM provided with the general winning number counter is supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply section 901, the memory contents of the general winning number counter are retained even when the power supply of the drive voltage and the control voltage from the power supply section 901 is stopped. In other words, unless the stored information in the RAM is erased by operating a predetermined switch (not shown), the memory contents of the general winning number counter are retained even when the pachinko machine 100 is in a power outage state.

In S1404, it is determined whether or not a shot ball has been detected. Specifically, based on the detection of the game ball by the ball detection switch 451 (see FIG. 53), if the ball detection switch detection flag (predetermined area in the RAM of the main control board 920) corresponding to the ball detection switch 451 is set, it is determined that the ball has been detected.

If it is determined that a shot ball has been detected (S1404: Y), the shot ball number counter (predetermined area in the RAM of the main control board 920) is updated (S1405), and determination processing S1501 is executed. On the other hand, if it is determined that the ball has not been detected (S1404: N), the determination processing S1501 is executed without executing the processing of S1405.

Specifically, in S1405, if the ball-fired detection switch detection flag is set, "1" is added to the number-of-balls counter. Since the shot ball counter is provided in a RAM to which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply unit 901, the stored contents of the shot ball counter are retained even when the pachinko machine 100 is in a power outage state, unless the stored information in the RAM is erased by operating a predetermined switch (not shown) in the same manner as the above-described general prize counter.

In S1501, it is determined whether or not the front block 102 is open. Specifically, when the output state of the signal from the open/close detection switch 109 via the payout control board 930 (see FIG. 53) indicates that the front block 102 is not closed with respect to the intermediate block 103, it is determined that the front block 102 is open.

When it is determined that the previous block 102 is open (S1501: Y), the value obtained by dividing the value of the general prize number counter by the value of the shot ball number counter (that is, the value of the general prize number counter/the value of the shot ball number counter) is calculated (S1502). The value calculated in S1502 reflects the state of the nail 411 provided at the entrance of the winning opening of the general winning devices 2439A and 2439B and its vicinity.

That is, the closer the value calculated in S1502 is to the predetermined reference value as the value when the winning of the game balls to the general prize winning devices 2439A and 2439B is as designed, the more the nail 411 (more specifically, the nail 411 provided at the entrance of the prize winning opening of the general prize winning devices 2439A and 2439B or in the vicinity thereof) can be in an appropriate state according to the setting at the time of manufacturing the pachinko machine 100. This indicates that the In the following description of the present embodiment, the "reference value" is the above-mentioned "predetermined reference value as a value when the winning of game balls to the general winning devices 2439A and 2439B is as designed".

On the other hand, the more the value calculated in S1502 is farther from the reference value, the higher the possibility that the nail 411 provided at the entrance of the prize winning opening of the general prize winning devices 2439A, 2439B or in the vicinity thereof deviates from the setting at the time of manufacture of the pachinko machine 100. That is, the larger the difference, the higher the possibility that the nail 411 is largely out of the appropriate state.

In the present embodiment, in S1502, the value obtained by dividing the value of the general prize number counter by the value of the shot ball number counter (that is, the value of the general prize number counter/the value of the shot ball number counter) is calculated.

For example, during a predetermined period, such as during the counting period or during the entire period in which power is supplied from the power supply unit 901, the number of times the first special symbol and/or the second special symbol are displayed fluctuating, the number of times the normal symbol is displayed, the number of times the special game state occurs, etc. may be employed as a divisor for the value (dividend) of the general winning number counter. Alternatively, the number of game balls fired from the launching device 330 is counted, or a value obtained by subtracting a predetermined value as the number of game balls fired from the launching device 330 but not reaching the game area from the counted number of game balls may be employed as a divisor for the value (dividend) of the general winning number counter.

A nail condition level is calculated based on the value calculated in S1502 (S1503). The "nail state level" is information indicating whether the state of the nail 411 (more specifically, the nail 411 provided at the entrance of the winning opening of the general prize winning devices 2439A, 2439B or in the vicinity thereof) is appropriate or inappropriate for the setting at the time of manufacture of the pachinko machine 100 in a stepwise level. For example, if the value calculated in S1502 is within a first range including the reference value (for example, a range having both ends of the reference value×±5%), the nail condition level is set to “1” indicating that the nail 411 is in an appropriate condition.

On the other hand, if the value calculated in S1502 is outside the first range (that is, on the side away from the reference value), the nail condition level is set to a value greater than "1", thereby indicating that the nail 411 may be out of the proper condition. For example, if the value calculated in S1502 is within a second range set outside the first range (for example, a range in which the end on the side away from the reference value is the reference value × ±10%), the nail condition level is set to "2", and if it is outside the second range (that is, on the side away from the reference value), the nail condition level is set to "3". That is, the more the nail 411 deviates from the appropriate state, the larger the value of the nail state level.

In this embodiment, the case where the nail condition level is divided into three stages is illustrated, but the nail condition level does not necessarily need to be divided into three stages. For example, the nail condition level may be divided into at least two stages: one indicating that the nail 411 is in an appropriate state, and another indicating that the nail 411 may not be in an appropriate state. Further, the nail condition level may be divided into four or more stages.

In the present embodiment, the nail condition level is calculated from the value calculated in S1502 (that is, the value of the general winning number counter/the value of the shot ball number counter), but the nail condition level may be calculated from the value of the general winning number counter. In other words, the configuration may be such that the nail condition level is calculated without using the value of the number-of-shots counter.

Next, the process of outputting the nail condition level calculated in S1503 is executed (S1504), and the process returns to the main control interrupt process. In this embodiment, at S1505, a numerical value indicating the nail condition level is displayed on the nail condition level display device 474 (see FIG. 53) composed of a 7-segment display. For example, if the nail condition level is "1", the nail condition level display 474 will display "1".

On the other hand, if it is determined in S1501 that the front block 102 is open (S1501: N), the processes of S1502 to S1504 are not executed, and the process returns to the main control interrupt process. In the present embodiment, the processing of S1502 and S1503 is performed under the condition that the front block 102 is open.

FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing setting suggestion information related processing S2021. Setting suggestion information related processing S2021 is processing for outputting setting suggestion information when a condition set as an output condition for setting suggestion information is satisfied.

Here, the "setting suggesting information" is information suggesting which of a plurality of stages (in this embodiment, nine types) of game modes that the currently set game mode (that is, the setting correspondence information stored in the RAM of the main control board 920 at that time) is settable in advance. For example, different information is set according to the type of setting correspondence information. For example, among the numbers 1 to 9, the larger value is selected with high probability for the top type, the intermediate value "5" is selected most for the middle type, the larger or smaller number than the intermediate "5" is less likely to be selected, and the smaller value for the bottom type is selected with higher probability. Although it is not clear to the user, the numbers as the setting suggestion information may correspond to the setting correspondence information.

In setting suggestion information related processing S2021, determination processing S1601 is performed to determine whether or not the setting suggestion information output condition is satisfied for the nail condition level calculated in S1503 of the nail condition related processing S2020 (see FIG. 56). Specifically, in determination processing S1601, it is determined that the output condition for the setting suggestion information is established when the nail condition level is "2" or higher. If it is determined that the setting suggestion information output condition is met for the nail condition level (S1601: Y), the setting suggestion information is output (S1606), and the process returns to the main control interrupt process. Specifically, in the process of S1606, control data is set for displaying setting suggestion information corresponding to the currently set game mode on a predetermined display unit. The predetermined display unit may be a pattern display device such as the decorative pattern display device 479, or may be a dedicated display unit for displaying setting suggestion information.

For example, when setting suggestion information is displayed on the decorative design display device 479, control data (command) for displaying the setting suggestion information on the decorative design display device 479 is set in the process of S1606. The command set here is output to the sub control board 940 in the control signal output processing S1208 based on the next timer interrupt. In response to receiving the command, the sub control board 940 displays setting suggestion information corresponding to the received command at a predetermined position (for example, right corner) of the decorative pattern display device 479 .

The setting suggestion information displayed and output by the processing of S1606 may be a combination of alphabetic characters representing the type and numbers representing the probability setting state, similar to the setting display information displayed on the setting display device 906, characters representing each game mode, numbers, symbols, figures, colors, texts, etc. representing each game mode, text representing a sensuous expression such as "may be a high probability setting!" and so on.

Further, the setting suggesting information displayed on the decorative pattern display device 479 is not limited to information that allows the player to completely identify which of the nine types of setting correspondence information is, but may be information that allows the player to guess which of the nine types of setting correspondence information is, for example, information that allows the player to guess the setting by setting at least a part of the selection rate to be different corresponding to which of the nine types of setting correspondence information. For example, if the color is set in 10 levels of shading, the darker the color, the more likely it is selected for the top type, the more intermediate color is selected for the middle type, the less likely it is to be selected if the color is darker or lighter than the intermediate color, and the lighter color is more likely to be selected for the bottom type. A plurality of types of characters with different selection rates may be used for each character or for each character, and the predetermined character type may correspond to the type, and the size of the character may change in accordance with the probability setting state.

Further, the setting suggestion information displayed on the decorative pattern display device 479 may be constituted by a part of the variable display executed by the special pattern lottery, or the setting suggestion information may be displayed according to the type of pattern in the variable display. Here, the number of times the setting suggestion information is output is not limited to one time, and the process of S1606 may be repeated a plurality of times when the output condition of the setting suggestion information is met once, and a plurality of setting suggestion information may be output. . In this case, it is preferable that the number of times the setting suggestion information is displayed increases as the player continues shooting without stopping the shooting. For example, the more times the variable display is suspended, the more the setting suggestion information is output.

The output of setting suggestion information executed by the processing of S1606 does not necessarily have to be display output to a predetermined display unit, and specific audio output from the acoustic devices 281 and 282 (for example, a high-pitched sound that is not output under other circumstances), specific light emission from the board surface light emitting device 490 or the frame light emitting devices 271 to 275 (for example, rainbow light emission that does not emit light under other circumstances), or at least a part of which is always emitted for a certain period of time or more. It may be turned off or the like. In such a case, by using the emission or extinguishment of light by the board surface light emitting device 490, the board surface of the game board 400X is extinguished for about several seconds (for example, about one second) at the timing when the game ball is fired by the launching device 330, and then light is emitted again, so that a so-called "delay effect" may be performed.

The output of setting suggestion information executed by the processing of S1606 does not necessarily have to be a display output to a predetermined display unit, and may be an audio output from the audio devices 281 and 282, light emission from the board light emitting device 490 or the frame light emitting devices 271 to 275, or the like. In addition, in the processing of S1606, the establishment of other conditions, such as determining by lottery whether or not to output the setting suggestion information, may be set as a condition for outputting the setting suggestion information, or the setting suggestion information may be output with a predetermined probability (for example, a probability of approximately 1/10) when the processing of S1606 is executed.

In the setting suggestion information related processing S2021, determination processing S1602 is performed for determining whether or not the output condition of the setting suggestion information is established for the entry of the game ball into the general winning devices 2439A and 2439B. Specifically, in the determination processing S1602, when the game ball enters one predetermined general winning device (for example, the general winning device 2439B) out of the general winning device 2439A or the general winning device 2439B, it is determined that the setting suggestion information output condition is established. When it is determined that the setting suggestion information output condition is established for the entry of the game ball into the general winning devices 2439A and 2439B (S1602: Y), the setting suggestion information is output (S1606).

In addition, in setting suggestion information related processing S2021, determination processing S1603 is performed for determining whether or not the output condition of setting suggestion information is satisfied with respect to the occurrence interval of the starting winning (starting condition). Specifically, in the determination process S1603, during a predetermined game period (for example, during the period of the shooting operation in which the game ball is shot from the shooting device 330 in the normal game state), a new special symbol (for example, a new special symbol ( 1st special design, 2nd special design) when the condition where starting condition is not established occurs, it decides that output condition of setting indication information is established. When it is determined that the setting suggestion information output condition is established for the occurrence interval of the start winning prize (S1603: Y), the setting suggestion information is output (S1606).

The interval at which the starting prize is generated (that is, the elapsed time since the last starting prize) is measured using a predetermined timer or counter provided on the sub-control board 940 . Specifically, the sub-control board 940 uses a predetermined timer or counter provided in the sub-control board 940, and a predetermined command (for example, pending command) transmitted from the main control board 920 based on the occurrence of the start winning of each special symbol. Alternatively, a predetermined timer or counter provided in the main control board 920 is used to measure the elapsed time from the last start winning, and the measurement result is transmitted to the sub control board 940.

In the determination processing S1603, it may be determined that the setting suggestion information output condition is satisfied when a situation where the starting condition for a new special symbol is not satisfied even after a predetermined period of time has passed since the starting condition for the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is satisfied during the predetermined game period occurs a predetermined number of times (for example, five times) within a predetermined monitoring period (for example, within one hour after the first occurrence of the situation). Further, for example, as in the pachinko machine 100 of the sixteenth embodiment described above, every time a situation arises in which the starting condition for a new special symbol is not satisfied even after a predetermined period of time ("first period" in the sixteenth embodiment) elapses after the condition for starting a special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is satisfied during a predetermined game period, the table state icon 1821 (see FIG. 47) displayed on the decorative symbol display device 479 is deleted one by one. It may be determined that the setting suggestion information output condition is established when the number of platform state icons 1821 is less than a predetermined number (for example, five).

Alternatively, it may be determined that the setting suggestion information output condition is established when the situation in which the condition for starting a new special symbol is not satisfied even after the elapse of a predetermined period of time after the starting condition for the special symbol is established during a predetermined game period occurs at least once within a predetermined monitoring period, and when the cumulative total of the period during which the starting condition for the new special symbol is not satisfied after the starting condition for the special symbol is satisfied reaches a predetermined value (for example, 10 minutes) within the monitoring period. In addition, it may be determined that the output condition of the setting suggestion information is satisfied when the starting condition of the special symbol is met many times in a short period of time, such as determining that the output condition of the setting suggestion information is met when the number of times (for example, 4 times) occurs that the starting condition of the new special symbol is met within a predetermined period (for example, 2 seconds) after the start condition of the special symbol (first special pattern, second special pattern) is met.

As described above, in the determination processing S1601 to S1603 of the setting suggestion information related processing S2021, it is determined whether or not various predetermined conditions regarding entry of a game ball into a predetermined winning device (for example, general winning devices 2439A and 2439B, middle start winning device 2431, and right start winning device 2432) provided on the game board 400X are established as conditions for outputting setting suggestion information. . Then, when the predetermined condition is satisfied, the setting suggestion information is output by the processing of S1606.

Further, as shown in FIG. 57, in the setting suggestion information related processing S2021, when the special game state is set (S1604: Y), determination processing S1605 is performed to determine whether or not the setting suggestion information output condition in the special game state is established. Specifically, in the determination processing S1605, when a ball overflow signal indicating that the game balls are excessively stored in the storage unit 241 is received from the ball overflow switch 249 during the special game state, it is determined that the setting suggestion information output condition is established. When it is determined that the setting suggestion information output condition in the special game state is established (S1602: Y), the setting suggestion information is output (S1606).

Here, in the special game state, in order for game balls to be excessively stored in the storage part 241 from the ball overflow switch 249, the ball extraction operation (for example, pressing operation) on the ball extraction operation member 242 must not be performed and the discharge port 241B must be closed for a certain period of time or longer. Therefore, in a situation where the discharge port 241B is always opened, the output condition of the setting suggestion information is not established, and the output condition of the setting suggestion information can be easily established by limiting to the players who know that the output of the ball overflow signal is the output condition of the setting suggestion information. This makes it possible to add new game characteristics such as imparting indirect benefits that cannot be directly obtained to some players, and to add new game characteristics that the players acquire setting suggestion information by using an operation part different from the shooting operation.

In the determination process S1605, during the special game state, the speed at which the game ball enters the upper big winning device 2433 or the lower big winning device 2434 is a predetermined value or more (for example, 8 game balls in 8 seconds in at least one predetermined round) When entering the big winning device 2433, 2434), or when the number of continuations of the probability variable game state during the special game state reaches a predetermined number (for example, 10 times) The configuration may be such that it is determined that the output condition for suggestive information is satisfied. In addition, as an operation that can be selected whether or not to be executed by the player's will, a new game feature may be added in which the player acquires setting suggestive information by performing a shooting operation that loses the opportunity to acquire some prize balls, such as stopping the shooting operation so that the game balls do not enter the big winning devices 2433 and 2434 at all in a predetermined round, or performing a left-handed game method in a special game state to generate a start winning of the middle start winning device 2431.

Therefore, in the above-described setting suggestion information related processing S2021, when the predetermined output conditions for various setting suggestion information are satisfied, the setting suggestion information is output by the processing of S1606.

Since the nail state level is information indicating whether the state of the nail 411 is appropriate or inappropriate for the setting at the time of manufacture of the pachinko machine 100 in a stepwise level, when the value is '2' or more, the nail 411 is out of the appropriate state, which may cause disadvantages to the player.

Similarly, after the start winning of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) occurs, even if a predetermined period of time (for example, 60 seconds) elapses, if there is a situation where the starting condition of the new special symbol is not satisfied, there is an abnormality related to the occurrence of the starting winning of the special symbol (that is, the winning of the game ball to the middle start winning device 2431 or the right starting winning device 2432) such as the state of the nail 411, thereby causing the player to may be detrimental to

On the other hand, in judgment processing S1601 or judgment processing S1603, it is judged whether or not the setting suggestion information output condition is satisfied with respect to the nail state level or the occurrence interval of the start winning, and by outputting the setting suggestion information on the condition that it is judged to be satisfied, it is possible to suggest to the player that the game ball output rate (machine discount, payout rate) of the pachinko machine 100 is low, and thereby it is possible to judge whether or not the game by the pachinko machine 100 is continued. By increasing the number of materials, the player can be allowed to make a suitable decision.

In addition, a game ball that has not entered the right start winning device 2432 or the upper big winning device 2433 enters the general winning device 2439B when a game is played by a right-handed game method in a special game state, a time-saving game state, or a probability variable game state. Therefore, when the game ball enters the general winning device 2439B, it is determined in the determination processing S1602 that the setting suggestion information output condition is satisfied, and the setting suggestion information is output on the condition that the setting suggestion information is satisfied, so that the player can enjoy the game ball entering the general winning device 2439B even if the game ball does not enter the target right start winning device 2432 or the upper big winning device 2433 when the game is played by the right-handed game method. can give.

Also, receiving the ball overflow signal during the special game state indicates that a certain number of game balls or more have been obtained during the special game state. Therefore, when the ball overflow signal is received during the special game state, it is determined in the determination processing S1605 that the setting suggestion information output condition is established, and by outputting the setting suggestion information on the condition of the establishment, the setting suggestion information can be given to the player as a privilege when the predetermined condition is established during the special game state.

Further, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the variable display time (fluctuation time) of the special symbols and decorative symbols performed in the unit game related to the special symbols (first special symbol, second special) in the special symbol related processing S1217 is configured to be selectable corresponding to the currently set game mode.

Specifically, settable and predetermined game modes are assigned in advance to a plurality of types of selectable variable display times, and when winning a lottery for determining whether or not to change the variable display time corresponding to the game mode, a variation pattern of the variable display time assigned to the currently set game mode is selected. Variation patterns of various variable display times that can be selected for settable predetermined game modes are pre-stored in the ROM of the main control board 920 as a table.

The allocation of variable display times to settable predetermined game modes may be configured such that the same variable display time is allocated to two or more game modes such as each type of game mode, or may be configured to allocate different variable display times to each settable and predetermined stage game mode.

Further, the selection of the variation pattern based on the currently set game mode may be performed only when the lottery result of each corresponding special symbol lottery (first special symbol lottery or second special symbol lottery) is winning, or may be performed only when the lottery result of each corresponding special symbol lottery is not winning.

In the special symbol related process S1217, by selecting the variation pattern of the variation display time assigned to the currently set game mode, the variation display of the variation display time corresponding to the currently set game mode is executed. Thereby, the player can guess (recognize) the type of the set game mode according to the length of the variable display of the decorative symbols.

The assignment of the variable display times to the settable predetermined game modes may facilitate the selection of the most advantageous game mode (for example, the third-level probability game mode of each type) among the game modes of the settable predetermined stages, and the longer variable display time from among the various selectable variable display times for the settable predetermined game modes. By lengthening the variable display time for the advantageous game mode, the player can play the game while paying attention to the length of the variable display time of the decorative pattern and can expect that the most advantageous game mode is set.

Alternatively, the higher the advantage of the settable game mode, the longer the variable display time may be allocated. As a result, the player can guess the advantage of the set game mode according to the length of the variable display of the decorative symbols.

Next, the action and effect of the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment described above will be described.

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, setting suggestion information corresponding to the currently set game mode is displayed and output when a predetermined condition is established, so that the player can visually recognize the type of the current game mode in the pachinko machine 100, that is, the ball output rate (machine split, payout rate) of the game ball.

Also, since the variation pattern of the variable display time corresponding to the currently set game mode is selected, the player can preferably recognize the type of the set game mode according to the length of the variable display of the decorative pattern.

<Nineteenth Embodiment>
Next, referring to FIG. 58, a nineteenth embodiment will be described. The pachinko machine 100 of the nineteenth embodiment, like the pachinko machine 100 of the eighteenth embodiment, has a setting change function for setting the game ball payout rate (machine discount, payout rate). In the following description, the same reference numerals are given to the same configurations as those in the above-described first to eighteenth embodiments, and description thereof is omitted. In addition, the configuration described below in the nineteenth embodiment may be added to the configuration provided in the pachinko machine 100 of the first to eighteenth embodiments described above, or may be provided in place of a part of the configuration of the pachinko machine 100 of the first to eighteenth embodiments described above.

As with the pachinko machine 100 of the first embodiment, the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment is configured such that, when the number of times the unit game right is reserved for each special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) reaches eight in total, a pending full tank effect appears on the decorative symbol display device 479 under a predetermined condition, and a lottery result of the pending full tank effect lottery (that is, a lottery result as to whether or not to execute the pending full tank effect) is displayed in a lottery result display section 2730. configured to be displayed in

FIG. 58(a) is a front view for explaining the lottery result display section 2730. FIG. As shown in FIG. 58(a), the lottery result display section 2730 is composed of four display sections 2730A to 2730D having different sizes, and is displayed on the lower right side of the screen of the decorative design display device 479. FIG. Incidentally, the part for displaying the lottery result of the reserved full-ton effect lottery may be provided as a separate display device different from the decorative pattern display device 479, similar to the lottery result display device 730 in the pachinko machine 100 of the first embodiment.

In the lottery result display unit 2730, similarly to the lamp variation display performed in the lottery result display device 730 (see FIG. 24), when the number of times the unit game rights are reserved for the special symbols (the first special symbol and the second special symbol) reaches the upper limit, one display unit out of the display units 2730A to 2730D lights up so as to sequentially move rightward from the leftmost display unit 2730A one by one like a roulette, and is located on the rightmost side. After the display section 2730D is turned on, it returns to the display section 2730A again and sequentially moves to the right from the display section 2730A to execute a variable display that repeats the lighting pattern.

The variable display by the lottery result display unit 2730 performs a high-speed change in which the moving speed of the lighting position (the moving interval of the lighting position) in the display units 2730A to 2730D is fast, and then the moving speed gradually slows down, and at the timing when a predetermined variable display time elapses from the start of the variable display, the display unit corresponding to the lottery result of the holding full tank effect among the display units 2730A to 2730D lights up, and finally stops (stop display).

More specifically, when the execution of the holding full-tank effect (appearance of the holding full-tank effect) is selected in the holding full-tank effect lottery, variable display is executed in each of the display parts 2730A to 2730D, and then the fourth display part 2730D lights up and is stopped and displayed. On the other hand, when appearance of the holding full-tank effect is not selected in the holding full-tank effect lottery, after the variable display is executed in each of the display parts 2730A to 2730D, display parts other than the fourth display part 2730D, i.e., the first display part 2730A, the second display part 2730B, or the third display part 2730C are stop-displayed.

As with the pachinko machine 100 of the eighteenth embodiment, the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment is configured to be able to select one of nine game modes with different combinations of the first hit probability and the variable probability continuation rate. In addition, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, for each of the three types (top type, middle type, bottom type) that roughly divides the nine types of game modes, when the game mode with the highest first hit probability (that is, the third stage probability) in each type is set, when the number of times of holding the right of the unit game related to the special symbol (first special symbol and second special symbol) (the number of times of holding special symbols) reaches the upper limit, a predetermined probability (for example, about 10%) ), setting suggestion information corresponding to the currently set game mode (in this case, the game mode with the highest first-hit probability in each type) is output.

More specifically, when a game mode with the highest initial winning probability is set for each type (top type, middle type, bottom type), in a lottery result display part 2730 (display parts 2730A to 2730D) for displaying the lottery result of the holding full tank effect lottery, the fourth display part 2730D emits light in a predetermined color (for example, gold) as setting suggestion information corresponding to the game mode with the highest initial winning probability in each type at a predetermined probability.

FIG. 58(b) is an explanatory diagram relating to an example of the display mode of the lottery result display section 2730 when the game mode with the third-stage probability of each type is set. In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, for example, as shown in FIG. 58(b), when the number of times the special symbols are held reaches the upper limit, the appearance probability of the holding full state effect is different depending on whether or not the special symbol lottery is included in all the holdings, as in the case of the pachinko machine 100 of the first embodiment.

In the example shown in FIG. 58(b), specifically, when the number of reserved special symbols reaches the upper limit, when the reserved number of the maximum number of times includes the reservation winning the special symbol lottery, the reservation full tank effect lottery selects to display the reserved full tank effect with a probability of 80%, and selects not to display the reserved full tank effect with a probability of 20%.

On the other hand, when the number of reserved special patterns reaches the upper limit, when the reserved number of times of special pattern lottery is not included in the reserved number of the maximum number of times, the reserved full-ton performance drawing is selected with a probability of 20%, and the reserved full-tank performance is selected with a probability of 80%.

Further, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, when a game mode with a third-stage probability in each type (that is, a game mode with the highest first-hit probability in each type) is set, a lottery (hereinafter also referred to as a "setting suggestion information output lottery") is performed to determine whether or not to output setting suggestion information corresponding to the currently set game mode when it is selected to make the reservation full-tan effect appear by a holding full-tan effect lottery.

For example, as shown in FIG. 58(b), in a pachinko machine 100 in which a game mode with a third-stage probability is set for each type, when the number of times of holding special symbols reaches the upper limit and the maximum number of holds includes a hold that has been won in a special symbol lottery, when it is selected to make the holding full-ton effect appear by the holding full-tank effect lottery, setting suggestion information output lottery for 12.5% of them corresponds to the currently set game mode. It is configured to select to output the information and select not to output the setting suggestion information for 87.5%.

On the other hand, when the number of times of holding special symbols reaches the upper limit and the holding of the special symbol lottery is not included in the holding of the maximum number of times, when it is selected to display the holding full-fill performance by holding full-fill performance lottery, outputting setting suggestion information corresponding to the game mode currently set for 50% of them is selected by setting suggestion information output lottery, and not outputting the setting suggestion information for 50% is selected by setting suggestion information output lottery.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, when the number of times of holding special symbols reaches the upper limit, when it is selected not to display the holding full-ton effect lottery by the holding full-ton effect lottery, setting suggestion information corresponding to the currently set game mode (in this case, the third-stage probability game mode of each type) is configured not to be output regardless of whether or not the third-stage probability game mode is set for each type.

When it is selected to output the setting suggestion information by the setting suggestion information output lottery, after the variable display by the lottery result display section 2730, the fourth display section 2730D emits light in a predetermined color (gold in the example shown in FIG. 58(b)) as the setting suggestion information corresponding to the game mode of the third stage probability in each type. On the other hand, when it is selected to output the setting suggestion information by the setting suggestion information output lottery, the fourth display unit 2730D emits light in a color different from the predetermined color (red in the example shown in FIG. 58(b)) after the variable display by the lottery result display unit 2730.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 100 of the example shown in FIG. 58(b), when the game mode of the third stage probability in each type is set, the variation display by the lottery result display unit 2730 executed when the number of times of holding the special symbols reaches the upper limit is stopped and displayed in the fourth display unit 2730D that emits gold light. 00), and even if the hold for the maximum number of times does not include the hold that wins the special symbol lottery, it is also 10% (=0.2×0.5×100).

That is, in this example, when the number of times the special symbols are held reaches the upper limit, and the game mode with the third-stage probability for each type is set, regardless of whether or not the reservation for winning the special symbol lottery is included in the maximum number of times of suspension, the light-emitting color of the fourth display unit 2730D has a probability of 10% in the variable display by the lottery result display unit 2730, and is set to correspond to the currently set game mode (that is, the game mode with the third-stage probability in each type). Gold as suggestive information.

The setting suggestion information output lottery is controlled by the sub control board 940 . Specifically, the setting suggestion information output lottery is performed by obtaining the value of a setting suggestion information output selection counter (a partial area of RAM) provided in the sub control board 940 and referring to the setting suggestion information output selection table prepared in the ROM of the sub control board 940 for the value of the setting suggestion information output selection counter when the number of holding times for both the first special symbol and the second special symbol reaches the maximum number of times.

The setting suggestion information output selection table includes the first setting suggestion information output selection table used when the hold for a special pattern lottery is included in the hold for the maximum number of times, and the second suggestion information output selection table used when the hold is not included in the maximum number of reservations. It is prepared, and the sub -control substrate 940 performs a setting suggestion information output lottery using a table according to whether or not the hold for the special design lottery is included in the hold for the maximum number of times.

Next, the action and effect of the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment described above will be described.

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, when the number of reserved special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) reaches the upper limit, setting suggestion information corresponding to the currently set game mode (in this embodiment, the game mode of the third stage probability in each type) is output with a predetermined probability (for example, 10% probability). It is possible to preferably recognize the ball output rate (mechanical rate, payout rate) of the game ball.

Therefore, by increasing the number of reserved special patterns (the first special pattern and the second special pattern) until it reaches the upper limit, it is possible to add the playability of estimating the game mode currently set in the pachinko machine during the game. For example, considering whether it is a pachinko machine suitable for one's taste or a different pachinko machine, the guessed game mode can be used as one of selection elements such as whether to continue the game or to move to another game machine, so that the playability of the pachinko machine capable of setting the game mode in a plurality of stages can be improved.

In particular, when the game mode with the highest first-hit probability (that is, the third-stage probability) is set for each type, the setting suggestion information corresponding to the currently set game mode is output. Therefore, when the player can guess that the game mode currently set in the pachinko machine in play is the game mode with the highest first-hit probability in each type, it is possible to increase the desire to continue playing with the pachinko machine in play. To improve the playability of a pachinko machine capable of setting skill modes in a plurality of stages.

<Twentieth Embodiment>
Next, a twentieth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the pachinko machine 100 of the twentieth embodiment, similar to the pachinko machine 100 of the first embodiment, when the number of reserved special symbols (the first special symbol and the second special symbol) reaches the upper limit (eight in total in the present embodiment), the pachinko machine 100 has a configuration in which the reserved full tank effect can appear, and when a predetermined condition related to the period extension is satisfied, the special period related to the reserved full tank effect (that is, the period in which the reserved full tank effect can appear) can be extended. It has

In the following description, the same reference numerals are given to the same configurations as those in the above-described first to nineteenth embodiments, and description thereof will be omitted. In addition, the configuration described below in the twentieth embodiment may be added to the configuration provided in the pachinko machine 100 of the first to nineteenth embodiments described above, or may be provided in place of a part of the configuration of the pachinko machine 100 of the first to nineteenth embodiments described above.

FIG. 59 is an explanatory diagram relating to an example of the effect extension function. In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, for example, as shown in FIG. 59, when the reserved full-tank effect appears due to the number of times of holding each special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) reaching the upper limit, the special period during which the reserved full-tank effect is performed (hereinafter, this length is also referred to as the "special period related to the reserved full-tank effect") is set to 5 minutes, which is the initial value at the start of the special period. In the present embodiment, the reserved full-ton effect may appear at 100% when the number of reserved special symbols reaches the upper limit, or may appear when winning the reserved full-ton effect lottery as in the pachinko machine 100 of the first embodiment.

In the example shown in FIG. 59, during the extended standby period (three minutes in this example) that ends earlier than the end time of the special period after the start of the special period related to the full reserve effect, a lottery (hereinafter also referred to as "production extension lottery") is performed to determine whether to extend the special period related to the full reserve effect. do. The winning probability in the effect extension lottery (probability of selecting the extension of the special period related to the reserved full tank effect) may be an appropriate probability such as 50%, for example. In the example shown in FIG. 59, the operation of the effect extension function is configured to extend the special period related to the reserved full tank effect by one minute.

The effect extension lottery is controlled by the sub control board 940 . Specifically, the effect extension lottery is performed by the sub-control board 940 at a predetermined lottery time (in the example shown in FIG. 59, when the number of times the special symbol is held increases by 1) by acquiring the value of the effect extension lottery counter (part of the RAM) provided in the sub-control board 940 and referring to the effect extension lottery table prepared in the ROM of the sub-control board 940 for the value of the effect extension lottery counter.

The effect extension lottery table is a table that defines winning or non-winning (losing) for each value of the effect extension lottery counter so that the winning probability in the effect extension lottery becomes a predetermined value. The winning probability in the effect extension lottery may be set to an appropriate value greater than zero, such as 50%, or may be 100% winning probability.

Next, the action and effect of the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment described above will be described.

A game ball is shot and enters any one of starting winning devices 431A, 431B and 432 to start winning and variable display is started, and when the game ball further enters one of the starting winning devices 431A, 431B and 432 during execution of the variable display, the lottery result of the special pattern lottery corresponding to the starting winning is reserved. The lottery results of the special symbols are reserved with a fixed number (eight) as an upper limit, and when the number of times of reservation reaches the upper limit, a lottery is made as to whether or not to display the reserved full tank performance. When this lottery results in the manifestation of the reserved full-tank effect, the special period is started. During the special period, before the start of the special period, it is indicated to the player that the state has changed, for example, the background color of the display area of the decorative pattern display device 479 is changed from blue to red to indicate to the player that the special period is in progress.

During the special period, as a special performance, a performance in which a specific character appears (for example, a performance of displaying a school of golden fish) can be executed during the variable display of the pattern displaying the lottery result of winning the jackpot lottery, so that the player can play the game expecting the execution of the performance (special performance) different from the special performance during the special period.

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, when a predetermined condition relating to the period extension is established, the performance extension function is activated to extend the special period related to the holding full-tank performance. Therefore, when the special period related to the holding full-tank performance is extended by the performance extension function, it is possible to increase the number of holds targeted for the holding full-tank performance by the extension. For example, if the reserved full-ton performance is a performance in which the color of the reserved display is displayed in a color indicating the degree of expectation for the lottery result of the special symbol lottery (a part of the unit game related to the special symbols) for each reservation during the special period related to the relevant reserved full-tank performance, the number of reservations subject to the reserved display in the color indicating the degree of expectation can be increased by the extension of the special period.

As a result, in a structure in which a reserved full-ton performance can appear when the number of reserved special patterns (a first special pattern and a second special pattern) reaches the upper limit, the special period related to the reserved full-tank performance can be added by allowing a player to shoot a game ball aiming at the start winning of the special patterns in order to increase the holding of the special patterns.

In addition, as the number of reserves targeted for the reserve full-ton performance increases, the probability that the reserves targeted for the reserve full-tank performance include the reserve winning the special symbol lottery is increased, so that the appearance possibility of the performance showing the high degree of expectation for winning in the special symbol lottery can be increased accordingly.

Therefore, in a configuration in which a reserved full tank performance can appear when the number of reserved special patterns reaches the upper limit, a game feature can be added in which a player guesses the lottery result of the special pattern lottery reserved by the reserved full tank performance. In addition, since the possibility of appearing only the performances in which winning in the special symbol lottery cannot be expected can be reduced, the dissatisfaction that the player cannot see the performance showing the high degree of expectation for the winning in the special symbol lottery can be suppressed.

Here, whether or not it is during the special period may be determined by changing the background color of the display area of the decorative design display device 479 or displaying a specific color on the periphery of the display screen as described above, but it is preferable to display the remaining period so that the player can recognize it. , the display may be blinking during the special period, and may be lit during the non-special period, or the remaining time may be counted down and displayed.

The special performance may be a performance that does not appear except during the special period, or it may appear both during the special period and during the special period, and the probability of displaying the lottery result of the big win may be changed between the special period and the period other than the special period, for example, the lottery result of the big win may be displayed with a probability of about 30% during the period other than the special period, and the lottery result of the big win may be displayed with a probability of 100% during the special period.

The present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiments, and may be modified and implemented as described below, for example. In this case, each configuration described below may be applied to each of the above embodiments, or a plurality of configurations described below may be combined and applied to each of the above embodiments.

(1) Modification of pachinko machine 100 according to the first embodiment In the above-described first embodiment, information such as the lottery result of each special effect lottery is stored for the variable display of the decorative symbols being executed. Information such as lottery results of each special effect lottery may be stored. In this configuration, even if the lottery result of the special pattern lottery (the first special pattern lottery or the second special pattern lottery) corresponding to the variable display of each decorative pattern is not a big hit, information such as the lottery result of each special performance lottery is stored.

In this way, when the lottery result of the special pattern lottery corresponding to the variable display of the decorative symbols being executed is a big hit, in the special game state to which the player transitions after that, not only the suggestive performances that can appear in the variable display of the decorative symbols fixed and stopped in the big win symbols but also the suggestive performances that can appear in the variable display of the decorative symbols performed before the variable display of the decorative symbols can be restored, thereby knowing the history of the suggestive performances until transition to the special game state.

Further, in the first embodiment, the suggestive effect can be restored in the special game state, but the time period in which the suggestive effect can be restored is not limited to the special game state. It may be configured to utilize the period of performance display unrelated to the game state, such as title display and demo display, displayed on the device 479 .

In this configuration, even if the lottery result of the special pattern lottery (first special pattern lottery or second special pattern lottery) corresponding to the variable display of each decorative pattern is not a big hit, information such as the lottery result of each special performance lottery may be stored.

In addition, in the above-described first embodiment, the suggested effect that can appear during the variable display of the decorative symbols can be restored, but the suggested effect that suggests the probability of occurrence of the special game state for each reservation (that is, each reserved unit game right) performed using the image showing the pending state displayed on the decorative pattern display device 479 may also be restored. That is, the variable display of the decorative patterns may be restored including the suggestive performance that can appear before the variable display of the decorative patterns is started, and thus the variable display can be restored over a long period before the start of the variable display and after the occurrence of the start prize. In this case, as the information to be stored in the predetermined area of the RAM regarding the variable display of the decorative symbols performed before transitioning to the special game state being executed, the sub-control board 940 stores information corresponding to the color of each pending display when the color indicating the degree of expectation is displayed as the color of the pending display, the number of pending at the timing when the start winning corresponding to the winning of the big win occurs, and the information related to the variable display executed each time the pending is exhausted. It is preferable that it can be reproduced.

Further, in the above-described first embodiment, by operating the pressing operation device 261 during an operable period, a suggestive effect selected from a plurality of types appears. Alternatively, a plurality of operation modes that can be operated during one operable period are set, and a plurality of types of suggestive effects are associated with each operation mode.

In this case, when the pressing operation device 261 or the selection operation device 263 is operated in one of a plurality of operation modes during the operable period, a suggestive effect selected from a plurality of suggestive effects associated with the operated operation mode may be displayed. For example, when a rightward operation is performed on the selection operation device 263 during a predetermined operable period, one pattern selected from a plurality of types of patterns constituting suggestive effects associated with the operation appears, and when a leftward operation is performed on the selection operation device 263 during the same operable period, two patterns selected from a plurality of patterns constituting suggestive effects associated with the operation may appear.

In this way, when operations in a plurality of different operation modes are possible within the same operable period, performing an operation in one of the plurality of operation modes (for example, a rightward operation on the selection operation device 263) during the same operable period inevitably makes it impossible to see the suggestive effects seen by operations in other operation modes (for example, a leftward operation on the selection operation device 263). On the other hand, by making it possible to restore the suggestive performance that can appear later during the operation possible period, the player can see the suggestive performance whose appearance is exclusive later, so that the player can be given a sense of satisfaction, and thereby the interest in the game can be favorably improved.

In addition, in the above-described first embodiment, as the suggestive effect, the image effect displayed on the decorative pattern display device 479 was exemplified, but the suggestive effect is not necessarily limited to the image effect. For example, effects by sound (voice, music) output from sound devices 281 and 282, effects by light output from various light emitting devices 490, 271 to 275, and effects by operations of operably provided structures may be elements of suggestive effects.

Different suggestive effects may be configured according to a combination of elements such as a visual effect, a sound effect, a light effect, and a structure motion effect. In this case, a suggestive effect including different elements may be displayed depending on the operation mode in the operable period. For example, when the selection operation device 263 is operated in the right direction, a suggestive effect consisting of a visual effect, a sound effect, a light effect, and an effect due to the operation of a structure may appear, when the selection operation device 263 is operated in the left direction, a suggestive effect composed of the video effect and the sound effect may appear, and when the selection operation device 263 is operated in the upward direction, a suggestive effect consisting of only the video effect may appear.

(2) Modification of the pachinko machine 100 according to the second embodiment In the above-described second embodiment, the cancelable period (first cancelable period, second cancelable period) is provided after the special effects (first special effect, second special effect) that are suggestive effects are completed and before the next operable period (second operable period, third operable period) is started.

Alternatively, the operating device for instructing execution of the suggestive effect and the operating device for instructing cancellation of the suggestive effect may be different, and the operable period may serve as the cancelable period. In the configuration in which the operable period also serves as the cancelable period, processing corresponding to the operating device operated first during the period (that is, execution of suggestive performance or cancellation of execution of suggestive performance) may be performed, or processing corresponding to the operating device operated last during the period may be performed.

Further, in the second embodiment, the player can cancel execution of the second and subsequent suggestive effects among a plurality of suggestive effects that can appear during one time of the variable display by means of the suggestive effect canceling function. Alternatively, a cancelable period may be provided before or immediately after the start of the variable display so that all of the suggestive effects that can appear while the variable display is being performed can be canceled.

In the above-described second embodiment, the suggestive effect that can appear in the variable display provided with the operable period (that is, the suggestive effect that appears when the player operates) is configured to be canceled by the suggestive effect canceling function.

In the above-described second embodiment, when the player operates the pressing operation device 261 during the cancelable period, the subsequent operation-enabled period is not generated, so that the subsequent suggestive effect is not displayed.

Further, in the above-described second embodiment, when the player operates the pressing operation device 261 during the cancelable period, the subsequent suggestive effects are not displayed. However, when the player operates the pressing operation device 261 during the cancelable period, a suggestive effect having a lower probability of occurrence of the special game state than the suggestive effect appearing before the cancelable period may be displayed.

(3) Modifications of the Pachinko Machine 100 According to the Third and Fourth Embodiments In the third and fourth embodiments, when the pressing operation device 261 is operated during a predetermined operable period, the suggestive effect corresponding to the operable period is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 479 of another pachinko machine 100 or in another area of the decorative symbol display device 479 of the own pachinko machine 100. However, when the pressing operation device 261 is operated, All subsequent variable display of decorative symbols may be displayed in the decorative design display device 479 of another pachinko machine 100 or in another area of the decorative design display device 479 of the own pachinko machine 100 . In addition, in the configuration in which all the variable displays of the decorative symbols after the pressing operation device 261 is operated are displayed on the decorative symbol display device 479 of the other pachinko machine, it may be possible to operate using the operating device (such as the pressing operation device 261) of the other pachinko machine 100 during the subsequent operable period.

(4) Modified Example of Pachinko Machine 100 According to Fifth Embodiment In the above-described fifth embodiment, the holding full tank effect selection table is the first table to be referred to when the number of holdings for the first special symbol and the second special symbol reaches the maximum number of times during the holding number monitoring period, the second table to be referred to when it is the second time, the third table to be referred to when it is the third time, and the fourth table to be referred to when it is the fourth time or later. are prepared, each of these tables (first table, second table and third table) may be divided into a winning time table referred to when the reservation includes the reservation winning the special symbol lottery and a loss table referred to when the reservation does not include the reservation winning the special symbol lottery.

By providing a win time table and a loss time table, when the reservation includes the reservation of winning the special symbol lottery, the reservation full performance is more likely to appear than the case of not including the reservation of winning the special symbol lottery. Therefore, since it is possible to add a sense of contrast to the progress of the game, the amusement of the game can be improved more favorably.

(5) Modified example of pachinko machine 100 according to the sixth embodiment In the sixth embodiment, by performing the complete loss variation display (variation display not including the reach display) a plurality of times, the variation display including the reach display is performed.

Further, in the sixth embodiment, when the variable display including the ready-to-win display is selected as the variable display of the decorative symbols, if there is a hold for winning the special symbol lottery among the holdings for the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol), the variable display including the variable display for the same variable display time as the selected variable display and not including the ready-to-win display is executed for a plurality of times. may be

Further, in the sixth embodiment, when the variable display including the ready-to-win display is selected as the variable display of the decorative symbols, if there is a hold for winning the special symbol lottery in the hold for the special symbols, the variable display including the variable display not including the ready-to-win display for the same variable display time as the selected variable display is executed at a predetermined probability to make it easier to accumulate the hold, but the structure to make it easy to accumulate the hold is not limited to this.

For example, when an entrance restriction mechanism for changing the entry probability of a game ball into the interior of the starting device is provided at the entrance portion of the starting device related to the special symbol, the posture of the entry restriction mechanism may be changed to a posture that facilitates the entry of the game ball into the starting device (or allows the entry of the game ball into the interior), thereby facilitating accumulation of reserves. Alternatively, by shortening the period from when the ready-to-win display is performed until the medium pattern finally stops, the period in which the player can stop shooting the game balls can be shortened, thereby facilitating accumulation of reserves.

In addition, in the sixth embodiment, when there is a reservation of winning the special symbol lottery among the reservations of the special symbols (the first special symbol and the second special symbol), the variable display time may be selected based on the condition that the variable display of the decorative symbols is likely to be selected for a longer time than when there is no winning reservation.

(6) Modified Example of Pachinko Machine 100 According to Seventh Embodiment In the seventh embodiment, each of the reels 711L, 711M, and 711R is configured as a cylindrical drum, but each of the reels 711L, 711M, and 711R may be a circling belt having a decorative pattern drawn on its outer peripheral surface and rotated by driving rollers.

In the above-described seventh embodiment, the variable display performed in the reel device 710 (that is, the variable display of the decorative symbols by the variation of the reels 711L, 711M, and 711R) is used to perform the second sub-symbol precursor notice and the countdown notice.

In the seventh embodiment, when it is determined that the timing of stop display in the lottery result display device 730 comes during the ready-to-win performance period in the variable display of the decoration pattern being executed, the variable display time of the lamp variable display is extended to remove the timing of the stop display in the lottery result display device 730 from the ready-to-win performance period. The configuration for removing the timing at which stop display is performed on the lottery result display device 730 from the ready-to-win performance period is not limited to the above method, and may be configured to shorten the variation display time of the ramp variation display so that the timing for performing stop display on the lottery result display device 730 comes before the ready-to-win performance period.

Alternatively, by shortening the variable display time of the variable display of the decoration pattern being executed without changing the variable display time of the lamp variable display, the timing at which the stop display is performed in the lottery result display device 730 may be excluded from the ready-to-win performance period. In this modified example, since the variable display time in the variable display of the decoration pattern being executed is shortened, the lottery result of the reservation full tank performance lottery can be shown early while showing the player the suggestive performance executed during the ready-to-win performance period.

In addition, when the timing of stopping and displaying on the lottery result display device 730 comes during the execution of the pre-reading performance using a plurality of variable displays, the fluctuation display time of the lamp fluctuation display may be extended so that the timing of stopping and displaying on the lottery result display device 730 comes after the end of the variable display of the pre-reading object in the pre-reading performance.

In addition, when the execution of the read-ahead performance is decided, when the read-ahead performance is being executed, when a predetermined special performance display is being executed, or when it is confirmed that the special performance display is to be executed, the sub-control board 940 may be provided with a control for selecting not to execute the reserve full tank performance.

In addition, during the period when the performance performed by the light emission of the frame light emitting devices 271 to 275 or the performance performed by displaying the image on the resin cover configured as the light guide plate of the reel device 710 is executed, the execution period of the performance may be adjusted or the variable display time of the lamp variable display may be adjusted so that the stop display is not performed on the lottery result display device 730.

In the above-described seventh embodiment, in the second sub-symbol precursor notice, the middle reel 711M, which has been stopped from the variable display before the variable display of the look-ahead target, is configured to start varying in synchronism with the ready-to-reach display formed on the middle line L2 by the left and right reels 711L and 711R in the variable display of the look-ahead target. (For example, 5 seconds before) may be configured to start.

The fluctuation of the middle reel 711M that has been stopped is not limited to being started in synchronization with the generation of the ready-to-win display, but may be configured to be started in synchronization with an effect performed by light emission of the frame light emitting devices 271 to 275 or an effect performed by displaying an image on a resin cover configured as a light guide plate in the reel device 710.

In the seventh embodiment, in the second sub-symbol portent notice, when the middle reel 711M is stop-displayed while the second sub-symbol 713B (that is, a symbol that does not constitute a big hit) is displayed on the middle line L2 in the fluctuation display before the fluctuation display to be read ahead, in the subsequent fluctuation display, the left and right reels 7 are maintained while the second sub-symbol 713 of the middle reel 711M is maintained on the middle line L2 from the beginning to the end of the fluctuation display. 11L and 711R are configured to vary.

Alternatively, or in addition to this, when the left and right reels 711L and 711R are stopped and displayed on the middle line L2 with symbols that do not constitute the ready-to-reach display in the variable display before the variable display to be read ahead, in the subsequent variable display, the middle reel 711M may be varied while the symbols on the middle line L2 of the left and right reels 711L and 711R are maintained from the beginning to the end of the variable display.

In this configuration, in the variable display two or more before the look-ahead target, the variable middle reel 711M is stopped with the second sub-symbol 713B or the first sub-symbol 713A displayed on the middle line L2, and the middle reel 711M is changed again in the next variable display. After that, in the variable display one before the look-ahead object, the middle reel 711M is stopped and displayed with the main pattern 712 displayed on the middle line L2, the left and right reels 711L and 711R are moved while the middle reel 711M is stopped, and one reel (for example, the left reel 711L) is stopped first. At this time, the main symbol 712 of the relevant reel displayed on the middle line L2 can constitute the ready-to-win display together with the main symbol 712 of the middle reel 711M displayed on the middle line L2. After one of the left and right reels 711L and 711R is stopped, the other reel is stopped.

In the above-described seventh embodiment, in the second sub-symbol precursor notice, the decorative patterns of the left reels 711L, 711M, and 711R are configured such that the main pattern 712 and the sub-symbols 713 (713A, 713B) are alternately arranged in the circumferential direction. Alternatively, a plurality of sub-designs 713 may be continuously arranged between the main design 712 to which "3" is attached and the main design 712 to which "5" is attached.

According to this configuration, in a state where the second sub-symbol 713B of the middle reel 711M is stop-displayed on the middle line L2, by arranging the continuous sub-symbols 713 of the left reel 711R on the middle line L2, it is possible to suppress the formation of the ready-to-win display with the symbols of the left reel 711L and the symbols of the middle reel 711R on any of the upper line L1, the middle line L2, and the lower line L3.

In the seventh embodiment, the second sub symbol 713B provided on the middle reel 711M is used to perform the second sub symbol precursor notice, but the second sub symbol 713B may be provided on the left reel 711L or the right reel 711R, and the second sub symbol 713B provided on the left reel 711L or the right reel 711R may be used to perform the same prefetch effect as the second sub symbol precursor notice.

In the seventh embodiment, in the countdown notice, the countdown of the number of times of variable display to be executed until the variable display to be read ahead is performed is configured to be performed according to the contents of the main symbol 712 (the number included in the main symbol 712) displayed when the middle reel 711M finally stops, but it may be configured to perform the countdown by temporarily stopping during the variation.

In the above seventh embodiment, the main symbols 712 provided on the respective reels 711L, 711M, 711R are all symbols including numbers, but for the left reels 711L, 711R where countdown is not performed in the countdown notice, the main symbols 712 may be composed of symbols including numerical information other than numbers. In addition, regarding the middle reel 711M that counts down in the countdown notice, the main pattern 712 may consist of a pattern containing numbers (for example, "3", "2", "1") that may be used for the countdown in the countdown notice and a pattern containing numerical information other than the numbers, and preferably consists of a pattern containing at least "1" and "2".

In the seventh embodiment, in the countdown notice, the countdown of the number of times of variable display to be executed until the variable display to be read ahead is performed is configured by the main symbol 712 of the middle reel 711M.

In the seventh embodiment, in the countdown notice, the number of times of the variable display during the prereading effect executed until the variable display of the prefetching target is executed is displayed by counting down, but the notice effect may be configured by counting up each time the variable display during the prefetching effect is executed, and the main pattern 712 may be composed of patterns including numbers (for example, "1", "2", "3") that may be used for the countup in the countup notice.

(7) Modification of Pachinko Machine 100 According to Eighth Embodiment In the above eighth embodiment, a continuous leftward school of fish is displayed on both sides of the reel device 710, but it may be displayed only on the right or left side of the reel device 710.

In the eighth embodiment, the region J is a part of the light-transmitting substrate 401, but the light-transmitting region J may be formed in a non-light-transmitting substrate.

In the eighth embodiment described above, part of the passage forming member 1631 (passage wall portions 1631A and 1631B) overlaps in front of the left information display portion 753 when the player looks obliquely in the lower left direction during play.

In the eighth embodiment, when the game ball entering the downstream passages 1613A2 and 1613B2 after entering from the entrance 1611 is detected by the start winning switches 1441A and 1411B, the special symbol starting winning (that is, the lottery condition for the special symbol lottery) is established as a benefit. Alternatively, when game balls entering the downstream passages 1613A2 and 1613B2 are detected by the detection unit, a certain number of game balls may be provided as prize balls (privileges) without satisfying the lottery conditions.

In the eighth embodiment, when the game ball entering from the entrance 1611 enters the second passage 1614A, 1614B, the start winning of the special symbol is not established. However, it may be configured to give a lower value benefit (for example, the number of prize balls, the probability of winning the special symbol lottery, or the game state after winning the special symbol lottery) than when entering the downstream passage 1613A2, 1613B2.

(8) Modification of Pachinko Machine 100 According to Ninth Embodiment In the ninth embodiment, the shape of the resin cover 715 provided with the half mirrors 761A and 761B is arcuate in a side sectional view. For example, the shape of the resin cover 715 may be a trapezoidal shape in a cross-sectional view, which has at least an upward-facing slope and a downward-facing slope, or may be a shape composed of an upward-facing convex surface, a downward-facing convex surface, and a flat surface provided between these convex surfaces.

In the ninth embodiment, the half mirrors 761A and 761B are provided above and below the resin cover 715, but the half mirror 761A or the half mirror 761B may be provided above or below the resin cover 715.

In the ninth embodiment, the reel-side lamp 717A is provided on the back side of the lower half mirror 761B, but in addition to or instead of this, a reel-side lamp similar to the reel-side lamp 717A may be provided on the back side of the upper half mirror 761A. Also, a reel-side lamp similar to the reel-side lamp 717A may be provided on the entire front side of the partition portion 717 .

In the ninth embodiment, the resin cover 715 of the reel device 710 is provided with the half mirrors 761A and 761B. However, the cover provided on the surface of the liquid crystal display device such as the decorative pattern display device 479 may be provided with an arc-shaped projecting portion in a side sectional view so that the player can visually recognize the image G2 and the like produced by the pressing operation device 261, and the half mirrors 761A and 761B may be provided on the projecting portion.

In the above-described ninth embodiment, the pressing operation device 261 is configured to be capable of lighting (light emitting), but the pressing operation device 261 may be configured not to emit light. Even if the pressing device 261 does not emit light, the player can recognize the operable period of the pressing device 261 by visually recognizing the image G3 of the wave lamp 771 reflected in the half mirror 761B.

(9) Modification of the Pachinko Machine 100 According to the Tenth Embodiment In the tenth embodiment, the display area of each symbol row is reduced in the reel device 710 that performs variable display of decorative symbols on the reels 711L, 711M, and 711R. However, the present invention may be applied to a liquid crystal display device such as the decorative symbol display device 479. For example, among the pattern rows of decorative patterns displayed on the liquid crystal display device, the middle pattern row may be reduced, and the left and right pattern rows may be moved so that the left and right pattern rows are arranged on both sides of the reduced middle pattern row.

In the tenth embodiment, after the middle reel 711M is moved backward, the left and right reels 711L and 711R are moved closer to the middle reel 711M. However, the left and right reels 711L and 711R may be moved backward and then moved closer to the middle reel 711M without changing the position of the middle reel 711M.

Alternatively, while the left reel 711L remains at the position, the middle reel 711M is moved rearward from the left reel 711L and then moved toward the left reel 711L, and then the right reel 711R is moved rearward from the middle reel 711M and then moved toward the middle reel 711M, thereby reducing the display area of each symbol row.

In the tenth embodiment described above, when the left and right reels 711L and 711R are moved toward the middle reel 711M after the middle reel 711M is moved backward, the brightness of the light emitting means such as LEDs provided inside the middle reel 711M located on the rear side may be made higher than the brightness of the light emitting means such as LEDs provided inside the left and right reels 711L and 711R located on the front side of the middle reel 711M. The luminance of the light emitting means provided inside each of the reels 711L, 711M and 711R is controlled by the sub control board 940. FIG.

According to this modified example, the brightness of the light emitting means provided inside the middle reel 711M located on the rear side is made higher than the brightness of the light emitting means provided inside the left and right reels 711L and 711R.

(10) Modified example of pachinko machine 100 according to the eleventh embodiment In the eleventh embodiment, the light guide plate unit 810 including the light guide plate 715B arranged on the front side of the reel device 710 was illustrated, but when a light guide plate having a curved portion similar to the light guide plate 715B is arranged on the front side of a movable body such as a character performing a predetermined action, the present invention may be applied to a light guide plate unit including the light guide plate.

In the eleventh embodiment described above, the curved portion 715B1 of the light guide plate 715B is curved along the curved surfaces of the reels 711L, 711M, and 711R of the reel device 710 in a substantially circular arc shape when viewed from the side.

In the eleventh embodiment, the through holes 841A and 843A and the through holes 841B and 843B of the light source unit 812 are inserted into the through holes 841A and 843A and the through holes 841B and 843B of the light source unit 812, respectively. In such a case, the mounting hole provided in the base 701 is formed into an elongated hole shape that is slightly larger in the vertical direction than the outer diameter of the protruding portion corresponding to the mounting hole, like the through hole 841A, thereby achieving the same effect as in the eleventh embodiment in which the through hole 841A or the like is formed into an elongated hole shape that is slightly larger in the vertical direction than the outer diameter of the protrusion 892 portion. Similarly, a projecting portion projecting forward may be provided on the front side of the light source unit 813 , and a mounting hole corresponding to the projecting portion may be provided in the base 701 .

In the eleventh embodiment, after the light source units 812 and 813 are fixed (attached) above and below the light guide plate 715B, the light guide plate 715B is fixed to the base 701 integrated with the outer cover 715A via the light source units 812 and 813. Alternatively, after fixing the upper and lower light source units corresponding to the light source units 812 and 813 to the base 701 integrated with the outer cover 715A, the light guide plate 715B may be fixed to the light source units.

In the eleventh embodiment, the pressing portion 811A of the pressing member 811 has a substantially arcuate front end shape in a side view along the curved shape of the curved portion 715A1 of the outer cover 715A. As a part of 15B1, the part whose deformation is desired to be corrected may be partially corrected. In this case, it is preferable to provide at least a center pressing portion that presses the rear side of the portion that protrudes most forward at a height position substantially in the center of the vertical direction of the curved portion 715B1 of the light guide plate 715B. In addition, it is preferable to provide at least a vertical pressing portion that presses the rear side of the portion located behind the curved portion 715B1 at the height position of the upper and lower ends of the curved portion 715B1 of the light guide plate 715B in the vertical direction.

(11) Modification of pachinko machine 100 according to twelfth embodiment In the twelfth embodiment, trapezoidal recesses Z having sides Z1 to Z3 are provided in the upper and lower end faces 715B4 and 715B5 of the light guide plate 715B in a front view, but the recesses provided in the end faces 715B4 and 715B5 do not necessarily have a trapezoidal shape. For example, it may be a concave portion having two consecutive sides in a mountain shape, or a concave portion including four or more sides.

In the eleventh embodiment, the recesses Z provided in the upper and lower end surfaces 715B4 and 715B5 of the light guide plate 715B are configured to have corners formed by the intersection of two continuous sides. However, the corners may be rounded or chamfered as long as areas such as areas D1 and D2 where light does not enter or light weaker than light traveling in the directions of arrows F1 to F3 enter.

In the twelfth embodiment, by providing the trapezoidal recesses Z in the upper and lower end surfaces 715B4 and 715B5 of the light guide plate 715B when viewed from the front, light is guided in a predetermined direction such as the regions D1 and D2 where light does not enter or light weaker than the light traveling in the directions of the arrows F1 to F3 enters. may constitute the predetermined direction. Alternatively, a dedicated component capable of configuring the predetermined direction may be provided between the end face 715B4 of the light guide plate 715B and the light emitting means 834 or between the end face 715B5 and the light emitting means 824.

In the above-described twelfth embodiment, the light guide plate 715B has a configuration in which the recesses Z are provided in the upper and lower end surfaces 715B4 and 715B5 of the light guide plate 715B having the curved portion 715B1 so that the light guide plate 715B has randomness in the way the light guide plate 715B shines.

(12) Modified example of pachinko machine 100 according to the thirteenth embodiment In the thirteenth embodiment, the reel device 710, which performs variable display of decorative symbols on the reels 711L, 711M, and 711R, is configured to change the width of the left and right reels 711L and 711R. However, the present invention may be applied to a liquid crystal display device such as the decorative symbol display device 479. In other words, the widths of the right and left pattern rows of the decorative pattern rows displayed on the liquid crystal display device may be changed.

In the thirteenth embodiment described above, in a state where the rights to the unit game relating to the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) are not reserved, the width of the left and right reels 711L, 711R is changed when the variable display of symbols in the unit game relating to the first special symbol or the second special symbol is started. A configuration in which the width of 11R is changed may be adopted.

In the thirteenth embodiment, of the three rows of reels 711L, 711M, 711R, the middle reel 711M on which decorative symbols are stopped and displayed last is configured so that the left and right reels 711L, 711R are partially overlapped in front and stopped. It may be configured to be visible from the

In the thirteenth embodiment, the display area of each symbol row is reduced by reducing the width of each of the left and right reels 711L, 711, and the display area of each symbol row is reduced by moving the reels 711L, 711M, 711R.

In the thirteenth embodiment, the left and right reels 711L and 711 are moved toward each other to reduce the width of the display area for each symbol row. However, it is also possible to reduce the width of the display area for each symbol row by moving at least one reel to one side or the other side in the reel arrangement direction. For example, by moving only one of the left and right reels 711L, 711 in the left or right direction of the three rows of reels 711L, 711M, 711R, the width of the display area of each symbol row may be reduced.

In the thirteenth embodiment, one driving solenoid 1711 draws the second reel body 1702 toward the first reel body 1701 by utilizing the rotation of the reels 711L and 711R. However, a plurality of driving solenoids similar to the driving solenoid 1711 may be provided in the circumferential direction of the reels 711L and 711R. By providing a plurality of drive solenoids in the circumferential direction of the reel, it becomes possible to draw the second reel body 1702 toward the first reel body 1701 even when the reel is in a stopped state.

In the thirteenth embodiment, by changing the insertion amount of the second reel body 1702 with respect to the first reel body 1701, the width of the reels (reels 711L and 711R) is changed. Alternatively, the outer peripheral surface of the reel may be made of a stretchable material, and one side of the reel in the left-right direction (width direction) may be pulled from the other side to shrink the outer peripheral surface of the reel, thereby narrowing the width of the reel.

In the thirteenth embodiment, each reel 711L. 711M, 711R. A display capable of displaying symbols such as numbers by electrical control may be provided on the outer peripheral surfaces of 711M and 711R, and the main symbols may be displayed on the display. In such a case, when the widths of the left and right reels 711L and 711R are narrowed, a configuration may be adopted in which main symbols having sizes corresponding to the widths are displayed.

(13) Modified Example of Pachinko Machine 100 According to Fourteenth Embodiment In the fourteenth embodiment, the light guide plate 715B is vertically extended by the drive solenoid 1731 to change (increase) the curvature radius of the curved portion 715B1.

In the fourteenth embodiment, the light guide plate 715B having the curved portion 715B1 is used, and the radius of curvature of the curved portion 715B1 is changed to change the position where the light guided through the light guide plate 715B is refracted on the front and back of the light guide plate 715B, thereby changing the position where the fish pattern 743 shines. Instead of this, by gently bending a flat light guide plate, it is also possible to change the bending position between the front and back inside the light guide plate.

(14) Modified Example of Pachinko Machine 100 According to Fifteenth Embodiment In the fifteenth embodiment, the flat light guide plate 1751 and the light guide plate 1771 are stacked in the front-back direction, but two curved light guide plates such as the light guide plate 715B may be stacked in the front-back direction. When two curved light guide plates are stacked in the front-rear direction, a reel device capable of displaying a decorative pattern such as the reel device 710 or a movable body such as a character performing a predetermined action may be arranged behind the two light guide plates.

In the fifteenth embodiment, of the light guide plates 1751 and 1771 stacked in the front-rear direction, the light guide plate 1771 located on the rear side is configured to be movable relative to the light guide plate 1751. However, among the light guide plates stacked in the front-rear direction, the light guide plate located on the front side may be configured to be movable relative to the light guide plate located on the rear side.

In the fifteenth embodiment, the flat light guide plate 1751 and the light guide plate 1771 are stacked in the front-rear direction, but three or more light guide plates may be stacked and at least one light guide plate may be moved relative to the other light guide plates.

In the fifteenth embodiment, the movably provided light guide plate 1771 is moved relative to the fixedly provided light guide plate 1751. Alternatively, both of the two light guide plates may be provided movably, and one of these two light guide plates may be moved relative to the other.

In the fifteenth embodiment, the light guide plate 1771 is configured to move in the horizontal direction relative to the light guide plate 1751, but the moving direction of one light guide plate with respect to the other light guide plate does not necessarily have to be the horizontal direction, and may be a predetermined direction other than the horizontal direction, such as the vertical direction. Also, the relative movement direction of one light guide plate with respect to the other light guide plate does not necessarily have to be a linear direction, and may be curved.

(15) Modified Example of Pachinko Machine 100 According to Sixteenth Embodiment In the sixteenth embodiment described above, the number of times of holding special symbols is represented by the number of holding icons 1812 displayed on the decorative pattern display device 479. In this configuration, the display mode of the holding icons 1812 is changed according to the occurrence interval of the start winning of the special symbols. In the configuration, the display mode of each lamp corresponding to each holding number (for example, the emission color, the blinking interval, or the brightness, or a combination of a plurality of them) may be configured to be different according to the occurrence interval of the start winning of the special symbol.

In the above 16th embodiment, the number of times of holding the special symbols is represented by the number of the holding icons 1812 displayed on the decorative pattern display device 479, and the display mode of the holding icons 1812 is changed according to the occurrence interval of the start winning of the special symbols. Alternatively, or in addition to this, when the number of times of holding of the normal symbols is displayed, the display mode of the holding icons may be changed, or the starting winning is generated during the variable probability game state. In the case of displaying the number of times the start winning to the right start winning device 432 is held, the display mode of the hold icon may be changed.

In the 16th embodiment, the display mode of the holding icon 1812 is changed according to the occurrence interval of the start winning of the special symbol, but instead of or in addition to this, it may be controlled so that the content of the variable display of the special symbol is changed according to the occurrence interval of the start winning of the special symbol. For example, when the interval of occurrence of the start winning of the special symbol is short, the fluctuation time of the special symbol for the starting winning is set short, and when the interval of occurrence of the starting winning of the special symbol is long compared to the case of the occurrence interval of the starting winning of the special symbol, control may be performed so that the variation time of the special symbol for the starting winning is long. When the occurrence interval of the start winning of the special symbol is short compared to , control may be performed so that the fluctuation time of the special symbol for the starting winning is likely to be set long. In addition, the control according to the length of the occurrence interval of the start winning of this special symbol may be executed by controlling the variable time according to the number of times of suspension, and the variable display of the special symbol that is started when the number of times of suspension is large and the predetermined number may be controlled so that the variable time of the special symbol that is started when the number is smaller than the predetermined number is set longer than the variable display of the special symbol.

In the sixteenth embodiment described above, before the start winning of the next scheduled special symbol occurs, the scheduled holding icon 1811 whose display mode is changed according to the elapsed time from the last starting winning is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 479. However, the display mode of the number of times of holding the special symbol, such as the holding lamp 720 provided on the lower side of the reel device 710, of the lamp (for example, the emission color, the blinking interval, etc.) is the same as that of the scheduled special symbol 1811. Before the occurrence of the starting winning of the pattern, it may be changed according to the elapsed time from the last starting winning.

In the sixteenth embodiment, both the pending icon 1811 and the pending icon 1812 are configured to represent the elapsed time from the last start winning by the size of the circle and the numerical value. However, either the size of the circle (the size of the shape) or the numerical value may be used to represent the elapsed time. Further, the position or direction of the pending icon 1811 or the pending icon 1812 may be changed from the reference position or direction in accordance with the elapsed time from the last starting prize winning, so that the position or direction of the icon may represent the elapsed time from the last starting prize winning.

In the sixteenth embodiment, both the pending icon 1811 and the pending icon 1812 are configured to represent the elapsed time from the last start winning by the size of the circle, but at least one of them may be configured to represent the elapsed time from the last starting win by another form such as a bar graph.

In the sixteenth embodiment described above, the pending icon 1811 and the pending icon 1812 are configured so that their sizes fall between a predetermined minimum size and a predetermined maximum size.

In the sixteenth embodiment described above, the pending icon 1811 and the pending icon 1812 are both configured to display the numerical value indicating the elapsed time from the last start winning, but in addition to the numerical value indicating the elapsed time, or instead of the numerical value indicating the elapsed time, it may be configured to display the numerical value indicating the number of game balls shot during the elapsed time.

In the sixteenth embodiment, the pending schedule icon 1811 is configured to change according to the elapsed time from the last start winning, but it may be configured to change according to the elapsed time during a predetermined game period. , In some game states such as variable probability game state, it may be temporarily stopped. According to such a configuration, it is possible to suppress the reflection of an abnormal value caused by a game state in which a game player stops shooting a game ball during a special game state or a game state in which the position of the game ball is changed is reflected in the display mode of the pending icon 1811 or the fixed display of the pending icon 1812.例文帳に追加

In the sixteenth embodiment described above, the "predetermined game period", which is the condition for updating the display content of the table state icon display area 1820 (that is, the number of table state icons 1821), is the period during which the game ball is being shot from the launching device 330. However, the "predetermined game period" may be the period during which the pachinko machine 100 is activated by power supply (while the pachinko machine 100 is powered on).

In addition, in a pachinko machine configured so that game balls can be separately shot in the left and right areas with respect to the central structure (that is, a game can be played by a left-handed game method and a right-handed game method), if a special symbol start-up winning does not occur in either a left-handed game method or a right-handed game method (or a special symbol start-up win does not substantially occur), the special symbol start-up prize is not generated in either the left-handed game method or the right-handed game method. Only in the case of a game that can occur, the period during which game balls are being shot from the shooting device 330 may be set as the "predetermined game period". In this case, by providing a sensor in at least one of a predetermined area through which a game ball shot by a left-handed game method passes with a high probability and a predetermined area through which a game ball shot by a right-handed game method is passed with a high probability, it is possible to determine whether a game is played by a left-handed game method or a game by a right-handed game method.

In the sixteenth embodiment, the state of the pachinko machine 100 is reflected in the number of the table state icons 1821. However, in addition to the number of the table state icons 1821, the game time during which the game was played in the pachinko machine 100 (for example, the total time during which the game balls are being shot from the shooting device 330) may be displayed.

In the 16th embodiment, when the occurrence interval of the special symbol start winning during the predetermined game period exceeds a predetermined first period as a period sufficient to doubt the possibility of an abnormality related to the occurrence of the special symbol start winning, the number of the table state icons 1821 decreases, and a new start winning occurs before the predetermined second period, which is a period in which the possibility of an abnormality related to the occurrence of the special symbol start winning is low, has passed. Although the number of platform state icons 1821 increases when the event occurs continuously for a predetermined number of times, the number of platform state icons 1821 may increase in the former and decrease in the latter.

In the above 16th embodiment, when the occurrence interval of the start winning of the special symbols during the predetermined game period exceeds the predetermined first period which is sufficient to suspect the possibility of the abnormality related to the occurrence of the starting winning of the special symbols, one of the stand state icons 1821 being displayed in the stand state icon display area 1820 is deleted. may be changed according to the passage of time after the occurrence of , and the table state icon 1821 may be erased at the timing when the occurrence interval of the start winning of the special symbol exceeds the first period. When erasing the table state icon 1821, the icon may be erased by an animation such as an explosion.

In the above sixteenth embodiment, when the occurrence interval of the start winning of the special symbol during the predetermined game period exceeds the predetermined first period as a period sufficient to suspect the possibility of abnormality related to the occurrence of the starting winning of the special symbol, one machine state icon 1821 among the machine state icons 1821 being displayed in the machine state icon display area 1820 is deleted. may continue for a predetermined number of times (for example, twice), the single stand state icon 1821 may be deleted.

In the above 16th embodiment, when the occurrence interval of the start winning of the special symbol during the predetermined game period exceeds the predetermined first period which is sufficient to suspect the possibility of abnormality related to the occurrence of the start winning of the special symbol, one of the stand state icons 1821 being displayed in the stand state icon display area 1820 is deleted. It may be a configuration.

In the above 16th embodiment, when an event in which a new starting prize occurs occurs continuously for a predetermined number of times before a predetermined second period, which is set in advance as a period in which the possibility of an abnormality related to the occurrence of a special symbol starting prize is low, occurs during a predetermined game period, one table state icon 1821 is added to the table state icon display area 1820, but in such a case, the number of table state icons 1821 to be added may be two or more.

Further, when the event that the start winning of the next special symbol occurs continuously for a predetermined number of times (for example, 3 times) before the predetermined third period shorter than the predetermined second period elapses, more table state icons 1821 may be added to the table state icon display area 1820 than the case where the event of the start winning of the next special symbol continues for the predetermined number of times (for example, 3 times) before the predetermined second period elapses.

In the sixteenth embodiment described above, when an event in which a new starting prize occurs occurs continuously for a predetermined number of times during a predetermined game period before the predetermined second period elapses, one machine state icon 1821 is added to the machine state icon display area 1820. In addition to the addition of the status icon 1821, or instead of the addition of the table status icon 1821, the setting value of the game ball output rate (machine discount, payout rate) set for the pachinko machine 100 by the manager of the game hall or the like may be displayed on the decorative pattern display device 479 or other display device.

In the 16th embodiment, the number of the table state icons 1821 is changed when the conditions regarding the occurrence interval of the special symbol start winning during the predetermined game period are high and low, but instead of or in addition to this, the size of the table state icon 1821 may be changed, and one table state icon 1821 is set when the condition regarding the period when the abnormality is high is met. may be expanded, and when conditions relating to a period with a low possibility of an abnormality are met, the table status icon 1821 may be reduced. Alternatively, instead of or in addition to the table status icon 1821, a number that is updated each time a condition regarding a period with a high possibility of an abnormality is met and a condition with respect to a period with a low possibility of an abnormality is met is displayed, and the number of times the condition about the period with a high possibility of an abnormality is satisfied and the number of times the condition about the period with a low possibility of an abnormality is satisfied are counted separately. Alternatively, the number 10 may be displayed in advance, the number of 1 is subtracted when the condition regarding the period with high possibility of abnormality is satisfied, and the number of 1 is added when the condition regarding the period with low possibility of abnormality is satisfied.

In the sixteenth embodiment, the occurrence interval of the special symbol start winning during the predetermined game period is set to a long period of start winning as the period in which the possibility of abnormality related to the occurrence of the special symbol start winning is high, and the case where the start winning is continuously occurring in a short period as a low period. A base state icon may be displayed in which a period in which the starting prize is longer than a certain period is set as a period in which the possibility of an abnormality related to the occurrence of the special symbol starting prize is low.

(16) Modified example of the pachinko machine 100 according to the 17th embodiment In the above 17th embodiment, in the variable-probability game state, a battle effect was exemplified as an effect corresponding to winning the jackpots 1 and 2 and shifting to another game state, but the game state transition may be indicated by other effects. It may be configured to perform an effect indicating a transition to another game state depending on whether the player is defeated or defeated, or it may be an effect aiming to reach a set target.

In the above seventeenth embodiment, in the variable probability gaming state, as an effect corresponding to winning jackpots 1 and 2 and moving to another game state, an effect in which the character performs an action was exemplified, but the game state transition may be indicated by other effects. , and as an effect corresponding to defeat in the battle, an effect may be performed in which the pattern of "End" stops at the center part of the display screen.

In the seventeenth embodiment described above, in the time-saving game state in which the upper limit number of times is limited to 100 times, the effect display of battle defeat is executed in the 80th unit game, which corresponds to the number of times near the end. However, if the jackpot is not won up to 99 times of the unit game, the effect of battle standby may be displayed, and the effect display of battle defeat may be performed at the last 100th time, or at the other 50th time. In a plurality of unit games such as 90 times, an effect display of battle defeat in which the story progresses may be performed.

In the above seventeenth embodiment, unless the jackpot 1 is won in times other than the special performance times, the unit game in which the variable display of the variable time set for a certain short period of time is performed has been described.

In the above seventeenth embodiment, unless the jackpot 1 is won in times other than the specific game times, the unit game in which the variable display of the variable time set for a certain short period of time is performed has been described. However, a unit game in which the variable display is performed in which two or more variable times are selected and set may be performed.

In the seventeenth embodiment, the invincible period is displayed as the remaining time as the invincible time effect. However, the invincible period does not necessarily have to be displayed as the remaining time, and may be displayed as the number of remaining unit games. .

(17) Modification of Pachinko Machine 100 According to 18th Embodiment In the 18th embodiment, a setting changer such as a game hall manager operates switches (rear setting switch 905, initialization switch 907) provided on the pachinko machine 100 to change the setting of the ball output rate (that is, change the setting of the game mode). Alternatively, an external device (for example, a management device called a so-called "hall computer") or a portable terminal device (portable terminal device) that can communicate with the pachinko machine 100 may input a signal corresponding to an instruction to change the game mode to the next game mode or information indicating the game mode to be set to the pachinko machine 100 by communication.

In the eighteenth embodiment, in the determination processing S1601, it is determined whether or not the setting suggestion information output condition is satisfied with respect to the nail state level calculated in the processing of S1503. Alternatively, in the determination processing S1601, it may be configured to determine whether or not the setting suggestion information output condition is satisfied with respect to the value calculated in the processing of S1502, that is, (the value of the general winning number counter/the value of the number of shot balls counter). Further, in the determination processing S1601, it may be determined whether or not the output condition of the setting suggestion information is satisfied for the value of the general winning number counter counted in a predetermined period (for example, one hour).

Alternatively, when the number of variable display times of the first special symbol and/or the second special symbol, the number of times of normal symbol display, the number of occurrences of the special game state, etc. are adopted as the divisor for the value of the general winning number counter (dividend), it may be configured to determine whether or not the setting suggestion information output condition is established in the determination processing S1601 for the value obtained by dividing the value of the general winning number counter by the divisor.

Further, when the number of game balls fired from the launching device 330 is counted, or the value obtained by subtracting a predetermined value as the number of game balls fired from the launching device 330 but not reaching the game area from the counted number of game balls is adopted as the divisor of the value of the general winning number counter (dividend), the setting suggestion information is output in the judgment processing S1601 for the value obtained by dividing the value of the general winning number counter by the divisor. The configuration may be such that it is determined whether or not the conditions are established.

In the eighteenth embodiment, in the judgment processing S1601, it is determined that the setting suggestion information output condition is met when the nail condition level is "2" or higher.

In the eighteenth embodiment, in the determination processing S1602, it is determined whether or not the setting suggestion information output condition is satisfied regarding the entry of the game ball into the general winning devices 2439A and 2439B. You can

In the eighteenth embodiment, when a game ball enters one predetermined general winning device (for example, the general winning device 2439B) out of the general winning device 2439A or the general winning device 2439B, it is determined that the setting suggestion information output condition is established. may be configured.

In the above eighteenth embodiment, when a game ball enters one predetermined general winning device (for example, the general winning device 2439B) out of the general winning device 2439A or the general winning device 2439B, the configuration for determining that the setting suggestion information output condition is established is illustrated. Good. That is, when a game ball enters one of a plurality of predetermined (two or more) winning devices, it may be determined in the determination processing S1601 that the setting suggestion information output condition is satisfied. In addition, it may be determined that the setting suggestion information output condition is established in the determination processing S1601 when the game ball enters both of a plurality of predetermined (two or more) winning devices.

In addition, when game balls enter a plurality of predetermined winning devices in a predetermined order (for example, in the order of the general winning device 2439B and the general winning device 2439A), it may be determined in the determination processing S1601 that the setting suggestion information output condition is satisfied. In other words, when a plurality of predetermined prize winning devices are provided, not only the entry of the game ball into the plurality of prize winning devices but also the order of entry may be included as a requirement for the output condition of the setting suggestion information. As a result, the player can obtain setting suggestion information as a privilege for causing game balls to enter a plurality of predetermined winning devices in a predetermined order. Therefore, the player can enjoy a game in which game balls enter a plurality of predetermined winning devices in a predetermined order.

In the eighteenth embodiment described above, a case has been described in which the output condition of setting suggestion information can be established by an operation that allows the player to select whether or not to execute it according to his/her will during the special game state. For example, in a normal game state in which it is advantageous for the player to play the game by the left-handed game method, the setting suggestion information output condition may be easily satisfied when the right-handed game method different from the left-handed game method is performed. In addition, it is preferable that the output condition of the setting suggestion information is that the game ball passes through an area added with another function and not used in the normal game state, because it is possible to easily set the area so that the game ball can pass with a high probability while suppressing the number of parts. In addition, when a ball overflow signal indicating that game balls are excessively stored in the storage section 241 is received from the ball overflow switch 249 in the normal game state, the setting suggestion information output condition is established, and the player who has performed the game ball lending operation operates the ball removal operation member 232 (see FIG. 1) to positively operate the ball overflow switch 249 so that the game balls are excessively stored in the storage section 241. may be added.

In the eighteenth embodiment, when it is determined that the setting suggestion information output condition is satisfied in any one of the determination processes S1601, S1602, S1603, and S1605 in the setting suggestion information related process S2021, the setting suggestion information is output. good too. For example, the setting suggestion information may be output when it is determined that the output conditions for each setting suggestion information are satisfied in all of the determination processes S1601, S1602, S1603, and S1605.

In the eighteenth embodiment, the variable display time (fluctuation time) of the special symbols and the decorative symbols performed in the unit game related to the special symbols (first special symbol, second special) is configured to be selectable according to the currently set game mode. It may be configured to be selectable according to the game mode. For example, in a gaming machine such as the pachinko machine 100 of the first embodiment in which an operable period (for example, the first to third operable periods that can occur in the variable display including super reach whose variable display time is 90 seconds) can occur during the variable display of the decorative symbols, the effect time of the predetermined suggestive effect that appears when the pressing operation device 261 is pushed during the operable period may be configured to be selectable according to the currently set game mode. In the eighteenth embodiment, when the lottery for changing the variable display time corresponding to the game mode is won, the variation pattern of the variable display time assigned to the currently set game mode (that is, the setting correspondence information stored in the RAM of the main control board 920 at that time) is selected. 940 to select the variation pattern of the variable display time assigned to the game mode currently set in the sub-control board 940 . Further, a lottery may be performed in the sub-control board 940 to determine whether or not to change the variable display time according to the game mode.

In the eighteenth embodiment, a counting invalid period is provided after the continuous insertion of game balls into the general winning devices 2439A and 2439B is detected, so that the game balls entering the general winning devices 2439A and 2439B during the counting invalid period are not counted as the number of general winning prizes. In this case, the game balls used for detection of continuous throwing are counted as the number of general winning prizes by the general prize winning number counter, but when the continuous throwing is detected, the number of game balls used for the detection may be subtracted from the general prize winning number counter.

In the eighteenth embodiment described above, some examples of periods that can be the "counting period" which is the criterion of S1401 have been given. However, when the large winning devices such as the large winning devices 2433 and 2434 are arranged on the lower right side of the central structure 420, instead of or in addition to the above example, the start of the normal game state may be set as the counting start condition, and the period until the end of the normal game state may be the "counting period".

Of the general winning devices 2439A and 2439B, a game ball can enter (win) the general winning device 2439A arranged on the left side with respect to the middle start winning device 2431 only by the left-handed game method, whereas the general winning device 2439B arranged on the right side with respect to the middle start winning device 2431 can enter (win) with either the left-handed game method or the right-handed game method. Here, in a gaming machine in which the big winning devices such as the big winning devices 2433 and 2434 are arranged on the lower right side of the central structure 420, the player plays the right-handed game method in the special game state. Therefore, when the game ball enters the general prize winning device 439B during the special game state, the general prize winning number counted by the general prize winning number counter and the nail state level calculated based on the general prize winning number thus counted may not appropriately reflect the state of the nail 411 provided at the entrance of the prize winning opening of the general prize winning devices 2439A, 2439B or in the vicinity thereof.

On the other hand, by setting the start of the normal game state as a counting start condition and the period until the end of the normal game state as the ``counting period'', it is possible to suitably exclude the game balls entering the general winning device 2439B during the special game state from the objects to be counted. Therefore, the number of general winning prizes counted by the general winning number counter and the nail state level calculated based on the so-counted general winning number can be accurately obtained as a value appropriately reflecting the state of the nail 411 provided at the entrance of the winning opening of the general prize winning devices 2439A, 2439B or in the vicinity thereof.

It should be noted that the start of the normal game state can be determined based on the output state of the signal from the external terminal board 580, for example. Specifically, for example, when the signal indicating the special game state is no longer output from the external terminal plate 580, it can be determined that the normal game state has started.

Alternatively, in a gaming machine in which the large winning devices such as the large winning devices 2433 and 2434 are arranged on the lower right side of the central structure 420, the left-handed game method is unlikely to be performed during the special game state. Therefore, based on the amount of rotation operation of the shooting handle 252, it may be determined whether or not the left-handed game method is performed, and the case where the left-handed game method is performed may be regarded as the normal game state.

In the eighteenth embodiment, the period during which the front block 102 is open is exemplified as the "counting invalid period", but the period during which the front block 102 is closed may be the "counting invalid period". Further, the predetermined period after the previous block 102 is in the closed state and the continuous insertion of game balls into the general winning devices 2439A and 2439B is detected may be set as the "counting invalid period". When the front block 102 is in a closed state and the continuous insertion of game balls into the general prize winning devices 2439A and 2439B is detected, the predetermined period after that is set as a "counting invalid period", for example, a ball clogging state in which the game balls stay in a part of the game area occurs, and the ball clogging state makes it impossible for the game balls to flow down in a part of the game area. When a situation occurs in which balls enter, the general winning number counter can be prevented from being updated with respect to the entry of at least some of these game balls. As a result, when a player continues to shoot game balls in a jammed state and makes the game balls illegally enter the general winning devices 2439A and 2439B continuously, the general winning number counter can be updated to correspond to the number of entering game balls excluding some of those game balls. Therefore, it is possible to more appropriately count whether or not the performance of the pachinko machine 100 is as designed. In addition, even when a fraudulent act of entering game balls continuously into the general winning devices 2439A and 2439B illegally using magnets is performed, the general winning number counter can be prevented from being updated for at least part of the entry of the game balls, and the performance of the pachinko machine 100 can be evaluated more appropriately.

In the eighteenth embodiment, the category indicating that the nail 411 may be out of the appropriate state is subdivided into two categories, while the category indicating that the nail 411 is in an appropriate state is not subdivided into one category.

In the eighteenth embodiment, the nail condition level indicating that the nail 411 is in an appropriate state is set to the minimum value "1", and the higher the possibility that the nail 411 is out of the appropriate state, the higher the nail condition level.

In the eighteenth embodiment, the winning device to be counted is provided with a prize ball upon entry, but is irrelevant to the big win lottery, and is limited to the general prize winning devices 2439A and 2439B that are not provided with a movable piece that can change the entry probability. The right start winning device 2432 or the like provided in the above may be counted, and the nail state level may be calculated for each winning device.

In the above eighteenth embodiment, a configuration has been described in which a plurality of general winning switches 2449A and 2449B for respectively detecting game balls that have entered the plurality of general winning devices 2439A and 2439B are provided separately. Also, the winning switch used for counting the number of general winnings may be the switch used for paying out the prize balls, or may be provided separately from the switch used for paying out the prize balls.

In the eighteenth embodiment, the number of general winnings is collectively counted for the plurality of general winning switches 2449A and 2449B that respectively detect the game balls that have entered the plurality of general winning devices 2439A and 2439B. 2439B may be displayed separately. In this case, the winning switch for counting the number of winnings by the winning number counter is composed of a winning device (or a winning opening, for example, a general winning device 2439A) that allows game balls to enter only by a specific gaming technique (for example, a left-handed gaming technique) and a winning device (or a winning opening, for example, a general winning device 2439A) that allows game balls to enter by another gaming technique (for example, a right-handed gaming technique). B) is preferably provided separately, and this makes it possible to accurately acquire the number of general winnings and the level of nail condition as values appropriately reflecting the arrangement state of members that affect the flow of game balls, such as the nail 411 provided near the entrance of the winning port of each prize winning device or in the vicinity thereof.

In the above 18th embodiment, the configuration in which the number of general winning prizes is counted for one counting period and the nail condition level is displayed has been described, but the configuration may be such that the number of general winning prizes is separately counted in a plurality of counting periods. For example, a general winning number counter may be provided separately corresponding to a plurality of game states (for example, a normal game state and a special game state), and the general winning number and nail state level may be separately displayed corresponding to each game state.

In the eighteenth embodiment, the pachinko machine 100 (more specifically, the main control board 920) counts the number of general winnings and the number of shot balls. However, the number of game balls entering the general winning devices 2439A and 2439B during the counting period and the number of shot balls during the counting period can be acquired by the management device, and the nail condition level can be calculated in the management device.

(18) Modification of the Pachinko Machine 100 According to the Nineteenth Embodiment In the nineteenth embodiment, when the game mode with the highest first-hit probability (that is, the third-stage probability) in each type is set, when the number of holdings of special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) reaches the upper limit, setting suggestion information corresponding to the currently set game mode (that is, the game mode with the third-stage probability in each type) can be output. When the number of pattern holdings reaches the upper limit, setting suggestion information corresponding to the currently set game mode may be output, not limited to the case where the game mode with the highest probability of first hit in each type is set.

For example, in a configuration in which the setting suggestion information corresponding to the currently set game mode is output as the light emission color of the stop display in the variable display by the lottery result display unit 2730, when the number of holdings of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) reaches the upper limit, the light emission color of the stop display in the variable display by the lottery result display unit 2730 may be the light emission color according to the currently set game mode.

Alternatively, instead of or in addition to the case where the game mode with the highest initial hit probability in each type is set, when the game mode with the lowest initial hit probability (that is, the first stage probability) in each type is set, setting suggestion information corresponding to the currently set game mode may be output when the number of times of holding special symbols reaches the upper limit. As a result, the player can guess that the game mode currently set in the pachinko machine 100 in which the player is playing is the game mode with the lowest first-hit probability in each type based on the output setting suggestion information.

Here, the probability of a game ball entering a starting hole related to establishment of a starting condition or a winning hole (for example, a winning hole called a "V winning hole") to which a predetermined privilege (for example, transition to a probability game state) is given when entering during a special game state depends on the physical state of the pachinko machine 100 such as the individual difference of the pachinko machine 100 and the mounting angle. Even if it is 100, depending on the physical state of the pachinko machine 100, the pachinko machine 100 may be an advantageous gaming machine for the player. Therefore, when the currently set game mode is a game mode with the lowest first-hit probability in each type, by showing the setting suggestion information corresponding to the game mode to the player, the player can use the setting suggestion information as one of the information for selecting the pachinko machine 100 to be played while considering the physical state of the pachinko machine 100, so that the player can be provided with a new enjoyment for selecting the pachinko machine 100.例文帳に追加becomes.

In the above nineteenth embodiment, when the game mode with the highest probability of first hit in each type (that is, the third-stage probability) is set, when the number of holdings of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) reaches the upper limit, setting suggestion information corresponding to the currently set game mode (that is, the game mode with the third-stage probability in each type) is output with a predetermined probability. It may be the probability (that is, 100%) that the setting suggesting information corresponding to the currently set game mode is output without fail when the probability is reached, or the probability that the setting suggesting information corresponding to the currently set game mode is output or not output when the number of times of holding the special symbols reaches the upper limit, such as 10%.

In the nineteenth embodiment, when the number of times of holding the special symbols reaches the upper limit, if it is selected not to display the holding full-tank effect by the holding full-tank effect lottery, the setting suggestion information corresponding to the currently set game mode is not output (that is, the fourth display unit 2730D does not emit light in gold). Alternatively, the setting suggestion information may be output with a predetermined probability.

In the nineteenth embodiment, when the number of times of holding the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) reaches the upper limit, when displaying the lottery result of the holding full tank effect lottery using the lottery result display unit 2730, the setting suggestion information corresponding to the currently set game mode is output. The setting suggestion information corresponding to the currently set game mode may be output during a special period during which the reserved full-tank effect is executed (a period in which the reserved full-tank effect can appear). For example, during the special period, numbers and symbols indicating setting suggestion information corresponding to the currently set game mode may be displayed on the decorative pattern display device 479 or a dedicated display device.

In the above nineteenth embodiment, the luminescence color of the stop display that is stopped by the fourth display unit 2730D after the variable display by the lottery result display unit 2730 is differentiated between when the setting suggestion information corresponding to the currently set game mode is output and when the setting suggestion information is not output. For example, when the setting suggestion information is not output, the fourth display section 2730D is caused to emit red light in the stop display after the variation display by the lottery result display section 2730, and when the setting suggestion information is output, the display sections 2730A to 2730D may be stopped by emitting light or blinking in red or a color other than red in the variation display by the lottery result display section 2730.

In the nineteenth embodiment, the lottery result display unit 2730 for displaying the lottery result of the holding full-tank effect lottery is used as the output destination of the setting suggestion information corresponding to the currently set game mode, but the setting suggestion information corresponding to the currently set game mode may be output independently of the display of the lottery result by the holding full-tank effect lottery. In other words, setting suggestion information corresponding to the currently set game mode may be output to an area different from the display area of the lottery result display section 2730 of the decorative symbol display device 479 or to a dedicated display device.

In the 19th embodiment, when the number of times of holding special symbols reaches the upper limit, the holding full tank effect lottery is performed and the setting suggestion information is output. However, it is not necessary to output the setting suggestion information when the number of times of holding special symbols reaches the upper limit. Setting suggestion information may be displayed by selecting whether or not to output information, or a special period may be started. In addition, conditions for a plurality of holding times (for example, conditions for increasing the number of holding times by a predetermined number (for example, 4) in a certain time period (within 10 seconds) and holding the number of times reaching the upper limit) are set, and when any of the conditions are satisfied, selection may be made as to whether or not to output setting suggestion information, or whether to start a special period may be determined by lottery. Good.

(19) Modification of pachinko machine 100 according to twentieth embodiment In the twentieth embodiment, as a predetermined condition for extending the period, the case of winning the lottery for extending the effect during the extended waiting period (that is, the period ending earlier than the end of the special period after the start of the special period related to the reserved full tank effect) was illustrated, but conditions other than this case may be adopted as the predetermined condition for extending the period. For example, when the number of reserved special symbols increases by 1 during the extended standby period, the performance extension function may be activated without performing the performance extension lottery (that is, with a probability of 100%) on the assumption that a predetermined condition relating to the extension of the period is satisfied.

Alternatively, when a game ball wins a prize in a prize-winning device other than the prize-winning device relating to the starting prize of a special symbol such as the general prize-winning devices 439A and 439B during the extended standby period, or when a prize extension lottery is performed each time the game ball is won, or when a prize is won in the prize extension lottery, the game ball shot by the player causes a predetermined condition regarding the period extension, and a predetermined condition regarding the period extension is established, and the effect extension function may be activated. Further, the predetermined condition for extending the period may be a condition that can be satisfied regardless of the game ball shot by the player. For example, the extension condition may be established by executing a part of the effect determined to be executed in the variable display whose execution has already been suspended, or the extension condition may be established by combining a plurality of conditions.

In the twentieth embodiment described above, the extended standby period is exemplified by a period that ends earlier than the end of the special period after the start of the special period related to the reserved full-tank effect. However, the extended standby period may be a period that is provided after the number of times of holding special symbols reaches the upper limit and ends earlier than the end of the special period related to the reserved full-tank effect. For example, after the number of reserved special patterns reaches the upper limit, a period ending earlier than the ending time of the special period related to the reserved full-tank performance, or a period starting after a predetermined time after the number of reserved special patterns reaches the upper limit and ending earlier than the ending time of the special period related to the reserved full-tanned performance may be configured as an extended standby period.

In the above twentieth embodiment, the case where the probability of winning by the lottery is constant (for example, 50%) is exemplified in any of the performance extension lotteries performed during the extended waiting period, but the winning probability of the performance extension lottery may vary as the number of times of holding special symbols increases within the extension waiting period. For example, as the number of reserved special symbols increases in the extended standby period, the winning probability by the performance extension lottery may be increased stepwise, or the winning probability by the performance extension lottery may be appropriately increased or decreased.

In the twentieth embodiment, the extended standby period is defined by time (for example, 3 minutes), but the extended standby period may be defined by elements other than time, such as the number of times the variable display of special symbols is executed or the number of times fixed display (stop display) is displayed in the variable display of special symbols.

In the twentieth embodiment, when a predetermined condition related to period extension is satisfied, the special period related to the reserved full-tank effect is extended by a predetermined time (for example, 1 minute). However, the extension of the special period may be configured to be extended by elements other than time, such as the number of times the variable display of the special symbols is performed or the number of times the fixed display (stop display) is displayed in the variable display of the special symbols.

In the twentieth embodiment, when a predetermined condition related to period extension is satisfied, the special period related to the reserved full tank effect is extended by a predetermined time (for example, 1 minute). However, it may be configured such that the amount of extension of the special period varies as the number of times the special symbols are held increases within the extended standby period. For example, as the number of times of holding special symbols increases within the extended waiting period, the amount of extension of the special period (time and the number of times of execution of variable display of special symbols, etc.) may be greatly increased stepwise, or the amount of extension may be increased or decreased as appropriate.

In the above twentieth embodiment, the case where the lottery for period extension is performed for the starting prizes that occurred during a part of the special period was exemplified, but the period extension lottery may be performed for the starting prizes until the end of the special period.

In the twentieth embodiment, the length of the special period is set in advance when the holding full-tank effect lottery is won, and the length of the special period is extended when a predetermined condition relating to the period extension is satisfied to make the length of the special period different. However, the length of the special period may be varied by other methods. For example, the end condition may be changed according to the number of game balls entering during the execution of the variable display of the upper limit of the number of holding which is the object of the holding full-fill performance, and the probability of continuation of the special period in the subsequent variable display may be increased as the number of game balls entered increases. That is, as the continuation probability, the initial value may be 30%, and the continuation probability may be determined by adding a value obtained by multiplying the number of start winnings by 5%. Even in this case, the special period can be easily extended longer as the starting prize is generated after the start of the special period.

(20) The present invention may be applied to a different type of pachinko machine or the like from the above embodiments. For example, the game may be implemented as a pachinko machine in which, once a big win is made, the expected value of the big win is increased until the big win state occurs a plurality of times (for example, two or three times). In addition, the game may be implemented as a pachinko machine that enters a special game state on the condition that the ball wins in a predetermined area after the big winning symbols are displayed. It may also be applied to an enclosed pachinko machine in which balls circulate. Furthermore, in addition to the pachinko machine, it may be implemented as various game machines such as an arrange ball type pachinko and a mammoth ball. Further, the present invention is not limited to pachinko machines, and may be applied to slot machines, or may be applied to gaming machines such as Parrot, which are a combination of pachinko machines and slot machines.

<Inventions Extracted from the Above Embodiments>
Hereinafter, the features of the group of inventions extracted from each of the above-described embodiments will be described while presenting problems, effects, and the like as necessary. In the following description, for ease of understanding, configurations corresponding to the above-described embodiments are appropriately shown in parentheses or the like, but are not limited to the specific configurations shown in parentheses or the like. Also, the meanings and examples of terms described in each feature may be applied as the meanings and examples of terms described in other features described with the same wording.

<Feature 10>
a display unit (decorative pattern display device 479) capable of variably displaying a plurality of rows of patterns;
A lottery means (main control board 920) that performs a predetermined lottery when a predetermined start condition is satisfied;
Variation mode selection means (main control board 920) for selecting a variation mode (decoration pattern variation pattern) of the variation display of the plurality of rows of symbols when the starting condition is satisfied;
When the starting condition is satisfied, the display unit variably displays the symbols in the plurality of rows in the variation mode selected by the variation mode selection means, and then stops and displays the combination of symbols according to the lottery result. Variation executing means (sub control board 940);
game control means (main control board 920) for generating a special game state more advantageous than a normal game state after the plurality of rows of symbols are stopped and displayed in a combination of symbols indicating the first result by the variation execution means when the lottery result is a predetermined first result;
a holding storage means (main control board 920) capable of storing, from among the lottery results of the lottery means, a predetermined number of lottery results for which execution of the variation display of the symbols in the plurality of rows by the variation execution means is suspended in a predetermined storage section (RAM of the main control board 920);
a special effect display means (sub control board 940) for displaying a predetermined special effect on the display unit with a predetermined probability when the number of lottery results stored in the storage unit by the holding storage means reaches an upper limit,
The variation mode selection means selects a variation mode in which, when a lottery result indicating the first result is included in the lottery results stored in the storage unit by the reserve storage unit, the number of lottery results stored in the storage unit by the reserve storage unit is more likely to increase than when the lottery result indicating the first result is not included in the lottery results stored in the storage unit by the reserve storage unit.

Conventionally, there is a pachinko machine as a typical example of gaming machines. In a typical conventional pachinko machine, when a ball enters a starting hole provided in a game area, a lottery is conducted according to the ball entering, and when a big win is won in the lottery, a special game state is established and a large number of game balls can enter the winning hole. The pachinko machine is provided with a display device, and the display device starts the variable display of patterns based on the lottery, and displays the stop result according to the lottery result as the final stop display of the variable display.

Further, in some conventional pachinko machines, when a game ball enters a start hole while a pattern is being displayed on a display device, hit information (information corresponding to the lottery result, which corresponds to the lottery result) used for the big win lottery is retained and stored with a predetermined number (for example, 4) as the upper limit (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-22147).

However, there is still a possibility that there is still room for improvement with respect to the conventionally configured game machine capable of retaining and storing lottery results up to a predetermined upper limit. For example, when the hit information reaches the upper limit, even if the game ball enters the start hole, the hit information for the entered ball is not stored and is wasted.

On the other hand, with the gaming machine described in feature 10, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of favorably holding and storing the lottery results up to a predetermined upper limit. That is, when a predetermined starting condition is established, a variation mode of the variable display of the patterns of a plurality of rows is selected by the variation mode selection means, and after the patterns of the plurality of rows are variably displayed on the display part in the selected variation mode by the variation execution means, the combination of patterns corresponding to the result of the lottery by the lottery means is stop-displayed. At this time, if the lottery result is a predetermined first result, a special game state more advantageous than the normal game state is generated by the game control means after the patterns of the plurality of rows are stop-displayed in the combination of the patterns showing the first result.

Of the lottery results by the lottery means, the lottery results whose execution of the variable display of a plurality of lines of patterns by the variation execution means is suspended can be stored in a predetermined storage section with a predetermined number as the upper limit by the reserve storage means. When the number of lottery results stored in the storage unit reaches the upper limit, the special effect display means displays a predetermined special effect on the display unit with a predetermined probability. Therefore, the player can face the game aiming at establishment of the start condition with the purpose of increasing the number of lottery results stored in the storage unit. As a result, it is possible to increase the player's willingness to play the game machine that can store up to a predetermined number (upper limit) of lottery results in the storage unit by the holding storage means.

The variation mode selection means is configured to select a variation mode in which the number of lottery results stored in the storage part by the reservation storage means is more likely to increase when the lottery result indicating the first result is included in the lottery result stored in the storage part by the reservation storage means, compared to the case where the lottery result stored in the storage part by the reservation storage means does not include the lottery result indicating the first result.

Therefore, when a lottery result indicating the first result is included in the lottery results stored in the storage part by the reservation storage means, the number of lottery results stored in the storage part by the reservation storage means tends to increase, so that the number of lottery results stored in the storage part easily reaches the upper limit, and the possibility of displaying the special performance increases. As a result, the player is less likely to be dissatisfied with not being able to see the special presentation, so that the loss of interest in the game can be suppressed.

When the lottery results stored in the storage part include the lottery result indicating the first result, the special performance is more likely to be displayed than when the lottery result stored in the storage part does not include the lottery result indicating the first result. Therefore, since the progress of the game can be adjusted, the interest in the game can be improved.

Note that the "special effect" in the gaming machine described in feature 10 is not limited to the effect displayed on the display unit, and instead of the effect displayed on the display unit or in addition to the effect displayed on the display unit, it may be a sound effect, a light effect, an effect by the operation of an operable structure, or a combination of some or all of them. Therefore, the "special effect display means" in feature 10 may be a "special effect execution means" that executes various special effects including display.

In addition, in the game machine described in feature 10, the information stored (reserved) in the storage unit by the reservation storage means may be "information used for lottery by the lottery means" or "information corresponding to the lottery result" instead of the description of "lottery result".

<Feature 11>
a display unit (decorative pattern display device 479) capable of variably displaying a plurality of rows of patterns;
A lottery means (main control board 920) that performs a predetermined lottery when a predetermined start condition is satisfied;
Variation mode selection means (main control board 920) for selecting a variation mode (decoration pattern variation pattern) of the variation display of the plurality of rows of symbols when the starting condition is satisfied;
When the starting condition is satisfied, the display unit variably displays the symbols in the plurality of rows in the variation mode selected by the variation mode selection means, and then stops and displays the combination of symbols according to the lottery result. Variation executing means (sub control board 940);
game control means (main control board 920) for generating a special game state more advantageous than a normal game state after the plurality of rows of symbols are stopped and displayed in a combination of symbols indicating the first result by the variation execution means when the lottery result is a predetermined first result;
a holding storage means (sub-control board 940) capable of storing up to a prescribed number of lottery results of the lottery results of the lottery means for which execution of the variable display of the symbols in the plurality of rows by the variation execution means is suspended in a predetermined storage unit;
a special effect display means (sub control board 940) for displaying a predetermined special effect on the display unit with a predetermined probability when the number of lottery results stored in the storage unit by the holding storage means reaches an upper limit,
The variation modes selectable by the variation mode selection means include at least a ready-to-win display mode in which symbols are stop-displayed in a state in which a part of the combination of symbols showing the first result is formed, and then the rest of the symbols whose variable display is continued are stop-displayed in a pattern corresponding to the lottery result by the lottery means, and a non-reach display mode that does not include the ready-to-win display mode.
The variation mode selection means selects the non-ready-to-win display mode at a higher probability than when the lottery results stored in the storage unit by the reserve storage means do not include the lottery results indicating the first result when the lottery results stored in the storage unit by the reserve storage unit include the lottery result indicating the first result.

Conventionally, there is a pachinko machine as a typical example of gaming machines. In a typical conventional pachinko machine, when a ball enters a starting hole provided in a game area, a lottery is conducted according to the ball entering, and when a big win is won in the lottery, a special game state is established and a large number of game balls can enter the winning hole. The pachinko machine is provided with a display device, and the display device starts the variable display of patterns based on the lottery, and displays the stop result according to the lottery result as the final stop display of the variable display.

Further, in some conventional pachinko machines, when a game ball enters a start hole while a pattern is being displayed on a display device, hit information (information corresponding to the lottery result, which corresponds to the lottery result) used for the big win lottery is retained and stored with a predetermined number (for example, 4) as the upper limit (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-22147).

However, there is still a possibility that there is still room for improvement with respect to the conventionally configured game machine capable of retaining and storing lottery results up to a predetermined upper limit. For example, when the hit information reaches the upper limit, even if the game ball enters the starting hole, the hit information for the entered ball is not stored and is wasted.

On the other hand, with the gaming machine described in feature 11, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of favorably holding and storing the lottery result up to a predetermined upper limit. That is, when a predetermined starting condition is established, a variation mode of the variable display of the patterns of a plurality of rows is selected by the variation mode selection means, and after the patterns of the plurality of rows are variably displayed on the display part in the selected variation mode by the variation execution means, the combination of patterns corresponding to the result of the lottery by the lottery means is stop-displayed. At this time, if the lottery result is a predetermined first result, a special game state more advantageous than the normal game state is generated by the game control means after the patterns of the plurality of rows are stop-displayed in the combination of the patterns showing the first result.

Of the lottery results by the lottery means, the lottery results whose execution of the variable display of a plurality of lines of patterns by the variation execution means is suspended can be stored in a predetermined storage section with a predetermined number as the upper limit by the reserve storage means. When the number of lottery results stored in the storage unit reaches the upper limit, the special effect display means displays a predetermined special effect on the display unit with a predetermined probability. Therefore, the player can face the game aiming at establishment of the start condition with the purpose of increasing the number of lottery results stored in the storage unit. As a result, it is possible to increase the player's willingness to play the game machine that can store up to a predetermined number (upper limit) of lottery results in the storage unit by the holding storage means.

The variation mode selection means is configured to select the non-ready-to-win display mode at a higher probability than when the lottery results stored in the storage part by the reserve storage means do not include the lottery results showing the first result when the lottery results stored in the storage part by the reserve storage means include the lottery results showing the first result. Therefore, when the lottery result indicating the first result is included in the lottery results stored in the storage unit by the reserve storage means, the variable display in the non-reach display mode is likely to be displayed.

When the variable display of the ready-to-win display mode is displayed, the player may stop shooting game balls during the variable display in consideration of the occurrence of a special game state after that. On the other hand, in the game machine described in the characteristic 11, when the lottery result indicating the first result is included in the lottery results stored in the storage part by the reserve storage means, the variable display in the non-reach display mode is easily displayed, so that the player can be prevented from stopping the shooting of the game ball during the variable display.

As a result, the number of lottery results stored in the storage part by the reserve storage means is easily increased, so that the number of lottery results stored in the storage part easily reaches the upper limit and the possibility of displaying the special performance is increased. As a result, the player is less likely to be dissatisfied with not being able to see the special presentation, so that the loss of interest in the game can be suppressed.

When the lottery result stored in the storage part includes the lottery result indicating the first result, the variable display in the non-reach display mode is more likely to be displayed than when the lottery result stored in the storage part does not include the lottery result indicating the first result. Therefore, the display of the special effect can create a situation in which the player expects the occurrence of the special game state, so that the progress of the game can be enhanced and the enjoyment of the game can be improved.

Note that the "special effect" in the gaming machine described in feature 11 is not limited to the effect displayed on the display unit, and instead of the effect displayed on the display unit or in addition to the effect displayed on the display unit, it may be a sound effect, a light effect, an effect by the operation of a operable structure, or a combination of some or all of them. Therefore, the ``special effect display means'' in feature 11 may be a ``special effect execution means'' for executing various special effects including display.

In addition, in the game machine described in feature 11, the information stored (held) in the storage unit by the holding storage means may be "information used for lottery by lottery means" or "information corresponding to lottery result" instead of description of "lottery result".

<Feature 12>
The gaming machine according to feature 11,
a variable time determination means for determining a variable time related to the variable display of the symbols in the plurality of columns when the starting condition is satisfied;
The variation mode selection means selects the variation mode corresponding to the variation time determined by the variation time determination means,
When the variation time determined by the variation time determination means corresponds to the ready-to-win display mode, and the lottery result stored in the storage unit by the holding storage means includes the lottery result indicating the first result, the variation mode selection means selects the non-ready-to-win display mode with a variation time shorter than the variation time determined by the variation time determination means at a higher probability than when the lottery result stored in the storage unit by the retention storage means does not include the lottery result indicating the first result.
When the variable time determined by the variable time determining means corresponds to the ready-to-reach display mode, and the lottery results stored in the storage unit by the holding storage means include a lottery result indicating the first result, and when the non-reachable display mode with a variable time shorter than the variable time determined by the variable time determining means is selected by the variable mode selecting means, the variable time determining means performs the selected non-ready-to-win display mode one or more times to perform the variable time determined by the variable time determining means. A game machine characterized by performing a variable display of.

In the game machine according to feature 12, when the variation time determined by the variation time determination means corresponds to the ready-to-win display mode, and when the lottery results stored in the storage part by the holding storage means include the lottery result indicating the first result, the variation mode selection means selects the non-ready-to-win display mode with a variation time shorter than the variation time determined by the variation time determination means at a higher probability than when the lottery result stored in the storage part by the suspension storage means does not include the lottery result indicating the first result.

When the variable time determined by the variable time determining means corresponds to the ready-to-win display mode, and the lottery results stored in the storage unit by the holding storage means include the lottery result indicating the first result, when the variable mode selecting means selects the non-ready-to-win display mode with the variable time shorter than the variable time determined by the variable time determining means, the selected non-ready-to-win display mode is performed once or a plurality of times by the variation executing means, thereby performing the variable display of the variable time determined by the variable time determining means.

Therefore, in order to variably display the non-reach display mode of the variable time corresponding to the ready-to-reach display mode, the data related to the non-reach display mode of the variable time shorter than the ready-to-reach display mode can be diverted, and there is no need to prepare exclusively the data related to the non-reach display mode of the variable time corresponding to the ready-to-reach display mode. As a result, it is possible to suitably suppress the consumption of the memory capacity in the gaming machine.

<Feature 20>
A display unit (decorative pattern display device 479) capable of displaying patterns,
A lottery means (main control board 920) that performs a predetermined lottery when a predetermined start condition is satisfied;
Variation executing means (sub-control board 940) for stopping and displaying a symbol according to the lottery result as a stop symbol after performing a variation display of the symbol on the display unit when the starting condition is satisfied;
game control means (main control board 920) for generating a special game state more advantageous than a normal game state after the stop symbol indicating the first result is displayed in a stopped state by the variation execution means when the lottery result is a predetermined first result;
an operation unit (pressing operation device 261) that can be operated by the player;
For each of a plurality of operation modes of the operation unit that can be operated at one or a plurality of operation timings set within an effect executable period (execution period of variable display of decorative symbols) composed of at least a part of the period from when the starting condition in which the first result is obtained by the lottery means is established until the stop symbol indicating the first result is displayed by the variable execution means, special effect selection means (secondary effect selection means) for selecting each special effect to be executed when each operation mode is performed from among a plurality of types of effects, respectively. a control board 940);
a first special effect display means (secondary control board 940) for displaying, on the display part, a special effect selected by the special effect selecting means for the first operation mode when the operation part is operated in a first operation mode among a plurality of operation modes of the operation part that are operable during the one or more operation times set within the effect executable period;
Storage control means (sub control board 940) for storing, in a predetermined storage section (RAM of sub control board 940), effect information indicating each special effect selected by the special effect selecting means for each of a plurality of operation modes of the operation unit that are operable at the one or more operation times set within the effect executable period in a predetermined storage unit (RAM of the sub control board 940) in a manner that the special effects can be restored;
a second special effect display means (secondary control board 940) for displaying a special effect selected by the special effect selecting means for the second operation mode on the display part based on the effect information stored in the storage part by the storage control means when the operation part is operated in a second operation mode among the plurality of operation modes within a predetermined restorable period set after the end of the effect executable period.

In a typical conventional pachinko machine, when a ball enters a starting hole provided in a game area, a lottery is conducted according to the ball entering, and when a big win is won in the lottery, a special game state is established and a large number of game balls can enter the winning hole. The pachinko machine is provided with a display device, and the display device starts the variable display of patterns based on the lottery, and displays the stop result according to the lottery result as the final stop display of the variable display.

In recent years, there is also known a gaming machine that executes a predetermined effect such as changing the display content on the display device or outputting a corresponding sound from the speaker by the player operating the effect button at a predetermined timing (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-193329).

However, there is still a possibility that there is still room for improvement in the conventional gaming machine configured to execute a predetermined effect based on the player's operation of the effect button at a predetermined timing. For example, if a player operates a performance button at a prescribed timing, the player can experience the performance corresponding to the operation of the performance button, but if the player does not operate the performance button at that timing, the player cannot experience the performance corresponding to the operation of the performance button.

On the other hand, with the gaming machine described in feature 20, it is possible to provide a gaming machine configured so that a predetermined effect is suitably executed based on the player's operation of the operation unit at a predetermined timing. That is, when a predetermined starting condition is established, the variation execution means performs a variation display of the symbols on the display section, and then the combination of symbols corresponding to the result of the lottery by the lottery means is stop-displayed. At this time, if the lottery result is a predetermined first result, a special game state more advantageous than the normal game state is generated by the game control means after the symbols are stop-displayed in a combination of symbols showing the first result.

An operation timing is set within a performance executable period composed of at least a part of a period from establishment of a starting condition under which a first result is obtained by a lottery means to stop display of a stop pattern indicating the first result by a variation execution means. For each of a plurality of operation modes of an operation part that can be operated at the operation timing, each special performance to be executed when each operation mode is performed is selected from a plurality of types of performances by a special performance selection means. Effect information indicating each special effect selected by the special effect selecting means is stored in a predetermined storage section by the storage control means so that each special effect can be restored.

When an operation part is operated in a first operation mode among a plurality of operation modes made operable in one or more operation times set within a performance executable period, a special performance selected by a special performance selection means for the first operation mode is displayed on a display part by a first special performance display means.

On the other hand, when the operation part is operated in the second operation mode among the plurality of operation modes within a predetermined restorable period set after the termination of the performance executable period, the special performance selected by the special performance selection means for the second operation mode by the special performance selection means is displayed on the display part based on the performance information stored in the storage part by the storage control means.

Therefore, even when the operation part is not operated in the second operation mode at the prescribed operation timing within the performance executable period, the player can restore and watch the special performance (special performance corresponding to the second operation mode) that the player himself could not see because he did not operate the operation part in the second operation mode at the prescribed operation time in the performance executable period by operating the operation part in the second operation mode within the restorable period. As a result, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the player will have a negative feeling about the game, such as regretting not seeing part or all of the special performance on his/her own will during the performance executable period, so that the decline in interest in the game is suppressed.

Note that the "special effect" in the gaming machine described in feature 20 is not limited to the effect displayed on the display unit, and instead of the effect displayed on the display unit or in addition to the effect displayed on the display unit, it may be a sound effect, a light effect, an effect due to the operation of an operable structure, or a combination of some or all of them. Therefore, the ``first special effect display means'' and the ``second special effect display means'' in feature 20 may be the ``first special effect execution means'' and the ``second special effect execution means'' for executing various special effects including display, respectively.

<Feature 21>
The gaming machine according to feature 20,
The effect executable period includes an execution period of the variable display of symbols executed by the variable execution means,
A plurality of said operation timings are set within an execution period of said symbol variation display,
The second special effect display means displays a special effect selected by the special effect selecting means for the second operation mode by the special effect selecting means for the second operation mode based on the effect information stored in the storage part by the storage control means, when the operation part is operated in a second operation mode at the operation timing later than the operation time when the operation part is operated in the first operation mode among the plurality of operation modes within the restorable period.

In the gaming machine according to feature 21, in the configuration in which the operation unit can be operated in the first operation mode or the second operation mode at different operation times during the execution period of the variable display of symbols, the special effect corresponding to the first operation mode is displayed by operating the operation part in the first operation mode at the previous operation time during the execution period of the variable display of the symbols, but the special effect corresponding to the second operation mode is displayed without operating the operation part in the second operation mode in the subsequent operation time. Even if there is not, the player can restore and see the special performance corresponding to the second operation mode by operating the operation part in the second operation mode within the restorable period.

When a plurality of operation periods are provided within the execution period of the variable display of patterns, when the special performance which can be displayed for each operation period is a performance suggesting the probability of occurrence of the subsequent special game state, and when the later displayed special performance is a performance suggesting that the possibility of transition to the special game state is lower than the previously displayed special performance, the player may lose the expectation of the transition to the special game state and be disappointed in the game. In order to prevent such disappointment, the player can choose not to operate the operation part in the later operation period, but if the player does not operate the operation part in the later operation period and then transitions to a special game state, the player may later want to know what would have happened if the special performance that was not displayed at his/her own will was displayed.

On the other hand, with the game machine described in feature 21, the player can restore and watch the special performance corresponding to the second operation mode during the restorable period, so that the player can be given a sense of satisfaction and the interest in the game can be favorably improved.

<Feature 22>
The gaming machine according to feature 20 or feature 21,
The second special effect display means displays a special effect selected by the special effect selection means for the second operation mode by the special effect selection means for the second operation mode based on the effect information stored in the storage part by the memory control means, when the operation part is operated in the second operation mode at the operation timing when the operation part is operated in the first operation mode among the plurality of operation modes within the restorable period.

In the game machine described in feature 22, in a configuration in which the operation part can be operated in the first operation mode or the second operation mode at a common operation time within the performance executable period, even if the operation part cannot be operated in the second operation mode inevitably by operating the operation part in the first operation mode in the performance executable period, the player can restore and see the special performance corresponding to the second operation mode in the restorable period. As a result, the player can see the special game that the player could not see during the performance executable period, so that the player can be given a sense of satisfaction and the interest in the game can be preferably improved.

<Feature 30>
A display unit (decorative pattern display device 479) capable of displaying patterns,
A lottery means (main control board 920) that performs a predetermined lottery when a predetermined start condition is satisfied;
Variation executing means (sub-control board 940) for stopping and displaying a symbol according to the lottery result as a stop symbol after performing a variation display of the symbol on the display unit when the starting condition is satisfied;
game control means (main control board 920) for generating a special game state more advantageous than a normal game state after the stop symbol indicating the first result is displayed in a stopped state by the variation execution means when the lottery result is a predetermined first result;
a first operation unit (pressing operation device 261) operable by the player;
a second operation unit (selection operation device 263) provided at a position different from the first operation unit and operable by the player;
A special effect selection means (sub-control board 940) for selecting a special effect to be executed when the first operation unit is operated at an operation time set within an effect executable period (execution period of variable display of decorative symbols) composed of at least a part of a period from when the starting condition in which the first result is obtained by the lottery means is satisfied until the stop symbol indicating the first result is displayed by the variable execution means, from a plurality of types of effects;
Special effect control means (sub-control board) for controlling to display the special effect selected by the special effect selecting means for the operation of the first operating portion during the operation time at a predetermined position on the display portion when the first operation portion is operated at the operation time set within the effect displayable period, and to display the special effect selected by the special effect selecting means for the operation of the first operation portion at the operation time at a position different from the predetermined position when the second operation portion is operated at the operation time. 940) and a game machine.

In a typical conventional pachinko machine, when a ball enters a starting hole provided in a game area, a lottery is conducted according to the ball entering, and when a big win is won in the lottery, a special game state is established and a large number of game balls can enter the winning hole. The pachinko machine is provided with a display device, and the display device starts the variable display of patterns based on the lottery, and displays the stop result according to the lottery result as the final stop display of the variable display.

In recent years, there is also known a gaming machine that executes a predetermined effect such as changing the display content on the display device or outputting a corresponding sound from the speaker by the player operating the effect button at a predetermined timing (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-193329).

However, there is still a possibility that there is still room for improvement in the conventional gaming machine configured to execute a predetermined effect based on the player's operation of the effect button at a predetermined timing. For example, the effects displayed on the display device by the player's operation of the operation button are always displayed in the same area.

On the other hand, with the gaming machine described in feature 30, it is possible to provide a gaming machine configured so that a predetermined effect is suitably executed based on the player's operation of the operation unit at a predetermined timing. That is, when a predetermined starting condition is established, the variation execution means performs a variation display of the symbols on the display section, and then the combination of symbols corresponding to the result of the lottery by the lottery means is stop-displayed. At this time, if the lottery result is a predetermined first result, a special game state more advantageous than the normal game state is generated by the game control means after the symbols are stop-displayed in a combination of symbols showing the first result.

An operation timing is set within a performance executable period composed of at least a part of a period from establishment of a starting condition under which a first result is obtained by a lottery means to stop display of a stop pattern indicating the first result by a variation execution means. Each special effect to be executed when the operating part is operated at the operation time is selected from among a plurality of types of effects by the special effect selecting means.

When the first operation part is operated at the operation time set within the performance executable period, the special performance selected by the special performance selection means for the operation of the first operation part at the operation time is displayed at a predetermined position on the display part by the special performance control means. On the other hand, when the second operation part is operated at the operation timing, the special performance selected by the special performance selection means for the operation of the first operation part at the operation time is displayed at a position different from the predetermined position by the special performance control means.

Therefore, the display position of the special performance can be changed depending on whether the first operation part is operated or the second operation part is operated, so that the game in which the special performance is displayed according to the player's operation can be diversified and the interest can be improved.

<Feature 31>
The gaming machine according to feature 30,
The special performance control means transmits performance information indicating the special performance selected by the special performance selection means in response to the operation of the first operation unit at the operation time, and displays the special performance on the display unit of the other game machine, when the second operation unit is operated at the operation time set within the performance displayable period.

In the game machine described in feature 31, when the second operation part is operated at the operation time set within the effect displayable period, the special effect control means transmits the effect information indicating the special effect selected by the special effect selection means in response to the operation of the first operation part at the operation time to the other game machine, thereby displaying the special effect on the display part of the other game machine.

Therefore, since the special performance can be displayed on the display part of another game machine, the special performance can be viewed together with other players, and the player can obtain a different interest from playing the game alone.

<Feature 32>
The gaming machine according to feature 30,
The special effect control means displays the special effect selected by the special effect selecting means in response to the operation of the first operation unit at the operation time when the second operation unit is operated at the operation time set within the effect displayable period at a position different from the predetermined position on the display unit, and displays at the predetermined position the content displayed on the display unit when neither the first operation unit nor the second operation unit is operated at the operation time.

In the gaming machine described in feature 32, when the second operation unit is operated at the operation time set within the effect displayable period, the special effect control means displays the special effect selected by the special effect selection means in response to the operation of the first operation unit at the operation time at a position different from a predetermined position in the display unit (that is, the position where the special effect is displayed when the first operation unit is operated at the operation time). On the other hand, at a predetermined position on the display section, the content displayed on the display section when neither the first operation section nor the second operation section is operated at the operation timing is displayed.

Therefore, the player can simultaneously see the special performance displayed by operating the second operation part and the contents displayed on the display part when neither the first operation part nor the second operation part is operated, so that the interest in the game can be preferably improved.

<Feature 33>
A gaming machine according to feature 30 or feature 31,
A receiving means (sub control board 940 of the pachinko machine 100B) capable of receiving the effect information from another game machine is provided,
A gaming machine characterized in that, when the reception means receives the performance information transmitted from another gaming machine, the special performance control means displays the special performance indicated by the performance information on the display section.

In the game machine described in feature 33, when the performance information transmitted from the other game machine is received, the special performance indicated by the performance information is displayed on the display part by the special performance display means based on the received performance information. Therefore, since the special performance based on the performance information received from the other game machine can be displayed on the display part, the special performance can be seen together with the other players playing with the other game machine, and the enjoyment different from that of playing the game alone can be obtained.

<Feature 40>
A display unit (decorative pattern display device 479) capable of displaying patterns,
A lottery means (main control board 920) that performs a predetermined lottery when a predetermined start condition is satisfied;
Variation executing means (sub-control board 940) for stopping and displaying a symbol according to the lottery result as a stop symbol after performing a variation display of the symbol on the display unit when the starting condition is satisfied;
game control means (main control board 920) for generating a special game state more advantageous than a normal game state after the stop symbol indicating the first result is displayed in a stopped state by the variation execution means when the lottery result is a predetermined first result;
Reservation storage means (main control board 920) capable of storing in a predetermined storage section (RAM of main control board 920) up to a predetermined number of lottery results for which execution of variation display of symbols by the variation execution means is suspended from among the results of the lottery;
a special effect display means (sub control board 940) for displaying a predetermined special effect on the display unit with a predetermined probability when the number of lottery results stored in the storage unit by the holding storage means reaches an upper limit,
The special effect display means displays the special effect at a higher probability than when the lottery results stored in the storage part by the reserve storage means do not include the lottery result indicating the first result when the lottery results stored in the storage part by the reserve storage means include the lottery result indicating the first result.

Conventionally, there is a pachinko machine as a typical example of gaming machines. In a typical conventional pachinko machine, when a ball enters a starting hole provided in a game area, a lottery is conducted according to the ball entering, and when a big win is won in the lottery, a special game state is established and a large number of game balls can enter the winning hole. The pachinko machine is provided with a display device, and the display device starts the variable display of patterns based on the lottery, and displays the stop result according to the lottery result as the final stop display of the variable display.

Further, in some conventional pachinko machines, when a game ball enters a start hole while a pattern is being displayed on a display device, hit information (information corresponding to the lottery result, which corresponds to the lottery result) used for the big win lottery is retained and stored with a predetermined number (for example, 4) as the upper limit (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-22147).

However, there is still a possibility that there is still room for improvement with respect to the conventionally configured game machine capable of retaining and storing lottery results up to a predetermined upper limit. For example, when the hit information reaches the upper limit, even if the game ball enters the starting hole, the hit information for the entered ball is not stored and is wasted.

On the other hand, with the gaming machine described in feature 40, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of favorably holding and storing the lottery results up to a predetermined upper limit. That is, when a predetermined starting condition is established, the variation execution means performs a variation display of the symbols on the display section, and then the combination of symbols corresponding to the result of the lottery by the lottery means is stop-displayed. At this time, if the lottery result is a predetermined first result, a special game state more advantageous than the normal game state is generated by the game control means after the symbols are stop-displayed in a combination of symbols showing the first result.

Of the lottery results obtained by the lottery means, the lottery results for which execution of the variable display of symbols by the variation execution means is suspended can be stored in a predetermined storage unit up to a predetermined number as an upper limit. When the number of lottery results stored in the storage unit reaches the upper limit, the special effect display means displays a predetermined special effect on the display unit with a predetermined probability. Therefore, the player can face the game aiming at establishment of the start condition with the purpose of increasing the number of lottery results stored in the storage unit. As a result, it is possible to increase the player's willingness to play the game machine that can store up to a predetermined number (upper limit) of lottery results in the storage unit by the holding storage means.

The special performance display means is configured to display the special performance at a higher probability than when the lottery results stored in the storage part by the reserve storage means do not include the lottery result showing the first result when the lottery results stored in the storage part by the reserve storage means include the lottery result showing the first result.

Therefore, when a lottery result indicating the first result is included in the lottery result stored in the storage part, the special performance is displayed more easily than when the lottery result indicating the first result is not included in the lottery result stored in the storage part, so that a situation can be created in which the player expects the occurrence of the special game state by the display of the special performance. Therefore, since the progress of the game can be made more interesting, it is possible to improve the amusement of the gaming machine that can store up to a predetermined number (upper limit) of lottery results in the storage unit by the holding storage means.

Note that the "special effect" in the gaming machine described in feature 40 is not limited to the effect displayed on the display unit, and instead of the effect displayed on the display unit or in addition to the effect displayed on the display unit, it may be a sound effect, a light effect, an effect due to the operation of an operable structure, or a combination of some or all of them. Therefore, the "special effect display means" in feature 40 may be a "special effect execution means" for executing various special effects including display.

In addition, in the game machine described in feature 40, the information stored (reserved) in the storage unit by the reservation storage means may be "information used for lottery by lottery means" or "information corresponding to lottery result" instead of description of "lottery result".

<Feature 50>
A display unit (decorative pattern display device 479) capable of displaying patterns,
A lottery means (main control board 920) that performs a predetermined lottery when a predetermined start condition is satisfied;
Variation executing means (sub-control board 940) for stopping and displaying a symbol according to the lottery result as a stop symbol after performing a variation display of the symbol on the display unit when the starting condition is satisfied;
game control means (main control board 920) for generating a special game state more advantageous than a normal game state after the stop symbol indicating the first result is displayed in a stopped state by the variation execution means when the lottery result is a predetermined first result;
Reservation storage means (main control board 920) capable of storing in a predetermined storage section (RAM of main control board 920) up to a predetermined number of lottery results for which execution of variation display of symbols by the variation execution means is suspended from among the results of the lottery;
a special effect display means (sub control board 940) for displaying a predetermined special effect on the display unit with a predetermined probability when the number of lottery results stored in the storage unit by the holding storage means reaches an upper limit,
After the number of lottery results stored in the storage unit by the reserve storage means reaches an upper limit in a predetermined first time period, the special effect display means displays the special effect at a higher probability than when the special effect is displayed in the first time period when the number of lottery results stored in the storage unit by the reserve storage means reaches the upper limit again in a predetermined second time period within a predetermined time period including the first time period.

Conventionally, there is a pachinko machine as a typical example of gaming machines. In a typical conventional pachinko machine, when a ball enters a starting hole provided in a game area, a lottery is conducted according to the ball entering, and when a big win is won in the lottery, a special game state is established and a large number of game balls can enter the winning hole. The pachinko machine is provided with a display device, and the display device starts the variable display of patterns based on the lottery, and displays the stop result according to the lottery result as the final stop display of the variable display.

Further, in some conventional pachinko machines, when a game ball enters a start hole while a pattern is being displayed on a display device, hit information (information corresponding to the lottery result, which corresponds to the lottery result) used for the big win lottery is retained and stored with a predetermined number (for example, 4) as the upper limit (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-22147).

However, there is still a possibility that there is still room for improvement with respect to the conventionally configured game machine capable of retaining and storing lottery results up to a predetermined upper limit. For example, when the hit information reaches the upper limit, even if the game ball enters the starting hole, the hit information for the entered ball is not stored and is wasted.

On the other hand, with the gaming machine described in feature 50, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of favorably holding and storing the lottery result up to a predetermined upper limit. That is, when a predetermined starting condition is established, the variation execution means performs a variation display of the symbols on the display section, and then the combination of symbols corresponding to the result of the lottery by the lottery means is stop-displayed. At this time, if the lottery result is a predetermined first result, a special game state more advantageous than the normal game state is generated by the game control means after the symbols are stop-displayed in a combination of symbols showing the first result.

Of the lottery results by the lottery means, the lottery results for which execution of the variable display of the symbols by the variation execution means is suspended can be stored in a predetermined storage section with a predetermined number as the upper limit by the reserve storage means. When the number of lottery results stored in the storage unit reaches the upper limit, the special effect display means displays a predetermined special effect on the display unit with a predetermined probability. Therefore, the player can face the game aiming at establishment of the start condition with the purpose of increasing the number of lottery results stored in the storage unit. As a result, it is possible to increase the player's willingness to play the game machine that can store up to a predetermined number (upper limit) of lottery results in the storage unit by the holding storage means.

The special performance display means is configured to display the special performance at a higher probability than when the special performance is displayed in the first period when the number of lottery results stored in the storage part by the suspension storage means reaches the upper limit again in a predetermined second period within a predetermined period including the first period after the number of lottery results stored in the storage part by the suspension storage means reaches the upper limit.

Therefore, when the number of lottery results stored in the storage part reaches the upper limit again within a predetermined period, the special performance is more likely to be displayed than when the number of the lottery results reaches the upper limit before that, so that the player can face the game aiming at establishment of the start condition with the purpose of increasing the number of lottery results stored in the storage part. As a result, it is possible to increase the player's willingness to play the game machine that can store up to a predetermined number (upper limit) of lottery results in the storage unit by the holding storage means.

Note that the "special effect" in the gaming machine described in feature 50 is not limited to the effect displayed on the display unit, and instead of the effect displayed on the display unit or in addition to the effect displayed on the display unit, it may be a sound effect, a light effect, an effect by the operation of a operable structure, or a combination of some or all of them. Therefore, the "special effect display means" in feature 50 may be a "special effect execution means" for executing various special effects including display.

In addition, in the game machine described in feature 50, the information stored (held) in the storage unit by the holding storage means may be "information used for lottery by the lottery means" or "information corresponding to the lottery result" instead of the description of "lottery result".

<Feature 51>
In the gaming machine according to feature 50,
When the number of lottery results stored in the storage unit by the reserve storage means reaches the upper limit again in the second period after the number of lottery results stored in the storage unit by the reserve storage unit reaches the upper limit, the special effect display unit includes the lottery results showing the first result in the lottery results stored in the storage unit by the reserve storage unit when the lottery results stored in the storage unit by the reserve storage unit include the lottery results showing the first result. A gaming machine characterized in that the special performance is displayed with a higher probability than when the special performance is not displayed.

In the gaming machine according to feature 51, when the number of lottery results stored in the storage unit by the reserve storage means reaches the upper limit in the predetermined first time period and then the number of lottery results stored in the storage unit by the reserve storage means reaches the upper limit again in the second time period, the lottery results stored in the storage unit by the reserve storage means include the lottery results showing the first result when the lottery results stored in the storage unit by the reserve storage means include the lottery results showing the first result. It is configured to display a special effect with a higher probability than when it is not.

Therefore, when a lottery result indicating the first result is included in the lottery result stored in the storage part, the special performance is displayed more easily than when the lottery result indicating the first result is not included in the lottery result stored in the storage part, so that a situation can be created in which the player expects the occurrence of the special game state by the display of the special performance. Therefore, since the progress of the game can be adjusted, the interest in the game can be improved.

<Feature 60>
A display unit (decorative pattern display device 479) capable of displaying patterns,
A lottery means (main control board 920) that performs a predetermined lottery when a predetermined start condition is satisfied;
Variation executing means (sub-control board 940) for stopping and displaying a symbol according to the lottery result as a stop symbol after performing a variation display of the symbol on the display unit when the starting condition is satisfied;
game control means (main control board 920) for generating a special game state more advantageous than a normal game state after the stop symbol indicating the first result is displayed in a stopped state by the variation execution means when the lottery result is a predetermined first result;
A first special effect selection means (sub control board 940) for selecting one special effect from among a plurality of types of special effects suggesting the probability of occurrence of the special game state afterward as a first special effect that can be displayed at a predetermined first time set within a period from when the starting condition in which the first result is obtained by the lottery means is satisfied until the stop symbol indicating the first result is displayed by the variable execution means;
a first special effect means (sub-control board 940) for displaying the first special effect selected by the first special effect selecting means on the display section at the first time;
an operation unit (pressing operation device 261) that can be operated by the player;
After the first special effect is executed by the first special effect means at the first time, when the operating unit is operated before the arrival of a predetermined second time set after the first time within the period, if the occurrence probability of the special game state suggested by the first special effect is higher than a predetermined probability, the second special effect suggesting the occurrence probability of the special game state is not displayed on the display unit at the second time, or the special game state higher than the first special effect is displayed. and a second special effect control means (sub-control board 940) for controlling the second special effect indicating the probability of occurrence of to be displayed on the display unit.

In a typical conventional pachinko machine, when a ball enters a starting hole provided in a game area, a lottery is conducted according to the ball entering, and when a big win is won in the lottery, a special game state is established and a large number of game balls can enter the winning hole. The pachinko machine is provided with a display device, and the display device starts the variable display of patterns based on the lottery, and displays the stop result according to the lottery result as the final stop display of the variable display.

In recent years, various character patterns are displayed during the variable display of patterns, and each time the character pattern is displayed, the degree of expectation for a big hit according to the type of the displayed character pattern etc. is suggested to the player.

However, there is still a possibility that there is still room for improvement in the conventional gaming machine configured to display an effect that suggests to the player the degree of expectation for a big win during the variable display of symbols. For example, during the variable display of patterns, when the degree of expectation for a big win suggested by the display of a character pattern or the like displayed later is lower than the display of the character pattern or the like displayed earlier, the player's expectation for the big win is once increased by the previous display, but is lost by the later display, so there is a possibility that the player's interest in the game is reduced.

On the other hand, with the gaming machine described in feature 60, it is possible to provide a gaming machine configured so that a predetermined effect is suitably executed based on the player's operation of the operation unit at a predetermined timing. When a predetermined starting condition is established, the variation executing means performs the variation display of the symbols on the display section, and then the combination of symbols according to the lottery results of the lottery means is stopped and displayed. At this time, if the lottery result is a predetermined first result, a special game state more advantageous than the normal game state is generated by the game control means after the symbols are stop-displayed in a combination of symbols showing the first result.

A first special performance selection means selects a first special performance that can be displayed at a predetermined first timing set within a period from establishment of a starting condition under which a first result is obtained by a lottery means to stop display of a stop pattern indicating the first result by a variation execution means, from a plurality of kinds of special performances suggesting the occurrence probability of the special game state thereafter. The selected first special effect is displayed on the display section at the first period by the first special effect means.

After the first special performance is executed by the first special performance means at the first time, when the operation unit is operated before the arrival of a predetermined second time set after the first time within the period (the period from the establishment of the starting condition for obtaining the first result by the lottery means to the stop display of the stop symbol indicating the first result by the variable execution means), and the occurrence probability of the special game state suggested by the first special performance is higher than the predetermined probability, the second special performance control means is operated. By control, the second special performance suggesting the probability of occurrence of the special game state is not displayed on the display part in the second period, or the second special performance suggesting the probability of occurrence of the special game state higher than the first special performance is displayed on the display part.

Therefore, it is possible to suppress the display of the second special performance suggesting the occurrence probability of the special game state lower than the first special performance after the first special performance, so that in the structure in which the second special performance is performed after the first special performance, it is possible to prevent the player from losing expectation for the occurrence of the special game state and losing interest in the game.

Note that the "special effect" in the gaming machine described in feature 60 is not limited to the effect displayed on the display unit, and instead of the effect displayed on the display unit or in addition to the effect displayed on the display unit, it may be a sound effect, a light effect, an effect by the operation of an operable structure, or a combination of some or all of them. Therefore, the ``first special performance display means'' in the feature 60 may be the ``first special performance execution means'' for executing various special performances including display, and the ``second special performance control means'' may be those for controlling to execute various special performances including display.

<Feature 70>
A spinning body (middle reel 711M) in which a plurality of symbols including at least two symbols (main symbols 712) to which two or more numerical information corresponding to the number of times of variable display are attached are arranged to rotate is set as a predetermined pattern row, and a plurality of spinning bodies (left reel 711L, middle reel 711M, and right reel 711R) including the spinning body are arranged to form a plurality of symbol rows each formed by rotating the plurality of spinning bodies. a display unit (reel device 710) capable of variable display;
A lottery means (main control board 920) that performs a predetermined lottery when a predetermined start condition is satisfied;
variation execution means (sub-control board 940) for stop-displaying a stop symbol corresponding to the lottery result of the lottery means after variably displaying the plurality of symbol rows on the display unit when the starting condition is satisfied;
game control means (main control board 920) for generating a special game state, which is a game state more advantageous than a normal game state, after the plurality of symbol rows are stop-displayed with the stop symbols corresponding to the first result by the variation execution means when the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined first result;
holding means (main control board 920) for storing information corresponding to the result of the lottery by the lottery means in a predetermined storage unit (RAM of main control board 920) when the starting condition is met while the variable display is being performed by the variable execution means, and holding the information until the variable display corresponding to the information is executed by the variable execution means;
an effect executing means (sub-control board 940) for executing a predetermined effect based on effect object information corresponding to execution of a predetermined variable display to be executed after at least two variable displays are executed and which is information corresponding to the lottery result held by the holding means;
The predetermined effect is an effect in which, in the variable display executed by the variable execution means before the predetermined variable display, the symbols of the predetermined pattern row displayed on the predetermined rotating body out of the plurality of symbol sequences stop so that the player can visually recognize the symbols attached with numerical information corresponding to the number of times of the variable display executed until the predetermined variable display is performed.

Conventionally, there is a pachinko machine as a typical example of gaming machines. In a typical conventional pachinko machine, when a game ball wins a prize in a starting winning hole, a pattern display device starts variable display of performance symbols, a big win lottery is performed, and when it is determined to generate a big win based on the result of the big win lottery, the big win is generated after the performance symbols are stop-displayed with a big win pattern (for example, ``777'').

In addition, there is a conventional pachinko machine that pre-reads the result of the jackpot lottery and performs a pre-reading effect while the effect pattern is changing (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2009-291480). The read-ahead performance is a performance that adds the number of reserved balls when a game ball wins a prize in a starting prize-winning hole during a variation of performance patterns, performs a big win lottery based on a random number value obtained at the winning timing, and foretells a game state that occurs when the variable display of the performance symbols performed by digestion of the reserved balls is completed based on the lottery result. For example, when the result of the jackpot lottery for the first held ball is a jackpot, it is announced that the jackpot will occur when the next variation display of the current variation display ends.

However, there is still a possibility that there is still room for improvement with respect to the conventionally configured game machine that performs the prefetch effect. For example, diversification of the read-ahead effect is required in order to increase the player's interest in the read-ahead effect.

Further, conventionally, there is a pachinko machine as a typical example of a game machine. In a typical conventional pachinko machine, when a ball enters a starting hole provided in a game area, a lottery is conducted according to the ball entering, and when a big win is won in the lottery, a special game state is established and a large number of game balls can enter the winning hole. The pachinko machine is provided with a display device, and the display device starts the variable display of patterns based on the lottery, and displays the stop result according to the lottery result as the final stop display of the variable display.

Further, in some conventional pachinko machines, when a game ball enters a start hole while a pattern is being displayed on a display device, hit information (information corresponding to the lottery result, which corresponds to the lottery result) used for the big win lottery is retained and stored with a predetermined number (for example, 4) as the upper limit (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-22147).

However, there is still a possibility that there is still room for improvement with respect to the conventionally configured game machine capable of holding and storing the lottery result up to a predetermined upper limit. This problem is also common to gaming machines described in features 80 to B0 below.

On the other hand, with the gaming machine described in feature 70, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the prefetching effect is diversified. Further, with the gaming machine described in feature 70, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably utilizing a configuration capable of retaining and storing lottery results up to a predetermined upper limit. That is, the display part is configured so that a plurality of patterns including at least two patterns to which two or more numerical information corresponding to the number of times of variable display are attached are arranged so as to rotate as a predetermined pattern row, and each of the plurality of pattern rows configured by arranging a plurality of rotator bodies including the relevant rotator body can be variably displayed by rotating each of the plurality of rotator bodies.

When a predetermined starting condition is satisfied, the plurality of pattern rows are variably displayed on the display section by the variation execution means, and then stop symbols corresponding to the lottery result by the lottery means are stopped and displayed. At this time, if the lottery result is a predetermined first result, a special game state more advantageous than the normal game state is generated by the game control means after a plurality of symbol rows are stop-displayed with stop symbols corresponding to the first result.

When a starting condition is satisfied while the variable display is performed by the variable execution means, the holding means stores the information corresponding to the result of the lottery by the lottery means in a prescribed storage part, thereby holding the information up to a prescribed number until the variable display corresponding to the information is executed by the fluctuation execution means.

Based on the performance object information corresponding to the execution of the predetermined variable display executed after at least two or more variable displays are executed, the performance executing means performs the predetermined performance by the performance executing means based on the performance object information corresponding to the lottery result held by the holding means and corresponding to the execution of the predetermined variable display executed before the predetermined variable display is executed by the variable execution means. An effect is executed in which the player stops visibly.

Therefore, by visually recognizing the number information attached to the pattern of the pattern row displayed on the predetermined rotating body in the variable display being executed, the player can grasp the number of times of the variable display to be executed until the predetermined variable display is executed after that from the number information. Since the number of times is counted down each time the variable display is performed, the expectation for the result of the lottery for the gradually approaching predetermined variable display is amplified, thereby improving the interest in the game.

In addition, since the countdown of the number of times of variable display to be executed until the predetermined variable display is executed is performed according to the pattern of the pattern row displayed on the rotating body for variable display, it is possible to prevent the player from overlooking the countdown.

In addition, the symbol row to be variably displayed is not limited to the round body, and although there are game machines that perform image display by a liquid crystal display device or the like, when the variable display is performed by image display, the development cost and the part cost tend to increase, and there are many players who prefer the variable display by the three-dimensional round body. At this time, in a game machine that performs variable display using a three-dimensional body, displaying the number of countdowns separately from the symbols that are displayed in a variable manner increases the cost of the display device.

On the other hand, in the game machine described in the feature 70, the three-dimensional rotary body is configured to include a pattern with numerical information, and the pattern can constitute a part of the stop pattern corresponding to the lottery result by the lottery means. As a result, in a game machine that performs variable display using a three-dimensional rotating body, the display size of the pattern displayed on the rotating body is set large to make the pattern easily visible to the player, and while suppressing an increase in cost, it is possible to provide a game machine equipped with an effect in which the display of the countdown until a predetermined variable display is performed is performed by the pattern.

It should be noted that, in the gaming machine described in feature 70, ``the symbol attached with numerical information is stopped so that the player can visually recognize it'' is not limited to the symbol attached with the numerical information being completely stopped.

<Feature 71>
The gaming machine according to feature 70,
The predetermined effect is a performance in which, in the variable display executed by the variable execution means before the predetermined variable display, the symbols in the pattern sequence displayed on the predetermined rotating body are stopped so that the player can visually recognize the symbols with numerical information corresponding to the number of times of the variable display executed until the predetermined variable display is performed, while the rotating body different from the predetermined rotating body is fluctuating.

With the gaming machine described in feature 71, in the variable display being executed, the player can recognize the number of times of the variable display to be executed until the predetermined variable display is executed by visually recognizing the numerical information attached to the symbols of the symbol row displayed on the predetermined rotator, in a state where the other rotator (a rotational trunk different from the predetermined rotator) is fluctuating. Therefore, the player can easily grasp the predetermined rotator by distinguishing it from the other rotator out of a plurality of rotator, so that the player can be prevented from overlooking the countdown performed in the predetermined rotator.

<Feature 80>
A display unit (reel device 710, decorative pattern display device 479) capable of displaying patterns,
A lottery means (main control board 920) that performs a predetermined lottery when a predetermined start condition is satisfied;
a first variation execution means (sub-control board 940) for stop-displaying a stop symbol corresponding to the lottery result of the lottery means after variably displaying the symbol on the display unit when the starting condition is satisfied;
game control means (main control board 920) for generating a special game state, which is a game state more advantageous than the normal game state, after the stop symbol corresponding to the first result is stopped and displayed by the first variation execution means when the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined first result;
When the starting condition is met while the first variation execution means performs the variation display of the symbols, information corresponding to the result of the lottery by the lottery means is stored in a predetermined storage unit (RAM of the main control board 920) with a predetermined number as the upper limit, and holding means (main control board 920) for holding the information until the variation display of the symbols corresponding to the information is performed by the first variation execution means;
a special effect selection means (sub control board 940) for selecting execution of a predetermined special effect with a predetermined probability when the number of information corresponding to the lottery result reserved by the reserve means reaches an upper limit;
When the number of pieces of information corresponding to the lottery result held by the holding means reaches an upper limit and execution of the special effect is selected by the special effect selecting means, a second change executing means (sub-control board 940) for performing a predetermined second change display on the display unit or a second display unit (lottery result display device 730) different from the display unit (lottery result display device 730) and then stopping and displaying in a predetermined stop mode;
a special effect executing means (sub-control board 940) for executing the special effect when the second variable display is stopped and displayed in the predetermined stop mode by the second variable executing means.

Conventionally, there is a pachinko machine as a typical example of gaming machines. In a typical conventional pachinko machine, when a ball enters a starting hole provided in a game area, a lottery is conducted according to the ball entering, and when a big win is won in the lottery, a special game state is established and a large number of game balls can enter the winning hole. The pachinko machine is provided with a display device, and the display device starts the variable display of patterns based on the lottery, and displays the stop result according to the lottery result as the final stop display of the variable display.

Further, in some conventional pachinko machines, when a game ball enters a start hole while a pattern is being displayed on a display device, hit information (information corresponding to the lottery result, which corresponds to the lottery result) used for the big win lottery is retained and stored with a predetermined number (for example, 4) as the upper limit (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-22147).

However, there is still a possibility that there is still room for improvement with respect to the conventionally configured game machine capable of retaining and storing lottery results up to a predetermined upper limit. For example, when the hit information reaches the upper limit, even if the game ball enters the starting hole, the hit information for the entered ball is not stored and is wasted.

On the other hand, with the gaming machine described in feature 80, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of favorably holding and storing the lottery results up to a predetermined upper limit. That is, when a predetermined starting condition is established, the symbols are variably displayed on the display section by the first variation executing means, and then the stopped symbols corresponding to the lottery results of the lottery means are stopped and displayed. At this time, if the lottery result is a predetermined first result, a special game state more advantageous than the normal game state is generated by the game control means after the stop symbols corresponding to the first result are stopped and displayed.

When a starting condition is met while the first variation execution means performs the variation display, the retention means stores the information corresponding to the lottery result by the lottery means in a predetermined storage part, thereby retaining the information up to a predetermined number until the variation display corresponding to the information is performed by the variation execution means.

When the number of information corresponding to the lottery result held by the holding means reaches the upper limit, the special performance selecting means selects execution of the predetermined special performance with a predetermined probability. When execution of a special performance is selected, a second variable execution means performs a predetermined second variable display on a display part or a second display part different from the display part, then stop-displays in a predetermined stop mode, and then the special performance is executed by the special performance execution means.

Therefore, when the execution of the special performance is selected by the special performance selection means, the special performance is executed by the special performance execution means, so that the player can face the game aiming at establishment of the start condition with the purpose of increasing the number of information corresponding to the results of the withheld lottery. As a result, it is possible to improve the player's willingness to play the game machine capable of holding and storing the lottery results up to a predetermined upper limit.

In addition, since the player is notified whether or not the special performance is selected by the special performance selection means as a stop display after the second variable display, the expectation of the player for the execution of the special performance can be favorably amplified in the period from when the number of information corresponding to the retained lottery results reaches the upper limit until the second variable display ends (that is, during the execution period of the second variable display).

Note that the "special effect" in the gaming machine described in feature 80 may be a effect displayed on the display unit, a sound effect, a light effect, or an effect due to the action of the operable structure, or a combination of some or all of these effects.

In addition, when the number of pieces of information corresponding to the lottery result held by the holding means reaches the upper limit, the second variable execution means in the gaming machine described in feature 80 may perform a predetermined second variable display on the display section or a second display section different from the display section, and then perform stop display in a predetermined stop mode when execution of the special effect is selected by the special effect selection means, and stop display in a stop mode different from the predetermined stop mode when execution of the special effect is not selected.

<Feature 81>
The gaming machine according to feature 80,
After performing the second variable display that varies within a predetermined range on the display unit or the second display unit, the second variable execution means performs stop display at different positions within the predetermined range depending on whether execution of the special effect is selected by the special effect selection means and when execution of the special effect is not selected.

In the game machine described in feature 81, when the second variable display is performed by the second variable execution means, when the execution of the special performance is selected by the special performance selection means, and when the execution of the special performance is not selected, the position of the stop display after the second variable display is different, so that the player can intuitively judge whether or not the execution of the special performance is selected from the position of the stop display. In particular, since the stop display is limited to a predetermined range, the player can easily grasp the position of the stop display.

<Feature 90>
a display unit (reel device 710, decorative pattern display device 479) capable of variably displaying a plurality of symbol rows;
A lottery means (main control board 920) that performs a predetermined lottery when a predetermined start condition is satisfied;
Variation execution means (sub control board 940) for stopping and displaying a combination of symbols according to the result of the lottery after variably displaying the plurality of symbol rows on the display unit when the starting condition is satisfied;
game control means (main control board 920) for generating a special game state, which is a game state more advantageous than a normal game state, after the plurality of symbol rows are stop-displayed in combination of symbols corresponding to the first result by the variation execution means when the lottery result is a predetermined first result;
holding means (main control board 920) for storing information corresponding to the result of the lottery by the lottery means in a predetermined storage unit (RAM of main control board 920) when the starting condition is met while the variable display is being performed by the variable execution means, and holding the information until the variable display corresponding to the information is executed by the variable execution means;
a special effect selection means (sub control board 940) for selecting execution of a predetermined special effect with a predetermined probability when the number of information corresponding to the lottery result reserved by the reserve means reaches an upper limit;
special effect executing means (sub control board 940) for executing the special effect when execution of the special effect is selected by the special effect selecting means;
a selection result display means (sub-control board 940) for displaying in a manner that a player can recognize that the execution of the special effect has been selected at a time different from a time when a predetermined attention display is displayed as the content of the variable display when the special effect selection means selects the execution of the special effect and the variation execution means executes the variable display.

Conventionally, there is a pachinko machine as a typical example of gaming machines. In a typical conventional pachinko machine, when a ball enters a starting hole provided in a game area, a lottery is conducted according to the ball entering, and when a big win is won in the lottery, a special game state is established and a large number of game balls can enter the winning hole. The pachinko machine is provided with a display device, and the display device starts the variable display of patterns based on the lottery, and displays the stop result according to the lottery result as the final stop display of the variable display.

Further, in some conventional pachinko machines, when a game ball enters a start hole while a pattern is being displayed on a display device, hit information (information corresponding to the lottery result, which corresponds to the lottery result) used for the big win lottery is retained and stored with a predetermined number (for example, 4) as the upper limit (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-22147).

However, there is still a possibility that there is still room for improvement with respect to the conventionally configured game machine capable of retaining and storing lottery results up to a predetermined upper limit. For example, when the hit information reaches the upper limit, even if the game ball enters the starting hole, the hit information for the entered ball is not stored and is wasted.

On the other hand, with the gaming machine described in feature 90, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of favorably holding and storing the lottery result up to a predetermined upper limit. That is, when a predetermined starting condition is established, the plurality of symbol rows are variably displayed on the display section by the variation executing means, and then stop symbols corresponding to the result of the lottery by the lottery means are stop-displayed. At this time, if the lottery result is a predetermined first result, a special game state more advantageous than the normal game state is generated by the game control means after a plurality of symbol rows are stop-displayed with stop symbols corresponding to the first result.

When a starting condition is satisfied while the variable display is performed by the variable execution means, the holding means stores the information corresponding to the result of the lottery by the lottery means in a prescribed storage part, thereby holding the information up to a prescribed number until the variable display corresponding to the information is executed by the fluctuation execution means.

When the number of information corresponding to the lottery result held by the holding means reaches the upper limit, the special performance selecting means selects execution of the predetermined special performance with a predetermined probability. When execution of a special effect is selected, the special effect is executed by the special effect executing means. Therefore, when the execution of the special performance is selected by the special performance selection means, the special performance is executed by the special performance execution means, so that the player can face the game aiming at establishment of the start condition with the purpose of increasing the number of information corresponding to the results of the withheld lottery. As a result, it is possible to improve the player's willingness to play the game machine capable of holding and storing the lottery results up to a predetermined upper limit.

When the execution of the special performance is selected by the special performance selection means and the variable display is executed by the variation execution means, the selection of the execution of the special performance is displayed by the selection result display means so that the player can recognize it at a time different from the time when the predetermined attention display is displayed as the content of the variable display.

Therefore, since the display indicating that execution of the special effect has been selected does not coincide with the display time of the attention display, the player is unlikely to miss the display indicating that execution of the special effect has been selected. In addition, when a predetermined attention display is displayed as the content of the variable display, the player can concentrate on the attention display, so that the player's expectation for the variable display being executed by the attention display can be preferably improved.

Note that the "predetermined attention display" in the gaming machine described in the feature 90 may be a display until stopped in a state in which some of the plurality of symbol rows form part of the combination of symbols corresponding to the first result (so-called "ready-to-reach display"), or may be a suggestive effect (a effect suggesting the degree of ease of transition to the special game state or the degree of expectation) by displaying a character (for example, a school of fish) on the display unit or emitting light from the light emitting unit.

Further, the "special effect" in the gaming machine described in feature 90 may be the effect displayed on the display unit, the effect by sound, the effect by light, the effect by the operation of the operable structure, or the effect by combining some or all of these effects.

<Feature 91>
The gaming machine according to feature 90,
When the execution of the special performance is selected by the special performance selection means and the predetermined attention display is displayed in the variable display executed by the variation execution means, the selection result display means advances the ending time of the attention display, and after the completion of the attention display, displays the fact that the execution of the special performance is selected so that the player can recognize it.

In the game machine described in feature 91, when the execution of the special performance is selected by the special performance selection means and the predetermined attention display is displayed in the variable display executed by the variation execution means, the end time of the attention display is brought forward by the selection result display means, and the fact that the execution of the special performance is selected is displayed so that the player can recognize it after the completion of the attention display. As a result, it is possible to quickly show the display indicating that the execution of the special effect has been selected while showing the attention display to the player.

<Feature 92>
A gaming machine according to feature 90 or feature 91,
The predetermined attention display is a display from stopping display in a state in which some of the plurality of pattern rows constitute a part of the combination of patterns corresponding to the first result to stopping display of the remaining pattern rows in accordance with the result of the lottery by the lottery means,
The gaming machine is characterized in that, when execution of the special effect is selected by the special effect selecting means and the predetermined attention display is displayed in the variable display executed by the variation execution means, the selection result display means displays in a manner that the player can recognize that execution of the special effect has been selected after the predetermined attention display is finished.

In the game machine described in feature 92, when execution of a special performance is selected by the special performance selection means and a predetermined attention display is displayed in the variable display executed by the variation execution means, the selection result display means displays that the execution of the special performance is selected so that the player can recognize it after the completion of the attention display. Here, the attention display is a display until the rest of the symbol rows are stop-displayed with symbols corresponding to the lottery result by the lottery means after stopping display in a state in which some of the plurality of symbol rows form part of the combination of symbols corresponding to the first result, and is a display for making the player expect transition to a special game state, so that the player can devote himself to the attention display, so that the player's expectation for the variable display being executed by the attention display can be favorably improved.

<Feature A0>
a display unit (reel device 710, decorative pattern display device 479) capable of variably displaying a plurality of symbol rows;
A lottery means (main control board 920) that performs a predetermined lottery when a predetermined start condition is satisfied;
variation execution means (sub-control board 940) for stop-displaying a stop symbol corresponding to the lottery result of the lottery means after variably displaying the plurality of symbol rows on the display unit when the starting condition is satisfied;
game control means (main control board 920) for generating a special game state, which is a game state more advantageous than a normal game state, after the plurality of symbol rows are stop-displayed with the stop symbols corresponding to the first result by the variation execution means when the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined first result;
holding means (main control board 920) for storing information corresponding to the result of the lottery by the lottery means in a predetermined storage unit (RAM of main control board 920) when the starting condition is met while the variable display is being performed by the variable execution means, and holding the information until the variable display corresponding to the information is executed by the variable execution means;
an effect executing means (sub-control board 940) for executing a predetermined effect based on effect object information corresponding to execution of a predetermined variable display to be executed after at least one variable display is executed and which is information corresponding to the lottery result held by the holding means;
The predetermined production is
executing a first variable display of stop symbols in a predetermined display area (middle line L2) where a transition to the special game state occurs when the stop symbols corresponding to the first result are stop-displayed, in which the plurality of symbol rows are stop symbols corresponding to a lottery result different from the first result and are a combination of predetermined symbols that do not transition to the special game state;
After executing the first variable display, one or more variable displays executed by the variable execution means before the predetermined variable display, or in the predetermined variable display, some symbols (second sub-symbol 713B) which are included in the predetermined combination of symbols and which cannot stop display the stop symbol corresponding to the first result in the predetermined display area when the partial symbols are included are displayed in the predetermined display area, and the plurality of symbols are displayed. A second variable display is started in which other pattern rows (left pattern row, right pattern row) different from the pattern row (middle pattern row) containing the part of the patterns among the pattern rows fluctuate,
Synchronizing with a predetermined attention display performed in the predetermined variable display, or at a timing before the end time of the predetermined variable display, a pattern row (middle pattern row) among the plurality of symbol rows that has been stopped from before the previous time starts to change.

Conventionally, there is a pachinko machine as a typical example of gaming machines. In a typical conventional pachinko machine, when a game ball wins a prize in a starting winning hole, a pattern display device starts variable display of performance symbols, a big win lottery is performed, and when it is determined to generate a big win based on the result of the big win lottery, the big win is generated after the performance symbols are stop-displayed with a big win pattern (for example, ``777'').

In addition, there is a conventional pachinko machine that pre-reads the result of the jackpot lottery and performs a pre-reading effect while the effect pattern is changing (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2009-291480). The read-ahead performance is a performance that adds the number of reserved balls when a game ball wins a prize in a starting prize-winning hole during a variation of performance patterns, performs a big win lottery based on a random number value obtained at the winning timing, and foretells a game state that occurs when the variable display of the performance symbols performed by digestion of the reserved balls is completed based on the lottery result. For example, when the result of the jackpot lottery for the first held ball is a jackpot, it is announced that the jackpot will occur when the next variation display of the current variation display ends.

However, there is still a possibility that there is still room for improvement with respect to the conventionally configured game machine that performs the prefetch effect. For example, diversification of the read-ahead effect is required in order to increase the player's interest in the read-ahead effect.

On the other hand, with the gaming machine described in feature A0, it is possible to provide a gaming machine with diversified prefetch effects. That is, when a predetermined starting condition is established, the plurality of symbol rows are variably displayed on the display section by the variation executing means, and then stop symbols corresponding to the result of the lottery by the lottery means are stop-displayed. At this time, if the lottery result is a predetermined first result, a special game state more advantageous than the normal game state is generated by the game control means after a plurality of symbol rows are stop-displayed with stop symbols corresponding to the first result.

When a starting condition is satisfied while the variable display is performed by the variable execution means, the holding means stores the information corresponding to the result of the lottery by the lottery means in a prescribed storage part, thereby holding the information up to a prescribed number until the variable display corresponding to the information is executed by the fluctuation execution means.

A specified performance is executed by a performance executing means based on performance object information corresponding to the execution of a predetermined variable display executed after at least one variable display is executed and which is information corresponding to the lottery result held by the holding means.

Specifically, in the predetermined performance, first, a first variable display is performed in which a plurality of symbol rows are stop-displayed in a predetermined display area where a transition to a special game state occurs when a stop symbol corresponding to the first result is stopped and displayed with stop symbols that are a combination of predetermined symbols that are stop symbols corresponding to a lottery result different from the first result and do not transition to the special game state.

After the first variable display is executed, one or more variable displays executed before the predetermined variable display by the variable execution means, or in the predetermined variable display, part of symbols included in a combination of predetermined symbols which are stop symbols stopped and displayed in the first variable display, and when the partial symbols are included, the stop symbol corresponding to the first result cannot be stop-displayed in the predetermined display area, while maintaining a state in which the partial symbols are displayed in the predetermined display area, among the plurality of symbol rows. A second variable display is started in which a symbol row different from the symbol row including the part of symbols fluctuates.

Then, in synchronism with a predetermined attention display performed in a predetermined variable display, or at a timing a predetermined time before the end time of the predetermined variable display, a pattern string that has been stopped from before the last time among the plurality of pattern strings (that is, a pattern string that includes a part of the stopped symbols displayed in a predetermined display area among the stopped symbols in the first variable display) starts to change.

Therefore, in one or more variable displays executed before the predetermined variable display, or in the predetermined variable display, as the second variable display, while maintaining the state in which some of the symbols stopped and displayed in the first variable display are displayed in a predetermined display area, a pattern row different from the symbol row including the part of the symbols is changed. It is possible to amplify the expectation of the game, thereby improving the interest in the game.

In particular, since the symbol row that has been stopped from the variable display before the predetermined variable display starts to change in synchronization with the predetermined attention display performed in the predetermined variable display or at the timing a predetermined time before the end time of the predetermined variable display, it is possible to give a strong impression that the predetermined variable display is approaching the end time, thereby further increasing the expectation for the lottery result for the predetermined variable display.

In addition, the symbols displayed in the predetermined display area in the symbol row stopped from the variable display before the predetermined variable display (some symbols among the stopped symbols stopped and displayed in the first variable display) are symbols in which the stopped symbols corresponding to the first result cannot be stop-displayed in the predetermined display area if the symbols are included. It is possible to prevent the pattern from being stopped and displayed.

Note that the "predetermined attention display" in the gaming machine described in feature A0 may be a display until stopped in a state in which some of the plurality of symbol rows form part of the combination of symbols corresponding to the first result (so-called "ready-to-reach display"), or may be a suggestive effect (a effect suggesting the degree of ease of transition to the special game state or the degree of expectation) by displaying a character (for example, a school of fish) on the display unit or emitting light from the light emitting unit.

<Feature A1>
The gaming machine according to feature A0,
The game machine is characterized in that, in the first variation display, in a state in which the other symbol row is fluctuating, after the symbols that cannot constitute the first result in the symbol row different from the other symbol row stop in the predetermined display area, the other symbol row is stopped so as to form a stop symbol that is a combination of the predetermined symbols.

With the gaming machine described in feature A1, the symbol row that is stopped prior to the other symbol rows in the first variation display is stopped until it is changed again in synchronization with the predetermined attention display performed in the subsequent predetermined variation display or at a timing that is a predetermined time before the end time of the predetermined variation display, so that the player's attention is likely to be attracted to the symbol sequence to be most varied, and the expectation for the lottery result of the predetermined variation display by the most variation can be preferably increased.

<Feature B0>
a display unit (reel device 710, decorative pattern display device 479) capable of variably displaying a plurality of symbol rows;
A lottery means (main control board 920) that performs a predetermined lottery when a predetermined start condition is satisfied;
variation execution means (sub-control board 940) for stop-displaying a stop symbol corresponding to the lottery result of the lottery means after variably displaying the plurality of symbol rows on the display unit when the starting condition is satisfied;
game control means (main control board 920) for generating a special game state, which is a game state more advantageous than a normal game state, after the stop symbol corresponding to the first result is stopped and displayed by the variation execution means when the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined first result;
holding means (main control board 920) for storing information corresponding to the result of the lottery by the lottery means in a predetermined storage unit (RAM of main control board 920) when the starting condition is met while the variable display is being performed by the variable execution means, and holding the information until the variable display corresponding to the information is executed by the variable execution means;
an effect executing means (sub-control board 940) for executing a predetermined effect based on effect object information corresponding to execution of a predetermined variable display to be executed after at least one variable display is executed and which is information corresponding to the lottery result held by the holding means;
In the predetermined effect, as a variable display executed by the variable execution means before the predetermined variable display, some symbols (second sub-symbol 713B) that do not constitute the stop symbols corresponding to the first result are displayed continuously in a predetermined display area (middle line L2) that transitions to the special game state when the stop symbols corresponding to the first result are stopped and displayed for the entire period of the variable display, and a symbol row including the one of the plurality of symbol rows. The gaming machine is characterized in that after a pattern row (left pattern row, right pattern row) different from the (middle pattern row) is variably displayed, the other pattern row is stop-displayed.

Conventionally, there is a pachinko machine as a typical example of gaming machines. In a typical conventional pachinko machine, when a game ball wins a prize in a starting winning hole, a pattern display device starts variable display of performance symbols, a big win lottery is performed, and when it is determined to generate a big win based on the result of the big win lottery, the big win is generated after the performance symbols are stop-displayed with a big win pattern (for example, ``777'').

In addition, there is a conventional pachinko machine that pre-reads the result of the jackpot lottery and performs a pre-reading effect while the effect pattern is changing (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2009-291480). The read-ahead performance is a performance that adds the number of reserved balls when a game ball wins a prize in a starting prize-winning hole during a variation of performance patterns, performs a big win lottery based on a random number value obtained at the winning timing, and foretells a game state that occurs when the variable display of the performance symbols performed by digestion of the reserved balls is completed based on the lottery result. For example, when the result of the jackpot lottery for the first held ball is a jackpot, it is announced that the jackpot will occur when the next variation display of the current variation display ends.

However, there is still a possibility that there is still room for improvement with respect to the conventionally configured game machine that performs the prefetch effect. For example, diversification of the read-ahead effect is required in order to increase the player's interest in the read-ahead effect.

On the other hand, with the gaming machine described in feature B0, it is possible to provide a gaming machine with diversified prefetch effects. That is, when a predetermined starting condition is established, the plurality of symbol rows are variably displayed on the display section by the variation executing means, and then stop symbols corresponding to the result of the lottery by the lottery means are stop-displayed. At this time, if the lottery result is a predetermined first result, a special game state more advantageous than the normal game state is generated by the game control means after a plurality of symbol rows are stop-displayed with stop symbols corresponding to the first result.

When a starting condition is satisfied while the variable display is performed by the variable execution means, the holding means stores the information corresponding to the result of the lottery by the lottery means in a prescribed storage part, thereby holding the information up to a prescribed number until the variable display corresponding to the information is executed by the fluctuation execution means.

A specified performance is executed by a performance executing means based on performance object information corresponding to the execution of a predetermined variable display executed after at least one variable display is executed and which is information corresponding to the lottery result held by the holding means. By executing the prescribed performance, expectations for the subsequent display (stop display) of the lottery results for the prescribed variable display can be amplified, thereby enhancing the amusement of the game.

In the predetermined effect, in the variable display executed by the variable execution means before the predetermined variable display, some of the symbols that do not constitute the stop symbols corresponding to the first result are continuously displayed in a predetermined display area that transitions to a special game state when the stop symbols corresponding to the first result are stopped and displayed for the entire period of the variable display, and after the symbol sequence other than the one of the plurality of symbol sequences is variably displayed, the other symbol sequence is displayed. appears stopped.

Therefore, in the variable display executed before the predetermined variable display, by showing that some symbols which do not constitute the stop symbols corresponding to the first result are displayed from the start to the end of the variable display, the players can recognize that the stop symbols corresponding to the first result are not displayed in the variable display, thereby increasing the expectation for the predetermined variable display to come thereafter.

In the gaming machine described in feature B0, the ``symbols not constituting the stop symbol corresponding to the first result'' displayed in the predetermined display area during the entire period of the variable display may be a symbol included in one of the plurality of symbol rows, or may be a plurality of symbols included in a part or all of the plurality of symbol rows excluding the one symbol row.

<Feature C0>
A gaming machine having a game area in which game balls shot from a shooting device (shooting device 330) flow down,
a ball guiding nail portion (nail 411A, nail 411B) composed of a plurality of game nails erected side by side so as to be able to guide a game ball in a predetermined direction in the game area;
a plate-shaped light-transmitting nail support member (area J of the base 401) which supports the base end sides of the plurality of game nails constituting the ball-guiding nail portion and has a light-transmitting property allowing the front side to the rear side to be seen through;
a first passageway (left first passageway 1613A, right first passageway 1613B) provided on the rear side of the light transmissive nail support member;
A passage forming part (guide passage 1612) for guiding game balls entering from a predetermined entrance (entrance 1611) among game balls flowing down the game area to the first passage;
A detection unit (left start winning switch 1441A, right starting winning switch 1441B) capable of detecting game balls flowing down along the first path,
Privilege giving means (main control board 920) for giving a predetermined privilege when a game ball is detected by the detection unit;
a second passage (left second passage 1614A, right second passage 1614B) that is not detected by the detection unit when a game ball enters from the first passage and is provided in a second passage branched in a direction different from the first passage on the upstream side of the detection unit;
an information display unit (information display unit 753) that displays predetermined privilege non-granting information (non-start winning area information) that allows the player to recognize that the second passage is an area in which the predetermined privilege is not granted when the game ball enters;
The game machine is characterized in that the information display part is provided at a position behind the light-transmissive nail supporting member, does not overlap the plurality of game nails when viewed from the front of the game machine, and overlaps the back side of the plurality of game nails when viewed from a predetermined oblique direction when the player's viewpoint is located on the front side of the game machine.

Pachinko machines are typical examples of game machines. In a conventional typical pachinko machine, when a game ball entering a winning opening (for example, a starting opening) provided in a game area is detected by a detection sensor (a winning switch), a configuration is known in which a privilege in the game is awarded (for example, when a start winning occurs and a jackpot lottery is performed, and a big win is won in the jackpot lottery, a special game state occurs and a large number of game balls can enter the winning opening) (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2016-221). 47).

Further, in a conventional pachinko machine, by providing a branch passage that branches from the guide passage and is not detected by a detection sensor for detecting winning to the start opening from a guide passage for guiding a game ball entering from a predetermined entrance to the start opening, even if a game ball enters the entrance, some of the game balls do not start winning.

However, as typified by the above game machine, when another passage is provided so that some of the game balls that enter the guide passage from a predetermined entrance do not win a prize for giving a predetermined privilege, there is a possibility that there is room for improvement in the configuration that allows the player to preferably recognize the existence of the other passage.

For example, when predetermined information is displayed so that a player can recognize the existence of an area such as the above-mentioned branch passage where a game ball entering from a predetermined entrance can enter and where starting winning is not possible, the information can notify the player of the existence of the area where starting winning is not possible, but there is also a possibility that the player may feel that the game is boring when the game ball enters the area where starting winning is not possible.

On the other hand, with the game machine described in feature C0, it is possible to provide a game machine which is provided with another passage that prevents some of the game balls entering from a predetermined entrance leading to a detection part that gives a predetermined privilege when a game ball is detected does not win a prize that gives a predetermined privilege, and that can suitably display the existence of the other passage. That is, among the game balls flowing down the game area, the game balls entering from the predetermined entrance are guided to the first passage by the passage forming portion. When a game ball flowing down along the first passage is detected by the detecting section, a predetermined privilege is given by the privilege giving means.

On the other hand, a second passage branching in a different direction from the first passage is provided upstream from the detection section, and part of the game balls flowing down the first passage can pass through the second passage. When the game ball enters the second passage, the game ball is not detected by the detection unit. Therefore, when a game ball entering from a predetermined entrance flows down the first passage and is detected by a detecting part, the player can obtain a predetermined privilege, but when the game ball enters the second passage from the first passage, the player cannot obtain the predetermined privilege.

Since the first passage is provided on the back side of the plate-like light-transmitting nail supporting member having light transmission properties that allow the rear side to be seen through, the player can visually recognize the game balls flowing down the first passage and also can visually recognize the entry of the game balls from the first passage to the second passage.

An information display portion is provided on the rear side of the light transmissive nail support member. The information display portion displays predetermined privilege non-granting information that enables the player to recognize that the second passage is an area where a predetermined privilege is not granted when a game ball enters. Therefore, the player who visually recognizes the predetermined privilege non-granting information understands that the second path is an area where the predetermined privilege is not granted when the game ball enters.

Since the information display part is provided at a position overlapping the back side of the plurality of game nails in a predetermined oblique view when the player's viewpoint is positioned in the front side of the game machine, the player whose viewpoint is positioned in the front side of the game machine during the game sees the information display part overlapping the back side of the plurality of game nails when looking at the predetermined oblique direction. Therefore, since the player during the game hardly recognizes the information that the prescribed privilege is not given by the plurality of game nails, even if the game ball entering from the prescribed entrance enters the second passage through the first passage, the player's disappointment due to the fact that the prescribed privilege is not given can be suitably suppressed.

On the other hand, the light-transmissive nail supporting member is configured as a member for supporting the base end sides of the plurality of game nails forming the ball guide nail portion, but the information display portion is provided at a position not overlapping the plurality of game nails when viewed from the front of the game machine. Therefore, since the visibility of the information display portion from the front of the gaming machine is sufficiently ensured, it is possible to suitably notify the information that the predetermined privilege is not provided.

Incidentally, the "predetermined privilege" described in the feature C0 is exemplified by occurrence of starting prize, lottery conditions, lottery probability, special game state occurring when lottery is won, number of game balls to be paid out, and the like.

Further, the "position overlapping the plurality of game nails on the back side when viewed from a predetermined oblique direction" described in feature C0 may be a position overlapping the plurality of game nails on the tip side in the diagonal direction when viewed from a predetermined oblique direction.

<Feature C1>
The gaming machine according to feature C0,
A game machine characterized by comprising a first rear side portion (passage forming member 1631) having a portion (passage wall portion 1631A) which is arranged on the rear side of the light transmissive nail supporting member and overlaps the front side of the information display portion when viewed from the front of the game machine.

In the game machine described in the feature C1, the first rear side portion having a portion overlapping the front side of the information display portion in the front view of the game machine is provided on the rear side of the light-transmitting nail support member, so that the visibility of the predetermined privilege non-granting information overlapping the rear side of the first rear side portion when viewed from the front can be reduced. As a result, it becomes more difficult for the player during the game to recognize the information about the non-granting of the prescribed privilege, so that the disappointment of the player can be more suitably suppressed when the game ball entering from the prescribed entrance enters the second passage through the first passage.

<Feature C2>
A gaming machine according to feature C0 or feature C1,
A gaming machine characterized by comprising a second rear side portion (passage forming member 1631) disposed behind the light-transmitting nail support member and having a portion (passage wall portion 1631B) overlapping the front side of the information display portion in the predetermined oblique view when the player's viewpoint is located on the front side of the gaming machine.

In the gaming machine described in feature C2, since the second rear side portion having a portion overlapping the front side of the information display portion in a predetermined oblique view when the viewpoint of the player is positioned on the front side of the gaming machine is provided on the rear side of the light-transmitting nail support member, the visibility of the predetermined privilege non-granting information overlapping the rear side of the second rear side portion when viewed from the front can be reduced. As a result, it becomes more difficult for the player during the game to recognize the information about the non-granting of the prescribed privilege, so that the disappointment of the player can be more suitably suppressed when the game ball entering from the prescribed entrance enters the second passage through the first passage.

<Feature C3>
A gaming machine according to any one of features C0 to C2,
The predetermined privilege non-granting information is composed of a predetermined character string indicating that the predetermined privilege is not granted in the area,
The gaming machine, wherein the predetermined character string is arranged along the arrangement of the plurality of game nails overlapping the front side of the information display section in the predetermined oblique direction when the player's viewpoint is positioned on the front side of the gaming machine.

In the gaming machine described in the feature C3, the prescribed privilege non-granting information is composed of a prescribed character string, and the prescribed character string is arranged along the arrangement of a plurality of game nails superimposed on the front side of the information display part in a prescribed oblique view when the player's viewpoint is located on the front side of the gaming machine. Therefore, since many areas of the character string forming the predetermined privilege non-applying information are arranged so as to overlap the plurality of game nails when viewed from the predetermined oblique direction, the player during the game is more difficult to recognize the predetermined privilege non-applying information. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the disappointment of the player when the game ball entering from the predetermined entrance enters the second passage through the first passage.

<Feature D0>
a game board (substrate 401) having a game area formed on the front side, in which game balls can flow down, and an opening formed in the game area;
a decorative surface (substrate 701) provided behind the game board and positioned within the opening when viewed from the front of the game machine;
A variable display unit configured to be able to variably display each of a plurality of symbol rows formed by arranging a plurality of symbols arranged in a row, by rotating each rotating body, wherein a variable display unit (reel device 710) is provided in the opening of the game board, and a part of the plurality of rotating bodies protrudes forward from the opening so that the plurality of symbols can be visually recognized;
A display cover provided at a position superimposed on the front side of the plurality of drums so that the plurality of patterns can be visually recognized, and configured in a plate-like shape projecting forward in a substantially arcuate cross section when viewed from the side of a predetermined direction intersecting the front-rear direction in front view of the gaming machine. 715B) with a display cover portion (resin cover 715);
a game board image display unit (design 741) that is at least part of the periphery of the opening in the game board and is provided on at least one side of the predetermined image that can be displayed by the light guide unit, the game board image display unit (design 741) forming a part of a decorative image (school of fish facing leftward) that is continuous in a predetermined direction side together with the predetermined image;
The gaming machine is characterized in that the decorative surface includes a decorative surface image display section (pattern 742) provided between the light guide section and the game board image display section in the display cover section when viewed from the front of the gaming machine, and forming a part of the continuous decorative image together with the predetermined image and the game board image display section.

Pachinko machines are typical examples of game machines. In a typical conventional pachinko machine, when a ball enters a starting hole provided in a game area, a lottery is performed according to the ball entering, and when a big hit is won in the lottery, a special game state is established and a large number of game balls can enter the winning hole.

In such a conventional pachinko machine, the liquid crystal display device displays symbols corresponding to the lottery result and various effect images to enhance the interest of the game. Also, there is known a configuration in which a lottery result is displayed by printing a design on a three-dimensional rotating body in which a plurality of designs are arranged. However, in a game machine having a three-dimensional body in which a plurality of symbols are arranged to rotate, it is sometimes difficult to provide a wide display area for rendering.

On the other hand, with the game machine described in feature D0, it is possible to provide a game machine in which a display area for a wide range of performances can be preferably installed even if the game machine has a three-dimensional body with a plurality of symbols arranged in a circle. That is, the variable display part is configured to be able to variably display each of a plurality of pattern rows constituted by arranging a plurality of the round bodies, with a three-dimensional round body in which a plurality of patterns are arranged to rotate as one pattern row, by rotating each round body. The variable display portion is provided in an opening formed in the game area of the game board, and a part of the plurality of rotating bodies protrudes forward from the opening so that the plurality of symbols can be visually recognized.

A display cover part is provided at a position superimposed on the front side of a plurality of rotating bodies so that a plurality of patterns in the variable display part can be visually recognized, and has a plate-like configuration in which a section seen from a predetermined direction crossing the front-rear direction in the front view of the game machine protrudes forward in a substantially arc shape. The display cover portion has a light guide portion capable of displaying a predetermined image by light emission when the light is irradiated from a predetermined end side so that the light travels along the direction in which the plate surfaces of the display cover portion continue.

A game board image display portion is provided on at least one side of a predetermined image that can be displayed by the light guide portion of the display cover portion and at least part of the periphery of the opening of the game board. Since the game board image display part constitutes a part of the decoration image continuous in the predetermined direction side together with the predetermined image that can be displayed by the light guide part, the decoration image continuous in the predetermined direction side can be displayed beyond the display range of the light guide part. As a result, it is possible to make the effect of the decorative image continuous in the predetermined direction more impressive than when the decorative image is displayed using only the light guide section.

However, when there is a structural separation between the opening of the game board and the display cover part, the discontinuity between the predetermined image displayed on the light guide part and the game board image display part may give an unnatural impression to the presentation by the decoration image continuous in the predetermined direction.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine described in feature D0, the decorative surface located within the opening of the game board when viewed from the front of the game machine is provided behind the game board, and the decorative surface image display section which is part of the decorative image continuous in the predetermined direction is provided between the light guide section and the game board image display section of the game board when viewed from the front of the gaming machine.

Thus, even when there is a structural gap between the opening of the game board and the display cover part (light guide part), the discontinuity between the predetermined image displayed on the light guide part and the game board image display part can be compensated for by the decorative surface image display part. Therefore, it is possible to realize a suitable effect in which the unnaturalness due to the discontinuity is suppressed in the effect of the decoration image that is displayed beyond the display range of the light guide and is continuous in the predetermined direction.

<Feature D1>
The gaming machine according to feature D0,
A side wall surface (side wall portion 702) provided between the peripheral edge of the opening of the game board and the decorative surface and extending in a direction intersecting the game board and the decorative surface,
The side wall surface is provided between the decorative surface image display portion and the game board image display portion, and includes a side wall surface image display portion (a pattern connecting between the pattern 741 and the pattern 742) that forms a part of the continuous decorative image together with the decorative surface image display portion and the game board image display portion.

In the gaming machine described in feature D1, a side wall surface extending in a direction intersecting the game board and the decorative surface is provided between the peripheral portion of the opening of the game board and the decorative surface. A side wall surface image display portion is provided on the side wall surface between the decorative surface image display portion of the decorative surface and the image display portion of the game board. The side wall surface image display portion is configured to be a part of the decoration image continuous in the predetermined direction side together with the decorative surface image display portion and the game board image display portion. Therefore, the discontinuity in the height direction due to the height difference between the game board and the decorative surface can be compensated for by the side wall surface image display portion. As a result, the continuity of the decorative images that are continuous in the predetermined direction is improved, so that the unnaturalness caused by the discontinuity in the rendering of the decorative images that are continuous in the predetermined direction can be more preferably suppressed.

<Feature D2>
A gaming machine according to feature D0 or feature D1,
The light guide section is configured to be able to display a first image (patterns 743B and 743C), which is a part of one image that constitutes the decorative image that is continuous in the predetermined direction, in predetermined areas (areas R1 and R2) below the frontmost top portion of the display cover section as part of the predetermined image,
The decorative surface image display section includes a second image (patterns 742B, 742C) displayed at a position adjacent to the first image displayed on the light guide section and forming the one image together with the first image.

In the gaming machine described in feature D2, one image that constitutes the decorative image that is continuous in the predetermined direction is formed from the first image displayed on the light guide section and the second image displayed on the decorative surface image display section. As a result, one image forming a decorative image that is continuous in a predetermined direction can be arranged at the boundary between the light guide section and the decorative surface, so that the continuity of the decorative image can be favorably enhanced.

In particular, since the first image is displayed in a predetermined area below the frontmost top portion of the display cover portion, the height difference (height in the front-rear direction) from the second image displayed on the decorative surface image display portion (decorative surface) can be kept low. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the distortion of the one image composed of the first image and the second image, so that it is possible to make it difficult for the user to feel uncomfortable with the one image.

<Feature E0>
a game board (substrate 401) having a game area formed on the front side, in which game balls can flow down, and an opening formed in the game area;
a variable display unit (reel device 710) arranged in the opening of the game board and capable of variably displaying a plurality of symbol rows;
A lottery means (main control board 920) that performs a predetermined lottery when a predetermined start condition is satisfied;
variation execution means (sub-control board 940) for stop-displaying a stop symbol corresponding to the lottery result of the lottery means after the plurality of symbol rows are variably displayed by the variation display unit when the starting condition is satisfied;
game control means (main control board 920) for generating a special game state, which is a game state more advantageous than a normal game state, after the plurality of symbol rows are stop-displayed with the stop symbols corresponding to the first result by the variation execution means when the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined first result;
a display cover portion (resin cover 715) protruding forward from the position where the stop symbol is displayed;
a light-emitting operation unit (pressing operation device 261) that is arranged upward with respect to the display cover unit when viewed from the front of the gaming machine and that can be operated by a player;
Light emission control means (sub control board 940) for causing the operation unit to emit light in a predetermined color in synchronization with an operation valid period (operable period) during which an input to the operation unit is valid, or an information period preceding the operation valid period and notifying the operation valid period;
and a reflecting portion (half mirror 761B) which is provided in a predetermined area below the frontmost top portion of the display cover portion and can reflect light emitted from the operating portion so that a player can visually recognize the reflected light.

Pachinko machines are typical examples of game machines. In a typical conventional pachinko machine, when a ball enters a starting hole provided in a game area, a lottery is conducted according to the ball entering, and when a big win is won in the lottery, a special game state is established and a large number of game balls can enter the winning hole.

In recent years, a game machine is also known in which a predetermined effect such as changing the display content on the display device or outputting the corresponding sound from the speaker is executed by the player operating the effect button (operation unit) at a predetermined timing (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-193329). In some game machines of this type, the operation section is configured to be luminous so that the player can be notified of the operation timing of the operation section.

However, there is a possibility that there is still room for improvement in conventional gaming machines that are configured to notify the player of the operation timing of the operating unit by means of light emitted from the operating unit. For example, since the player tends to pay attention to the variable display performed on the display device, there is a problem that it is difficult to recognize the operation timing of the operation unit provided below the display device by the light emitted from the operation unit.

On the other hand, with the gaming machine described in feature E0, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that allows the player to preferably recognize the operation timing of the operation unit in a configuration in which the operation timing of the operation unit is notified to the player by light emission of the operation unit. That is, a game board on which a game area in which game balls can flow down is formed on the front side has an opening formed in the game area when viewed from the front of the game machine, and a variable display section capable of variably displaying a plurality of symbol rows is provided in the opening. When a predetermined starting condition is established, a plurality of symbol rows are variably displayed in a variation display section by a variation execution means, and then the combination of symbols corresponding to the result of the lottery by the lottery means is stop-displayed. At this time, if the lottery result is a predetermined first result, a special game state more advantageous than the normal game state is generated by the game control means after the symbols are stop-displayed in a combination of symbols showing the first result.

A display cover portion is provided so as to protrude in front of the position where the stop symbol is displayed. An operating section that can be operated by a player is arranged upward on the lower side of the display cover section when viewed from the front of the gaming machine. The operation unit is configured to emit light. The operation unit is controlled by the light emission control means, and emits light in a predetermined color in synchronization with an operation valid period in which an input to the operation unit becomes valid, or an information period preceding the operation valid period and reporting the operation valid period.

Here, in a predetermined area below the top portion positioned foremost in the display cover portion, a reflecting portion capable of reflecting the light emitted from the operating portion so that the player can visually recognize the reflected light is provided, so that the player can visually recognize the light emitted from the operating portion as the reflected light from the reflecting portion. As a result, even when the player pays attention to the variable display section, the player is less likely to miss the notification of the operation timing of the operation section by light emission of the operation section, and can easily recognize the operation timing.

In addition, since the player is notified of the operation timing of the operation unit by using the light reflected by the reflecting unit, the control load does not increase due to the notification. Therefore, in this respect as well, it is possible to allow the player to preferably recognize the operation timing of the operation unit. In addition, since there is no need to provide a dedicated image display device (for example, a liquid crystal display device) for notifying the operation timing of the operation unit by an image or the like, there is no increase in manufacturing cost or control load.

<Feature E1>
The gaming machine according to feature E0,
The variable display unit is configured so that each of the plurality of symbol rows formed by arranging a plurality of the rotator bodies can be variably displayed by rotating the rotator body, and a part of the plurality of rotator bodies is provided so as to protrude forward from the opening in the game board.
The display cover part is provided at a position overlapping the front side of the plurality of rotating bodies so that the plurality of patterns can be visually recognized, and is configured in a plate shape projecting forward in a substantially arc shape in cross section when viewed from a predetermined direction intersecting the front-rear direction in the front view of the game machine.

In the game machine described in the feature E1, the variable display part is configured such that a three-dimensional rotary body in which a plurality of patterns are arranged to circulate is set as one pattern row, and each of the plurality of pattern rows configured by arranging the plurality of rotary bodies including the relevant rotary body can be variably displayed by rotating the plurality of rotary bodies. In the case of a gaming machine in which a variable display of symbols is displayed on the screen of a display unit such as an LCD, it is possible to notify the valid operation period by displaying a predetermined character string or a predetermined image on the screen of the display unit. However, in the gaming machine having the feature E1 in which the symbols are variably displayed by the drum of the drum, it is difficult to display a character string or an image on the drum due to its structure.

On the other hand, in the gaming machine described in feature E1, a plate-like display cover portion projecting forward in a substantially arc shape in cross section when viewed from a predetermined direction intersecting the front-rear direction when viewed from the front of the gaming machine is provided in front of the variable display portion in which a part of the plurality of round bodies protrudes forward from the opening of the game board. By providing a reflecting portion in a predetermined area below the frontmost top portion of the display cover portion, the light emitted from the operating portion can be visually recognized by the player as reflected light by the reflecting portion.

<Feature E2>
The gaming machine according to feature E1,
A gaming machine comprising a predetermined display portion (holding lamp 720, lottery result display device 730) provided in the opening of the game board and on the rear end side and lower side of the predetermined area when viewed from the front of the gaming machine.

In the gaming machine described in feature E2, the predetermined display section provided in the opening of the game board is provided on the rear end side and lower side of the predetermined area when viewed from the front of the game machine, so that the area where the display content of the predetermined display section is reflected on the reflecting section can be restricted to the limited area on the rear end side of the reflecting section. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the visibility of the light from the light-emitting portion reflected by the reflecting portion from being hindered by the display content of the predetermined display portion reflected by the reflecting portion. In addition, without increasing the size of the reflecting portion (that is, without increasing the forward projection of the display cover portion), a large area in front of the reflecting portion in which the light from the light emitting portion is reflected (the region where an image is formed by the light from the light emitting portion) can be secured in the reflecting portion.

<Feature F0>
a game board (substrate 401) having a game area formed on the front side, in which game balls can flow down, and an opening formed in the game area;
a variable display unit (reel device 710) arranged in the opening of the game board and capable of variably displaying a plurality of symbol rows;
A lottery means (main control board 920) that performs a predetermined lottery when a predetermined start condition is satisfied;
variation execution means (sub-control board 940) for stop-displaying a stop symbol corresponding to the lottery result of the lottery means after the plurality of symbol rows are variably displayed by the variation display unit when the starting condition is satisfied;
game control means (main control board 920) for generating a special game state, which is a game state more advantageous than a normal game state, after the plurality of symbol rows are stop-displayed with the stop symbols corresponding to the first result by the variation execution means when the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined first result;
a display cover portion (resin cover 715) protruding forward from the position where the stop symbol is displayed;
an operation unit (pressing operation device 261) that is arranged upward with respect to the display cover in a front view of the gaming machine and that can be operated by a player;
a light-emitting portion (wave lamp 771) capable of emitting light, arranged on one side with respect to the operation portion;
Light emission control means (sub control board 940) for causing the light emitting unit to emit light in a predetermined color in synchronization with an operation valid period (operable period) during which the input to the operation unit is valid, or an information period preceding the operation valid period and notifying the operation valid period;
and a reflecting portion (half mirror 761B) which is provided in a predetermined area below the frontmost top portion of the display cover portion and can reflect the light emitted from the light emitting portion so that the reflected light can be visually recognized by a player.

Pachinko machines are typical examples of game machines. In a typical conventional pachinko machine, when a ball enters a starting hole provided in a game area, a lottery is conducted according to the ball entering, and when a big win is won in the lottery, a special game state is established and a large number of game balls can enter the winning hole.

In recent years, a game machine is also known in which a predetermined effect such as changing the display content on the display device or outputting the corresponding sound from the speaker is executed by the player operating the effect button (operation unit) at a predetermined timing (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-193329). In such a type of gaming machine, there is a game machine that notifies a player when it is time to operate an operation unit by configuring a light-emitting unit provided around the operation unit so that it can emit light.

However, there is a possibility that there is still room for improvement in the conventional gaming machine configured to inform the player of the operation timing of the operating section by means of light emitted from the light emitting section. For example, since a player tends to pay attention to the variable display performed on the display device, there is a problem that it is difficult to recognize the operation timing of the operating section notified by the light emission of the light emitting section provided around the operating section provided below the display device.

On the other hand, with the gaming machine described in feature F0, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that allows the player to preferably recognize the operation timing of the operation unit in a configuration in which the player is notified of the operation timing of the operation unit by the light emission of the light emitting unit provided around the operation unit. That is, a game board on which a game area in which game balls can flow down is formed on the front side has an opening formed in the game area when viewed from the front of the game machine, and a variable display section capable of variably displaying a plurality of symbol rows is provided in the opening. When a predetermined starting condition is established, a plurality of symbol rows are variably displayed in a variation display section by a variation execution means, and then the combination of symbols corresponding to the result of the lottery by the lottery means is stop-displayed. At this time, if the lottery result is a predetermined first result, a special game state more advantageous than the normal game state is generated by the game control means after the symbols are stop-displayed in a combination of symbols showing the first result.

A display cover portion is provided so as to protrude in front of the position where the stop symbol is displayed. An operating section that can be operated by a player is arranged upward on the lower side of the display cover section when viewed from the front of the gaming machine. A light-emitting section capable of emitting light is arranged on one side of the operation section. The light emitting unit is controlled by the light emission control means, and emits light in a predetermined color in synchronization with an operation valid period in which an input to the operation unit becomes valid, or an information period preceding the operation valid period and notifying the operation valid period.

Here, in a predetermined area below the frontmost top of the display cover part, a reflecting part capable of reflecting the light emitted from the light emitting part so that the player can visually recognize the reflected light is provided, so that the player can visually recognize the light emitted from the light emitting part as the reflected light from the reflecting part. As a result, even when the player pays attention to the variable display section, the player is less likely to miss the notification of the operation timing of the operating section by the light emission of the light emitting section, and can easily recognize the operation timing.

In addition, since the player is notified of the operation timing of the operation unit by using the light reflected by the reflecting unit, the control load does not increase due to the notification. Therefore, in this respect as well, it is possible to allow the player to preferably recognize the operation timing of the operation unit. In addition, since there is no need to provide a dedicated image display device (for example, a liquid crystal display device) for notifying the operation timing of the operation unit by an image or the like, there is no increase in manufacturing cost or control load.

<Feature F1>
The gaming machine according to feature F0,
The variable display unit is configured so that each of the plurality of symbol rows formed by arranging a plurality of the rotator bodies can be variably displayed by rotating the rotator body, and a part of the plurality of rotator bodies is provided so as to protrude forward from the opening in the game board.
The display cover part is provided at a position overlapping the front side of the plurality of rotating bodies so that the plurality of patterns can be visually recognized, and is configured in a plate shape projecting forward in a substantially arc shape in cross section when viewed from a predetermined direction intersecting the front-rear direction in the front view of the game machine.

In the game machine described in the feature F1, the variable display part is configured such that a three-dimensional rotary body in which a plurality of patterns are arranged so as to circulate is used as one pattern row, and each of the plurality of pattern rows formed by arranging the plurality of rotary bodies including the relevant rotary body can be variably displayed by rotating each of the plurality of rotary bodies. In the case of a gaming machine in which a variable display of symbols is displayed on the screen of a display unit such as an LCD, it is possible to notify the operation time by displaying a predetermined character string or a predetermined image on the screen of the display unit. However, in the game machine having the feature F1 in which the symbols are variably displayed by the drum of the drum, it is difficult to display a character string or an image on the drum due to its structure.

On the other hand, in the gaming machine described in the feature F1, a plate-like display cover portion projecting forward in a substantially arc shape in cross section when viewed from a predetermined direction intersecting the front-rear direction when viewed from the front of the gaming machine is provided in front of the variable display portion in which a part of the plurality of round bodies protrudes forward from the opening of the game board. By providing a reflecting portion in a predetermined area below the frontmost top portion of the display cover portion, the light emitted from the operating portion can be visually recognized by the player as reflected light by the reflecting portion.

<Feature F2>
The gaming machine according to feature F1,
A second light emitting unit (reel side lamp 717A) that can emit light is provided between the rotating body and the rotating body,
The light emission control means causes the second light emitting unit to emit light in the same color as the color emitted from the light emitting unit when the light emitting unit emits light in a predetermined color in synchronization with the operation valid period or the notification period.

In the gaming machine described in feature F2, the second light-emitting section capable of emitting light is provided between the round bodies. The second light emitting section emits light in the same color as the light emitting section that emits light in synchronization with the operation valid period or the notification period by the light emission control means. Therefore, the notification of the operation timing is performed not only by the light reflected by the reflection part, but also by the direct light from the second light emitting part provided in the variable display part (more specifically, between the rotating bodies) that the player tends to pay attention to.

<Feature F3>
A gaming machine according to feature F1 or F2,
The parabolic body is configured to be able to display the pattern by emitting light,
The gaming machine, wherein the reflecting section is configured to reflect light incident from the front side and transmit light incident from the rear side.

In the gaming machine described in feature F3, the reflecting part is configured to reflect the light incident from the front side and transmit the light incident from the rear side. Therefore, since the reflecting section can be arranged in front of the pattern on the rotating body, it is possible to prevent the size of the display cover section from becoming too large.

<Feature F4>
A gaming machine according to any one of features F1 to F3,
A gaming machine comprising a predetermined display portion (holding lamp 720, lottery result display device 730) provided in the opening of the game board and on the rear end side and lower side of the predetermined area when viewed from the front of the gaming machine.

In the gaming machine described in feature F4, the predetermined display section provided in the opening of the game board is provided on the rear end side and lower side of the predetermined area when viewed from the front of the game machine, so that the area where the display content of the predetermined display section is reflected in the reflecting section can be restricted to the limited area on the rear end side of the reflecting section. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the visibility of the light from the light-emitting portion reflected by the reflecting portion from being hindered by the display content of the predetermined display portion reflected by the reflecting portion. In addition, without increasing the size of the reflecting portion (that is, without increasing the forward projection of the display cover portion), a large area in front of the reflecting portion where the light from the light emitting portion is reflected (the region where an image is formed by the light from the light emitting portion) can be secured in the reflecting portion.

<Feature G0>
a variable display unit (reel device 710) capable of variably displaying a plurality of symbol rows;
A lottery means (main control board 920) that performs a predetermined lottery when a predetermined start condition is satisfied;
variation execution means (sub-control board 940) for stop-displaying a stop symbol corresponding to the lottery result of the lottery means after the plurality of symbol rows are variably displayed by the variation display unit when the starting condition is satisfied;
game control means (main control board 920) for generating a special game state, which is a game state more advantageous than a normal game state, after the plurality of symbol rows are stop-displayed with stop symbols corresponding to the first result by the variation execution means when the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined first result;
an operation unit (pressing operation device 261) that can be operated by the player;
a display area control means (sub-control board 940) for reducing the display range in which the at least two symbol rows are displayed by moving the positions of at least two symbol rows (left symbol row, right symbol row) that can constitute a part of the combination of stop symbols corresponding to the first result among the plurality of symbol rows when the operation unit is operated by the player.

Pachinko machines are typical examples of game machines. In a typical conventional pachinko machine, when a ball enters a starting hole provided in a game area, a lottery is performed according to the ball entering, and when a big hit is won in the lottery, a special game state is established and a large number of game balls can enter the winning hole.

Such a conventional pachinko machine is provided with a display device (display part), and the display device starts the variable display of patterns based on the fact that the lottery is performed, and displays the stop result corresponding to the lottery result as the final stop display of the variable display.

However, as typified by the above gaming machine, there is still room for improvement in gaming machines in which symbols are displayed in a variable manner on the display unit. For example, when a pattern to be variably displayed is displayed in a large size, the large pattern can give a player a strong impression of the variative display, while some players feel that it is difficult to see the variative display because the region in which the variable display is performed becomes too large for the visual field.

On the other hand, with the gaming machine described in feature G0, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that allows the player to suitably change the appearance of the display unit as needed. That is, when a predetermined starting condition is established, the variation execution means performs a variation display of a plurality of symbol rows in the variation display section, and then the combination of symbols corresponding to the lottery results of the lottery means is stopped and displayed. At this time, if the lottery result is a predetermined first result, a special game state more advantageous than the normal game state is generated by the game control means after the symbols are stop-displayed in a combination of symbols showing the first result.

An operation part operable by the player is provided, and when the operation part is operated by the player, the position of at least two pattern rows capable of constituting a part of the combination of stop patterns corresponding to the first result among the plurality of pattern rows is moved by the display area control means, thereby reducing the display range in which the at least two pattern rows are displayed. In this way, the player can reduce the display area of the plurality of symbol rows by operating the operation unit as necessary, thereby preventing the player from feeling that the variable display is difficult to see.

Further, since the display range in which the at least two pattern rows are displayed is reduced by moving the positions of the at least two pattern rows, there is no change in the apparent size of the at least two pattern rows before and after the display range is reduced, and it is possible to prevent these pattern rows from becoming difficult to see due to the display range being reduced. In particular, since the at least two symbol rows are symbol rows that can form part of the combination of the stop symbols corresponding to the first result, the player can preferably visually recognize the display when part of the combination of the stop symbols corresponding to the first result is displayed by the at least two symbol rows.

Note that "reducing the display range" described in feature G0 may mean reducing either the vertical direction or the horizontal direction of the display range, or reducing the display range in both the vertical direction and the horizontal direction.

<Feature G1>
The gaming machine according to feature G0,
The variable display unit is configured to be able to variably display each of the plurality of symbol rows formed by arranging a plurality of the rotating bodies, with a three-dimensional rotating body arranged so that a plurality of patterns are arranged as one pattern row, by rotating each rotating body,
The game machine is
a first moving means (gears 782, 783, rack gears corresponding to the gears 782, 783) capable of moving a first spinning body (left reel 711L, right reel 711R) corresponding to at least two symbol rows that can constitute a part of a combination of stop symbols corresponding to the first result among the plurality of spinning bodies in a predetermined direction intersecting the front-rear direction in the front view of the gaming machine;
A second moving means (gear 781, a rack gear corresponding to the gear 781) capable of moving a second rotating body (middle reel 711M) different from the first rotating body among the plurality of rotating bodies to the rear side in the front view of the gaming machine,
The display area control means reduces the display area of the plurality of symbol rows by moving the first body with the first movement means after moving the second body with the second moving means so as to be behind the first body when the operation unit is operated by the player.

In the game machine described in the feature G1, the variable display part is configured such that a three-dimensional rotary body in which a plurality of patterns are arranged so as to circulate is set as one pattern row, and each of the plurality of pattern rows formed by arranging the plurality of rotary bodies including the relevant rotary body can be variably displayed by rotating the plurality of rotary bodies.

Among the plurality of spinning bodies, a first spinning body corresponding to at least two symbol rows that can constitute a part of combinations of stop patterns corresponding to the first result is configured to be movable in a predetermined direction intersecting the front-rear direction in the front view of the game machine by a first moving means. On the other hand, among the plurality of rotating bodies, the second rotating body different from the first rotating body is configured to be movable rearward in the front view of the gaming machine by the second moving means.

When the operation part is operated by the player, the display area control means moves the second body by the second moving means so as to be behind the first body, and then the first body is moved by the first moving means. This makes it possible to reduce the display area for the plurality of symbol rows.

<Feature G2>
The gaming machine according to feature G1,
The first round body is a round body positioned at least at both ends of the plurality of round bodies,
A gaming machine, wherein the first moving means is configured to be capable of moving the second bodies positioned at both ends of the plurality of bodies by approximately the same distance in a direction in which the second bodies are brought closer to each other.

In the gaming machine described in feature G2, when the operation unit is operated by the player, the second round bodies positioned at both ends of the plurality of round bodies are moved by the first moving means by substantially the same distance in the direction of approaching each other. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the center of the display area of the plurality of symbol rows from moving due to the reduction. As a result, it is possible to suppress a change in the line of sight of the player when viewing the variable display of symbols due to the reduction in the display area of the plurality of symbol rows.

<Feature H0>
A light guide member provided at a position overlapping the front side of the structure so that a predetermined structure (reel device 710) can be visually recognized from the front side, and having a plate-shaped (or formed with a substantially constant thickness) light guide curved portion (curved portion 715B1) that curves and protrudes forward when viewed from the side of a predetermined direction that intersects the front-rear direction in the front view of the game machine, and guides light in a predetermined continuous direction that intersects the thickness direction (or a predetermined continuous direction in which the plate surface is continuous). a light guide member (light guide plate 715B) capable of emitting and displaying a predetermined image (pattern 743) at least on the light guide curved portion when light is incident from predetermined end sides (end surfaces 715B4 and 715B5) so that light travels along a predetermined continuous direction in which light can be emitted;
a cover portion (outer cover 715A) provided overlapping at least the front side of the light guide curved portion of the light guide member, having optical transparency that allows the predetermined image displayed by light emission on the light guide member to be visually recognized from the front side, and having a cover curved portion (curved portion 715A1) in a curved shape along the light guide curved portion;
light source units (light source units 812, 813) having light emitting means (light emitting means 824, 834) for outputting light incident on the predetermined end side of the light guide member;
a first attachment portion (projection 892, through holes 841A, 841B, 843A, 843B, projection 893, through holes 851A, 851B, 853A, 853B) that is used when the light guide member and the cover are integrated and that allows displacement along the predetermined continuous direction due to deformation of the light guide bending portion;
a second mounting portion (projection 844A, through holes 861A, 842A, projection 844B, through holes 861B, 842B, projection 854A, through holes 862A, 852A, projection 854B, through holes 862B, 852B) that is used when the light guide member and the light source unit are integrated and does not allow displacement along the predetermined continuous direction compared to the first mounting portion; A game machine characterized by comprising:

Pachinko machines are typical examples of game machines. In a typical conventional pachinko machine, when a ball enters a starting hole provided in a game area, a lottery is conducted according to the ball entering, and when a big win is won in the lottery, a special game state is established and a large number of game balls can enter the winning hole. In recent years, there is known a pachinko machine that diversifies the effects by providing a light guide plate that emits light and displays a predetermined design in the game area by injecting light from the end face (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-80625).

However, a light guide member that is not a flat light guide plate but has a curved plate-like portion (curved portion) may cause problems during assembly when unitizing. For example, if the curved portion cannot be manufactured in a precisely designed shape, there is a possibility that the predetermined design cannot be visually displayed by light emission. On the other hand, if an attempt is made to reduce the tolerance of the light guide member including the curved portion and manufacture it with high accuracy, the cost of the light guide member will increase and the cost of the game machine will increase. Further, if an excessive force is applied to deform the curved portion of the light guide plate, there is a possibility that the position of the light source and the light guide member will be shifted and the light guide function will be impaired.

On the other hand, with the gaming machine described in feature H0, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which a unit including a light guide member having a curved portion can be preferably assembled. That is, a light guide member having a plate-shaped light guide curved portion that projects forward in a curved shape when viewed from a predetermined direction that intersects the front-rear direction when viewed from the front of the game machine is provided at a position overlapping the front side of the structure so that the predetermined structure can be visually recognized from the front side. The light guide member is configured such that when light is incident from a predetermined end side so that the light travels along a predetermined continuous direction, the light can emit light to display a predetermined image on at least the light guide curved portion. A light source unit is provided with a light emitting means so that light is incident on a predetermined end side of the light guide member. Therefore, when a predetermined structure including a shape that curves and protrudes forward is arranged on the rear side of the light guiding curved part, a predetermined image can be displayed in front of the predetermined structure without a large distance as a whole. Therefore, even if the viewpoint position of the player changes due to the player's height, posture, etc., the position where the predetermined image is superimposed and displayed on the front side of the predetermined structure does not greatly shift, and the predetermined image can be displayed at an appropriate position.

In addition, a cover portion having a curved cover portion curved along the light guide curved portion is overlapped on at least the front side of the light guide curved portion in the light guide member. The cover portion has a light transmittance that allows a predetermined image displayed by light emission on the light guide member to be visually recognized from the front side.

Here, the first attachment portion, which is a portion used when the light guide member and the cover portion are integrated, is configured to allow displacement along a predetermined continuous direction due to deformation of the light guide curved portion. Therefore, even if the light guide curved portion is deformed and manufactured due to manufacturing variations or the like, the displacement along the predetermined continuous direction due to the deformation is allowed by the first mounting portion, so manufacturing variations of the light guide member along the predetermined continuous direction can be largely allowed, and the manufacturing cost of the light guide member including the curved portion can be reduced.

On the other hand, the second mounting portion, which is a portion used when the light guide member and the light source unit are integrated, is configured not to allow displacement along the predetermined continuous direction compared to the first mounting portion. As a result, the light guide member and the light source unit can be positioned and integrated in a suitable position with little variation in manufacturing in a predetermined continuous direction, so that a predetermined image using the light guide member can be displayed with good appearance.

<Feature H1>
A light guide member provided at a position overlapping the front side of the structure so that a predetermined structure (reel device 710) can be visually recognized from the front side, and having a plate-shaped (or formed with a substantially constant thickness) light guide curved portion (curved portion 715B1) that curves and protrudes forward when viewed from the side of a predetermined direction that intersects the front-rear direction in the front view of the game machine, and guides light in a predetermined continuous direction that intersects the thickness direction (or a predetermined continuous direction in which the plate surface is continuous). a light guide member (light guide plate 715B) capable of emitting and displaying a predetermined image (pattern 743) at least on the light guide curved portion when light is incident from predetermined end sides (end surfaces 715B4 and 715B5) so that light travels along a predetermined continuous direction in which light can be emitted;
a cover portion (outer cover 715A) provided overlapping at least the front side of the light guide curved portion of the light guide member, having optical transparency that allows the predetermined image displayed by light emission on the light guide member to be visually recognized from the front side, and having a cover curved portion (curved portion 715A1) in a curved shape along the light guide curved portion;
light source units (light source units 812, 813) having light emitting means (light emitting means 824, 834) for outputting light incident on the predetermined end side of the light guide member;
a first attachment portion (projection 892, through holes 841A, 841B, 843A, 843B, projection 893, through holes 851A, 851B, 853A, 853B), which is a portion used when the light guide member and the cover are integrated, and in which the predetermined continuous direction has a larger allowable positioning range than the intersecting direction that intersects the continuous direction;
A second mounting portion (projecting portion 844A, through holes 861A, 842A, projecting portion 844B, through holes 861B, 842B, projecting portion 854A, through holes 862A, 852A, projecting portion 854B, through holes 862B, 852B), which is a portion used when the light guide member and the light source unit are integrated, and has a smaller permissible range of positioning in the predetermined continuous direction than the first mounting portion. ), and a gaming machine characterized by comprising:

Pachinko machines are typical examples of game machines. In a typical conventional pachinko machine, when a ball enters a starting hole provided in a game area, a lottery is conducted according to the ball entering, and when a big win is won in the lottery, a special game state is established and a large number of game balls can enter the winning hole. In recent years, there is known a pachinko machine that diversifies the effects by providing a light guide plate that emits light and displays a predetermined design in the game area by injecting light from the end face (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-80625).

However, a light guide member that is not a flat light guide plate but has a curved plate-like portion (curved portion) may cause problems during assembly when unitizing. For example, if the curved portion cannot be manufactured in a precisely designed shape, there is a possibility that the predetermined design cannot be visually displayed by light emission. On the other hand, if an attempt is made to reduce the tolerance of the light guide member including the curved portion and manufacture it with high accuracy, the cost of the light guide member will increase and the cost of the game machine will increase. Further, if an excessive force is applied to deform the curved portion of the light guide plate, there is a possibility that the position of the light source and the light guide member will be shifted and the light guide function will be impaired.

On the other hand, with the gaming machine described in feature H1, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably assembling a unit including a light guide member having a curved portion. That is, a light guide member having a plate-shaped light guide curved portion that projects forward in a curved shape when viewed from a predetermined direction that intersects the front-rear direction when viewed from the front of the game machine is provided at a position overlapping the front side of the structure so that the predetermined structure can be visually recognized from the front side. The light guide member is configured such that when light is incident from a predetermined end side so that the light travels along a predetermined continuous direction, the light can emit light to display a predetermined image on at least the light guide curved portion. A light source unit is provided with a light emitting means so that light is incident on a predetermined end portion side of the light guide member. Therefore, when a predetermined structure including a shape that curves and protrudes forward is arranged on the rear side of the light guiding curved part, a predetermined image can be displayed in front of the predetermined structure without a large distance as a whole. Therefore, even if the viewpoint position of the player changes due to the player's height, posture, etc., the position where the predetermined image is superimposed and displayed on the front side of the predetermined structure does not greatly shift, and the predetermined image can be displayed at an appropriate position.

In addition, a cover portion having a curved cover portion curved along the light guide curved portion is overlapped on at least the front side of the light guide curved portion in the light guide member. The cover portion has a light transmittance that allows a predetermined image displayed by light emission on the light guide member to be visually recognized from the front side.

Here, the first attachment portion, which is a portion used when the light guide member and the cover portion are integrated, has a larger positioning tolerance in a predetermined continuous direction than in an intersecting direction that intersects with the continuous direction. Therefore, even if the light guide curved portion is manufactured deformed due to manufacturing variations or the like, the allowable range of positioning in the continuous direction along the predetermined continuous direction is set relatively large by the first mounting portion, so manufacturing variations of the light guide member along the predetermined continuous direction can be largely tolerated, and the manufacturing cost of the light guide member including the curved portion can be suppressed.

On the other hand, the second mounting portion, which is used when the light guide member and the light source unit are integrated, has a smaller positioning tolerance in a predetermined continuous direction than the first mounting portion. As a result, the light guide member and the light source unit can be positioned and integrated in a suitable position with little variation in manufacturing in a predetermined continuous direction, so that a predetermined image using the light guide member can be displayed with good appearance.

<Feature H2>
A gaming machine according to feature H0 or feature H1,
The first mounting portion is
a first support portion (protrusions 892, 893) protruding at a predetermined position on the back side of the flat portion of the cover portion that is continuous with the curved portion of the cover or on the front side of the light source unit;
A gaming machine comprising: a first hole provided in the light source unit or the cover so as to allow the first support to be inserted therethrough, the first hole having the predetermined continuous direction longer than the intersecting direction intersecting the continuous direction (through holes 841A, 841B, 843A, 843B, 851A, 851B, 853A, 853B).

In the gaming machine described in feature H2, the first mounting portion is provided in the light source unit or the cover portion with a first hole through which the first support portion protruding at a predetermined position on the back side of the flat portion of the cover portion or on the front side of the light source unit can be inserted. The first hole is formed longer in a predetermined continuous direction than in an intersecting direction crossing the continuous direction. Therefore, the first mounting portion can be configured to allow a larger positioning tolerance in the predetermined continuous direction than in the cross direction, and to allow displacement along the predetermined continuous direction (the direction in which the plate surface continues) due to deformation of the light guiding curved portion.

<Feature H3>
The gaming machine according to feature H2,
The second mounting portion is
second hole portions (through holes 861A and 861B, through holes 862A and 862B) provided on both end sides of the light guide member in the cross direction, the length of the predetermined continuous direction being shorter than the length of the first hole portion in the continuous direction;
a second support portion (projections 844A, 844B, projections 854A, 854B) formed in the light source unit so as to be able to be inserted into the second hole;
The length of the second holes (through holes 861B, 862B) provided on one side of the crossing direction in the crossing direction is longer than the length of the second holes (projections 844A, 854A) provided on the other side of the crossing direction in the crossing direction.

In the gaming machine according to feature H3, the second attachment portion includes second holes provided on both end sides of the light guide member in the cross direction, and a second support portion provided on the light source unit so as to be able to be inserted into the second holes. Each of the second holes provided at both ends in the cross direction has a predetermined length in the continuous direction shorter than the length in the predetermined continuous direction of the first holes. Therefore, the second mounting portion can be set to have a smaller permissible range of positioning in the predetermined continuous direction than the first mounting portion, and can be configured not to allow displacement along the predetermined continuous direction (the direction in which the plate surface continues) compared to the first mounting portion.

Further, of the second holes provided on both sides in the cross direction, the length in the cross direction of the second hole provided on one side in the cross direction is longer than the length in the cross direction of the second hole provided on the other side in the cross direction. Therefore, even if there is a manufacturing error in the installation position of the second holes provided on both sides in the cross direction, the manufacturing error can be absorbed in the cross direction. Thereby, it is possible to suppress the manufacturing error of the position of the second hole from adversely affecting the positioning accuracy of the light source unit in the predetermined continuous direction with respect to the light guide member.

<Feature H4>
A gaming machine according to any one of features H0 to H3,
a curved holding portion (holding member 811) capable of holding the light guiding curved portion overlapping the rear side of the cover curved portion while pressing the cover curved portion along the cover curved portion;
The gaming machine, wherein the light guide member is configured to be integrated with the cover portion by the first mounting portion after the light guide curved portion is held by the curved holding portion.

In the gaming machine according to feature H4, before the light guide member is integrated with the cover portion by the first attachment portion, the light guide curved portion superimposed on the rear side of the cover curved portion is held by the curve holding portion in a state in which it is pressed against the cover curved portion along the cover curved portion. Therefore, when the light guide curved portion is deformed by a certain amount or more due to manufacturing variations, the light guide member and the cover portion can be integrated by the first attachment portion in a state in which the shape of the light guide curved portion is corrected to the shape of the cover curved portion by the curve holding portion. Therefore, it is possible to correct the shape of the light guide curved portion within a certain range while allowing large manufacturing variations of the light guide member including the light guide curved portion, and to display a predetermined image with good appearance using the light guide member.

<Feature H5>
A light guide member provided at a position overlapping the front side of the structure so that a predetermined structure (reel device 710) can be visually recognized from the front side, and having a plate-shaped (or formed with a substantially constant thickness) light guide curved portion (curved portion 715B1) that curves and protrudes forward when viewed from the side of a predetermined direction that intersects the front-rear direction in the front view of the game machine, and guides light in a predetermined continuous direction that intersects the thickness direction (or a predetermined continuous direction in which the plate surface is continuous). a light guide member (light guide plate 715B) capable of emitting and displaying a predetermined image (pattern 743) at least on the light guide curved portion when light is incident from predetermined end sides (end surfaces 715B4 and 715B5) so that light travels along a predetermined continuous direction in which light can be emitted;
a cover portion (outer cover 715A) provided overlapping at least the front side of the light guide curved portion of the light guide member, having optical transparency that allows the predetermined image displayed by light emission on the light guide member to be visually recognized from the front side, and having a cover curved portion (curved portion 715A1) in a curved shape along the light guide curved portion;
A light source unit (light source unit 812, 813) having a light emitting means (light emitting means 824, 834) that outputs light incident on the predetermined end side of the light guide member,
One of the light source unit and the cover has a mounting portion (through holes 841A, 841B, 843A, 843B, 851A, 851B, 853A, 853B) that, when integrated with the other, allows positioning of the other in a direction along the predetermined continuous direction within a predetermined range,
A gaming machine, wherein the light guide member is integrated with the cover portion via the light source unit by integrating the light source unit and the cover portion with the mounting portion.

Pachinko machines are typical examples of game machines. In a typical conventional pachinko machine, when a ball enters a starting hole provided in a game area, a lottery is conducted according to the ball entering, and when a big win is won in the lottery, a special game state is established and a large number of game balls can enter the winning hole. In recent years, there is known a pachinko machine that diversifies the effects by providing a light guide plate that emits light and displays a predetermined design in the game area by injecting light from the end face (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-80625).

However, a light guide member that is not a flat light guide plate but has a curved plate-like portion (curved portion) may cause problems during assembly when unitizing. For example, if the curved portion cannot be manufactured in a precisely designed shape, there is a possibility that the predetermined design cannot be visually displayed by light emission. On the other hand, if an attempt is made to reduce the tolerance of the light guide member including the curved portion and manufacture it with high accuracy, the cost of the light guide member will increase and the cost of the game machine will increase. Further, if an excessive force is applied to deform the curved portion of the light guide plate, there is a possibility that the position of the light source and the light guide member will be shifted and the light guide function will be impaired.

On the other hand, with the gaming machine described in feature H5, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably assembling a unit including a light guide member having a curved portion. That is, a light guide member having a plate-shaped light guide curved portion that projects forward in a curved shape when viewed from a predetermined direction that intersects the front-rear direction when viewed from the front of the game machine is provided at a position overlapping the front side of the structure so that the predetermined structure can be visually recognized from the front side. The light guide member is configured such that when light is incident from a predetermined end side so that the light travels along a predetermined continuous direction, the light can emit light to display a predetermined image on at least the light guide curved portion. A light source unit is provided with a light emitting means so that light is incident on a predetermined end side of the light guide member. Therefore, when a predetermined structure including a shape that curves and protrudes forward is arranged on the rear side of the light guiding curved part, a predetermined image can be displayed in front of the predetermined structure without a large distance as a whole. Therefore, even if the viewpoint position of the player changes due to the player's height, posture, etc., the position where the predetermined image is superimposed and displayed on the front side of the predetermined structure does not greatly shift, and the predetermined image can be displayed at an appropriate position.

In addition, a cover portion having a curved cover portion curved along the light guide curved portion is overlapped on at least the front side of the light guide curved portion in the light guide member. The cover portion has a light transmittance that allows a predetermined image displayed by light emission on the light guide member to be visually recognized from the front side.

Here, by integrating the light source unit and the cover portion, the light guide member is integrated with the cover portion via the light source unit. By integrating the light source unit with the light guide member in advance, the position of the light source with respect to the light guide member can be preferably aligned.

In addition, when one of the light source unit and the cover is integrated with the other, the mounting portion permits positioning of the other in a predetermined continuous direction within a predetermined range. Therefore, even if the light guide curved portion is manufactured deformed due to manufacturing variations or the like, when the light guide member is integrated with the cover portion via the light source unit, the manufacturing error in the predetermined continuous direction is absorbed by the mounting portion. Therefore, manufacturing variations of the light guide member along the predetermined continuous direction can be largely tolerated, and the manufacturing cost of the light guide member including the curved portion can be suppressed.

<Feature J0>
a light guide member (light guide plate 715B) having a light guide portion (curved portion 715B1) capable of emitting and displaying a predetermined image (pattern 743) when light is incident from predetermined end portions (end surfaces 715B4 and 715B5) so that light travels along a predetermined continuous direction (or a predetermined continuous direction in which plate surfaces are continuous, or a predetermined continuous direction in which light can be guided) that intersects the thickness direction;
a plurality of light emitting means (light emitting means 824, 834) for outputting light incident on the predetermined end side of the light guide member;
A light guide means (recessed portion Z) that guides the light incident on the light guide member from the light emitting means to partially weak light or guides light including predetermined directions (regions D1 and D2) in which the light does not travel,
The light guiding means guides the light from the light emitting means so that the light emitted from the light emitting means shines more strongly than the portion extending in the predetermined direction on both sides inclined in one direction and the other direction around the light source along the plate surface of the light guiding member with respect to the predetermined direction.

Pachinko machines are typical examples of game machines. In a typical conventional pachinko machine, when a ball enters a starting hole provided in a game area, a lottery is conducted according to the ball entering, and when a big win is won in the lottery, a special game state is established and a large number of game balls can enter the winning hole. In recent years, there is known a pachinko machine that diversifies the effects by providing a light guide plate that emits light and displays a predetermined design in the game area by injecting light from the end face (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-80625).

However, the mode in which a predetermined design is displayed by a light guide plate (light guide member) has a problem that the light uniformly shines according to the color of the light source such as LED, and the variation of the mode displayed by light guide tends to be scarce.

On the other hand, with the gaming machine described in feature J0, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of realizing diversification of image display modes by the light guide member. That is, a light guide member is provided that has a light guide portion capable of displaying a predetermined image by light emission when light is incident from a predetermined end so that the light travels along a predetermined continuous direction. A plurality of light emitting means for outputting light are provided so that the light is incident on a predetermined end portion side of the light guide member.

Further, the light guide means causes the light incident on the light guide member from the light emitting means to travel as partially weak light, or to guide light including a predetermined direction in which the light does not travel. Therefore, with the light guide means, it is possible to provide a portion that shines more strongly than the portion extending in the predetermined direction on both sides inclined in one direction and the other direction centering on the light emitting means along the plate surface of the light guide member with respect to the predetermined direction. As a result, the lighting of the light guide member can be made random rather than uniform, so that it is possible to diversify the display modes of images by the light guide member.

Note that the predetermined image in the feature J0 may include at least an image displayed by light output from a plurality of light emitting means.

<Feature J1>
a light guide member (light guide plate 715B) having a light guide portion (curved portion 715B1) capable of emitting and displaying a predetermined image (pattern 743) when light is incident from predetermined end portions (end surfaces 715B4 and 715B5) so that light travels along a predetermined continuous direction (or a predetermined continuous direction in which plate surfaces are continuous, or a predetermined continuous direction in which light can be guided) that intersects the thickness direction;
a plurality of light emitting means (light emitting means 824, 834) for outputting light incident on the predetermined end side of the light guide member;
a light guide means (concave part Z) configured to separate the light incident on the light guide member from the light emitting means into at least two directions (arrow F1 direction, arrow F2 direction, arrow F3 direction) to travel in the light guide member, and form regions (regions D1 and D2) between the separated light in each direction where the light shines weaker than the light or where the light does not reach.

Pachinko machines are typical examples of game machines. In a typical conventional pachinko machine, when a ball enters a starting hole provided in a game area, a lottery is conducted according to the ball entering, and when a big win is won in the lottery, a special game state is established and a large number of game balls can enter the winning hole. In recent years, there is known a pachinko machine that diversifies the effects by providing a light guide plate that emits light and displays a predetermined design in the game area by injecting light from the end face (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-80625).

However, the mode in which a predetermined design is displayed by a light guide plate (light guide member) has a problem that the light uniformly shines according to the color of the light source such as LED, and the variation of the mode displayed by light guide tends to be scarce.

On the other hand, with the gaming machine described in feature J1, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of realizing diversification of image display modes by means of the light guide member. That is, a light guide member is provided that has a light guide portion capable of displaying a predetermined image by light emission when light is incident from a predetermined end so that the light travels along a predetermined continuous direction. A plurality of light emitting means for outputting light are provided so that the light is incident on a predetermined end side of the light guide member.

In addition, the light guide means can separate the light incident on the light guide member from the light emitting means into at least two directions and allow the light to travel through the light guide member, so that between the separated lights in each direction, a region that shines weaker than the light or that the light does not reach can be formed. As a result, the lighting of the light guide member can be made random rather than uniform, so that it is possible to diversify the display modes of images by the light guide member.

Note that the predetermined image in the feature J1 may include at least an image displayed by light output from a plurality of light emitting means.

<Feature J2>
A gaming machine according to feature J0 or feature J1,
A gaming machine, wherein the light guide means is a concave portion having two or more sides (sides Z1, Z2, Z3) formed on the end surface of the light guide member on the predetermined end side, and top portions (left end C1, right end C2) formed by two adjacent sides of the two or more sides that form different angles with respect to a light output direction of the light source.

In the gaming machine according to feature J1, the light guide means is a recess having at least two sides formed on the end surface of the light guide member on the predetermined end side, and a top portion formed by two adjacent sides having different angles with respect to the output direction of the light from the light source among the two or more sides.

<Feature K0>
a variable display unit (reel device 710) capable of variably displaying a plurality of symbol rows;
A lottery means (main control board 920) that performs a predetermined lottery when a predetermined start condition is satisfied;
variation execution means (sub-control board 940) for stop-displaying a stop symbol corresponding to the lottery result of the lottery means after the plurality of symbol rows are variably displayed by the variation display unit when the starting condition is satisfied;
game control means (main control board 920) for generating a special game state, which is a game state more advantageous than a normal game state, after the plurality of symbol rows are stop-displayed with stop symbols corresponding to the first result by the variation execution means when the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined first result;
and a pattern width change control means (sub-control board 940) for reducing the width of the pattern in a predetermined direction intersecting the direction of variation of the pattern in which the pattern is variably displayed while the pattern is variably displayed by the variation execution means.

Pachinko machines are typical examples of game machines. In a typical conventional pachinko machine, when a ball enters a starting hole provided in a game area, a lottery is performed according to the ball entering, and when a big hit is won in the lottery, a special game state is established and a large number of game balls can enter the winning hole.

Such a conventional pachinko machine is provided with a display device (display part), and the display device starts the variable display of patterns based on the fact that the lottery is performed, and displays the stop result corresponding to the lottery result as the final stop display of the variable display.

However, there is a possibility that there is still room for improvement in a gaming machine such as the above-described gaming machine in which symbols are displayed in a variable manner on the display unit. For example, when a pattern to be variably displayed is displayed in a large size, the large pattern can give a player a strong impression of the variative display, while some players feel that it is difficult to see the variative display because the region in which the variable display is performed becomes too large for the visual field.

On the other hand, with the gaming machine described in feature K0, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing the player from feeling that the variable display is difficult to see. That is, when a predetermined starting condition is established, the variation execution means performs a variation display of a plurality of symbol rows in the variation display section, and then the combination of symbols corresponding to the lottery results of the lottery means is stopped and displayed. At this time, if the lottery result is a predetermined first result, a special game state more advantageous than the normal game state is generated by the game control means after the symbols are stop-displayed in a combination of symbols showing the first result.

During the variable display of the pattern by the variation execution means, the width of the pattern in a predetermined direction intersecting with the variation direction of the pattern to be variably displayed is reduced by the pattern width change control means. This makes it possible to reduce the area in which variable display is performed. By reducing the area where the variable display is performed, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling that the variable display is difficult to see.

<Feature K1>
The gaming machine according to feature K0,
suspending means (main control board 920) for suspending execution of the variation display of the symbols by the variation execution means within a predetermined upper limit number of times;
a pattern width restoration control means (sub-control board 940) for largely changing the width of the pattern, which has been changed small by the pattern width change control means, after the high-speed fluctuation in the variable display and before the variable display is stopped in a situation where the variable display of the pattern is being variably displayed by the variable execution means and the execution of the variable display is not suspended by the holding means after the variable display.

In the gaming machine described in the feature K1, in a situation in which the variable display of the symbols is being performed by the variable execution means and the execution of the variable display is not suspended by the suspending means after the variable display, the symbol width restoration control means largely changes the width of the symbol that has been slightly changed by the symbol width change control means after the high-speed variation in the variable display and before the variable display is stopped.

As a result, while the execution of the variable display is suspended, the width of the pattern that has been reduced by the pattern width change control means can be maintained. Therefore, while the variable display of the suspended symbols is continuously executed, the area where the variable display is performed can be maintained in a readily visible state.

<Feature K2>
A gaming machine according to feature K0 or feature K1,
A symbol display area control means (sub-control board 940) for reducing the display range in which the plurality of symbol rows are displayed by moving the display positions of the symbols constituting at least one symbol row among the plurality of symbol rows along the row direction so that the width of the symbol is reduced by the symbol width change control means during the variation display of the symbols by the variation executing means, after the change, so that the overall width of the plurality of symbol rows in the row direction becomes narrower. Amusement machine.

In the gaming machine described in feature K2, when the width of the pattern is reduced by the pattern width change control means while the pattern is variably displayed by the variation execution means, after the change, the display position of the pattern forming at least one of the plurality of pattern rows is moved along the arrangement direction by the display area control means so that the overall width of the plurality of pattern rows in the arrangement direction is narrowed, thereby reducing the display range in which the plurality of pattern rows are displayed. Therefore, by not only changing the width of the pattern but also moving the display position of the pattern, the area where the variable display is performed can be made smaller than by reducing the width of the pattern.

<Feature K3>
A gaming machine according to any one of features K0 to K2,
The variable display unit is configured to be able to variably display each of the plurality of symbol rows formed by arranging a plurality of the rotating bodies, with a three-dimensional rotating body arranged so that a plurality of symbols are arranged as one pattern row, by rotating each rotating body,
At least some of the rotating bodies constituting the plurality of pattern rows include an expansion mechanism (first reel body 1701, second reel body 1702) that enables expansion and contraction in the predetermined direction that intersects the rotation direction of the rotating body, and an operating means (drive solenoid 1711) that is provided in the rotating body and acts on the peripheral side of the side surface substantially perpendicular to the rotation axis of the rotating body to expand and contract the expansion and contraction mechanism.
The symbol width change control means operates the operating means of the rotating body during an acceleration period until the variation display of the plurality of symbol rows by the variation execution means reaches a high-speed variation from the stop of variation, thereby contracting the extension and contraction mechanism, thereby changing the width of the symbol to be smaller.

In the game machine described in the feature K3, the variable display part is configured such that a three-dimensional body in which a plurality of patterns are arranged to circulate is used as one pattern row, and each of the plurality of pattern rows formed by arranging a plurality of bodies including the said body can be variably displayed by rotating each of the plurality of bodies.

At least some of the rotating bodies constituting the plurality of pattern rows are allowed to expand and contract in a predetermined direction intersecting with the rotating direction of the rotating body by an expansion mechanism, and the expanding and contracting mechanism is expanded and contracted by the operation means provided in the rotating body acting on the peripheral side of the side surface substantially perpendicular to the rotation axis of the rotating body.

During an acceleration period from when the variable display of the plurality of pattern rows by the variation execution means reaches high-speed variation from the stop of the variation, the pattern width change control means operates the operating means of the rotating body constituting the pattern row to contract the extension mechanism, thereby changing the width of the pattern to be small.

Therefore, even when the pattern row is a three-dimensional body, it is possible to reduce the area in which the variable display is performed, and by reducing the area in which the variable display is performed, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling that the variable display is difficult to see.

In addition, since the operation of the operating means is performed during the acceleration period from when the variable display of the plurality of symbol rows reaches the high-speed variation from the stop of the variation, the force acting on the peripheral side of the side surface substantially orthogonal to the rotation axis of the rotating body is likely to be evenly applied by the operating means, and it is possible to suppress the occurrence of troubles in the contraction of the expansion and contraction mechanism that expands and contracts in the predetermined direction.

<Feature L0>
A light guide member provided at a position overlapping the front side of the structure so that a predetermined structure (reel device 710) can be visually recognized from the front side, and having a plate-shaped (or formed with a substantially constant thickness) light guide curved portion (curved portion 715B1) that curves and protrudes forward when viewed from the side of a predetermined direction that intersects the front-rear direction in the front view of the game machine, and guides light in a predetermined continuous direction that intersects the thickness direction (or a predetermined continuous direction in which the plate surface is continuous). a light guide member (light guide plate 715B) capable of emitting and displaying a predetermined image (pattern 743) at least on the light guide curved portion when light is incident from predetermined end sides (end surfaces 715B4 and 715B5) so that light travels along a predetermined continuous direction in which light can be emitted;
light emitting means (light emitting means 824, 834) for outputting light incident on the predetermined end side of the light guide member;
and a changing means (driving solenoid 1731) capable of changing the light emission display of the light guide curved portion by the light incident from the light emitting means in a state where the output of the light incident on the predetermined end side from the light emitting means is kept substantially constant.

Pachinko machines are typical examples of game machines. In a typical conventional pachinko machine, when a ball enters a starting hole provided in a game area, a lottery is conducted according to the ball entering, and when a big win is won in the lottery, a special game state is established and a large number of game balls can enter the winning hole. In recent years, there is known a pachinko machine that diversifies the effects by providing a light guide plate that emits light and displays a predetermined design in the game area by injecting light from the end face (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-80625).

However, the mode of displaying a predetermined design by means of a light guide plate (light guide member) has a problem that the light emitted from a light source such as an LED uniformly shines, and the variation of the mode displayed by the light guide tends to be scarce.

On the other hand, with the gaming machine described in feature L0, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of realizing diversification of image display modes by the light guide member. That is, a light guide member having a plate-shaped light guide curved portion that projects forward in a curved shape when viewed from a predetermined direction that intersects the front-rear direction when viewed from the front of the game machine is provided at a position overlapping the front side of the structure so that the predetermined structure can be visually recognized from the front side. The light guide member is configured to be able to emit light and display a predetermined image at least on the light guide curved portion when light is incident from a predetermined end side so that the light travels along a predetermined continuous direction that intersects the thickness direction. A light emitting means is provided so that light is incident on a predetermined end portion side of the light guide member.

In this way, since a predetermined image can be displayed on the light guide curved portion, when a predetermined structure including a shape that curves and protrudes forward is arranged on the rear side of the light guide curved portion, the predetermined image can be displayed in front of the predetermined structure without a large distance as a whole. Therefore, even if the viewpoint position of the player changes due to the player's height, posture, etc., the position where the predetermined image is superimposed and displayed on the front side of the predetermined structure does not greatly shift, and the predetermined image can be displayed at an appropriate position.

Further, the light emission display of the light guide curved portion by the light incident from the light emitting means can be changed by the changing means while the output of the light incident on the predetermined end side of the light guide member from the light emitting means is kept substantially constant. Therefore, it becomes difficult for the light-emitting display of the light guide curved portion to be uniform, and it is possible to realize diversification of image display modes by the light guide member.

In the gaming machine according to feature L0, the change in the luminous display of the light guiding curved portion by the changing means may be, for example, a change in how the predetermined image luminously displayed on the light guiding curved portion illuminates, a change in the position at which the image illuminates, or a change in the color of the luminous display of the image.

<Feature L1>
The gaming machine according to feature L0,
The changing means changes the curvature of the light guiding curved part in a state in which the positional relationship between the light emitting means and the predetermined end of the light guide member is kept substantially constant, thereby making it possible to change the light emission display of the light guiding curved part according to the light incident from the light emitting means.

In the gaming machine described in feature L1, the light emission display of the light guide curved portion by the light incident from the light emitting means can be changed by changing the curvature of the light guide curved portion of the light guide member while the positional relationship between the light emitting means and the predetermined end portion of the light guide member is kept substantially constant by the changing means. Therefore, the installed light guide member can be used as it is to change the light emission display of the light guide curved portion.

<Feature M0>
a first light guide member (light guide plate 1751) having a first light guide portion capable of emitting and displaying a predetermined first image (pattern 1761) by the light when light is incident from a predetermined end portion side (the upper end surface and the lower end surface of the light guide plate 1751) so that the light travels along a predetermined continuous direction (or a predetermined continuous direction in which the plate surface is continuous, or a predetermined continuous direction in which light can be guided) that intersects the thickness direction;
first light emitting means (light emitting means provided above and below the light guide plate 1751) that outputs light incident on the predetermined end side of the first light guide member;
The second light guide member is provided on the front side or the rear side of the first light guide member, and is a second light guide portion that can emit and display a predetermined second image (pattern 1781) when light is incident from a predetermined end portion side (the upper end surface or the lower end surface of the light guide plate 1771) so that the light travels along a predetermined continuous direction that intersects the thickness direction (or a predetermined continuous direction in which the plate surface is continuous, or a predetermined continuous direction in which light can be guided). a second light guide member (light guide plate 1771) that can be arranged over the first light guide section;
second light emitting means (light emitting means provided above and below the light guide plate 1771) for outputting light incident on the predetermined end side of the second light guide member;
and moving means (light guide plate supporting portion 1772, gear 1773) for moving at least one of the first light guide member and the second light guide member in a direction crossing a direction in which the first light guide member and the second light guide member overlap so that one of the first light guide portion and the second light guide portion moves relative to the other.

Pachinko machines are typical examples of game machines. In a typical conventional pachinko machine, when a ball enters a starting hole provided in a game area, a lottery is conducted according to the ball entering, and when a big win is won in the lottery, a special game state is established and a large number of game balls can enter the winning hole. In recent years, there is known a pachinko machine that diversifies the effects by providing a light guide plate that emits light and displays a predetermined design in the game area by injecting light from the end face (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-80625).

However, a predetermined design that is displayed by light emission on a light guide plate (light guide member) has a fixed display position on the light guide plate.

On the other hand, with the gaming machine described in feature M0, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of realizing diversification of image display modes by the light guide member. That is, the first light guide member is provided with a light guide portion capable of displaying a predetermined first image by light emission when the light is incident from a predetermined end side so that the light travels along a predetermined continuous direction that intersects with the thickness direction. A first light emitting means is provided so that light is incident on a predetermined end portion side of the first light guide member.

A second light guide member is provided on the front side or the rear side of the first light guide member, and has a light guide portion capable of displaying a predetermined second image by light emission when the light is incident from a predetermined end side so that the light travels along a predetermined continuous direction crossing the thickness direction. A second light emitting means is provided so that light is incident on a predetermined end side of the second light guide member.

At least one of the first light guide member and the second light guide member is moved by the moving means in a direction crossing the overlapping direction of the first light guide member and the second light guide member, thereby moving one of the first light guide section and the second light guide section relative to the other. Since one of the first light guide part and the second light guide part is relatively movable with respect to the other, compared to the case where the first light guide member and the second light guide member are fixed (that is, one does not move relative to the other), it is possible to increase the variation of the display mode by the combination of the first image and the second image that can be visually recognized by the player from the front of the first light guide member and the second light guide member. Therefore, it is possible to realize diversification of image display modes by the light guide member.

<Feature N0>
A variable display unit (reel device 710, decorative pattern display device 479) that can variably display identification information,
A lottery means (main control board 920) that performs a predetermined lottery when a predetermined start condition is satisfied;
a variation execution means (sub-control board 940) for stopping and displaying the identification information corresponding to the result of the lottery by the lottery means after the variation display unit variably displays the identification information when the starting condition is satisfied;
game control means (main control board 920) for generating a special game state, which is a game state more advantageous than a normal game state, by stop-displaying the identification information corresponding to the first result by the variation execution means when the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined first result;
holding means (main control board 920) for storing information corresponding to the result of the lottery by the lottery means in a predetermined storage unit (RAM of the main control board 920) and suspending the execution of the variable display corresponding to the information by the fluctuation execution means when the starting condition is satisfied when the variable display is performed by the variable execution means;
a pending display unit (holding count display area 1810) capable of displaying a pending display (holding icon 1812) corresponding to the number of information whose execution of variable display is suspended by the holding means, corresponding to the number of the information;
Suspension display control means (sub-controller) capable of displaying, on the suspension display unit, when the new starting condition is satisfied in a situation where the execution of at least one variable display is suspended by the suspension means, as the suspension display corresponding to the satisfaction of the new starting condition, the first suspension display in which the execution of the variable display has already been suspended and the second suspension display in a display mode different from the first suspension display according to the time interval from the satisfaction of the starting condition for the first suspension display to the satisfaction of the new starting condition. A game machine characterized by comprising a substrate 940) and.

Conventionally, there is a pachinko machine as a typical example of gaming machines. In a typical conventional pachinko machine, a starting condition is established by entering a ball into a starting hole provided in a game area, and a lottery is performed, and when a big hit is won in the lottery, a special game state occurs and a large number of game balls can enter the winning hole.

However, there is a possibility that there is still room for improvement in such a conventional gaming machine. For example, a player can sensuously grasp the degree of ease with which the start condition is met for a pachinko machine during play based on the number of times the start condition is met with respect to the number of game balls shot, but it may be difficult to grasp the degree of ease with which the start condition is met in a short period of time. In the case of adjusting the shooting force of the game ball, it is preferable that the easiness of establishment of the short-term start condition be easily grasped.

On the other hand, with the gaming machine described in feature N0, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that allows the player to grasp the degree of ease with which the short-term start condition is satisfied at a certain time. That is, when a predetermined starting condition is satisfied, the identification information corresponding to the lottery result by the lottery means is stopped and displayed after the identification information is variably displayed on the variable display portion by the variation executing means. At this time, if the lottery result is a predetermined first result, a special game state more advantageous than the normal game state is generated by the game control means after the identification information corresponding to the first result is stop-displayed.

When a starting condition is satisfied while the variable display is performed by the variable execution means, the holding means stores the information corresponding to the result of the lottery by the lottery means in a prescribed storage part, thereby holding the information up to a prescribed number until the variable display corresponding to the information is executed by the fluctuation execution means. Suspended displays corresponding to the number of information whose execution of variable display is suspended by the suspending means are displayed on the suspended display portion corresponding to the number of the information.

When a new starting condition is met in a state where the execution of at least one variable display is suspended by the suspending means, the suspending display control means displays, as the suspended display corresponding to the establishment of the new starting condition, the first suspending display in which the execution of the variable display has already been suspended and the second suspending display having a display mode different from the first suspending display in accordance with the time interval from when the starting condition for the first suspending display is satisfied until when the new starting condition is satisfied.

Therefore, the player can recognize the time interval from the establishment of the start condition for the first hold display to the establishment of the start condition for the second hold display from the display mode of the second hold display. As a result, the player can preferably grasp the degree of likelihood that the starting condition will be satisfied, and can grasp, for example, the degree of likelihood that the short-term starting condition will be satisfied at a certain time.

<Feature N1>
The gaming machine according to feature N0,
The gaming machine is characterized by comprising a variable time setting means for setting, when a new starting condition is met in a situation where execution of at least one variable display is suspended by the suspending means, a variation time for the variable display of the identification information executed by the variation executing means in response to the establishment of the new starting condition to vary according to a time interval from when the starting condition for the first suspended display is met until when the new starting condition is met.

<Feature N2>
The gaming machine according to feature N0,
The gaming machine is characterized by comprising a variable time setting means for setting the variable time to a value corresponding to the number of pieces of information whose execution of the variable display is suspended by the suspending means so that the variable time of the variable display of the identification information differs according to the time interval from when the starting condition is satisfied until when the new starting condition is satisfied.

In the gaming machine according to features N1 and N2, when a new starting condition is established in a state where the execution of at least one variable display is suspended by the suspending means, the variable time setting means can vary the variable display period of the variable display of the identification information executed by the variable execution means in response to the establishment of the new starting condition according to the time interval from the establishment of the first starting condition to the establishment of the new starting condition, and the fluctuation time of the variable display of the identification information can be set according to the establishment interval of the starting condition. .

<Feature P0>
A variable display unit (reel device 710, decorative pattern display device 479) that can variably display identification information,
A lottery means (main control board 920) that performs a predetermined lottery when a predetermined start condition is satisfied;
a variation execution means (sub-control board 940) for stopping and displaying the identification information corresponding to the result of the lottery by the lottery means after the variation display unit variably displays the identification information when the starting condition is satisfied;
game control means (main control board 920) for generating a special game state, which is a game state more advantageous than a normal game state, by stop-displaying the identification information corresponding to the first result by the variation execution means when the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined first result;
holding means (main control board 920) for storing information corresponding to the result of the lottery by the lottery means in a predetermined storage unit (RAM of the main control board 920) and suspending the execution of the variable display corresponding to the information by the fluctuation execution means when the starting condition is satisfied when the variable display is performed by the variable execution means;
a pending display unit (holding count display area 1810) capable of displaying a pending display (holding icon 1812) corresponding to the number of information whose execution of variable display is suspended by the holding means, corresponding to the number of the information;
and a holding display control means (sub-control board 940) for displaying a predetermined display (holding schedule icon 1811) corresponding to establishment of the next starting condition to be scheduled after that in the holding means in a state where execution of at least one variable display is put on hold by the holding means.

Conventionally, there is a pachinko machine as a typical example of gaming machines. In a typical conventional pachinko machine, a starting condition is established by entering a ball into a starting hole provided in a game area, and a lottery is performed, and when a big hit is won in the lottery, a special game state occurs and a large number of game balls can enter the winning hole.

However, there is a possibility that there is still room for improvement in such a conventional gaming machine. For example, the player may not be able to recognize whether the lottery is performed with the establishment of the start condition or whether the lottery is not performed with the establishment of the start condition for the pachinko machine in play.

On the other hand, with the gaming machine described in feature P0, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the player can preferably recognize whether or not a lottery will be conducted in accordance with the establishment of the starting condition. That is, when a predetermined starting condition is satisfied, the identification information corresponding to the lottery result by the lottery means is stopped and displayed after the identification information is variably displayed on the variable display portion by the variation executing means. At this time, if the lottery result is a predetermined first result, a special game state more advantageous than the normal game state is generated by the game control means after the identification information corresponding to the first result is stop-displayed.

When a starting condition is satisfied while the variable display is performed by the variable execution means, the holding means stores the information corresponding to the result of the lottery by the lottery means in a prescribed storage part, thereby holding the information up to a prescribed number until the variable display corresponding to the information is executed by the fluctuation execution means. Suspended displays corresponding to the number of information whose execution of variable display is suspended by the suspending means are displayed on the suspended display portion corresponding to the number of the information.

In a situation where execution of at least one variable display is suspended by the suspension means, the suspension display control means displays a predetermined display corresponding to establishment of the next starting condition scheduled thereafter on the suspension display part. Therefore, since the player can recognize in advance the display mode of the pending display corresponding to the establishment of the next start condition, it is possible to easily recognize the progress of the game.

<Feature P1>
The gaming machine according to feature P0, wherein the holding display control means changes the display mode of the predetermined display according to the elapsed time since the last starting condition was satisfied, and displays the holding display corresponding to the establishment of the next starting condition in a display mode corresponding to the display mode of the predetermined display when the next starting condition is newly satisfied.

According to the gaming machine described in the feature P1, the display mode of the predetermined display is changed by the suspension display control means according to the elapsed time after the last start condition is satisfied, and when the next start condition is newly satisfied, the display mode of the suspension display corresponding to the establishment of the next start condition is determined.

Therefore, the display mode of the predetermined display that changes according to the elapsed time after the last establishment of the starting condition is determined as the display mode of the holding display corresponding to the establishment of the next starting condition when the next starting condition is newly established, so that the player can recognize the elapsed time required from the last establishment of the starting condition to the establishment of the new starting condition from the fixed display mode of the holding display. As a result, the player can grasp the degree of likelihood that the short-term starting condition will be satisfied at a certain time. Therefore, when adjusting the position of the firing operation, it is possible to easily grasp the likelihood that the short-term start condition will be satisfied.

In particular, since the display mode of the pending display changes according to the elapsed time after the last establishment of the starting condition, the player can sensuously grasp the elapsed time after the last establishment of the starting condition from the change of the display mode.

In the gaming machine described in feature P1, "when the next starting condition is newly established, the display mode of the predetermined display is determined as the display mode of the holding display corresponding to the establishment of the next starting condition" means that the display mode of the holding display corresponding to the establishment of the next starting condition does not necessarily have to take over the entire display mode of the predetermined display and be determined, and at least part or all of the portion of the display mode of the predetermined display that has changed according to the elapsed time since the last time the starting condition was satisfied. It is sufficient if the configuration is determined by inheriting

<Feature Q0>
A variable display unit (reel device 710, decorative pattern display device 479) that can variably display identification information,
A lottery means (main control board 920) that performs a predetermined lottery when a predetermined start condition is satisfied;
a variation execution means (sub-control board 940) for stopping and displaying the identification information corresponding to the result of the lottery by the lottery means after the variation display unit variably displays the identification information when the starting condition is satisfied;
game control means (main control board 920) for generating a special game state, which is a game state more advantageous than a normal game state, by stop-displaying the identification information corresponding to the first result by the variation execution means when the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined first result;
a display control means (sub-control board 940) for updating the display contents of a predetermined display section (table state icon display area 1820) displaying a predetermined display (table state icon 1821) when a new start condition is not satisfied even after a predetermined first period has elapsed since the start condition was satisfied during a predetermined game period.

Conventionally, there is a pachinko machine as a typical example of gaming machines. In a typical conventional pachinko machine, a starting condition is established by entering a ball into a starting hole provided in a game area, and a lottery is performed, and when a big hit is won in the lottery, a special game state occurs and a large number of game balls can enter the winning hole.

However, there is a possibility that there is still room for improvement in such a conventional gaming machine. For example, a player can intuitively grasp the degree of ease with which a starting condition is established for a predetermined pachinko machine based on games played over a certain period of time, but when the player feels that the starting condition is difficult to be established, it is difficult to judge whether it is due to chance or a malfunction of the machine.

On the other hand, with the gaming machine described in feature Q0, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that allows the player to easily judge the state of the gaming machine. That is, when a predetermined starting condition is satisfied, the identification information corresponding to the lottery result by the lottery means is stopped and displayed after the identification information is variably displayed on the variable display portion by the variation executing means. At this time, if the lottery result is a predetermined first result, a special game state more advantageous than the normal game state is generated by the game control means after the identification information corresponding to the first result is stop-displayed.

When a new starting condition is not satisfied even after a predetermined first period has passed since the starting condition is satisfied during a predetermined game period, display contents of a predetermined display part displaying a predetermined display are updated by a display control means.

Therefore, the more the display contents of the predetermined display part are updated, the more likely there is some trouble that makes it difficult to establish the starting condition, so the player can determine the state of the game machine by confirming the display contents of the predetermined display part.

Further, since the display contents of the prescribed display part are updated based on the establishment interval of the starting condition during the prescribed game period, it is possible to exclude the event that the establishment interval of the starting condition becomes longer due to the non-playing of the game. Therefore, it is possible to increase the reliability of the display content of the predetermined display unit.

In the gaming machine described in feature Q0, "during a predetermined game period" may be a period during which a player is playing a game, a period during which a game ball is being shot, a period during which a condition for shooting a game ball is satisfied, a predetermined game state (for example, during a normal game state), a period during which identification information is being variably displayed, or a period when a plurality of conditions including the above condition or other conditions are satisfied. .

<Feature Q1>
The gaming machine according to feature Q0,
The display control means stepwise updates the display contents of a predetermined display portion (table state icon display area 1820) where the predetermined display (table state icon 1821) is displayed in a predetermined direction (direction in which the table state icon 1821 decreases).

It should be noted that the display control means may update to a plurality of types of modes according to the number of times the new starting condition is not satisfied even after a predetermined first period has elapsed since the starting condition was satisfied.

<Feature Q2>
The gaming machine according to feature Q1,
The display control means is
The game machine is characterized in that, when a new start condition is satisfied a predetermined number of times consecutively before a predetermined second period shorter than the first period elapses after the start condition is satisfied during a predetermined game period, the display contents of the predetermined display part are returned by a predetermined step in a direction opposite to the predetermined direction (a direction in which the table state icon 1821 increases).

In the game machine described in the feature Q2, when a new starting condition is satisfied continuously for a predetermined number of times before a predetermined second period shorter than the first period elapses after the starting condition is satisfied during a predetermined game period, the display content of the predetermined display part displaying the predetermined display is returned by the predetermined step in the direction opposite to the predetermined direction by the display control means.

When a new starting condition continues to be established a predetermined number of times before a second period elapses after the starting condition is established, there is a low possibility that there is a problem that makes it difficult to establish the starting condition.

<Feature R0>
Determination means (a part of the processing of the main control board 920) for determining whether or not a predetermined specific game start condition is satisfied when a predetermined start condition is satisfied;
Determination information display means (special symbol display devices 471 and 472) for displaying information corresponding to the determination result of the determination means;
When it is determined that the specific game start condition is satisfied by the determination means, a specific game state (special game state, probability variable game state and time reduction game state) that is advantageous to the player compared to the normal game state Specific game state control means (each process for controlling the special game state, probability variable game state and time reduction game state of the main control board 920),
A gaming machine comprising a display control means (sub control board 940) for controlling a display means for displaying a result corresponding to whether or not the specific game start condition is satisfied,
The specific game state control means is
As the specific game state,
A special game state in which a variable winning portion, to which a predetermined game value is awarded when a game ball enters, is controlled to a predetermined entry-permitting posture;
A first game state (probability variable game state) in which the starting condition is more likely to be satisfied than in the normal game state and in which the specific game start condition is satisfied with a higher probability than in the normal game state;
At least a second game state (time-saving game state) in which the starting condition is more likely to be satisfied than in the normal game state and in which the specific game start condition is satisfied at a lower probability than the first game state is generated,
When the determination means determines that the first specific game start condition (jackpot 1) is satisfied, the special game state and the first game state are generated, and the first game state is controlled to continue at least until the specific game start condition is satisfied,
In the first game state, when the determination means determines that the second specific game start condition (jackpot 2) is satisfied, the special game state and the second game state are generated, and the second game state is continued until the unit game based on the establishment of the start condition (one game from the start of the variation display to the result display) is executed a predetermined number of times (100 times) or until the specific game start condition is satisfied during the execution of the unit game of the predetermined number of times. performing control to shift to a normal game state at least continuously when the unit game is executed the predetermined number of times in the second game state;
The display control means is
When the second specific game start condition is satisfied in the first game state, the display content (battle standby display) that was displayed when the second specific game start condition was not satisfied in the first game state is continuously displayed, and the specific game start condition is satisfied in the unit game of the predetermined number of times or more after the unit game has been executed a predetermined number of times or more (80 times) in the second game state shifted by the establishment of the second specific game start condition. A gaming machine comprising means for displaying a predetermined effect display (effect display of battle defeat) corresponding to establishment of the second specific game start condition when the second specific game start condition is not satisfied.

In a typical conventional pachinko machine, a lottery is conducted when a game ball enters a starting hole provided in a game area to start winning a prize, and when a big win is won in the lottery, a special game state is entered and a large number of game balls can enter the winning hole. In addition, after the special game state, there is known a configuration that returns to the normal game state after transitioning to a game state that is advantageous for the player, such as a variable probability game state or a reduced working hours game state.

The pachinko machine is provided with a display device, and the display device starts the variable display of patterns based on the lottery, and displays the stop result according to the lottery result as the final stop display of the variable display. Then, it is known that during the variable display of symbols, performance display of various character symbols etc. is performed, and the degree of expectation of a big hit according to the type of the displayed character pattern etc. is suggested to the player (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2009-153699).

However, if the probability of transition to an advantageous game state or the probability of the continuation of an advantageous game state is set high, the projectileness will increase, so it is sometimes desirable to set the probability low. On the other hand, if the probability of transition to an advantageous game state and the probability of continuation are set low, and the probability of transition from an advantageous game state to a normal game state is set high, the execution frequency of the performance display suggesting the transition to the normal game state increases accordingly, and visually recognizing the performance display reduces the desire to continue the game, and there is a possibility that the player will move to a game machine with high fascination. In other words, there is a problem that it is difficult to execute an effect display suitable for the player while keeping the probability of transition to an advantageous game state and the probability of continuation of an advantageous game state low.

According to the gaming machine described in the characteristic R0, when the first specific game start condition is satisfied, the special game state and the first game state are generated as the specific game state, and when the second specific game start condition is satisfied in the first game state, the special game state and the second game state are generated. This second game state continues at least until the unit game based on the fulfillment of the start condition is executed a predetermined number of times, or until the specific game start condition is satisfied during execution of the unit game for the predetermined number of times.

Then, when the second specific game start condition is satisfied in the first game state, the display contents displayed when the second specific game start condition is not satisfied in the first game state are continuously displayed. Therefore, even if the player visually recognizes the display contents of the display means, the player cannot recognize that the first game state has shifted to the second game state, and after the unit game is executed a predetermined number of times or more, the player visually recognizes the predetermined performance display, and when the second specific game start condition is established and the predetermined number of unit games are completed, the player can recognize with a delay that the game state returns to the normal game state.

On the other hand, even if the game state is shifted to the second game state, when the specific game start condition is established before the predetermined performance display is displayed, the game state is shifted to another game state such as the first game state through the special game state, or the second game state is started again, and in this case, the predetermined performance display at the scheduled timing is not displayed. Therefore, by visually recognizing the predetermined performance display, the player can reduce the chance of recognizing the situation where the second specific game start condition is established and the possibility of returning to the normal game state is increased by the display contents. Therefore, among the establishment of the specific game start condition, the probability of visually recognizing the predetermined performance display can be kept lower than the probability of establishment of the second specific game start condition for returning to the normal game state, and the player can be easily given an impression as if the probability of establishment of the second specific game start condition is set low and the probability of continuing the specific game state is high. As a result, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of executing an effect display suitable for the player while suppressing the probability of transition to an advantageous game state and the probability of continuation of an advantageous game state.

It should be noted that, when the display control means continues to display the display contents that have been displayed, the display mode of the character when the character is displayed may be the same as the unit game in the case where the second specific game start condition is satisfied in the first game state and the unit game executed before the unit game to the extent that the player can visually recognize that there is no change. Further, the display contents to be continuously displayed are not limited to the case where the character is displayed, and may be the display contents in which the variable display is executed in substantially the same variable time and the substantially same result display is performed as the variable display of the pattern.

Further, the probability of displaying the predetermined effect display by the means for displaying the predetermined effect display of the display control means is 100% probability, that is, the predetermined effect display is always displayed when the specific game start condition is not satisfied in the unit game of the predetermined number of times or more after the unit game is executed a predetermined number of times or more in the second game state shifted by the establishment of the second specific game start condition, but the predetermined effect display is displayed at a high probability exceeding at least 50%. It is preferable to set the predetermined effect display to be displayed with a high probability exceeding 70%, and it is preferable to set the predetermined effect display to be displayed with a high probability exceeding 90%.

<Feature R1>
The gaming machine according to feature R0, wherein the display control means
a first effect control means for causing the display means to display, on the display means, a first effect display corresponding to establishment of the second specific game start condition, which is an effect display in which a predetermined character moves in the last or the predetermined number of times of the unit game, if the specific game start condition is not satisfied until the unit game is executed the last or near the last predetermined number of times of the predetermined number of times in the second game state;
a second effect control means for causing the display means to display a second effect display in which the predetermined character operates in the unit game in which the first specific game start condition is satisfied, when the first specific game start condition is satisfied before execution of the unit game of the last or near-last predetermined number of the predetermined times in the second game state;
The game machine is characterized by comprising a predetermined display continuation means for continuing to display the predetermined display contents displayed in the first game state without displaying the performance display in which the predetermined character moves on the display means in the unit game in which the second specific game start condition is established in the first game state.

According to the game machine described in the feature R1, a player can know which specific game start condition has been established by the performance of the same character acting, and can easily know the established specific game start condition by partially common performance contents. Also, even if the second specific game start condition is met, if the first specific game start condition is met within a fixed period after that, the second performance display is executed, and the first performance display corresponding to the establishment of the second specific game start condition for shifting to the normal game state can be made invisible, and the establishment of the second specific game start condition can be made unrecognizable. Therefore, it is possible to easily give the impression that the first game state has been continued, and to suppress the opportunity to know the situation that the first game state is shifted to the second game state or the shift to the normal game state is approaching.

<Feature R2>
A gaming machine according to feature R0 or R1,
The display means includes a display unit capable of variably displaying identification information,
The display control means repeatedly displays a short-time variable display (a variable display of 5 seconds or less or a variable display of 2 seconds or less) as the predetermined display content each time the unit game is executed.

According to the game machine described in the feature R2, even if the player visually recognizes the contents of the variable display, the player does not need to visually recognize the transition from the first game state to the second game state, so that it is possible to easily give the impression that the first game state continues.

<Feature R3>
The gaming machine according to feature R2,
The display control means displays, as the short-time variable display, a specific variable display when the second specific game start condition is satisfied in the first game state in a shorter time than a normal variable display performed before and after the variable display when the specific game start condition is not satisfied.

According to the gaming machine described in feature R3, the specific variable display when the second specific game start condition is satisfied in the first game state is a variable display executed before and after the variable display and is displayed in a shorter time than the normal variable display when the specific game start condition is not satisfied. Therefore, even if a special game state ending in a short time is set as the special game state during the time difference of the fluctuation time, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize the occurrence of the special game state. Therefore, it is made difficult for the player to recognize the variable display of the unit game in which the second specific game start condition is established and the special game state generated by the unit game, thereby making it easier to give the impression that the first game state is continuing.

<Feature R4>
The gaming machine according to feature R3,
The specific game state control means is characterized in that, when the second specific game start condition is satisfied, the special game state is a special game state different from that when the first specific game start condition is satisfied, and is a short-time special game state which ends in substantially the same time as the time difference between the specific variable display and the normal variable display.

According to the gaming machine described in feature R4, it is possible to make it even more difficult for the player to recognize the establishment of the second specific game start condition, and to make it easier to impart the impression that the first game state is continuing.

<Feature S0>
Determination means (a part of the processing of the main control board 920) for determining whether or not a predetermined specific game start condition is satisfied when a predetermined start condition is satisfied;
Determination information display means (special symbol display devices 471 and 472) for displaying information corresponding to the determination result of the determination means;
When it is determined that the specific game start condition is satisfied by the determination means, a specific game state (special game state, probability variable game state and time reduction game state) that is advantageous to the player compared to the normal game state Specific game state control means (each process for controlling the special game state, probability variable game state and time reduction game state of the main control board 920),
A gaming machine comprising display control means for controlling display contents including display means for displaying a result corresponding to whether or not the specific game start condition is satisfied,
The specific game state control means (sub control board 940)
When it is determined by the determination means that the specific game start condition (jackpot 2) with a limited number of times has been established, as a specific game state more advantageous than the normal game state, the unit game based on the establishment of the start condition (one game from the start of the variable display to the result display) is executed a predetermined number of times, or control is performed to generate a limited number of times game state that continues at least until the specific game start condition is satisfied during the execution of the unit game of the predetermined number of times.
The display control means is
a first effect control means for controlling to display on the display means a first effect display (battle defeat) corresponding to establishment of the specific game start condition with the number limit, which is a effect display in which a predetermined character moves and the number-limited game state is entered, if the specific game start condition is not met until the unit game is executed the last or near-last predetermined number of times (80 times) of the predetermined number of times in the number-limited game state;
a second effect control means for performing control to display, on the display means, a second effect display (battle victory) corresponding to establishment of the specific game start condition, which is a effect display in which a predetermined character operates when the specific game start condition is satisfied before the last or near-last unit game of the predetermined number of times in the number-limited game state is executed;
and period effect control means for performing period display (invincible time and invincible period display) indicating a predetermined fixed effect period when the number of executions of the unit game remains above a certain level in the number-limited game state, wherein during the fixed effect period, the second effect display is displayed only when the specific game start condition is satisfied, and the effect display in which the predetermined character operates is executed.

In a typical conventional pachinko machine, a lottery is conducted when a game ball enters a starting hole provided in a game area to start winning a prize, and when a big win is won in the lottery, a special game state is entered and a large number of game balls can enter the winning hole. In addition, after the special game state, there is known a configuration that returns to the normal game state after transitioning to a game state that is advantageous for the player, such as a variable probability game state or a reduced working hours game state.

The pachinko machine is provided with a display device, and the display device starts the variable display of patterns based on the lottery, and displays the stop result according to the lottery result as the final stop display of the variable display. In addition, a display condition (a so-called mission) such as an instruction to display a predetermined effect display is issued during the variable display, for example, the display of "Go for reach with the symbol (7)" is displayed on the display screen, and when the effect display that satisfies the instruction is displayed on the display screen in the variable display that is executed during the display period.

However, as control of the effect display for which the display condition is issued, the effect display is controlled so as not to be displayed on the display screen unless a predetermined lottery is won. Therefore, even if the player is interested in the content of the presentation, there may be a case where the content cannot be confirmed. In this case, there is a possibility that the content of the performance will be noticed, or that the performance that was actually displayed may have been overlooked and the player may have overlooked the big win.

According to the gaming machine described in feature S0, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably executing the control of the effect display in which the display condition is issued. That is, in the number-limited game state, if the specific game start condition is not satisfied until the predetermined number of unit games are executed at the end or near the end of the predetermined number of times, the effect display in which the predetermined character operates and the first effect display corresponding to the non-satisfaction of the specific game start condition is displayed on the display means is executed after the fixed effect period has passed. can always be confirmed by the first effect display. Also, since the period display indicating the fixed performance period is performed when the number of execution times of the unit game remains above a fixed number in the number-of-times limited game state, the first performance display can be set to be executed after the fixed performance period ends. When the specific game start condition is satisfied within the fixed performance period, the second performance display is displayed and the performance display in which the specified character operates is executed, so that the display condition such as the display of the specified character is presented along with the period display during the fixed performance period, and the game property of generating the special game state when the display condition is satisfied can be provided to the player. Therefore, after the period display is displayed, the player can certainly generate an opportunity to visually recognize the performance display in which the predetermined character operates, and the game machine can be made to facilitate the continuation of the game by reducing the dissatisfied situation that makes the player worry about the contents of the performance.

<Feature S1>
The gaming machine according to feature S0,
The period effect display control means performs a plurality of kinds of period displays indicating fixed effect periods with different period lengths, and the game machine is characterized in that the period display including the period display of the long fixed effect period selected when the remaining number of times of the unit game in the number-limited game state is equal to or greater than a predetermined number.

According to the game machine described in the feature S1, a plurality of kinds of period display indicating fixed performance periods with different period lengths is performed, and as a part thereof, the period display of a long fixed performance period selected when the remaining number of times of the unit game is equal to or more than a predetermined number is included, so that it is possible to add a game feature of guessing the number of remaining times of the unit game in the number-limited game state by the displayed period display.

The remaining number of unit games in the number-limited game state may be the number of remaining unit games in which the specific game start condition is not established even if the starting condition is established in the number-limited game state, and the variable display is not yet executed (it may not be started or ended).

<Feature T0>
A game area (game area) where game balls entering from a predetermined entrance flow down;
A plurality of ball entrances (general prize winning devices 2439A, 2439B, etc.) provided in the game area into which game balls can enter;
Privilege granting means (main control board 920) for imparting a predetermined privilege according to the ball entrance into which the game ball enters when the game ball enters a predetermined ball entrance among the plurality of ball entrances;
A setting storage means (RAM of the main control board 920) for storing probability information corresponding to a probability set as a lottery probability among a plurality of probabilities that a predetermined lottery result is selected in a predetermined lottery in a game; an input means (rear setting switch 905, initialization switch 907) capable of inputting operation information corresponding to an operation for changing the probability information stored in the setting storage means to the probability information corresponding to one of the plurality of probabilities;
setting change means (main control board 920) for changing the probability information stored in the setting storage means to the probability information corresponding to the operation information input by the input means;
a setting output means (main control board 920, sub control board 940) for outputting setting output information corresponding to the probability information stored in the setting storage means when a predetermined condition regarding entry of a game ball into the predetermined ball entrance among the plurality of ball entrances is established.

In the gaming machine described in feature T0, the ``predetermined condition regarding entry of a game ball into a predetermined ball entrance'' includes, for example, that a game ball enters one or more predetermined ball entrances among a plurality of ball entrances, that a game ball enters two or more predetermined ball entrances among a plurality of ball entrances in a predetermined order, and that a game ball enters one or more predetermined ball entrances among a plurality of ball entrances. number of game balls entering a predetermined ball entrance out of a plurality of ball entrances, information on the number of entries updated in response to entry into a predetermined ball entrance, or a predetermined condition for corresponding information counted in correspondence with the information on the number of entries, and even if a predetermined period of time elapses after the start condition based on the entry of the game ball into one or more predetermined ball entrances out of the plurality of ball entrances is established during a predetermined game period, a new start condition is established. It includes the occurrence of a predetermined number of times in which a situation in which no operation is performed is determined.

<Feature U0>
A game area (game area) where game balls entering from a predetermined entrance flow down;
A plurality of ball entrances (general winning devices 2439A, 2439B, etc.) provided in the game area and into which game balls can enter;
Privilege granting means (main control board 920) for imparting a predetermined privilege according to the ball entrance into which the game ball enters when the game ball enters a predetermined ball entrance among the plurality of ball entrances;
A setting storage means (RAM of the main control board 920) for storing probability information corresponding to the probability set as the lottery probability among a plurality of probabilities that can be set as the lottery probability that a predetermined lottery result is selected in a predetermined lottery in a game;
input means (rear setting switch 905, initialization switch 907) capable of inputting operation information corresponding to an operation for changing the probability information stored in the setting storage means to the probability information corresponding to one of the plurality of probabilities;
setting change means (main control board 920) for changing the probability information stored in the setting storage means to the probability information corresponding to the operation information input by the input means;
A gaming machine comprising setting output means (main control board 920, sub control board 940) for outputting setting output information corresponding to the probability information stored in the setting storage means when a predetermined condition including entry of a game ball into the predetermined ball entry hole among the plurality of ball entry holes is established.

2. Description of the Related Art As a conventional gaming machine, there is known a gaming machine having a function of setting a winning probability in a plurality of stages in a lottery for transition from a normal game state to a game state advantageous to the player. In a typical conventional gaming machine having such a function, the setting of the winning probability can be changed by operating a predetermined key switch using a dedicated key by the manager of the gaming facility or the like (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2007-202870).

However, there is a possibility that there is still room for improvement in the game performance of a gaming machine that can set the lottery probability that a predetermined lottery result is selected in a predetermined lottery in multiple stages, such as the winning probability in the game state transition lottery.

On the other hand, with the gaming machine described in feature T0 and feature U0, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of favorably improving game playability. That is, the setting storage means stores probability information corresponding to the probability set as the lottery probability among a plurality of probabilities that a predetermined lottery result is selected in a predetermined lottery in the game. Operation information corresponding to an operation for changing probability information stored in the setting storage means to probability information corresponding to one of the plurality of probabilities is input to the input means. The probability information stored in the setting storage means is changed by the setting change means to probability information corresponding to the operation information input by the input means. Thereby, the lottery probability that a predetermined result is selected in a predetermined lottery can be changed to a probability corresponding to the operation information input by the input means.

A plurality of ball entrances into which the game balls can enter are provided in a game area where the game balls entering from a predetermined entrance flow down, and when the game balls enter a predetermined ball entrance among the plurality of ball entrances, a predetermined privilege corresponding to the ball entrance into which the game ball enters is given by a privilege granting means. When a predetermined condition regarding entry of a game ball into a predetermined ball entrance out of a plurality of ball entrances is established, setting output information corresponding to probability information stored in the setting storage means is output by the setting output means. Therefore, the probability information stored in the setting storage means, that is, the information corresponding to the probability currently set as the lottery probability that a predetermined result is selected in the predetermined lottery can be suggested to the player based on the output from the setting output means. Therefore, the player can add a game feature of estimating probability information about the gaming machine during play through establishment of a predetermined condition including entry of a game ball into a predetermined ball entrance. For example, considering whether the game machine is suitable for one's own taste or not, the estimated probability information can be used as one of the selection elements such as whether to continue the game or to move to another game machine, so that the game performance of the game machine in which the lottery probability can be set in a plurality of stages can be improved.

In addition, in order to satisfy the predetermined conditions for the player to guess the probability information, it is necessary to satisfy the predetermined conditions regarding the entry of the game ball into the predetermined ball entrance in the game area. Therefore, in a game machine where lottery results such as game state transition lottery tend to be paid attention to, it is possible to increase opportunities to pay attention to the entry of game balls into predetermined ball entrances, and to diversify games by setting the predetermined arrangement and number of ball entrances, etc., thereby improving the playability of the game machine using the downflow of game balls.

In particular, in the gaming machine described in feature U0, when a predetermined condition including the entry of a game ball into a predetermined ball entrance among a plurality of ball entrances is established, setting output information corresponding to probability information stored in the setting storage means is output by the setting output means, so that the player can obtain information corresponding to the probability currently set as the lottery probability that a predetermined result will be selected in the predetermined lottery as a privilege for allowing the game ball to enter the predetermined ball entrance. Therefore, the player can play the game while enjoying that the game ball enters the predetermined ball entrance.

<Feature U1>
The gaming machine according to feature U0,
The setting output means outputs the setting output information under the condition that, as at least part of the predetermined condition, game balls enter two or more predetermined ball entrances among the plurality of ball entrances in a predetermined order.

In the gaming machine described in feature U1, the setting output means outputs the setting output information corresponding to the probability information stored in the setting storage means assuming that at least a part of the predetermined condition (that is, the predetermined condition including the game ball entering the predetermined ball entrance among the plurality of ball entrances) is established when the game ball enters two or more predetermined ball entrances in a predetermined order among the plurality of ball entrances. As a result, the player can enjoy the game property of obtaining information corresponding to the probability currently set as the probability that a prescribed result is selected in a prescribed lottery as a privilege of entering game balls into two or more ball entrances in a prescribed order. Therefore, the player can enjoy a game in which game balls enter two or more predetermined ball entrances in a predetermined order.

<Feature V0>
A launching means (shooting device 330) for shooting game balls;
a game area (game area) in which game balls that are shot by the shooting means and entered from a predetermined entrance flow down;
A ball entrance (general prize winning devices 2439A, 2439B) provided in the game area and into which game balls can enter;
Privilege giving means (main control board 920) for giving a predetermined privilege when a game ball enters the ball entrance;
A setting storage means (RAM of the main control board 920) for storing probability information corresponding to the probability set as the lottery probability out of a plurality of probabilities that a predetermined lottery result is selected in a predetermined lottery in the game; an input means (rear setting switch 905, initialization switch 907) capable of inputting operation information corresponding to an operation for changing the probability information stored in the setting storage means to the probability information corresponding to one of the plurality of probabilities;
setting change means (main control board 920) for changing the probability information stored in the setting storage means to the probability information corresponding to the operation information input by the input means;
entry number storage means (RAM of main control board 920) for storing entry number information (general winning number) updated according to the entry of game balls into the ball entrance;
a setting output means (main control board 920, sub control board 940) for outputting setting output information corresponding to the probability information stored in the setting storage means when a predetermined condition including at least a condition satisfied corresponding to the entry number information stored in the entry number storage means or corresponding information (nail condition level) counted corresponding to the entry number information is satisfied.

2. Description of the Related Art As a conventional gaming machine, there is known a gaming machine having a function of setting a winning probability in a plurality of stages in a lottery for transition from a normal game state to a game state advantageous to the player. In a typical conventional gaming machine having such a function, the setting of the winning probability can be changed by operating a predetermined key switch using a dedicated key by the manager of the gaming facility or the like (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2007-202870).

However, there is a possibility that there is still room for improvement in the game performance of a gaming machine that can set the lottery probability that a predetermined lottery result is selected in a predetermined lottery in multiple stages, such as the winning probability in the game state transition lottery.

On the other hand, with the gaming machine described in feature V0, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of favorably improving game playability. That is, the setting storage means stores probability information corresponding to the probability set as the lottery probability among a plurality of probabilities that a predetermined lottery result is selected in a predetermined lottery in the game. Operation information corresponding to an operation for changing probability information stored in the setting storage means to probability information corresponding to one of the plurality of probabilities is input to the input means. The probability information stored in the setting storage means is changed by the setting change means to probability information corresponding to the operation information input by the input means. Thereby, the lottery probability that a predetermined result is selected in a predetermined lottery can be changed to information corresponding to the probability according to the operation information input by the input means.

A ball entrance into which the game ball can enter is provided in the game area where the game ball which is shot by the shooting means and entered from the predetermined entrance flows down, and when the game ball enters the ball entrance, a predetermined privilege corresponding to the ball entrance is given by the privilege giving means. When a predetermined condition regarding entry of a game ball into a predetermined ball entrance is established, setting output information corresponding to probability information stored in the setting storage means is output by the setting output means. Therefore, the probability information stored in the setting storage means, that is, the information corresponding to the probability currently set as the lottery probability that a predetermined result is selected in the predetermined lottery can be suggested to the player based on the output from the setting output means. Therefore, the player can add a game feature of estimating probability information about the gaming machine during play through establishment of a predetermined condition including entry of a game ball into a predetermined ball entrance. For example, considering whether the game machine is suitable for one's own taste or not, the estimated probability information can be used as one of the selection elements such as whether to continue the game or to move to another game machine, so that the game performance of the game machine in which the lottery probability can be set in a plurality of stages can be improved.

In addition, in order to satisfy the predetermined conditions for the player to guess the probability information, it is necessary to satisfy the predetermined conditions regarding the entry of the game ball into the predetermined ball entrance in the game area. Therefore, in a game machine where lottery results such as game state transition lottery tend to be paid attention to, it is possible to increase opportunities to pay attention to the entry of game balls into predetermined ball entrances, and to diversify games by setting the predetermined arrangement and number of ball entrances, etc., thereby improving the playability of the game machine using the downflow of game balls.

The entry number storage means stores entry number information which is updated according to the entry of the game ball into the entry hole. When a predetermined condition is established for the entry number information stored in the entry number storage means or the correspondence information counted corresponding to the entry number information, setting output information corresponding to the probability information stored in the setting storage means is output by the setting output means. Since the entering number information and the correspondence information are information reflecting the state of entry of the game balls into the ball entrance, it is possible to output the information corresponding to the probability currently set as the lottery probability of selecting a predetermined result in the predetermined lottery according to the state of the game balls entering the ball entrance.

As a result, for example, when the predetermined condition is a value that suggests the possibility that the performance of the gaming machine does not conform to the design value with respect to the entry of the game ball into the ball entrance, it is possible to suggest to the player that there is a possibility of being disadvantaged, and the information output by the setting output means can also be utilized to allow the player to determine whether or not to continue the game with the gaming machine during play.

<Feature X0>
A display unit (decorative pattern display device 479) capable of displaying identification information,
A lottery means (main control board 920) for performing a predetermined lottery when a game ball enters a predetermined ball entrance as a predetermined start condition is satisfied;
When the starting condition is satisfied, after the identification information is variably displayed on the display unit, the identification information (stop pattern) corresponding to the lottery result of the predetermined lottery by the lottery means is stopped and displayed (sub-control board 940);
game control means (main control board 920) for generating a special game state which is a game state more advantageous than a normal game state by stop-displaying identification information (a stop pattern indicating the first result) corresponding to the first result by the variation execution means when the lottery result of the predetermined lottery is a predetermined first result;
A setting storage means (RAM of the main control board 920) for storing probability information corresponding to a probability set as a lottery probability that the first result is selected in the predetermined lottery or a lottery probability that the predetermined lottery result is selected in the second lottery, among a plurality of probabilities that can be set as a lottery probability that the first result is selected in the predetermined lottery or a predetermined lottery result is selected in a second lottery that is different from the predetermined lottery; input means (rear setting switch 905, initialization switch 907) capable of inputting operation information corresponding to an operation for changing to the corresponding probability information;
setting change means (main control board 920) for changing the probability information stored in the setting storage means to the probability information corresponding to the operation information input by the input means;
a setting output means (main control board 920, sub control board 940) for outputting setting output information corresponding to the probability information stored in the setting storage means when a predetermined condition including a situation in which the new starting condition is not satisfied occurs a predetermined number of times during a predetermined game period even after a predetermined first period elapses after the starting condition is satisfied.

2. Description of the Related Art As a conventional gaming machine, there is known a gaming machine having a function of setting a winning probability in a plurality of stages in a lottery for transition from a normal game state to a game state advantageous to the player. In a typical conventional gaming machine having such a function, the setting of the winning probability can be changed by operating a predetermined key switch using a dedicated key by the manager of the gaming facility or the like (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2007-202870).

However, there is a possibility that there is still room for improvement in the game performance of a gaming machine that can set the lottery probability that a predetermined lottery result is selected in a predetermined lottery in multiple stages, such as the winning probability in the game state transition lottery.

On the other hand, with the gaming machine described in feature X0, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of favorably improving the game playability. That is, when a predetermined starting condition is satisfied, the identification information corresponding to the result of a predetermined lottery by the lottery means is stopped and displayed after the identification information is variably displayed on the display section by the variation executing means. At this time, if the lottery result of the predetermined lottery is a predetermined first result, a special game state more advantageous than the normal game state is generated by the game control means after stopping and displaying the identification information corresponding to the first result.

A setting storage means stores probability information corresponding to a probability set as a lottery probability of selecting a first result in a predetermined lottery or a lottery probability of selecting a predetermined lottery result in a second lottery among a plurality of probabilities that can be set as a lottery probability of selecting a first result in a predetermined lottery or a predetermined lottery result in a second lottery different from the predetermined lottery. Operation information corresponding to an operation for changing probability information stored in the setting storage means to probability information corresponding to one of the plurality of probabilities is input to the input means. The probability information stored in the setting storage means is changed by the setting change means to probability information corresponding to the operation information input by the input means. Thus, the lottery probability that the first result is selected in the predetermined lottery or the lottery probability that the predetermined result is selected in the second lottery can be changed to the probability corresponding to the operation information input by the input means.

When a predetermined condition regarding entry of a game ball into a predetermined ball entrance is established, setting output information corresponding to probability information stored in the setting storage means is output by the setting output means. Therefore, the probability information stored in the setting storage means, that is, the information corresponding to the probability that the first result is selected in the predetermined lottery or the probability that the predetermined result is selected in the second lottery is currently set to the player based on the output from the setting output means. Therefore, the player can add a game feature of estimating probability information about the gaming machine during play through establishment of a predetermined condition including a game ball entering a predetermined ball entrance. For example, considering whether the game machine is suitable for one's own taste or not, the estimated probability information can be used as one of the selection elements such as whether to continue the game or move to another game machine, so that the playability of the game machine in which the lottery probability can be set in a plurality of stages can be improved.

In addition, in order to satisfy the predetermined conditions for the player to guess the probability information, it is necessary to satisfy the predetermined conditions regarding the entry of the game ball into the predetermined ball entrance in the game area. Therefore, in a game machine where lottery results such as game state transition lottery tend to be paid attention to, it is possible to increase opportunities to pay attention to the entry of game balls into predetermined ball entrances, and to diversify games by setting the predetermined arrangement and number of ball entrances, etc., thereby improving the playability of the game machine using the downflow of game balls.

In addition, when a situation in which a new starting condition is not satisfied occurs a predetermined number of times during a predetermined game period even after a predetermined first period has passed since the starting condition is satisfied, setting output information corresponding to the probability information stored in the setting storage means is output by the setting output means. A situation in which a new starting condition is not established even after a predetermined first period has elapsed since the establishment of the starting condition is an undesirable situation for the player, and the player may be disadvantaged compared to playing in other game machines. On the other hand, under this situation, it is possible to allow the player to determine whether or not to continue the game by the gaming machine during the game by also utilizing the information output by the setting output means.

Incidentally, instead of the description of the setting output means in the game machine described in the feature X0, when a predetermined condition including a game ball entering a predetermined ball entrance as a predetermined starting condition is met, the setting output means for outputting the setting output information corresponding to the probability information stored in the setting storage means may be provided.

<Feature Y0>
A display unit (decorative pattern display device 479) capable of displaying identification information,
A lottery means (main control board 920) for performing a predetermined lottery when a game ball enters a predetermined ball entrance as a predetermined start condition is satisfied;
When the starting condition is satisfied, after the identification information is variably displayed on the display unit, the identification information (stop pattern) corresponding to the lottery result of the predetermined lottery by the lottery means is stopped and displayed (sub-control board 940);
game control means (main control board 920) for generating a special game state which is a game state more advantageous than a normal game state by stop-displaying identification information (a stop pattern indicating the first result) corresponding to the first result by the variation execution means when the lottery result of the predetermined lottery is a predetermined first result;
A setting storage means (RAM of the main control board 920) for storing probability information corresponding to a probability set as a lottery probability that the first result is selected in the predetermined lottery or a lottery probability that the predetermined lottery result is selected in the second lottery, among a plurality of probabilities that can be set as a lottery probability that the first result is selected in the predetermined lottery or a predetermined lottery result is selected in a second lottery that is different from the predetermined lottery; input means (rear setting switch 905, initialization switch 907) capable of inputting operation information corresponding to an operation for changing to the corresponding probability information;
setting change means (main control board 920) for changing the probability information stored in the setting storage means to the probability information corresponding to the operation information input by the input means;
an effect selection means (main control board 920, sub control board 940) for selecting, from among a plurality of types of effects with different effect times, an effect with an effect time corresponding to the probability information stored in the setting storage means, as an effect composed of at least a part of a period from when the starting condition in which the first result is obtained in the predetermined lottery is established until the stop display of the identification information corresponding to the first result is performed by the variable execution means;
and an effect display control means (sub-control board 940) for displaying the effect selected by the effect selecting means on the display section.

2. Description of the Related Art As a conventional gaming machine, there is known a gaming machine having a function of setting a winning probability in a plurality of stages in a lottery for transition from a normal game state to a game state advantageous to the player. In a typical conventional gaming machine having such a function, the setting of the winning probability can be changed by operating a predetermined key switch using a dedicated key by the manager of the gaming facility or the like (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2007-202870).

However, there is a possibility that there is still room for improvement in the game performance of the game machine in which the lottery probability that a predetermined lottery result is selected in a predetermined lottery, such as the winning probability in the game state transition lottery, can be set in multiple stages. That is, when a predetermined starting condition is satisfied, the identification information corresponding to the result of a predetermined lottery by the lottery means is stopped and displayed after the identification information is variably displayed on the display section by the variation executing means. At this time, if the lottery result of the predetermined lottery is a predetermined first result, a special game state more advantageous than the normal game state is generated by the game control means after stopping and displaying the identification information corresponding to the first result.

A setting storage means stores probability information corresponding to a probability set as a lottery probability of selecting a first result in a predetermined lottery or a lottery probability of selecting a predetermined lottery result in a second lottery among a plurality of probabilities that can be set as a lottery probability of selecting a first result in a predetermined lottery or a predetermined lottery result in a second lottery different from the predetermined lottery. Operation information corresponding to an operation for changing probability information stored in the setting storage means to probability information corresponding to one of the plurality of probabilities is input to the input means. The probability information stored in the setting storage means is changed by the setting change means to probability information corresponding to the operation information input by the input means. Thus, the lottery probability that the first result is selected in the predetermined lottery or the lottery probability that the predetermined result is selected in the second lottery can be changed to the probability corresponding to the operation information input by the input means.

Out of a plurality of types of performances with different performance times, a performance of performance time corresponding to probability information stored in a setting storage means is selected by a performance selection means as a performance composed of at least a part of a period from establishment of a starting condition under which a first result is obtained by a predetermined lottery until stop display of identification information corresponding to the first result is performed by a variation execution means, and is displayed on a display part by a performance display control means.

Therefore, the probability information stored in the setting storage means, that is, the probability currently set as the lottery probability that the first result is selected in the predetermined lottery or the probability that the predetermined result is selected in the second lottery is reflected in the performance time composed of at least a part of the period from the establishment of the starting condition for obtaining the first result in the predetermined lottery to the stop display of the identification information corresponding to the first result by the variation execution means. Therefore, the player can add a game feature of estimating the probability currently set as the lottery probability that the first result is selected in the predetermined lottery or the probability that the predetermined result is selected in the second lottery from the performance time of the performance. For example, considering whether the game machine is suitable for one's own taste or not, the estimated probability information can be used as one of the selection elements such as whether to continue the game or to move to another game machine, so that the game performance of the game machine in which the lottery probability can be set in a plurality of stages can be improved.

Also, in order for the player to guess the probability information, it is possible to increase the chances of paying attention to the length of the presentation time. For this reason, in a game machine where attention tends to be paid to the lottery result of a game state transition lottery or the like, it is possible to increase the number of objects to be noticed, so that it is possible to improve the playability of the game machine utilizing the flow of game balls.

<Feature Y1>
The gaming machine according to feature Y0,
The game machine is characterized in that the performance selecting means selects the performance with the probability that the performance with the longest performance time among the plurality of types of performances is likely to be executed with respect to the probability of being the most advantageous to the player among the plurality of probabilities.

In the game machine described in the characteristic Y1, since the performance with the longest performance time among the plurality of types of performances is selected with the probability of being most advantageous to the player among the settable multiple probabilities, the player can expect that the most advantageous probability is set when the performance is performed for a long time.

<Feature Y2>
A gaming machine according to feature Y0 or feature Y1,
Equipped with an operation unit (pressing operation device 261) that can be operated by the player,
The effect selected by the effect selecting means is a special effect executed when a predetermined operation is performed on the operation unit at a predetermined operation timing set within a period in which the effect can be executed, which is set at least in a period from when the starting condition for obtaining the first result in the predetermined lottery is satisfied until the identification information corresponding to the first result is stopped and displayed by the variable execution means.

If it is a gaming machine described in feature Y2,
An operation timing is set within a performance executable period composed of at least a part of a period from establishment of a starting condition under which a first result is obtained by a predetermined lottery to stop display of a stop pattern indicating the first result by a variable execution means. The effect selected by the effect selecting means is a special effect that is executed when a predetermined operation is performed on the operation section during the operation timing. Therefore, by performing a prescribed operation on the operating part at the operation timing, the player can estimate the probability currently set as the lottery probability of selecting the first result in the prescribed lottery or the probability of selecting the prescribed result in the second lottery from the performance time of the special performance executed based on the operation.

<Feature Z0>
A display unit (decorative pattern display device 479) capable of variably displaying identification information,
A lottery means (main control board 920) for performing a predetermined lottery when a game ball enters a predetermined ball entrance as a predetermined start condition is satisfied;
A variation executing means (sub-control board 940) for stopping and displaying the identification information (stop symbol) corresponding to the result of the lottery by the lottery means after the identification information is variably displayed on the display unit when the starting condition is satisfied;
game control means (main control board 920) for generating a special game state which is a game state more advantageous than a normal game state by stop-displaying identification information (a stop pattern indicating the first result) corresponding to the first result by the variation execution means when the lottery result of the predetermined lottery is a predetermined first result;
A setting storage means (RAM of the main control board 920) for storing probability information corresponding to a probability set as a lottery probability that the first result is selected in the predetermined lottery or a lottery probability that the predetermined lottery result is selected in the second lottery, among a plurality of probabilities that can be set as a lottery probability that the first result is selected in the predetermined lottery or a predetermined lottery result is selected in a second lottery that is different from the predetermined lottery; input means (rear setting switch 905, initialization switch 907) capable of inputting operation information corresponding to an operation for changing to the corresponding probability information;
setting change means (main control board 920) for changing the probability information stored in the setting storage means to the probability information corresponding to the operation information input by the input means;
and control execution means (main control board 920, sub control board 940) for executing control according to the probability information stored in the setting storage means when a predetermined condition including a condition that can be established during the special game state is established.

2. Description of the Related Art As a conventional gaming machine, there is known a gaming machine having a function of setting a winning probability in a plurality of stages in a lottery for transition from a normal game state to a game state advantageous to the player. In a typical conventional gaming machine having such a function, the setting of the winning probability can be changed by operating a predetermined key switch using a dedicated key by the manager of the gaming facility or the like (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2007-202870).

However, there is a possibility that there is still room for improvement in the game performance of a gaming machine that can set the lottery probability that a predetermined lottery result is selected in a predetermined lottery in multiple stages, such as the winning probability in the game state transition lottery.

On the other hand, with the gaming machine described in feature Z0, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of favorably improving game playability. That is, when a predetermined starting condition is satisfied, the identification information corresponding to the result of a predetermined lottery by the lottery means is stopped and displayed after the identification information is variably displayed on the display section by the variation executing means. At this time, if the lottery result of the predetermined lottery is a predetermined first result, a special game state more advantageous than the normal game state is generated by the game control means after stopping and displaying the identification information corresponding to the first result.

A setting storage means stores probability information corresponding to a probability set as a lottery probability of selecting a first result in a predetermined lottery or a lottery probability of selecting a predetermined lottery result in a second lottery among a plurality of probabilities that can be set as a lottery probability of selecting a first result in a predetermined lottery or a predetermined lottery result in a second lottery different from the predetermined lottery. Operation information corresponding to an operation for changing probability information stored in the setting storage means to probability information corresponding to one of the plurality of probabilities is input to the input means. The probability information stored in the setting storage means is changed by the setting change means to probability information corresponding to the operation information input by the input means. Thus, the lottery probability that the first result is selected in the predetermined lottery or the lottery probability that the predetermined result is selected in the second lottery can be changed to the probability corresponding to the operation information input by the input means.

When a predetermined condition including a condition that can be established is established during the special game state, control according to the probability information stored in the setting storage means is executed by the control execution means. Therefore, the player can add the game property of estimating the probability information stored in the setting storage means, that is, the probability currently set as the lottery probability that the first result is selected in the predetermined lottery or the lottery probability that the predetermined result is selected in the second lottery based on the contents that appear by the control by the control execution means. For example, considering whether the game machine is suitable for one's own taste or not, the estimated probability information can be used as one of the selection elements such as whether to continue the game or to move to another game machine, so that the game performance of the game machine in which the lottery probability can be set in a plurality of stages can be improved.

In the gaming machine described in feature Z0, it is preferable that the condition that can be established during the special game state includes entry of a game ball into a predetermined ball entrance during the special game state. In order to establish a predetermined condition for the player to guess the probability information, it is possible to create a need to establish a predetermined condition regarding entry of the game ball into a predetermined ball entrance in the game area. Therefore, in a game machine where lottery results such as game state transition lottery tend to be paid attention to, it is possible to increase opportunities to pay attention to the entry of game balls into predetermined ball entrances, and to diversify games by setting the predetermined arrangement and number of ball entrances, etc., thereby improving the playability of the game machine using the downflow of game balls.

In addition, in the gaming machine described in feature Z0, it is preferable that the condition that can be established during the special game state is a condition that can be established by operating an operation unit other than the operation unit that performs the shooting operation for shooting the game ball into the game area during the special game state. Thus, during the special game state, it is possible to add the game property to pay attention to the operation other than the shooting operation, and to add the new game property that enables the player to obtain the probability information by adding another operation in addition to simply continuing the shooting operation.

<Feature α0>
A display unit (decorative pattern display device 479) capable of displaying patterns,
A shooting means (shooting device 330) for shooting game balls;
A starting port (the winning port of the middle starting winning device 431, the winning port of the right starting winning device 432) where the starting condition is satisfied when the game ball launched by the shooting means enters;
Lottery means (main control board 920) for performing a predetermined lottery when the starting condition is satisfied;
Variation executing means (sub-control board 940) for stopping and displaying a symbol according to the lottery result as a stop symbol after performing a variation display of the symbol on the display unit when the starting condition is satisfied;
game control means (main control board 920) for generating a special game state more advantageous than a normal game state after the stop symbol indicating the first result is displayed in a stopped state by the variation execution means when the lottery result is a predetermined first result;
Reservation storage means (main control board 920) capable of storing in a predetermined reservation storage section (RAM of main control board 920) up to a predetermined number of lottery results for which execution of the variation display of symbols by the variation execution means is suspended from among the results of the lottery;
A special effect execution means (sub control board 940) for executing a predetermined special effect in a predetermined first period with a predetermined first probability (probability of winning in the reservation full tank effect lottery) when the number of lottery results stored in the reservation storage unit by the reservation storage means reaches the upper limit,
The special effect execution means is provided with a period extension means for extending the end time of the first period when a predetermined extension condition is satisfied within a predetermined second period which is a period provided after the number of lottery results stored in the holding storage unit reaches an upper limit and ends at the same time as the end time of the first period or earlier than the end time of the first period.

The predetermined extension condition may be a condition that can be satisfied by the game ball shot by the shooting means, or a condition that can be satisfied regardless of the game ball shot by the shooting means. For example, the execution of a part of the effect (for example, the appearance of a specific character) whose execution is decided in the variable display whose execution has already been suspended may be the extension condition, or the extension condition may be satisfied by combining a plurality of conditions.

<Feature α1>
A display unit (decorative pattern display device 479) capable of displaying patterns,
A shooting means (shooting device 330) for shooting game balls;
A starting port (the winning port of the middle starting winning device 431, the winning port of the right starting winning device 432) where the starting condition is satisfied when the game ball launched by the shooting means enters;
Lottery means (main control board 920) for performing a predetermined lottery when the starting condition is satisfied;
Variation executing means (sub-control board 940) for stopping and displaying a symbol according to the lottery result as a stop symbol after performing a variation display of the symbol on the display unit when the starting condition is satisfied;
game control means (main control board 920) for generating a special game state more advantageous than a normal game state after the stop symbol indicating the first result is displayed in a stopped state by the variation execution means when the lottery result is a predetermined first result;
Reservation storage means (main control board 920) capable of storing in a predetermined reservation storage section (RAM of main control board 920) up to a predetermined number of lottery results for which execution of the variation display of symbols by the variation execution means is suspended from among the results of the lottery;
A special effect execution means (sub control board 940) for executing a predetermined special effect in a predetermined first period with a predetermined first probability (probability of winning in the reservation full tank effect lottery) when the number of lottery results stored in the reservation storage unit by the reservation storage means reaches the upper limit,
The special effect execution means extends the end time of the first period when a predetermined extension condition that can be established by the game ball shot by the shooting means is satisfied (when the number of times of suspension is increased by 1 and the effect extension lottery of winning with a predetermined second probability is won) is established within a predetermined second period which is a period provided after the number of lottery results stored in the reservation storage unit reaches an upper limit, and which ends at the same time as the end of the first period or earlier than the end of the first period. A gaming machine characterized by comprising a period extension means for

Conventionally, there is a pachinko machine as a typical example of gaming machines. In a typical conventional pachinko machine, when a ball enters a starting hole provided in a game area, a lottery is conducted according to the ball entering, and when a big win is won in the lottery, a special game state is established and a large number of game balls can enter the winning hole. The pachinko machine is provided with a display device, and the display device starts the variable display of patterns based on the lottery, and displays the stop result according to the lottery result as the final stop display of the variable display.

Further, in some conventional pachinko machines, when a game ball enters a start hole while a pattern is being displayed on a display device, hit information (information corresponding to the lottery result, which corresponds to the lottery result) used for the big win lottery is retained and stored with a predetermined number (for example, 4) as the upper limit (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-22147).

However, there is a possibility that there is still room for improvement in conventional gaming machines that are capable of holding and storing lottery results. For example, when the number of stored lottery results reaches the upper limit, even if the game balls enter the starting hole after that, the lottery results for the entered balls are not memorized and are only wasted.

On the other hand, with the gaming machine described in feature α1, it is possible to suitably execute the effect in the gaming machine capable of holding and storing the lottery result. That is, when the game ball shot by the shooting means enters the starting port and the starting condition is satisfied, after the pattern is variably displayed on the display part by the variation execution means, the pattern corresponding to the lottery result by the lottery means is stopped and displayed as the stop pattern. At this time, if the lottery result is a predetermined first result, a special game state more advantageous than the normal game state is generated by the game control means after the stop symbols corresponding to the first result are stopped and displayed.

Of the lottery results by the lottery means, the lottery results whose execution of the variable display of the pattern by the variation execution means is suspended can be stored in a predetermined suspension storage part with a predetermined number as the upper limit by the suspension storage means. When the number of lottery results stored in the holding storage part reaches the upper limit, a special performance display means displays a prescribed special performance in a prescribed first period with a prescribed first probability on the display part. Therefore, the player can face the game aiming at establishment of the start condition with the purpose of increasing the number of lottery results stored in the holding storage unit. As a result, it is possible to increase the player's willingness to play the game machine that can store up to a predetermined number (upper limit) of lottery results in the reserve storage means.

Here, as a period after the number of lottery results stored in the holding storage part reaches the upper limit, a predetermined second period is provided that ends at the same time as the first period ends or earlier than the first period ends, and if a game ball shot by a shooting means satisfies a predetermined condition within the second period, the period extension means extends the end time of the first period.

Thus, in a game machine capable of executing a special performance when the number of lottery results stored in a holding storage part reaches the upper limit, a game feature capable of extending the first period in which the special performance can appear can be added by the player shooting game balls.

Note that the “special effect” in the gaming machine described in features α0 and α1 may be a effect displayed on the display unit, a sound effect, a light effect, or an effect due to the action of the operable structure, or a combination of some or all of these effects. Also, the special performance may be a performance executed only in the first period, or may be a performance with a high probability of being executed in the first period before the start and after the end of the first period. Also, the period extending means may extend the first period and the second period. The second period may be a fixed period that is not extended even if the first period is extended by the period extending means, or may be a variable period that is extended when the first period is extended by the period extending means.

<Feature α2>
A gaming machine according to feature α0 or α1,
The special production execution means is
During the first period, when a lottery result indicating the first result is included in the lottery results whose symbols are stopped and displayed by the variable execution means, a predetermined effect that is not executed when the lottery result indicating the first result is not included may be executed as the special effect.
The period extending means extends the end time of the first period with the predetermined second probability when a new lottery result that suspends the execution of the variable display of the symbols by the variation execution means is newly stored in the holding storage part as the predetermined condition within the second period provided after the number of lottery results stored in the holding storage part reaches the upper limit.

In the game machine described in the feature α2, when the lottery result indicating the first result is included in the lottery result stored in the reservation storage part by the reservation storage means, the predetermined performance which is not executed when the lottery result indicating the first result is not included in the lottery result stored in the reservation storage part is configured to be executed at least as a special performance.

As a period after the number of the lottery results stored in the holding storage part reaches the upper limit, a second prescribed second period is provided that ends at the same time as the end time of the first period or earlier than the end time of the first period, and when a lottery result that suspends the execution of the variation display of the pattern by the variation execution means is newly stored in the holding storage part as a prescribed condition within the second period, the end time of the first period is extended.

Therefore, in a situation where the number of lottery results stored in the reserved storage part reaches the upper limit, even if the lottery result indicating the first result is not included in the lottery results, when the lottery result indicating the first result is newly stored in the reserved storage part within the second period, the predetermined performance is executed as a special performance, so that the chances of the player to visually recognize the predetermined performance can be increased, and the dissatisfaction of not being able to see the predetermined performance can be suppressed.

<Feature β0>
A display unit (decorative pattern display device 479) capable of displaying patterns,
A lottery means (main control board 920) that performs a predetermined lottery when a predetermined start condition is satisfied;
variation execution means (sub control board 940) for stopping and displaying, as a stop symbol, a symbol according to the lottery result of the predetermined lottery after performing the variable display of the symbol on the display unit when the starting condition is satisfied;
game control means (main control board 920) for generating a special game state more advantageous than the normal game state after the stop symbol indicating the first result is displayed by the variation executing means when the lottery result of the predetermined lottery is the predetermined first result;
Reservation storage means (main control board 920) capable of storing in a predetermined reservation storage section (RAM of main control board 920) up to a predetermined number of lottery results for which execution of variation display of symbols by the variation execution means is suspended among the lottery results of the predetermined lottery;
an information storage unit (RAM of the main control board 920) capable of storing at least predetermined setting information corresponding to the probability set as the lottery probability of selecting the first result in the predetermined lottery or the probability of selecting the predetermined lottery result in the second lottery different from the predetermined lottery;
input means (rear setting switch 905, initialization switch 907) capable of inputting operation information corresponding to an operation of selecting the setting information corresponding to one of a plurality of probabilities that can be set as the lottery probability that the first result is selected in the predetermined lottery or the lottery probability that the predetermined lottery result is selected in the second lottery that is different from the predetermined lottery;
setting information storage means (main control board 920) for storing, in the information storage unit, the setting information selected by an operation corresponding to the operation information when the operation information is input by the input means;
and setting output means (main control board 920, sub control board 940) for outputting setting output information corresponding to the setting information stored in the information storage section with a predetermined probability when the number of lottery results stored in the holding storage section by the holding storage section satisfies a predetermined condition.

The predetermined condition in the feature β1 is not limited to the case where the number of lottery results stored in the holding storage unit reaches the upper limit, and the setting suggestion information may be displayed by selecting whether or not to output the setting suggestion information in response to the fulfillment of other holding times, such as when the number of holdings of the special symbol increases from 3 to 4, or when the holding occurs during the fluctuation stop and then becomes 1 for a moment such that the fluctuation display is started. The above conditions may be satisfied.

<Feature β1>
A display unit (decorative pattern display device 479) capable of displaying patterns,
A lottery means (main control board 920) that performs a predetermined lottery when a predetermined start condition is satisfied;
variation execution means (sub control board 940) for stopping and displaying, as a stop symbol, a symbol according to the lottery result of the predetermined lottery after performing the variable display of the symbol on the display unit when the starting condition is satisfied;
game control means (main control board 920) for generating a special game state more advantageous than the normal game state after the stop symbol indicating the first result is displayed by the variation executing means when the lottery result of the predetermined lottery is the predetermined first result;
Reservation storage means (main control board 920) capable of storing in a predetermined reservation storage section (RAM of main control board 920) up to a predetermined number of lottery results for which execution of variation display of symbols by the variation execution means is suspended among the lottery results of the predetermined lottery;
an information storage unit (RAM of the main control board 920) capable of storing at least predetermined setting information corresponding to the probability set as the lottery probability of selecting the first result in the predetermined lottery or the probability of selecting the predetermined lottery result in the second lottery different from the predetermined lottery;
input means (rear setting switch 905, initialization switch 907) capable of inputting operation information corresponding to an operation of selecting the setting information corresponding to one of a plurality of probabilities that can be set as the lottery probability that the first result is selected in the predetermined lottery or the lottery probability that the predetermined lottery result is selected in the second lottery that is different from the predetermined lottery;
setting information storage means (main control board 920) for storing, in the information storage unit, the setting information selected by an operation corresponding to the operation information when the operation information is input by the input means;
and setting output means (main control board 920, sub control board 940) for outputting setting output information corresponding to the setting information stored in the information storage section with a predetermined probability when the number of lottery results stored in the holding storage section by the holding storage section reaches an upper limit.

Conventionally, there is a pachinko machine as a typical example of gaming machines. In a typical conventional pachinko machine, when a ball enters a starting hole provided in a game area, a lottery is conducted according to the ball entering, and when a big win is won in the lottery, a special game state is established and a large number of game balls can enter the winning hole. The pachinko machine is provided with a display device, and the display device starts the variable display of patterns based on the lottery, and displays the stop result according to the lottery result as the final stop display of the variable display. Further, in some conventional pachinko machines, when a game ball enters a start hole while a pattern is being displayed on a display device, hit information (information corresponding to the lottery result, which corresponds to the lottery result) used for the big win lottery is retained and stored with a predetermined number (for example, 4) as the upper limit (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-22147).

However, there is a possibility that there is still room for improvement in conventional gaming machines that are capable of holding and storing lottery results.

On the other hand, with the gaming machine described in feature β0, it is possible to suitably execute the effect in the gaming machine capable of holding and storing the lottery result. That is, when a predetermined starting condition is satisfied, the identification information corresponding to the result of a predetermined lottery by the lottery means is stopped and displayed after the identification information is variably displayed on the display section by the variation executing means. At this time, if the lottery result of the predetermined lottery is a predetermined first result, a special game state more advantageous than the normal game state is generated by the game control means after stopping and displaying the identification information corresponding to the first result.

The information storage part is configured to be able to store at least prescribed setting information corresponding to a probability set as a lottery probability that a first result is selected in a prescribed lottery or a probability that a prescribed lottery result is selected in a second lottery different from the prescribed lottery. When operation information corresponding to an operation for selecting setting information corresponding to one of a plurality of probabilities that can be set as a lottery probability of selecting a first result in a predetermined lottery or a lottery probability of selecting a predetermined lottery result in a second lottery different from the predetermined lottery is input by an input means, the setting information selected by the operation corresponding to the operation information is stored in the information storage part by the setting information storage means. Thus, the lottery probability that the first result is selected in the predetermined lottery or the lottery probability that the predetermined result is selected in the second lottery can be set to the probability corresponding to the operation information input by the input means.

Among the lottery results by the lottery means, the lottery results whose execution of the variable display of the pattern by the variation execution means is suspended can be stored in a predetermined suspension storage part with a predetermined number as the upper limit by the suspension storage means. When the number of lottery results stored in the holding storage part reaches the upper limit, the setting output means outputs setting output information corresponding to the setting information stored in the information storage part with a predetermined probability.

Thus, the setting information stored in the information storage part, that is, the information corresponding to the lottery probability of selecting the first result in the predetermined lottery or the probability of selecting the predetermined lottery result in the second lottery different from the predetermined lottery can be suggested to the player based on the output from the setting output means.

Therefore, by increasing the number of lottery results stored in the reservation storage unit until it reaches the upper limit, it is possible to add a game feature of guessing the setting information about the gaming machine in play. For example, it is possible to use the estimated setting information as one of selection elements such as whether to continue the game or to move to another game machine considering whether the game machine is suitable for one's taste or not, so that the playability of the game machine capable of setting the lottery probability in a plurality of stages can be improved.

<Feature β1>
A gaming machine according to feature β0,
The setting output means outputs the setting output information corresponding to the setting information with a predetermined probability when the setting information stored in the information storage unit is setting information corresponding to at least one of the highest probability and the lowest probability among the plurality of probabilities when the number of lottery results stored in the holding storage unit by the holding storage unit reaches an upper limit.

In the gaming machine described in feature β1, when the number of lottery results stored in the reservation storage unit reaches the upper limit, the setting information stored in the information storage unit corresponds to at least one of the highest probability or the lowest probability among a plurality of probabilities that can be set as the lottery probability that the first result is selected in a predetermined lottery or the lottery probability that a predetermined lottery result is selected in a second lottery that is different from the predetermined lottery. Output information is output with a predetermined probability.

Therefore, the player can guess the lottery probability that the first result is selected in the predetermined lottery in the game or that the maximum probability or the minimum probability is set as the predetermined lottery result in the second lottery based on the set output information output by the set output means. As a result, the player can make various selections for continuation of the game, such as whether to continue the game in the game machine in play or move to another game machine, based on the output setting output information, so that the game performance of the game machine in which the lottery probability can be set in a plurality of stages can be preferably improved.

Note that at least one of the features 10 to β1 may be applied in combination with any other feature or a plurality of other features. The basic configuration of a gaming machine to which each of the features described above can be applied is shown below.

Pachinko machine: A gaming machine comprising a shooting operation means operated by a player, a game ball shooting means for shooting a game ball based on the operation of the shooting operation means, a passage part for guiding the shot game ball to a predetermined game area, and each game part arranged in the game area, and giving a privilege to the player when a game ball passes through a predetermined passing part among these game parts.

A reel-type game machine such as a slot machine: A game machine that starts rotation of the revolving body based on the operation of the start operation means, stops the rotation of the revolving body based on the operation of the stop operation means, and gives benefits to the player according to the pattern after the stop.

As described above, the present invention is suitable for game machines such as pinball game machines.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 100... Gaming machine, 261... Press operation device, 263... Selection operation device, 479... Decoration symbol display device, 710... Reel device, 711L... Left reel, 711M... Center reel, 711R... Right reel, 712... Main symbol, 713B... Second sub symbol, 730... Lottery result display device, 920... Main control board, 940... Sub control board, 401... Base, 701... Base, 702... Side wall part 715... Resin cover 715A... Outer cover 715A1... Curved part 715B... Light guide plate 715B1... Curved part 715B4, 715B5... End face 717A... Reel side lamp 720... Retention lamp 741, 742, 743... Pattern 753... Information display part 761A, 761B... Half mirror 771... Wave lamp , 781, 782, 783 gears 1441A, 1441B start winning switch 1610 entrance 1612 guide passage 1613A, 1613B first passage 1614A, 1614B second passage 1631 first rear side portion, second rear side portion 1631A, 1631B passage wall portion 811 pressing member 812, 813... Light source unit 824, 834... Light emitting means 892, 893... Protrusions 841A, 841B, 843A, 843B, 851A, 851B, 853A, 853B... Through holes 844A, 844B, 854A, 854B... Protrusions 842A, 842B, 852A, 852B... Through holes 861A, 861B, 862A, 862B through-hole D1, D2 region Z recessed parts Z1, Z2, Z3 side C1 left end of side Z1 C2 right end of side Z1 1701 first reel body 1702 second reel body 1711 drive solenoid 1731 drive solenoid 1751 light guide plate 1761 pattern 1771 light guide plate 1 781... Design, 1772... Light guide plate support portion, 1773... Gear, 1810... Hold number display area, 1811... Hold plan icon, 1812... Hold icon, 1820... Stand status icon display area, 1821... Stand status icon, 2439A, 2439B... General winning device, 905... Back setting switch, 907... Initialization switch

Pachinko machines are typical examples of game machines. In a typical conventional pachinko machine, when a ball enters a starting hole provided in a game area, a lottery is conducted according to the ball entering, and when a big win is won in the lottery, a special game state is established and a large number of game balls can enter the winning hole .

However, there is a possibility that there is room for improvement in the configuration of the gaming machine for effecting using the light emitting means .

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a game machine capable of favorably executing an effect using a light emitting means .

In order to solve the above problems, the gaming machine according to the present invention includes:
A gaming machine capable of executing a plurality of types of effects with different expectations for transition to a predetermined game state advantageous to the player,
a light-emitting means having a light-emitting portion that emits light;
light guide means for making predetermined information about a game visible from the front side of the gaming machine when the light emitted from the light emitting means is incident from a predetermined portion;
a diffusing means for diffusing the light from the light emitting means beyond the width of the light emitting section;
The diffusion means is
1. When the light emitted from the light emitting means of 1 is incident from a predetermined portion, it is provided with a first direction irradiation part that irradiates in a first direction and a second direction irradiation part that irradiates in a second direction different from the first direction.

According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a game machine capable of suitably executing an effect using a light emitting means .

Claims (1)

a display unit capable of displaying a pattern;
a launching means for launching a game ball;
a starting port into which a starting condition is established when the game ball fired by the shooting means enters;
Lottery means for performing a predetermined lottery when the starting condition is met;
a variation execution means for performing a stop symbol display according to the result of the lottery after performing a variation display of the symbols on the display unit when the starting condition is satisfied;
a game control means for generating a special game state more advantageous than a normal game state after the stop symbol indicating the first result is stopped and displayed by the variation execution means when the lottery result is a predetermined first result;
a holding storage means capable of storing, from among the lottery results, the lottery results for which execution of the variation display of symbols by the variation execution means is suspended in a prescribed holding storage unit, with a prescribed number as the upper limit;
a special effect execution means for executing a predetermined special effect in a predetermined first period with a predetermined first probability when the number of lottery results stored in the reservation storage unit by the reservation storage unit reaches an upper limit,
The special effect execution means is a period provided after the number of lottery results stored in the holding storage unit reaches an upper limit, and is provided with a period extension means for extending the end time of the first period when a predetermined extension condition that can be established by the game ball shot by the shooting means is satisfied within a predetermined second period that ends at the same time as the end time of the first period or earlier than the end time of the first period.